Home

HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator Module User`s Manual and

1. 464 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 1 HP E1445A Example Program Listing continued Program Type Program Name Language Description Sweeping SMPLSWP1 HP BASIC Visual BASIC 0 Hz to 1 MHz sweep using start and stop frequencies Frequency Lists Visual C C Frequency Shift Keying LIST1 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz frequency list Chapter 4 SMPLSWP2 1 kHz to 21 kHz sweep using start and span frequencies LISTDEF i Definite length arbitrary block frequency list LOG_SWP 5 Seven point logarithmic frequency sweep SWP_PVST k Setting the sweep time LIST TME Setting the time through a frequency list SWP ARB i Sweeping an arbitrary waveform SWP LEVL Sweep with output leveling FSK1 Frequency shift keying with the FSK In control source FSK2 Frequency shift keying with the TTLTrg control source FSK ARB Frequency shift keying of an arbitrary waveform Arming and EXT ARM HP BASIC Visual BASIC Arming the AFG with a signal applied to the Start Arm In Triggering Visual C C BNC Chapter 5 BURST j 5 cycle burst for each external arm DIV_N 10 MHz using the frequency2 generator LOCKSTEP j Triggering Two AFGs with a common trigger signal STOPTRIG i Aborting a cycle count using stop triggers GATE i Gating the output on and off SWP TRIG F Arming and triggering a sweep using group execute trigger SWP_STEP 4 Arming and triggering a sweep LIST_STP i Arming and triggering a
2. Legal macro names must start with an alphabetic character and contain only alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters Alphabetic character case upper vs lower is ignored The name is allowed to be the same as a SCPI command but may be not be the same as aCommon Command When the name is the same as a SCPI command the macro rather than the command will be executed when the name is received if macro usage is enabled The SCPI command will be executed if macro usage is disabled Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands EMC GMC LMC RMC RST Condition None macro definitions are unaffected 416 Command Reference Chapter 8 Example EMC and EMC Comments ESE and ESE Parameters Comments e Power On Condition No macros are defined Define Macro to Restart Waveform DMC RESTART 19ABOR INIT Defines macro EMC lt enable gt enables and disables macro usage When lt enable gt is zero macro usage is disabled Any non zero value in the range of 32768 to 32767 enables macro usage EMC returns 1 if macro usage is enabled 0 if disabled e Macro definitions are not affected by this command e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition Macro usage is disabled Power On Condition Macro usage is enabled ESE mask enables one or more event bits of the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in bit 5 the
3. POINts SOURce RAMP POINts number specifies the number of points to be used to generate the stepped ramp or triangle waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units number numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The valid range for number is 4 through the length of the largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory MINimum selects 4 points MAXimum selects the largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory or 262 144 points whichever is less 4 points minimum Comments For triangle waves make number a multiple of 4 for best waveform shape e When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RAMP or TRlangle is selected the greater of the SOURce RAMP POINts value and 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare is selected 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available Attempting to select one of these functions with less contiguous waveform segment memory available or to set SOURce RAMP POINts to a value larger than the largest contiguous amount of available waveform segment memory when ramp or triangle wave output is selected will generate Error 1000 Out of memory Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency and voltage e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RST Condition SOURce RAMP POINts 100 Example Setting Ram
4. Chapter 8 Command Reference 365 SOURce PM SOURce SOURce PM SOURce source selects the source for phase modulation data Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete DPORt INTernal LBUS VXI none Comments The available sources are DPORt The HP E1445A s front panel Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus local bus INTernal The SOURce PM DEViation command VXI The VXIbus data transfer bus e When the source for phase deviation data is the V XIbus data transfer bus the least significant byte of the data should be written either in the least significant bits of a word to offset 176 decimal BO hex The most significant byte should be written in the least significant bits of a word to offset 178 decimal B2 hex After both bytes are written a word write of any data to offset 138 decimal 8A hex is required to activate the new phase deviation e Phase deviation may be changed at a maximum rate of one change every 5 reference oscillator cycles or 2 MHz whichever is less Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce PM DEViation SOURce PM STATe e RST Condition SOURce PM SOURce INTernal Example Setting Modulation Source PM SOUR DPOR Sets Digital Port In connector as modulation source 366 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce PM STATe SO
5. Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt name gt character data 1 through 12 characters NONE none NONE selects no waveform segment Comments Legal names must start with an alphabetic character and contain only alphabetic numeric and underscore characters Alphabetic character case upper versus lower is ignored No waveform segment may have the same name as any segment sequence e A maximum of 256 waveform segment names may be defined at any time Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL or SELected commands to delete names that are no longer needed e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected Example Selecting a Waveform Segment LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC 344 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt defines the series of output voltage points that constitute a waveform segment The points are specified in terms of volts Parameters Comments The lt voltage_list gt may be either a comma separated list of voltage values or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format The legal range for voltage values is specified by the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude command Default units are volts MINimum and MAXimum cannot
6. SOURce ROSCillator TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce MARKer POLarity SOURce MARKer STATe RST Condition SOURce MARKer FEED ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 Chapter 8 Command Reference 363 SOURce MARKer Example Setting the Marker Out BNC Source MARK FEED SOUR LIST Sets marker list as source POLarity SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt selects the polarity of the marker signal at the front panel Marker Out BNC NORMal polarity selects an active high marker output INVerted an active low output Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt polarity gt discrete INVerted NORMal none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer S TATe e RST Condition SOURce MARKer POLarity NORMal Example Setting the Marker Out BNC Polarity MARK POL INV Sets active low output STATe SOURce MARKer STATe mode enables or disables the routing of the currently selected marker signal SOURce MARKer FEED command to the front panel Marker Out BNC Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coup
7. 4 Set the source which starts the frequency list ARM SWEep SOURce source 5 Set the source which advances the list to the next frequency TRIGger SWEep SOURce source 6 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 7 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 8 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 193 HP BASIC Program Example LIST_STP 1 IRE STORE LIST_STP 2 The following program configures the AFG to step through a 3 frequency list when an HP IB group execute trigger is received 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg Pts 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL List_stp 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB List_stp 210 List_stp Subprogram which sets up a frequency list which is armed 220 land advanced with HP IB group execute triggers TRIGGER 7 230 COM OAfg Pts 240 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 IDDS time base 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST frequency list mode 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST2 FREQ 10E3 20E3 30E3 40E3 50E3 freq list 270 OUTPUT OAfg ARM SWE SOUR BUS larm on HP IB trigger 280 OUTPU
8. 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Sweep2 150 CALL Query 160 170 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 180 OFF INTR 7 190 END 200 210 SUB Sweep2 220 Sweep2 Subprogram which outputs a swept sine wave from 1 kHz to 230 121 kHz 240 COM Afg 250 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 260 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 1E3 Istart frequency 270 OUTPUT EAfg SOUR FREQ1 SPAN 20E3 frequency span 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 310 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM Afg 370 OUTPUT EAfg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Query 420 Query Subprogram which queries sweep parameters 430 COM Afg 440 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 CENT Continued on Next Page 128 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 450 ENTER OAfg Center 460 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 SPAN 470 ENTER Afg Span 480 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 490 ENTER OAfg Start 500 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 510 ENTER
9. 122 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 CENT ENTER OAfg Center OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 SPAN ENTER Afg Span OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR ENTER Afg Start OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 STOP ENTER Afg Stop DISP START Start STOP Stop CENTER Center SPAN Span SUBEND SUB Errmsg 570 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 790 700 710 START 0 000000000E 000 STOP 1 000000000E CENTER 5 000000000E 005 SPAN 1 000000 COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT A fg OUTPUT A fg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND The start stop center and span values returned are 006 000E 006 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SMPLSWP1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SMPLSWPI C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 123 Specifying a The LIST program shows the basic steps involved in setting up and Frequenc
10. 440 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 450 B SPOLL Afg 460 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 470 OUTPUT Afg 480 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 490 REPEAT 500 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 510 ENTER Afg Code Message 520 PRINT Code Message 530 UNTIL Code 0 540 STOP 550 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program EXT ARM FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program EXT ARM C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 168 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Setting the Arm and Waveform Cycle Count The BURST program shows you how to set the number of arms the AFG is to receive before returning to the Idle state and how to set the number of waveform cycles repetitions per arm The program sets a five cycle burst that occurs each time an external arm is received Square Wave Source HP E1445A Oscilloscope 5V 1KHz Square Wave AFG Output CH A 1 V DWV Arm Source B 2 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV Channel Channel A The steps of this program are 1 Set the output burst frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency Set the output function SOURc
11. 500 PAUSE 510 DISP 520 SUBEND 530 540 SUB Rst 550 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 560 COM Afg 570 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 580 ENTER Afg Complete 590 SUBEND Comments e Clearing the Operation Status Event Register line 140 allows new events to be latched into the register Clearing the service request bit bit 6 RQS in the Status Byte Register line 480 when the interrupt is serviced allows the bit to be set again when the next summary bit is received STAT OPC INIT OFF line 180 allows the OPC command line 380 to execute following INIT IMM rather than waiting for the AFG to return to the Idle state Pending Operation Flag set false Thus when the AFG enters the wait for arm state following INIT IMM OPC executes and allows time for the interrupt to be serviced Afg_ready called before line 400 executes Refer to page 382 for more information on the STATus OPC INITiate command Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program OSG_RQS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program OSG_RQS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 438 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Standard Event Status Group The Standard Event Status Register The Standard Event Status Group monitors command execution programming errors and the power on state It is the status group used by the error checking routine in
12. Chapter 9 AFG Status 435 The Event Register The Enable Register Program Example PTRansition sets the positive transition For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Condition Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Condition Register bit to be unmasked Bits 0 3 6 and 8 have corresponding decimal values of 1 8 64 and 256 The Event Register latches transition events from the Condition Register as specified by the Transition Filter Bits in the Event Register are latched and remain set until the register is cleared by one of the following commands STATus OPERation EVENt CLS The Enable Register specifies which bits in the Event Register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The AFG logically ANDs the bits in the Event Register with bits in the Enable Register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable Register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event Register are specified unmasked with the command STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Enable Register bit to be unmasked Bits 0 3 6 and 8 have corresponding decimal values of 1 8 64 and 256 The Enable Register is cleared at power on or by specifying an lt unmask g
13. Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition Unaffected Example Changing the Factory shipped Security Password CAL SEC STAT OFF E1445A Disables security CAL SEC CODE NEWCODE Sets new security code CAL SEC ON Re enables security 302 Command Reference Chapter 8 CALibration SECure STATe CALibration SECure STATe mode code enables or disables calibration security Calibration security must be disabled to calibrate the HP E1445A read or write calibration data change the security code or change the protected user data Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none lt code gt string 0 through 15 characters none Comments Attempting to disable calibration security without providing the lt code gt parameter generates Error 109 Missing parameter The value supplied must match the currently programmed security code or Error 224 Illegal parameter value will be generated The HP E1445A will then wait 1 second before executing any subsequent commands To enable security the lt code gt parameter is not not required but is checked if it is present e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration DC BEGin CALibration DATA AC 1 CALibration DATA AC2 CALibration SECure CODE PUD e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condi
14. FSK Using an Arbitrary Waveform Page 152 e Sweeping and FSK Program Comments Page 154 Reference Oscillator Sources o oooooooooooooo o Page 154 Sample Sources eeo euet ar eee eie Page 154 AFG Frequency Modes 0 200 eee eee eee Page 155 Frequency Range Sweeping and Sampling Page 155 Frequency Range Frequency Lists and FSK Page 155 Sweep Count and Frequency List Repetition Count eere ra a Page 156 Arbitrary Block Data 0 0 cece eee eee Page 156 Frequency Points Page 157 Sweep Spacing 0 6 eee ee eee eee te eee Page 157 Sweep Direction 0 0c eee ee eee ee tees Page 157 SWEEP LIME ici do eens Page 158 Output Frequency and Sample Rate Page 160 AC Leveling esito a Bea ae ae Page 160 FSK Control Sources 0 0 2 eee eee eee Page 161 Frequency Shift Delay ooooooococooooo o Page 162 Driving the TTLTrg lt n gt Trigger Lines Page 162 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 117 FSK Programming Flowchart SWEEPS FREQUENCY LISTS FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING The flowchart in Figure 4 1 shows the commands used to program the AFG for frequency sweeps frequency lists and for frequency shift keying Shown with each command is its power on reset setting Since each example program begins by resetting the AFG many of the def
15. Ge nerating a TheSIN X program generates a Sin X X waveform using 4096 segments Sin X X Waveform points 5 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV HP BASIC Program Example SIN_X 1 IRE STORE SIN X 2 This program generates the arbitrary waveform Sin x x 3 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprogram which resets and clears the AFG 130 CALL Rst 140 ISet the signal frequency function and amplitude 150 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 160 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V 180 Call the subprogram which defines the Sin x x waveform and 190 loutput sequence 200 CALL Sinx_def 210 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN_X_OUT 230 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 240 250 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 260 OFF INTR 7 270 END Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 105 280 SUB Sinx_def 290 Sinx_def Define Sin x x waveform and output sequence 300 COM OAfg 310 DIM Waveform 1 4096 320 FOR 12 2047 TO 2048 330 IF 1 0 THEN 1 E 38 340 Waveform 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 350 NEXT
16. IRE STORE SIN R N 180 Call the subprogram which defines a rectified sine wave and 190 Ithe output sequence 200 CALL Sinr def 210 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN R OUT 230 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 280 SUB Sinr_def This program outputs a rectified sine wave as an arbitrary waveform 290 Sinr_def Compute waveform rectified sine wave and define segment 300 COM Afg 310 DIM Waveform 1 4096 320 FOR l 1 TO 4096 330 Waveform l SIN 2 PI 1 4096 340 NEXT 350 FOR 122048 TO 4096 360 Waveform l 0 370 NEXT 380 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN R 390 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 400 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform 410 420 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN R OUT 430 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 440 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN R 450 SUBEND Define segment name IDefine segment size lload waveform points Define sequence name Define sequence size ISet segment execution order Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 111 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIN_R FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIN_R C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Generating Noise The NOISE program generates pseudo noise HP BASIC Program Example NOISE 1 2 3 180 190 200 210
17. Subsystem Syntax SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed frequency 330 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency2 CW FIXed SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed frequency selects the sample rate for arbitrary waveforms or the frequency for the standard waveforms square ramp triangle Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz Arbitrary Waveforms MINimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 131 072 MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency Square Wave Outputs MINimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 524 288 MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Ramps and Triangles Outputs MINimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 131 072 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value The above values bound the valid range for lt frequency gt The lt frequency gt value is rounded to the nearest frequency that can be produced using the divide by n technique of this generator Comments If the actual frequency generated differs from the specified frequency by greater than 1 the Frequency bit of the Questionable Signal Status Register will be set See the STATus subsystem for mor
18. e This program was written using the system configuration described on page 484 Data is written to the DAC at a rate of 115 us per amplitude point which is limited by the execution speed of HP BASIC Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program VXISRCE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program VXISRCE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 508 Register Based Programming Appendix C CLS 47 416 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 GMC 418 IDN 419 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 OPC 420 OPC 421 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47 424 SAV 424 SRE 425 SRE 425 STB 426 TRG 426 TST 46 426 W AT 427 32 Bit Integer Data how HP BASIC transfers 255 Index HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual amplitude errors 160 161 Accessing the Registers 484 486 Address A24 space query 407 command module HP IB port 22 HP IB 22 logical 21 22 primary HP IB 22 query segment sequence 347 query waveform segment 336 secondary HP IB 22 AFG arming count 199 202 arming sources 199 arming the 165 171 291 297 block diagram description 445 452 bus request level setting 24 calibration 298 305 description 445 frequency modes 155 198 frequency synthesis modes 197 gating polarity 200 gating sources 200 high speed operation 223
19. 230 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 15 Istart frequency 250 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 1E6 Istop frequency 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE POIN 7 Isweep points 270 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR SWE SPAC LOG llogarithmic sweep 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 290 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction 300 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 310 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM OAfg 370 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Errmsg 420 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 430 COM Afg 440 DIM Message 256 450 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 460 B SPOLL Afg 470 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 480 OUTPUT Afg 490 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 500 REPEAT 510 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 520 ENTER Afg Code Message 530 PRINT Code Message 540 UNTIL Code 0 550 STOP 560 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LOG SWP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LOG SWP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 134 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Swe
20. 360 370 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN X select segment to be defined 380 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Ireserve memory for segment 390 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points 400 410 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN X OUT select sequence to be defined 420 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Ispecify segments in sequence 430 OUTPUT QAfg SOURILIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN X set segment order in sequence 440 SUBEND 450 460 SUB Rst 470 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 480 COM OAfg 490 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC reset the AFG 500 ENTER Afg Complete 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Errmsg 540 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 550 COM OAfg 560 DIM Message 256 570 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 580 B SPOLL Afg 590 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 600 OUTPUT Afg 610 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 620 REPEAT 630 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 640 ENTER Afg Code Message 650 PRINT Code Message 660 UNTIL Code 0 670 STOP 680 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIN X FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIN X C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 106 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Ge nerating a TheSIN D program gene
21. 430 END IF 440 NEXT I Continued on Next Page 96 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 450 460 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Isegment name 470 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size 480 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform waveform points 490 SUBEND 500 510 SUB Sine_wave 520 Sine_wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave and stores 530 lit in a segment 540 COM Afg 550 DIM Waveform 1 2048 ICalculate sine wave 560 FOR I 1 TO 2048 570 Waveform l 25 SIN 2 PI I 2048 580 NEXT I 590 600 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SINEWAVE Isegment name 610 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size 620 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform waveform points 630 SUBEND 640 650 SUB Seq def 660 Seq def Subprogram which defines the output sequence 670 COM OAfg 680 OUTPUT CAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE OUT sequence name 690 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Isequence size 700 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SINEWAVE TRI lexecution order 710 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DWEL COUN 2 1 segment dwell count 720 SUBEND 730 740 SUB Rst 750 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 760 COM OAfg 770 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 780 ENTER Afg Complete 790 SUBEND 800 810 SUB Wf del 820 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 830 COM OAfg 840 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 850 O
22. 500 DIM Waveform 1 4096 510 FOR I 2047 TO 2048 520 IF 1 0 THEN 1 E 38 530 Waveform 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 540 NEXT 550 560 OUTPUT OAfg LIST SEGM SEL SIN X Iselect segment 570 OUTPUT OAfg LIST SEGM DEF 4096 Ireserve memory 580 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM VOLT Waveform X load points 590 600 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEL S1 Iselect sequence 610 OUTPUT OAfg LIST SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments 620 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEQ SIN X Isegment order in sequence 630 SUBEND 640 650 SUB Noise def 660 Noise def Set sweep mode specify start and stop sample rates for a 670 10 Hz to 20 Hz sweep set arbitrary waveform function 680 ICompute waveform Noise define waveform segment and 690 Isequence 700 COM OAfg Continued on Next Page 142 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 710 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 720 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 40 96E3 Istart sample rate 730 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 81 92E3 Istop sample rate 740 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 750 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Ifunction arbitrary 760 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V Iscale arb values 770 780 DIM Waveform 1 4096 790 FOR l 1 TO 4096 800 Waveform 2 RND 1 810 NEXT 820 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM SEL NOISE Iselect segment 830 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory 840 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM V
23. 540 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 550 COM QAfg 560 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 570 ENTER Afg Complete 580 SUBEND 590 600 SUB Errmsg 610 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 620 COM Afg 630 DIM Message 256 640 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 650 B SPOLL Afg 660 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 670 OUTPUT Afg 680 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 690 REPEAT 700 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 710 ENTER Afg Code Message 720 PRINT Code Message 730 UNTIL Code 0 740 STOP 750 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP TRIG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP TRIG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 189 Arming and Triggering a Frequency Sweep The SWP_STEP program show you how to control the start and advancing of a frequency sweep The program sets the sweep arm and sweep trigger sources to HOLD The AFG is armed and advances to the next frequency in the sweep using the ARM SWEep IMMediate and TRIGger SWEep IMMediate commands respectively Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 on page 118 as a guide the steps of the program are 1 10 Select the frequency generator that allows frequency sweeping TRIGger STARt S
24. 99 102 104 generating with different waveform segments 93 98 generating with single waveform segment 88 92 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 output frequency 160 program comments 113 116 sample rate setting 331 sweep direction 157 sweeping 141 ARBWAVE C Program Example 41 45 ARBWAVE FRM Example Program 91 92 ARBWAVE FRM Program Example 33 39 ARM Subsystem 291 297 ARM STAR LAY 1 COUN 291 ARM STAR LAY2 COUN 292 ARM STAR LAY2 IMM 293 ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP 293 ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR 294 ARM SWEep COUN 295 ARM SWEep IMM 295 ARM SWEep LINK 296 ARM SWEep SOUR 297 ARM TRIG 163 202 configuration 164 flowchart 164 states 164 Arming and triggering 163 202 and triggering a frequency list 193 195 and triggering a frequency sweeps 190 192 and triggering frequency sweeps and lists 186 189 and triggering immediately 201 and triggering program comments 197 201 commands 165 291 297 count 199 292 frequency sweeps or lists 295 setting number of 169 171 slope setting 293 sources 199 sources setting 166 168 294 sweep sources 297 sweeps linking 296 sweeps setting 295 372 sweeps sources 297 the AFG 165 171 291 297 waveforms immediately 293 ASCii Data Format 335 358 Assigning the AFG to a Commander 21 Attenuator Description 451 Backplane downloading segment data 259 268 using VXIbus 259 271 506 508 Base Address 484 486 Bits operation condit
25. Connector each data point to de downloaded The timing relationship between FPCLK and FPDDxx is as shown in Figure 7 7 except without the to Download Data FPPACE line The data format is the same that is used to download segment data using the SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload command Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 279 High Speed Operation Program Comments Amplitude Effects on DAC Codes Incorrect AFG Operation from Incorrect DAC Codes DAC Sources Download Sources Determining the Size of the Combined Segment List Determining the Size of the Combined Segment Sequence List The following comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapter The AFG stores the Signed or Unsigned DAC codes directly into memory Thus the amplitude setting has no affect on the codes Unlike sending a voltage list the output amplitude can be set to any of the values listed in Appendix B The amplitude does not have to be gt to the maximum DAC code value The AFG requires that the data it receives must be correct or it will not execute it correctly Unlike using other data transfer methods the AFG does not perform any error checking on the data when it is directly downloaded The AFG has the following DAC sources available to download data to the DAC INTernal The SOURce LIST 1 subsystem built in waveforms DPORt The front panel s Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus Local Bus VXI The
26. IDefine marker list Imarkers at fp BNC Isegment name Isegment size lamplitude points Imarker list 740 Imarker signals to be output with the triangle wave 750 Isegment 760 COM QAfg 770 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE OUT sequence name 780 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Inumber of segments 790 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SINE TRI Isegments in sequence 800 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ MARK 0 1 lenable marker on segment TRI 810 SUBEND 820 830 SUB Rst 840 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 850 COM Afg 860 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 870 ENTER Afg Complete 880 SUBEND 890 900 SUB Wf del Continued on Next Page 210 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 910 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 COM OAfg OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT OAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT OAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue
27. IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt command The output units are only valid for amplitude and not offsets volts is assumed for offsets 3 Set the Amplitude and the Offset SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet offset These commands specify the amplitude and offset Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits The maximum value of the combined amplitude and offset voltages must remain within the 6 025 V limit 4 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 72 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 HP BASIC Program Example OUTPUNIT 1 IRE STORE OUTPUNIT 2 This programs sets the output amplitude units to volts peak to peak 3 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ONINTR7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Out_unit 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Out_unit 210 Out_unit Subprogram which sets the amplitude units 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL UNIT VOLT VPP amplitude units 240 OUTPUT Af
28. The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this product Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the product Hewlett Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground the equipment For Safety Class 1 equipment equipment having a protective earth terminal an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable gases or fumes For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse s only with fuse s of the same voltage and current rating and type DO NOT use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service trained personnel only Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the equipment switched off To avoid dangerous electrical shock DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified to do so DO NOT operate damaged equipment Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into t
29. VINStrument IDENtity Chapter 8 Command Reference 413 SCPI Conformance Information The HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator conforms to the SCPI 1991 0 standard Table 8 2 and 8 3 list all the SCPI confirmed approved and non SCPI commands that the HP E1445A can execute Table 8 2 SCPI Confirmed Commands ABORt ARM START SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 DEViation lt phase gt COUNI lt number gt SOURce source LAYer2 STATe mode COUNI number UNIT IMMediate ANGLe lt units gt SLOPe edge ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt SOURce source SWEep SEQuence3 SWEep COUNI number COUNI number IMMediate DIRection direction LINK link POINts number SOURce source SPACing mode TIME time INITiate IMMediate STATus OPERation OUTPut 1 CONDition FILTer ENABIe mask LPASs NTRansition mask FREQuenoy frequency PTRansition mask STATe mode PRESet IMPedance impedance QUEStionable STATe lt mode gt CONDition ENABle mask SOURce NTRansition mask FREQuency 1 PTRansition mask CENTer center freq CW FIXed frequency SYSTem MODE mode ERRor SPAN freq span VERSion STARt start freq STOP stop freq TRIGger FREQuency2 STARt SEQuencef 1 CW FIXed frequency COUNt number FUNCtion IMMediate SHAPe lt shape gt
30. in the output queue No other commands will be executed until the 1 is placed in the output queue Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC WAI e RST Condition None PMC PMC purges all macro definitions Comments Use the RMC command to purge an single macro definition e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands DMC RMC e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 421 PUD and PUD PUD lt data gt stores the specified data in the HP E1445A s non volatile calibration memory The data must be sent in IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite block format Calibration security must have been previously disabled PUD returns the current protected user data in IEEE 488 2 definite block format The query form may be executed regardless of the state of calibration security Note When shipped from the factory the protected user data area contains information regarding when the HP E1445A was last calibrated Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mask gt block data 0 through 63 characters none or string Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition Unaffected Example Setting the Protected User Data PUD 17Unit 5 Sets data to Unit 5 422 Command Reference Chapter 8 RC
31. llle 78 Sjnisodl Function Requirements cias een ee Rog CE eR RE KS 78 Reference Oscillator SGUICES e rec e hs Rhod o Be Re ak 78 sample SODIEBS ks eg KK NN 78 DIDS Frequency Generator Ranges o o e ace kh ek oe Re OR Rd 79 Number of Points versus Frequency oso be ee 9 RR RR RR eaa 79 DOuiputLo ad COMME nu A AAA WOROR A AA 79 Output Units COMES go dao kee Gee EA ARA 80 Selecting the Deviation Units for Phase Modulation 80 Using MINimum and MAXimum Parameters o o 81 Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 83 Chapter Contes as 6 dk woe eR Roe E EC GRR A REWER ROW EBSD 83 Arbitrary Wavetorms Flowchart 42 22x bo a iak RO EE RI a 84 How the AFG Generates Arbitrary Waveforms o e 86 Generating a Simple Arbitrary Waveform o o 88 HP BASIC Program Example AKBWAVE 9 255644 a RR a 91 Executing Several Waveform Segments o 93 HP BASIC Program Example MULSEG a4 dog 444489 G4 ewe S 96 Using Different Frequency Generators sse ee 99 HP BASIC Program Example AFGGEN1 oo o 102 HP BASIC Program Example AFGGEN2 o 104 Sample POSIT uo e db e o a EE RES GS De io de de d 104 Generating a Sin X X Waveform 00002 e ee eee 105 HP BASIC Program Example SIN X 2 44 44 5b eka 09854090000 105 Generating a Damped Site Wave 4 04544 o 06 44544464 A 107 HP BASIC Program Exe
32. lt length gt This command selects the source used to download DAC data into segment memory see DAC Sources on page 280 The lt source gt parameter selects the download source lt dest gt contains the name of the waveform segment to be downloaded and lt length gt contains the size of the waveform segment in number of points 1 e the same size set in SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Place the AFG Into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This commands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until it executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the previous commands Generate Download and Store the Second Waveform Segment as a Combined Signed List This step stores the Combined waveform segment into segment memory using the Signed number format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The command or downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded 262 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 controller You can also use the command module like the HP E1406A Command Module but at a slower data transfer rate Be sure to set the last point bit and marker bits at the appropriate points on the waveform Notify the AFG that Downloading is
33. 101 2SHIFT Waveform l 101 3 430 END IF 440 NEXT I 450 460 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 470 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed 480 loutput marker as defined by segment list 490 OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 500 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name 510 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size 520 OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 3402 530 OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform 1400 bytes 3 digits 2 bytes ampl point 540 OUTPUT QAfg ICR LF 550 560 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT sequence name 570 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size 580 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order 590 SUBEND 600 610 SUB Rst 620 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 630 COM QAfg Afg1 640 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 650 ENTER Afg Complete Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 243 660 SUBEND 670 680 SUB Wf del 690 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 700 COM Afg Afg1 710 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 720 OUTPUT QGAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 630 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 740 SUBEND 750 760 SUB Errmsg 770 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 780 COM Afg Afg1 790 DIM Message 256 800 IRead AFG status byte register and cl
34. 16 Base addr IVAL 63 16 Sample hold BINIOR Sample hold 128 Iset bit 7 WRITEIO 16 Base addr IVAL 63 16 Sample hold ISet the reference oscillator divider based on the new frequency Also load the new divider value if n is greater than 3 Divider Reference_osc Frequency Points SELECT Divider CASE 1 Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 0 CASE 2 Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 1 CASE 3 Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 2 CASE ELSE Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 3 Divider Divider 2 1 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 7D 16 SHIFT Divider 8 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 7F 16 BINAND Divider 255 END SELECT WRITEIO 16 Base addr IVAL 63 16 Sample hold IClear sample hold bit which activates new frequency Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Based Programming 493 830 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 63 16 BINAND Sample_hold 127 840 SUBEND 850 860 SUB Rst 870 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 880 COM OAfg Base_addr 890 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 900 ENTER Afg Complete 910 SUBEND Comments To simplify the program SCPI commands are included to select the reference oscillator the divide by n subsystem and to start the waveform This requires that the only registers written to be the Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register and the ROSC N Divider Registers This program executes as intended when the SCPI commands in subprogram Output_function are executed before the r
35. 282 Command Reference Chapter 8 ISQURGe ser 368 TRIGO di emet tt 391 RAMP eate 08 STARt SEQuence 1 392 PONES cat noe oa 368 GOUN ied 392 POLA Weiss tasar tale 369 CATE a metet OOD POLATI 5 ihe eem 393 SOURce nas 370 SOURCE A eara eian as 393 ROSCillator nsa 370 STA TO neo eee es 394 FREQUENCY sess 370 MMediate esses 395 EXT ee tene 370 SO iint bee etes 395 SOURCE iiias eene 371 SOURCE inaa eiiie en 396 SOURCE i n ect tet es 372 TRIGger SWEep rune hoe RE 372 STOP SEQuencee 397 COUNT iine 372 IMMediate sese 397 DIRection sess 373 ISLOB6 cete ne 398 POINIS dti nica eee 374 SOU GO ceu 398 SSPAGiIng onte eee ete 375 SIME se trece 876 TRIGger SWEep SEQuence3 399 SQURce neuen AES 377 IMMediate sese 399 VOLTAGE 2 ivi peg um etl 377 EINK canta sais 400 EEEVel aeos 377 SOURGS eie ied 401 IMMediate ss 377 TIMer E 402 AMPLitude 377 UNI Tita teres 379 VINStrument eee 403 VOLTage 379 CONFigure esee 403 OFFSet unused 380 EBUS oia 403 MODE eene 403 SATUS nunt ben tege tp 381 AUTO sence Sede ein eee ae 404 iB cm 382 EST cn E 405
36. 320 Ramp_wave 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave pulse and the output sequence COM OAfg OAfg1 frequency function lamplitude Iwaveform sequence Iwait for arm state ISubprogram which defines a ramp waveform with a marker INTEGER Waveform 1 200 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes FOR l 100 TO 99 STEP 1 IF I 0 THEN Idac codes for voltages lt OV Waveform 101 1 2 1I 050505 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform 101 1 SHIFT Waveform 101 1 3 32768 END IF IF I0 THEN IOV dac code and marker pulse Waveform 101 32766 Iset marker bit with this amplitude point END IF IF 120 THEN Idac codes for voltages gt OV Waveform 101 1 1 050505 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform 101 1 SHIFT Waveform 101 1 3 32768 END IF NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM UNS OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Idac data source Idac data
37. 64 16 49 152 Logical Address 64 16 E1406A ADDRESS MAP 20000016 IFCOO046 Sa OTA A16 N A24 REGISTER ADDRESS ADDRESS ADDRESS SPACE SPACE IFO00046 IFCOO016 B 2 080 768 N Base Address IFCO001g Logical Address 64 16 or 2 080 768 Logical Address 64 10 Register Address Base address Register Offset Base address Register Offset M M M FFFF 46 Regist r FOR 16 BIT WORDS 2 3E16 N REGISTER Sis ADDRESS T e e SPACE j sd e e N OE16 Data Low Register A OC 16 Data High Register Response Data cd En OA16 Extended Register 16 0816 Protocol Signal Register 49 152 0616 Offset Register an 0416 Status Control Register N 0216 Device Type Register 0016 ID_Register HP E1445A Register Map Register Offset 16 BIT WORDS SE16 3C16 e e e e e e OE16 Data Low Register 0C16 Data High Register Response Data 0A16 Extended Register 0816 Protocol Signal Register 0616 Offset_Register 0416 Status Control_Register 0216 Device Type Register 0016 ID Register HP E1445A A16 REGISTER MAP Figure C 1 HP E1445A AFG Registers within A16 Address Space Appendix C Register Based Programming 485 In a system using a V 360 HP E1480 controller for example the base address of the configuration registers is computed as C00016 LADDR 64 16
38. 740 REPEAT 750 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 760 ENTER Afg Code Message 770 PRINT Code Message 780 UNTIL Code 0 790 STOP 800 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIGN DAT FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIGN DAT C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A These programs are very similar to the example programs used in Chapter 3 The only difference is that this program transfers the segment data as DAC codes in the Signed number format instead of voltage values 228 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms Note Using the Unsigned Number Format Transferring DAC Codes in the Unsigned Number Format Determining DAC Codes in the Unsigned Number Format Transferring waveform segments as Digital to Analog Converter DAC Codes to the AFG is faster than transferring a voltage list This section shows how to transfer the lists as DAC codes using the Unsigned number format The DAC 66 99 codes are transferred to the AFG as a comma separated list The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus if the AFG currently contains Unsigned data and you wish to send Signed data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Signed data This section shows how to setup the AFG to receive DAC codes in the Unsig
39. AFG Self Test Resetting the AFG and clearing its status registers Querying the AFG power on reset settings Checking for Errors Generating a sine wave with a single command The AFG self test is executed with the command TST The AFG parameters tested include internal interrupt lines waveform select RAM segment sequence RAM waveform segment RAM DDS NCO operation sine wave generation arbitrary waveform generation marker generation waveform cycle and arm counters sweep timer frequency shift keying stop trigger DC analog parameters amplitude offset attenuators filters calibration DACs Upon completion of the test one of the self test codes listed in Table 1 2 is returned Table 1 2 HP E1445A Self Test Codes Self Test Code Description 0 Test passed 1 Test failed An error message describes the failure 46 Getting Started Chapter 1 HP BASIC Program Example SLFTST 1 IRE STORE SLFTST 10 ISend the self test command enter and display the result 20 DIM Message 256 30 OUTPUT 70910 TST 40 ENTER 70910 Rslt 50 IF Rslt lt gt 0 THEN 60 REPEAT 70 OUTPUT 70910 SYST ERR 80 ENTER 70910 Code Message 90 PRINT Code Message 100 UNTIL Code 0 110 END IF 120 PRINT Rslt 130 END Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SLFTST FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example program SLFTST C is in Versions
40. Afg Complete 580 SUBEND Comments e This program runs continuously until a frequency change greater than 1 occurs between the programmed frequency and the output frequency Resetting the computer stops the program e Clearing the Questionable Signal Event Register line 130 allows new events to be latched into the Register Clearing the service request bit bit 6 RQS in the Status Byte Register line 440 when the interrupt is serviced allows the bit to be set again when the next summary bit is received Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program QSSG_RQS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program QSSG_RQS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 434 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Operation Status Group The Condition Register The Operation Status Group monitors current operating conditions within the AFG The specific conditions include calibrating sweeping entering the wait for arm state and execution of the INITiate IMMediate command Calibration sweeping waiting for an arm signal and the INITiate IMMediate command are monitored with the following bits in the Condition Register AII other bits are unused 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 unused INIT ARM unused SWE unused CAL The Transition Filter CALibrating Bit 0 is set 1 during calibration The bit is cl
41. Appendix A Frequency Generator 2 Internal Reference 40 000000 MHz Rate Generation Method Divide by N or direct use of reference Range Minimum 305 175781 Sa s 40 131072 MSa s Maximum 40 000000 MSa s Resolution Not Applicable Attainable rates are 40 N MSa s where N 1 2 3 and all even values up to 131072 Jitter 80 psec typical rms Pertinent SCPI commands SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal2 SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal2 Frequency Agility No Recommendation Use if 40 MSa s is required or for lowest jitter at other sample rates Built In Waveforms using 42 94967296 MHz internal reference oscillator in each case the frequency resolution equals the minimum frequency Sine Waves 0 01 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz Square Waves 0 0025 Hz to 2 68435456 MHz normal range Average Duty cycle is 49 9 to 50 1 3 nsec 0 005 Hz to 5 36870912 MHz doubled range Average Duty cycle is 44 to 56 3 nsec Using frequency generator 1 square waves inherit the timing jitter characteristics given above for frequency generator 1 The sample period is 14 of the square wave period Triangles Ramps For the default setting of 100 points per cycle 0 0001 Hz to 107 3741824 kHz normal range 0 0002 Hz to 214 7483648 kHz doubled range Higher frequencies are possible with fewer than 100 points per cycle Points per cycle can be 4 to 262144 Appendix A HP E1445A Specifications 455
42. CLK10 10 MHz the V XIbus CLK line EXTernal User provided value the front panel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or 1 User provided value the VXIbus ECL trigger lines If using either the EXTernal or ECLTrg0 or 1 reference oscillator sources enter the source frequency to the AFG using SOURce JROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal frequency e For best frequency linearity use the 42 9 MHz 1 e INTernal 1 reference oscillator source with the DDS frequency1 frequency generator This combination provides 01 Hz resolution For higher frequency values use the 40 MHz i e INTernal2 reference oscillator source with the Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator Use the EXTernal or ECLTrgO or ECLTrg1 sources for custom frequency values However any reference oscillator source can be used with any frequency generator Sample Sources e The USER function operates with any of the sample sources selected by the TRIGger STARt SOURce command The INTernal 1 source automatically selects the DDS frequency generator The INTernal2 source selects the Divide_by_N frequency generator The other sources are not used with any frequency generator The sample frequency thus depends on the externally generated sample signal The different sample sources are INTernal 1 power on value selects the DDS frequency generator INTernal2 selects the Divide by N frequency generator BUS the HP IB GET or TRG commands EXTernal the front pa
43. Commands for Generating Standard Waveforms continued from previous page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 55 Generating DC Voltages The DCVOLTS program outputs a 5 Vdc voltage The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the sinusoid function output impedance and output load to 50 O 2 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC This command selects the DC function 3 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information HP BASIC Program Example DCVOLTS 170 180 190 200 IRE STORE DCVOLTS This program outputs a 5V DC voltage Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Dc volts WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Dc volts 210 Dc volts subprogram which outputs a dc voltage 220 230 240 COM QAfg OUTPUT QGAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP DC OUTPUT EAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V Continued on Next Page lfunction lamplitude 56 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 250
44. ERRORCHK 220 IRE STORE ERRORCHK This program represents the method used to check for programming lerrors in HP BASIC programs lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg IDefine branch to be taken when an E1445A error occurs Enable HP IB interface to generate an interrupt when an error loccurs ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 Clear all bits in the standard event status register unmask the Istandard event status group summary bit in the E1445A status byte Iregister decimal weight 32 unmask the query error device Idependent error execution error and command error bits decimal sum 60 in the E1445A standard event status register OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Subprogram calls would be here WAIT 1 allow error branch to occur before turning intr off OFF INTR 7 END Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 49 230 240 SUB Errmsg 250 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL OAfg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP
45. FREQuency2 SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA format lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined combined list SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE 410 Command Reference Chapter 8 Table 8 1 HP E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SOURce LIST 1 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer marker list Cont d SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint lt point gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage voltage list SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC voltage list SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined lt combined_list gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt repetition list SOURce
46. FSKey SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce source sets the source which will control which of the two FSKey sample rates or waveform frequencies is generated when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE FSKey is selected A high level on the source selects SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey frequency a low level selects frequency2 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete EXTernal TTLTrgO through none LTrg7 Comments The available sources are EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e The front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC is a three use connector for FSK control as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source Only one of these uses may be active at any time e Ifa VXIbus TTLTrg trigger line is used for FSK control then no TTLTrg trigger lines can be used as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source e Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE e RST Condition SOURce FSKey SOURce EXTernal Example Setting the FSK Control Source FREQ FSK SOUR TTLTO Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRGO as FSK control source 324 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE rode
47. Frequency Agility The capabilities in this section apply to all built in standard waveforms and to all arbitrary waveforms generated with Frequency Generator 1 i e the DDS timebase Digital Sweep Linear and Log phase continuous 0 2 to 800 points sec typical Note 1 Frequency List Up to 256 points phase continuous 0 2 to 800 points sec typical Note 1 Frequency Shift Up to 2M or f ref 5 changes sec Keyed FSK phase continuous whichever is smaller Digital Phase See Interface Characteristics later in this Modulation appendix Note 1 Sine waves can be leveled at each step of a frequency sweep or list The speeds above include leveling Additional Waveform Control Characteristics Waveform repetitions per ARM STARt 1 to 65536 or INFinity Not specified for built in sine waves For other waveforms the final waveform repetition stops at the last sample point ARM STARt events per INITiate 1 to 65535 or INFinity 456 HP E1445A Specifications Appendix A Amplitude Characteristics Low Pass nominal Filtering Programmable choice of three configurations 250 kHz nominal 3 dB point 5th order Bessel 10 MHz nominal 3 dB point 7th order Bessel No Filter Output Impedance 50 Q or 75 Q programmable Output Disconnect Uses a relay Output is unterminated when relay is open DAC Resolution 13 bits 12 bits sine waves only sign monotonic to 11 bits including DC Volt Function Output i
48. INITIATE ite tn 382 CONFigure eee 405 OPERalioln eee 383 DATA Lue 06 CONDiition ooo ee ee esee 383 NVME ora etm etes 406 ENABI6 ous us t e888 EMODB terim 406 EVENI unc 384 et 01 1 iaia 407 INTRANSItION s a a eeens 384 ADDRESS E 407 PTRansition esses 385 DAWA uiti Eid 407 PRESO ues 385 O 407 QUEStionable ssssss 386 DENU Z ss sace 408 CONDiition 02 eeeeeceeeceeteee eee ettees 386 ENABIe ccce 386 EEVENIJ EE 387 NTRansition eesess 387 PTRansition eseessss 388 SYS Temi ER HESSEN 389 ERRO aaa 009 0 Chapter 8 Command Reference 283 Command Types Commands are separated into two types IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and SCPI Commands Common The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the Common Commands that perform functions like Command reset self test status byte query etc Common commands are four or five characters in Format length always begin with the asterisk character and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character Some examples of Common Commands are shown below RST CLS ESE unmask OPC STB SCPI Command Format The functions of the AFG are programmed using SCPI commands SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as a tree system In this system associ
49. LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC command must be contiguous To do this sent no carriage return CR and line feed LF before all the data is transferred Also since EOL is a data terminating string it must not be sent before the data transfer is complete The format in line 440 disables the CR LF and EOL The LF character and EOL string sent in line 460 tells the AFG that the data transfer is complete IRE STORE DACBLOK2 This program downloads arbitrary waveform data as unsigned IDAC codes The data is sent in an IEEE 488 2 indefinite length Iblock in 16 bit integer format The waveform is a 200 point l 5V to 5V ramp wave Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data COM Atg Afg1 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT OAfg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude CALL Ramp wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state Continued on Next Page 236 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 260 270 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 280 OFF INTR 7 290 E
50. LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts to determine the Number of Marker length of the marker pulse list selected by Points of a SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer The command returns the marker list size of the currently selected segment sequence Segment Sequence 222 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 Chapter Contents Chapter 7 High Speed Operation This chapter explains how to use the HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator at faster speeds and other operations Chapter 3 shows how to transfer waveform segments and segment sequences to the AFG as voltage values and ASCII data respectively This 1s the slowest method to transfer the lists to the AFG This chapter shows faster ways to transfer the lists to the AFG The sections are as follows e Data Transfer Methods and Speed Comparisons Page 224 e Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms Page 225 Using the Signed Number Format Page 225 e Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms Page 229 Using the Unsigned Number Format Page 229 e Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer D ta 2i irure ie ties dd Page 231 Definite Length Block Data Format Page 231 Data Byte SIZE coca Page 231 e Using Indefinite Length Arbitray Blocks to Transfer Data E oben aoe Page 235 Indefinite Length Block Data Format Page 235 Data Byte Sizes eo Ai a a
51. LIST2 FREQuency freq list POINts SOURce MARKer STATe lt mode gt SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce source STOP IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce source SWEep IMMediate LINK link SOURCe source TIMer period 414 Command Reference Chapter 8 Table 8 3 Non SCPI Commands CALibration COUNt DATA AC 1 block AC2 block DC block DC BEGin POINt SECure CODE lt code gt STATe mode code STATe state AC estate DC estate OUTPut 1 LOAD load AUTO mode SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat format SOURce source DOWNload source dest length COMPlete FUNCtion USER LIST 1 FORMat DATA format length SEGMent ADDRess CATalog COMBined combined list POINts DEFine length DELete ALL SELected FREE MARKer marker list POINts SELect lt name gt VOLTage voltage list DAC dac list POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess CATalog COMBined combined list DEFine length DELete ALL SELected DWELI COUNt repetition list POINts FREE MARKer marker list POINts SPOint lt points gt SELect lt name gt SEQuence segment list SEGMents LIST2 FORMat DATA format length MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source g
52. SEGMent VOLTage DAC voltage list This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory according to the Unsigned number format set by the SOURce JARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command HP BASIC Program Example UNS_DAT 4 300 Use the same BASIC program as the SIGN_DAT program beginning on page 227 The only difference is that this program generates in line 360 and transfers in line 400 the segment data as DAC codes in the Unsigned number format instead of the Signed format The following lines show the differences of the two program examples IRE STORE UNS DAT SUB Ramp wave 310 Ramp wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 Isequence COM OAfg DIM Waveform 1 200 Calculate waveform points as dac codes FOR I 100 TO 99 Wavetorm I 101 1 050505 00125 4096 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM UNS dac data format unsigned OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP segment name OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC Waveform waveform pts OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP segment order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program UNS DAT FRM is in d
53. SHAPe shape 5 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 6 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example FSK2 1 IRE STORE FSK2 2 This program shifts between 1 MHz and 2 MHz based on a control 3 Isignal supplied by the HP E1406 Command Module on TTLTRG 4 Itrigger line 5 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 ASSIGN Cmd_mod TO 70900 40 COM Afg Cmd_mod 60 ISet up error checking 70 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 80 ENABLE INTR 7 2 90 OUTPUT Afg CLS 100 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 110 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 130 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG set up frequency shift 140 keying and which set up the TTLTrg5 trigger line 150 CALL Rst 160 CALL Fsk ttl 170 CALL Setup ttl5 180 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 190 OFF INTR 7 Continued on Next Page 150 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 200 END 210 220 SUB Fsk_ttl 230 Fsk_itl Subprogram which sets up frequency shift keying and trigger 240 line TTLTRG 5 as the control source 250 COM Afg Cmd_mod 260 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FSK IFSK mode 270 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 FSK 1E6 2E6 IFSK frequencies 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ FSK SOUR TTLT5 IFSK source 290 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 300 OUTPUT A fg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 310 OUTPUT QAfg I
54. SOURce MARKer ECLTrg1 STATe ON This enables the arm output on the ECL Trgl trigger line Select the Servant AFG s Reference Oscillator Source SOURce JROSCillator SOURce ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce JROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal 40M This command selects the Reference Oscillator Source To synchronize the servant AFG with the master select the ECLTrgO trigger line The ECLTRGO line is a 40 MHz clock Select the Servant AFG s Sample Source TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 SOURce INT2 Select the Divide by n time base for the sample source Setup the Servant AFG For a 5 V Square Wave Output SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare Setup the Servant AFG Arm Source to be the ECLTrg1 Line ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce ECLTrg1 This command tells the servant AFG to start on the arm signal from the master AFG Generate the Servant AFG s Output INITiate IMMediate Wait for the Servant AFG to Complete its Setup STATus OPC INITiate OFF OPC Generate the Master AFG s Output INITiate IMMediate Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 219 HP BASIC Program Example DRIFT 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 IRE STORE DRIFT This program sets up two AFG s to output 1 MHz square waves ITo prevent these signals from drifting and creating a phase Idifference the reference oscillator of a master AFG is shared by a servant AFG The master s reference
55. SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 350 ENTER Afg Code Message 360 PRINT Code Message 370 UNTIL Code 0 380 STOP 390 SUBEND Comments Clearing the service request bit bit 6 RQS in the Status Byte Register line 290 when the interrupt is serviced allows the bit to be set again when the next summary bit is received Chapter 9 AFG Status 441 Visual BASIC and Visual C C Program Versions The Status Byte Status Group The Status Byte The Visual BASIC example program ERRORCHK FRM is in directory VBPROG and the Visual C example program ERRORCHK C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A The registers in the Status Byte Status Group enable conditions monitored by the other status groups to generate a service request The Status Byte Register contains the summary bits of the Questionable Register Signal Status Group QUES the Operation Status Group OPER and the Standard Event Status Group ESB The register also contains the message available bit MAV and the service request bit RQS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OPER RQS ESB MAV QUES unused Questionable Signal Summary Bit QUES Bit 3 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Questionable Signal Status Group is present when the appropriate bit is latched into the group s Event Register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable Register Message Available Bit MAV Bit 4 is set 1 wh
56. Setting the Operation Register Positive Transition Mask STAT OPER PTR H0040 Sets the event bit when Waiting for Arm condition is set STATus PRESet initializes the Enable Registers and transition masks for the Operation Status and Questionable Signal Status Registers and sets STATus OPC INITiate ON For both Status Registers the Enable Registers are set to 0 the negative transition masks are set to O and the positive transition masks are set to 32767 Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition None Presetting the Status Subsystem STAT PRES Presets the status subsystem Chapter 8 Command Reference 385 STATus QUEStionable CONDition Comments Example STATus QUEStionable CONDition returns the contents of the Questionable Signal Condition Register Reading the register does not affect 1ts contents e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition All bits of the Condition Register are cleared as a result of the state present after RST except for the Calibration bit which will remain set if the condition persists Querying the Questionable Signal Condition Register STAT QUES COND Queries Questionable Signal Condition Register QUEStionable ENABle Parameters Comments Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt specifies which bits
57. The SOURce VOLTage subsystem controls the amplitude and offset values for all output waveform shapes SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude UNIT VOLTage units OFFSet lt offset gt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude SOURce VOL Tage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude sets the output amplitude when SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe is set to DC RAMP SINusoid SQUare or TRlangle It sets the positive full scale output amplitude for arbitrary waveforms SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER set the least significant DAC code bit represents 1 4095 of this value Output amplitude for ramp sine square and triangle wave output may be programmed in volts peak volts peak to peak volts RMS volts or dBM Output amplitude for DC must be programmed in volts for arbitrary waveform output volts or peak volts The query form returns the amplitude in terms of the default units specified by the SOURCce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage command Chapter 8 Command Reference 377 SOURce VOLTage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt amplitude gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum see below DC Output When a matched load has been specified MINimum selects 5 12 V MAXimum selects 5 11875 V Arbitrary Waveform Ramp Sine Square and Triangle Outputs When a matched load has been specified if the current offset v
58. The HP E1445A AFG uses an ARM TRIG triggering configuration to output these points When initiated an arm signal enables the AFG to output one amplitude point each time a trigger signal is received The arm trigger model is shown in Figure 5 1 ABORt RST Idle State INITiate IMMediate YES Have ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt Wait for arm State Arm received Wait for trigger State Trigger received Instrument Action Figure 5 1 The ARM TRIG Triggering Model arms occurred 2 Have ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt cycles occurred 2 The AFG operates within four states Idle Wait for Arm Wait for Trigger and Instrument Action see Figure 5 1 When power is applied or following a reset or an abort the AFG is in the Idle state The AFG is set to the Wait for Arm state with the INITiate IMMediate command The AFG moves to the Wait for Trigger state when an arm from the specified arm source is received The AFG moves to the Instrument Action state when a trigger is received After the Instrument Action amplitude point is output occurs the AFG returns to the Wait for Trigger state until the next trigger occurs When enough triggers have occurred such that the specified waveform cycle repetition count has been reached the AFG returns to the Wait for Arm state until the next arm occurs When the specified arm count has been reached the AFG returns to the Idle
59. Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 32767 Example Setting the Questionable Signal Register Positive Transition Mask STAT QUES PTR H0040 Sets the event bit when Waiting for Arm condition is set 388 Command Reference Chapter 8 SYSTem SYSTem The SYSTem subsystem returns error messages and the SCPI version number to which the HP E1445A complies Subsystem Syntax SYSTem ERRor query only VERSion query only ERRor SYSTem ERRor returns the error messages in the error queue See Table B 6 in Appendix B for a listing of possible error numbers and messages Comments The HP E1445A places any generated errors into the error queue The queue is first in first out With several errors waiting in the queue the SYSTem ERRor command returns the oldest unread error message first e The error queue can hold 30 error messages If the HP E1445A generates more than 30 messages that are not read it replaces the last error message in the queue with Error 350 Too many errors No additional messages are placed into the queue until SYSTem ERRor reads some messages or the CLS clear status command clears the queue e When the error queue is empty SYSTem ERRor returns 0 No error e Executable when Initiated Yes e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No errors are in the error queue Example Reading the Error Queue SYST ERR Queries the error queue Chapter 8
60. VOLTage SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage units SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt offset gt STATus STATus OPC INITiate state STATus OPERation QUEStionable CONDition STATus OPERation QUEStionable ENABle unmask STATus OPERation QUEStionable EVENt STATus OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt STATus OPERation QUEStionable PTRansition unmask STATus PRESet 412 Command Reference Chapter 8 Table 8 1 HP E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SYSTem SYSTem ERRor SYSTem VERsion TRIGger TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity polarity TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce source TRIGger STARIT GATE STATe mode TRIGger STARt IMMediate TRIGger STARt SLOPe edge TRIGger STARt SOURce source TRIGger STOP IMMediate TRIGger STOP SLOPe edge TRIGger STOP SOURce source TRIGger SWEep IMMediate TRIGger SWEep LINK lt link gt TRIGger SWEep SOURce source TRIGger SWEep TlMer period VINStrument VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE mode VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO mode VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure lt ength gt VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE mode VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy
61. in turn select the waveform sequences The available sources are 0 0 sequencer data source is Local Bus 0 1 sequencer data source is Front Panel 10 sequencer data source is Waveform Select Register The source specified in the Sequence Selection program is the Waveform Select Register Note that when the sequencer data source is specified the contents of the other register fields must remain unchanged 498 Register Based Programming Appendix C The Waveform Select The Waveform Select Register contains the location of the output Register sequence s base address in sequence base memory Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0 base A16 Waveform Index other control bits The Sequence Base Register Waveform Index The Waveform Index is the location in sequence base memory where the base address of the sequence in sequence memory is located When specifying a waveform index it is recommended that you begin with an index of 1 then 2 and so on Index 0 is reserved for SCPI usage The Sequence Base Register contains the base address of the selected sequence in sequence memory Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 2016 Sequence Base Address The Status Register Sequence Base Address The Sequence Base Address is the location of the sequence in sequence memory The Status Register is used to determine
62. to send commands to the AFG with logical address 80 the OUTPUT statement in an HP BASIC program appears as OUTPUT 1680 SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 for device logical addresses from 01 to 99 or OUTPUT 160xxx SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 for device logical addresses from 100 to 255 Setting the AFG The HP E1445A servant area is set when the HP E1446A Summing Servant Area mplifier DAC is used with the Arbitrary Function Generator Note the following when setting the AFG servant area e The HP E1445A servant area need only be set when the HP E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC is used with the AFG factory setting 0 e The HP E1446A must be in the AFG servant area in order for the AFG to control the Summing Amplifier DAC e The HP E1445A servant area is defined as Servant area logical address 1 through logical address servant area switch setting e The HP E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC should be the only device in the AFG servant area Other devices in the servant area would be inaccessible to other commanders HP E1406A Command Module for example The HP E1445A AFG servant area switch is shown in Figure 1 2 Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 The AFG Bus Request Level Bus Request Level Guidelines Figure 1 3 The bus request level is a priority at which the HP E1445A can request the use of the Data Transfer Bus e There are four bus request lines BGO BG3 fro
63. 1 YES NO SET MARKER LIST IN SEGMENT LIST SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint SET MARKER LIST IN SEGMENT SEQUENCE LIST SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer or SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint FINISH Figure 6 1 Commands for Marker Pulses 204 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 Available Marker Sources There are six marker sources available for output at the AFG s front panel Marker Out BNC and the ECL Trigger Lines Use the SOURce MARKer FEED lt source gt command to select the Marker Out BNC use SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED source command to select the ECL trigger lines The sources for the Marker Out BNC not the ECL trigger lines can output the marker pulses as either active high NORMal or active low INVerted Use the SOURce MARKer POLarity polarity command to select the polarity The different marker sources are as follows ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 For arbitrary waveforms the marker level changes with the first point on the waveform of the first waveform repetition The source then outputs a marker pulse at the last waveform point of each repetition For SINUsoid outputs the marker is a 50 duty cycle square wave at the waveform frequency ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 The AFG asserts a marker when triggering the first amplitude point after receiving a
64. 1 PHASE MODULATION CWI FIXed RESET VALUE 10kHz SET PHASE MODULATION SOURCE SOURce PM SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal ENABLE PHASE MODULATION SOURce PM STATe RESET VALUE OFF FREQUENCY COUPLED AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet RESET VALUE OV SET OUTPUT IMPEDANCE OUTPut 1 IMPedance RESET VALUE 500 SET OUTPUT LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD RESET VALUE AUTO ON LOAD MATCHED TO IMPEDANCE VOLTAGE COUPLED Figure 2 1 Commands for Generating Standard Waveforms continued on next page 54 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 SET FILTER FREQUENCY OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency RESET VALUE 250kHz ENABLE FILTER OUTPut 1 FiLTer LPASs STATe RESET VALUE OFF UNCOUPLED ENABLE OUTPUT AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT OUTPut 1 STATe RESET VALUE ON SET PHASE MODULATION UNITS SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe RESET VALUE RADians SET PHASE MODULATION DEVIATION SOURce PM DEViation RESET VALUE O RADians PHASE MODULATION UNCOUPLED SET THE ARM SOURCE ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce RESET VALUE IMMediate SET THE ARM COUNT ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt RESET VALUE 1 ARMING SET THE REPETITION COUNT ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt RESET VALUE INFinity INITIATE THE WAVEFORM INITiate IMMediate UNCOUPLED Figure 2 1
65. 1013 Illegal when not testing local bus VINS CONF TEST DATA was executed and the local bus test was not performed 1014 Illegal while initiated Command cannot be executed while the HP E1445A is in the initiated instrument action state Appendix B Useful Tables 477 Table B 6 HP E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 1015 Illegal when SOUR ARB DAC not SOUR LIST1 commands cannot be executed unless INT the DAC data source is internal 1016 Illegal when VIN LBUS MODE not The operating mode for the local bus is off and CONS SOUR ARB DOWN is set to LBUS 1017 Illegal when SOUR FUNC SHAP The output function must be SINusoid when testing RAMP SQU TRI set the local bus VINS CONF TEST CONP 1018 Illegal while calibrating Commands cannot be sent to the HP E1445A while the device is calibrating 1019 Illegal while not calibrating The command is only valid while the HP E1445A is calibrating 1020 Illegal while initiated and Frequency changes during phase modulation can SOUR PM SOUR not INT only occur when SOUR PM SOUR is INTernal 1021 Test data byte count not even The length parameter for the command number VINS CONF TEST CONF is not an even number 1022 VXI data transfer bus not active VINS CONF VME REC ADDR DATA is executed and A24 address space is not being written to 1100 Illegal segment name Attempting to download
66. 124 126 list specifying 124 126 list triggering 193 195 list using arbitrary blocks 130 132 list versus time 138 140 159 lists and sweeping 120 lists commands flowchart 118 119 lists frequency range 155 lists maximum number 155 lists repetition count 156 load strobe register 488 logarithmic spacing 133 134 low pass output filter 308 modes 155 198 output arbitrary waveform 160 output changing 487 points 157 range doubling 155 326 range frequency lists and FSK 155 range sweeping and sampling 155 repetition determining 87 span 327 standard waveform setting 331 start and span 127 129 start and stop 121 123 sweep advance source 158 sweep advance trigger 201 sweep arming 190 192 201 295 sweep commands flowchart 118 119 sweep count 372 sweep direction 157 373 sweep points 374 sweep sample rate 160 sweep spacing 157 375 sweep time 158 159 376 sweep triggering 190 192 399 402 sweep using triggers 186 189 synthesis modes 197 vs number of points 79 Frequency Control programs 489 494 registers 487 488 Frequency Shift Keying See FSK HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 515 Frequency 1 Generator characteristics 454 coupling rules 319 description 449 range 116 SCPI commands 319 329 Frequency 2 Generator characteristics 455 description 449 SCPI commands 330 331 FSK 147 153 and sweeping 117 162 command reference 120 control s
67. 180 is commented or line 340 if line 190 is commented Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP_ARB FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_ARB C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A AC Output Leveling The SWP LEVL program sets up a sine wave frequency sweep from 0 Hz to 10 MHz and uses the AFG s 10 MHz filter and AC output leveling to maintain a constant amplitude over the span With the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE mode 2 Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt start freq 3 Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP stop freq 4 Set the number of sweeps SOURce S WEep COUNt number 5 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 6 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 7 Select the output filter OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency frequency 8 Enable the output filter OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASS STATe mode 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate 144 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_LEVL IRE STORE SWP_LEVL 2 This program enables output leveling over the O Hz to 10 MHz 3 Isweep 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E
68. 475 479 messages settings conflict 480 482 numbers 475 479 queue 389 ERRORCHK Example Program 441 ERRORCHK Program Example 49 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 Event Register operation status group 436 query contents 384 387 questionable signal status group 432 summary bit 383 386 Example Programs AFGGENI 102 AFGGEN2 104 ARBWAVE C 41 45 ARBWAVE FRM 33 39 91 92 BURST 170 171 CHARGE 108 109 COMBSEQ 255 258 COMBSIGN 242 244 COMBUNS 247 249 DACBLOKI 232 234 DACBLOK2 236 238 DCVOLTS 56 57 DIV_N 174 175 DRIFT 220 222 ERRORCHK 49 441 EXT_ARM 167 168 FREQI REG 489 491 FREQ2 REG 492 494 FSKI 148 149 FSK2 150 151 FSK ARB 152 153 GATE 184 185 list of 464 466 LISTI 125 126 LIST STP 194 195 LIST TME 139 140 LISTDEF 131 132 LOCKSTEP 177 180 LOG SWP 133 134 LRN 48 MARKSEGI 209 211 MARKSEG2 213 MARKTRG 215 217 MULSEG 96 98 NOISE 112 OSG ROS 437 OUTPLOAD 70 71 OUTPUNIT 73 74 PHAS_CHNG 496 497 PHS_MOD 76 77 QSSG_RQS 433 434 RSTCLS 47 RSTSINE 51 SIGN_DAT 227 228 SIN_D 107 108 SIN_R 111 SIN_X 105 106 SINEWA VE 59 60 SLFTST 47 SMPLSWPI 122 123 SMPLSWP2 128 129 SPIKES 109 SQUWAVE 63 64 STOPTRIG 181 182 SWP ARB 141 143 SWP LEVL 30 31 145 146 SWP PVST 136 137 SWP STEP 191 192 514 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index SWP_TRIG 188 189 TRIWAVE 67 68 UNS_DAT 230 VXIDOWN 264 268 VXISRCE 270 271 506 508 WAVE_SEL 500 505 W
69. 5 for triggering information Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 95 HP BASIC Program Example MULSEG 1 IRE STORE MULSEG 2 This program outputs an arbitrary waveform that is comprised of 3 Itwo waveform segments 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and clear segment 130 land sequence memory 140 CALL Rst 150 CALL Wf_del 160 ISet the signal frequency the function and the amplitude 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 2 048E6 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V 200 Call the subprograms which define the triangle wave sine wave 210 land output waveform sequence 220 CALL Tri wave 230 CALL Sine wave 240 CALL Seq def 250 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER WAVE OUT 270 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 280 290 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 300 OFF INTR 7 310 END 320 330 SUB Tri wave 340 Tri wave Subprogram which defines a triangle waveform and stores 350 lit in a segment 360 COM OAfg 370 DIM Waveform 1 2048 ICalculate waveform points 380 FOR I 1 TO 2048 390 IF 1 lt 1024 THEN 400 Waveform l l 0048828 410 ELSE 420 Waveform l 2 2048 1 0048828
70. 96s if n seg commands seg size Call function to execute the final command with segment data if liprintf addr send str Wave seg time out gen seg seg commands Call routine to check for AFG errors check error gen seg seg commands Setup the AFG for output cmd exe out commands sizeof out commands sizeof char gen seg out commands Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 43 Call routine to check for AFG errors check_error gen_seg out_commands Free the allocated memory free Wave_seg NK KK kk KK KK IK KK IK IK IK IK RR KK RR RR ck ck RR ck ck KK OK void cmd exe char commands int length char func_tion int loop for loop 0 loop lt length loop if liprintf addr s n commands loop time_out func_tion NK KK kk KK KK IK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK RR RR RR KK OK void run_query void char mem size 21 Query segment memory if ipromptf addr SOUR LIST1 SEGM FREE n t mem size time out run query seg memory printf nSegment Memory Available Used 96s mem size Query sequence memory if lipromptf addr SOUR LIST1 SSEQ FREE n 9st mem size time out run query seq memory printf nSequence Memory Available Used 96s mem size N CK KK KK KK IK IK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK I RR RR RK OK OK void rst_clr void int into Executes the commands that resets the AFG
71. 99 Freq Error in Volts Settling Time ms Error dB Error 0 056 0 01 1 12 0 097 0 05 0 48 1 0 0 086 0 025 1 10 0 5 0 043 Amplitude 5 Vpk 250 kHz filter frequency change 10 Freq1 250 kHz Freq 0 9 Freq Error in Volts Settling Time ms Error dB Error 0 256 0 01 5 12 0 433 0 25 0 39 5 0 0 424 0 10 1 22 2 0 0 172 0 05 1 84 1 0 0 086 0 025 2 60 0 5 0 043 Amplitude 5 Vpk 250 kHz filter frequency change 1 Freq1 250 kHz Freq2 0 99 Freq Error in Volts Settling Time ms 96 Error dB Error 0 025 0 32 0 5 0 043 0 01 1 20 0 2 0 0174 FSK Control The frequency shift keying control sources are Sources EXTernal The HP E1445A AFG s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector TTL levels TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTL trigger lines TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Stop Trig f O FSK Gate VN Both the FSK BNC connector and the TTLTrg lt n gt trigger lines use TTL compatible signal levels A high level on the BNC or trigger line selects frequencyl a low level selects frequency2 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 161 Frequency Sh Ift Once the control signal to shift the frequency is received there is a delay of Delay 20 reference oscillator clock cycles before the frequency is active This delay occurs with all reference oscillator sources Driving the When driving the TTLTrg lt n gt t
72. Afg TRIG STAR GATE STAT ON lenable gate 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 1E6 frequency 290 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP TRI Ifunction 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR RAMP POIN 405 Iwaveform points 310 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 320 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 330 SUBEND 340 350 SUB Rst 360 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 370 COM Afg 380 OUTPUT OAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG 390 ENTER Afg Complete 400 SUBEND 410 Continued on Next Page 184 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 420 SUB Errmsg 430 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 COM OAfg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT A fg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program GATE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program GATE C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 185 Arming and Triggering Frequency Sweeps and Lists Frequency Sweeps Using Triggers Frequency sweeps and lists are started and a
73. Afg Afg1 710 DIM Message 256 720 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 730 B SPOLL Afg 740 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 750 OUTPUT QAfg Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 237 760 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 770 REPEAT 780 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 790 ENTER Afg Code Message 800 PRINT Code Message 810 UNTIL Code 0 820 STOP 830 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DACBLOK2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DACBLOK2 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 238 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Combined Signed Data Note Combined Segment List Format The Combined Segment Lists transfers both the arbitrary waveform segment data and marker pulses to the AFG see Chapter 6 for information on marker pulses You can use either the Signed or Unsigned number format for the list The Combined Segment List can be sent as a comma separated list see Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 or as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data see Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 231 and Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 235 respectively This section shows how to transfer the list
74. Afg Stop 520 DISP START Start STOP Stop CENTER Center SPAN Span 530 SUBEND 540 550 SUB Errmsg 560 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 570 COM Afg 580 DIM Message 256 590 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 600 B SPOLL Afg 610 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 620 OUTPUT Afg 630 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 640 REPEAT 650 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 660 ENTER Afg Code Message 670 PRINT Code Message 680 UNTIL Code 0 690 STOP 700 SUBEND The start stop center and span values returned are UL HL i DOO UO DE BD STOP 2 100000000E 004 CENTE 100000000E 004 SPAN 2 000000000E 004 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SMPLSWP2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SMPLSWP2 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 129 Freq uency Lists When specifying a large frequency list up to 256 frequencies the ease in U sing Definite and which the list is specified and the speed at which data is loaded into the P AFG is enhanced by using definite or indefinite length arbitrary blocks Indefinite Length The data in an arbitrary block is in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format Arbitrary Blocks The LISTDEF program sends a definite length a
75. Arbitrary Block Data The example generates two 5 V sine waves and a single O to 5 V triangle wave A marker is output at the center of the triangle The commands are Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 4 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed or UNSigned number format 5 Set the Marker Output Source SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 This command selects the LIST 1 source as the source that outputs a marker pulse at the Marker Out front panel terminals see Chapter 6 for information on other sources 6 Setup the First Combined Segment List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt 7 Select the Download Source for the First Combined Segment List SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt This command selects the source used to download DAC data into segment memory see DAC Sources on page 280 The lt source gt parameter selects the download source lt dest gt contains the name of the waveform segment to be downloaded and lt ength gt contains the size of the waveform se
76. Cleared 0 when waveform generation is halted when frequency sweeping or lists are not selected and at the end of each sweep or list Bit 6 Waiting for Arm ARM Set 1 when waiting for a start arm Cleared 0 when a start arm is accepted or when waveform generation is aborted Bit 8 Initiated Set 1 by the INITiate IMMediate command Cleared 0 when waveform generation is complete and the trigger subsystem returns to the idle state Questionable Only bits 5 frequency and 8 calibration are defined All other bits are always 0 Signal Status Register Bit 5 Frequency Set 1 when the SOURce FREQuency2 divide by n frequency generator is selected and the generated frequency differs from the specified frequency by greater than 1 Cleared 0 otherwise Bit 8 Calibration Set 1 if an error has been detected in the non volatile calibration memory Cleared 0 otherwise Chapter 8 Command Reference 381 STATus Subsystem Syntax STATus OPC INITiate state OPERation CONDition query only ENABle unmask EVEN1 query only NTRansition unmask PTRansition unmask PRESet no query QUEStionable CONDition query only ENABle unmask EVEN1 query only NTRansition unmask PTRansition unmask OPC INITiate STATus OPC INITiate state controls whether the OPC OPC and WAI commands will complete immediately or whether they will wait for waveform generat
77. Comments IDN returns identification information for the HP E1445A The response consists of four fields HEWLETT PACKARD E1445A 0 A 01 00 The first two fields identify this instrument as model number E1445A manufactured by Hewlett Packard The third field is 0 since the serial number of the HP E1445A is unknown to the firmware The last field indicates the revision level of the firmware The firmware revision field will change whenever the firmware is revised A 01 00 is the initial revision The first two digits indicate the major revision number and increment when functional changes are made The last two digits indicate bug fix level e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Power On Condition Register is cleared LMC returns a comma separated list of quoted strings each containing the name of a macro If no macros are defined a single null string is returned Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands DMC e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No macros are defined Chapter 8 Command Reference 419 LRN OPC Note Comments Comments LRN returns a sequence of commands that may be resent to the HP E1445A to return it to its current programming state Only those commands that are affected by RST are included in the sequence Notable exceptions include the DAC code format signed vs unsigned the SO
78. Completed SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete Send this command to the AFG after all data is downloaded Select the First Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess These commands select the first waveform segment and then returns its address Divide the address by 8 store it into the second element of the first 16 bit word array Add the most significant bit of the segment address to the first element of the first 16 bit word array Add the First Segment List s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment is to be executed of the first element of the first 16 bit word array Select the Second Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess These commands select the second waveform segment and then returns its address Divide the address by 8 store it into the second element of the second 16 bit word array Add the most significant bit of the segment address to the first element of the second 16 bit word array Add the Marker Enable Add the value of the marker enable bit of the second waveform segment to the value in the first element of the second 16 bit word array Add the Second Segment List s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment is to be executed of the first element of the second 16 bit word arra
79. Data Source SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use INTernal to transfer the data using the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 5 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed data number format Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 241 6 Set the Marker Output Source SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 This command selects the LIST 1 source as the source that outputs a marker pulse at the Marker Out front panel terminals see Chapter 6 for information on other sources 7 Setup the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt 8 Store the Waveform Segment as Combined Signed DAC Data SOURce JLIST 1 SEGMent COMBined combined list This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory in the Signed format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The data is sent as a combined list with the marker bit selected 9 Setup the Sequence and Generate Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list SOURce JFUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example COMBSIGN IRE STORE COMBSIGN This program downloads an arbitrary waveform as a combined voltage an
80. Disabling AC Calibration Corrections CAL STAT AC OFF Disables AC corrections 304 Command Reference Chapter 8 CALibration STATe DC CALibration STATe DC lt state gt specifies whether DC corrections using the calibration constants are made or not If state is OFF then no DC corrections are made If state is ON DC corrections will be made if CALibration STATe ON is also set Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units state boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration STATe e RST Condition CALibration STATe DC ON Example Disabling DC Calibration Corrections CAL STAT DC OFF Disables DC corrections Chapter 8 Command Reference 305 INITiate INITiate Subsystem Syntax IMMediate The INITiate subsystem initiates the trigger subsystem and prepares the HP E1445A for waveform generation Once initiated a start arm received from the programmed arm source TRIGger STARt SOURce command starts the waveform output For frequency sweeping the initial sample or waveform frequency is the STARt frequency when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWEep is set or the first frequency in the frequency list when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST is set INITiate IMMediate no query INITiate IMMediate initiates the trigger system and places all trigger sequences in the wait for ar
81. ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MARKSEGI FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MARKSEGI C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 211 Ge nerating Sing le The MARKSEG2 program shows how to generate marker pulses using Marker Pulsesin A URcejLISTIT SSEQuence MARKerSPOInt Th ce 1 uence er int The program generates a Sing le Waveform sine wave and triangle wave It outputs Active high marker pulse at the Seg ments center of the triangle waveform The program generates a 512 point 5 V sine wave and 5 V triangle wave Chan A applied to AFG s Output Connector Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Connector Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 5 msec DIV The commands are the same ones listed in Generating Multiple Marker Pulses in Multiple Waveform Segment Lists on page 207 except they only select single point wide marker pulses The exceptions are as follows 10 Store the Marker Pulse Location for the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint point This command selects the segment or point on a waveform where the marker pulse is to be output For example to output a m
82. FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP RESET VALUE 10 73 MHz SET FREQUENCY SPAN SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN RESET VALUE 10 73 MHz SET SWEEP TRIGGER SOURCE TO TlMer TRIGger SWEep SOURce RESET VALUE TlMer SET SWEEP TIME SOURce SWEep TIME or TRIGger SWEep TIMer Figure 4 1 Commands for Frequency Sweeps Frequency Lists and FSK Keying continued on next page 118 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 SET THE FUNCTION SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RESET VALUE SlNusold SET TRIANGLE OR RAMP WAVEFORM POINTS SOURce RAMP POINts RESET VALUE 100 SET TRIANGLE OR RAMP WAVEFORM POLARITY SOURce RAMP POLarity RESET VALUE NORMal FUNCTION SET WAVEFORM AMPLITUDE SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude RESET VALUE 16187V SET DC OFFSET SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet RESET VALUE OV SET OUTPUT IMPEDANCE OUTPut 1 IMPedance RESET VALUE A 50 AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT SET OUTPUT LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD RESET VALUE AUTO ON LOAD COUPLED TO IMPEDANCE FREQUENCY VUL TAGE COUPLED VOLTAGE COUPLED VOLTAGE COUPLED Us AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT ARMING SET OUTPUT FILTER OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency RESET VALUE 250kHz ENABLE OUTPUT FILTER OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe RESET VALUE OFF ENABLE OUTPUT OUTPut 1 STATe RE
83. Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 101 HP BASIC Program Example AFGGEN1 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 IRE STORE AFGGEN 1 This program outputs a ramp arbitrary waveform using the IAFG s frequency1 generator Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and which clear Isegment and sequence memory CALL Rst CALL Wf del ISet waveform parameters OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT15 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 RANG 10E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 10E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V Iset amplitude to 5 1V Call subprogram which defines waveform segment and sequence CALL Ramp wave ISelect output sequence and initiate waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave 340 Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 100 Calculate waveform points FOR l 1 TO 100 Waveform l I 0505 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Define segment name
84. INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 440 OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC Iwait for INIT to complete 450 ENTER Afg Complete 460 SUBEND 470 480 SUB Phase change Phase 490 Phase change ISubprogram which changes the phase of the output signal 500 Iby writing phase data to the registers on the AFG 510 COM OAfg Base_addr 520 CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO 530 540 ICalculate phase increment 550 Phase1 Phase MOD 360 560 IF Phase1 lt 0 THEN Phase1 Phase1 360 570 Phase_data IVAL 4096 16 Phase1 360 65536 Phase1 gt 180 16 580 590 IWrite the first byte of the phase increment to register B3 600 IWrite the second byte to register B1 610 WRITEIO 16 Base addr IVAL B3 16 IVAL Phase data 1 2 16 620 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL B1 16 IVAL Phase_data 3 2 16 630 640 IGenerate pulse which loads the new phase Once the pulse is 650 lreceived it takes 14 reference oscillator clock cycles before 660 tthe new phase appears at the output 670 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8B 16 0 680 SUBEND 690 700 SUB Rst 710 ISubprogram which resets the E1445 720 COM OAfg Base_addr 730 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 740 ENTER Afg Complete 750 SUBEND Comments To simplify the program SCPI commands are included to configure the AFG enable phase modulation and start the waveform Thus the only registers written to are the Phase Modulation and Phase Load Strobe Registers T
85. INT or SOUR FUNC SHAP USER and current SOUR VOLT unit not V VPK SOUR VOLT AMPL MIN in V set SOUR FUNC SHAP DC and current SOUR VOLT unit not V SOUR VOLT value converted to volts Appendix B Useful Tables 481 Table B 7 HP E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages continued Settings Conflict Error Messages when HP E1445A is used with the HP E1446A Amplifier OUTP2 ATT 20 and OUTP2 IMP 0 OUTP2 IMP 50 set SOUR2 VOLT OFFS lt minimum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MIN set SOUR2 VOLT OFFS gt maximum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MAX set 482 Useful Tables Appendix B Appendix C Register Based Programming Appendix Contents The HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator AFG is a message based device As such it supports the VXI word serial protocol used to transfer ASCII command strings and is capable of converting the SCPI commands it receives to reads and writes of its hardware registers Register based programming allows the user to access the hardware registers directly This increases the speed at which events in the AFG occur since the parsing converting of SCPI commands is eliminated In addition to describing how to access selected AFG registers this appendix explains how to do the following functions with register reads and writes e Accessing the Registers 0 0 0 0 0 esee Page 484 Determining the A24 Base Address Page 484 e Changing the Output Fre
86. INTernal 1 INTernal2 TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments The sources available are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET HP IB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 and ECLTrgl The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Ref Sample In BNC connector HOLD Suspends sample generation Use the TRIGger STARt MMediate command to advance the waveform INTernal 1 The SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem Sine wave output SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SlNusoid set requires that this source be selected INTernal2 The SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Use the TRIGger STARt SLOPe command to select the active edge for the front panel Ref Sample In BNC when used as the start trigger source Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SLOPe e RST Condition TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernalt Example Setting the Start Trigger Source TRIG SOUR EXT Trigger source is front panel s Ref Sample In BNC 396 Command Reference Chapter 8 STOP IMMediate TRIGger TRIGger STOP IMMediate terminates the current start arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition regardless of the selected stop trigger source The command aborts the remaining ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt repetitions of the current trigger cycle The start trigger sequenc
87. Iramp triangle waves npts RAMP POINts value CALL Freg_change 2000 1 4 294967296E 7 0 END SUB A24 offset 240 A24 offset ISubprogram which determines the base address for 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM OAfg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 2 access A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16 addr DVAL D400 16 IAFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register Base addr Offset 256 shift offset for 24 bit address SUBEND SUB Output_function Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Based Programming 489 340 Output function ISubprogram which uses SCPI commands to set the 350 142 94967296 MHz reference oscillator to set DDS 360 frequency synthesis to set the output frequency 370 lfunction amplitude and to start the waveform 380 COM OAfg Base_addr 390 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 reference oscillator 42 MHz 400 OUTPUT CAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 frequency1 generator 410 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 lfrequency 420 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function 430 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 440 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 450 OUTPUT QAfg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC lwait for INIT to complete 460 ENTER Afg Complete 470 SUBEND 480 490 SUB Freq change Freq Npts Reference osc Range 500 Freq change Subprogram which changes the output frequency by writing 510
88. LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer lt marker_list gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint point SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents SOURce LIST2 SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA format lt length gt SOURce LIST2 FREQuency freq list SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts Chapter 8 Command Reference 411 Table 8 1 HP E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED source SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt SOURce MARKer FEED lt source gt SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt SOURce MARKer STATe lt mode gt SOURce PM SOURce PM DEViation lt phase gt SOURce PM SOURce lt source gt SOURce PM STATe mode SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe lt units gt SOURce RAMP SOURce RAMP POLarity polarity SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt SOURce SOURce JROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal frequency ROSCillator SOURce ROSCillator xSOURce source SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep COUNt number SOURce SWEep DIRection direction SOURce SWEep POINts number SOURce SWEep SPACing mode SOURce SWEep TIME number SOURce
89. Messages Page 475 e Table B 7 HP E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages sve aene ev Page 480 Appendix B Useful Tables 463 Example Program Listing Table B 1 HP E1445A Example Program Listing Program Type Program Name Language Description Introductory SLFTST HP BASIC Visual BASIC E1445A Self Test Visual C C Chapter 1 RSTCLS i Resetting and clearing the AFG LRN i Power on reset configuration ERRORCHK i Error checking program RSTSINE Sine wave output from reset settings Standard DCVOLTS HP BASIC Visual BASIC 5V DC voltage Functions Visual C C Chapter 2 SINEWAVE 1kHz 5Vp sine wave SQUWAVE 4V 5 MHz square wave 1V DC offset TRIWAVE X 200 point 4V 10 kHz triangle wave OUTPLOAD A Sets AFG s output impedance and load OUTPUNIT 7 Sets amplitude units to volts peak to peak PHS MOD Shifts sine wave phase from 0 to 180 degrees Arbitrary ARBWAVE HP BASIC Visual BASIC Procedure for generating an arbitrary waveform Waveforms Visual C C Chapter 3 MULSEG Arbitrary waveform with two segments AFGGEN 1 Ramp arbitrary waveform using the frequency1 generator AFGGEN2 Ramp arbitrary waveform using the frequency2 generator SIN X i Sin x x arbitrary waveform SIN D E Damped sine wave arbitrary waveform CHARGE 5 Exponential charge discharge waveform SPIKES i Sine wave with spikes SIN R 1 2 wave rectified sine wave NOISE i Pseudo random noise
90. OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER WAVE_OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Sine_wave 370 Sine_wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave 380 390 400 410 COM OAfg DIM Waveform 1 512 Calculate sine wave FOR l 1 TO 512 Waveform l 5 SIN 2 PI I 512 Continued on Next Page Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 209 420 NEXT 430 440 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SINE 450 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 512 460 OUTPUT QMAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform 470 SUBEND 480 490 SUB Tri wave Isegment name Isegment size lamplitude points 500 Tri wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and marker list 510 COM Afg 520 DIM Waveform 1 512 Marker list 1 512 530 FOR l 1 TO 256 540 Waveform l I 0195313 550 NEXT 560 FOR 12257 TO 512 570 Waveform l 512 1 0195313 580 NEXT 590 600 FOR l 256 TO 266 610 Marker_list l 1 620 NEXT 630 640 ILoad waveform points and marker list 650 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 660 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI 670 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 512 680 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform 690 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM MARK Marker_list 700 SUBEND 710 720 SUB Seq_list 730 Seq list This subprogram defines the sequence list and enables ICalculate triangle wave
91. OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 Isegment execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq1_addr SUBEND SUB Sind_def Sind_def Compute the damped sine waveform Download the data las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seqi_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg2 A 4 4096 W 2 PI 50 FOR T 1 TO 4096 Waveform T EXP A T SIN W T 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform T SHIFT Waveform T 3 NEXT T OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN D Isegment name OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END terminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN D Sequence 2
92. PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LIST STP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LIST_STP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 195 Aborting Waveforms Aborting a waveform places the AFG in the Idle state Figure 5 4 The waveform is halted and the output remains at the last amplitude point triggered when the abort was executed The command which aborts a waveform is ABORt Using ABORT Stop Figure 5 4 compares the effects of aborting a waveform or using stop Trigge rs or Gating triggers or gating to stop or suspend the output ARM STAR LAY2 COUN 3 ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 3 j START ARM 3 ARMS 3 CYCLES PER ARM ABORT VVUuV V VV STOP TRIGGER Figure 5 4 Effects of ABORt Stop Triggers and Gating 196 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering Program Comments Reference Oscillator Sources AFG Frequency Synthesis Modes The following information is associated with arming and triggering the AFG Included are details on the operation of the AFG s arming and triggering functions and on the various modes ranges etc used in the programs in this chapter There are five reference oscillator sources for the AFG which are selected by the SOURce ROSCillator SOURce command e CLK10 The VXIbus CLK
93. Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt format gt discrete SIGNed UNSigned none Comments The available formats are SIGNed Selects the two s complement format The DAC code is a two s complement number where 0 represents 0 V output 4096 represents negative full scale output 4095 represents positive full scale The positive full scale output value is specified by the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude command UNSigned Selects the unsigned format The DAC code is an unsigned number where 0 represents negative full scale output and 8191 represents positive full scale Chapter 8 Command Reference 313 SOURce ARBitrary e There is no need to specify the DAC format with waveforms programmed in volts The format should be specified if you are a Programming waveforms in DAC codes SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC commands b Driving the DAC directly SOURce JARBitrary DAC SOURCe c Directly downloading waveform segments SOURce ARBitrary DOWNloadq e Related Commands SOURce JARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC e Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed Example Setting Unsigned DAC Cod
94. Port In connector to Ichange the sequences as follows IFPCLK is clocked other data lines open Sequence 3 IFPCLK is clocked FP000 to low Sequence 2 IFPCLK is clocked FP001 to low Sequence 1 10 20 Assign an I O path between the computer and the AFG 30 ASSIGN Cmd TO 80900 40 ASSIGN Afg TO 80910 0 001i C0 P c 50 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 80910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data 60 Laddr 80 logical address for AFG 70 COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seqi_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr 80 90 ISubprograms which reset the AFG and erase all existing waveforms 100 CALL Rst 110 CALL Wf del 120 130 ISCPI commands which configure the AFG 140 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 Sample rate 150 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function 160 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 2 1V lamplitude 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format 190 Continued on Next Page 272 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 200 ISubprograms which define waveforms and load them into segment 210 land sequence memory which determine the AFG s register locations 220 lin A24 and which configure the AFG s sequence base memory 230 CALL Waveform_def 240 CALL A24 offset Laddr 250 CALL Build ram 260 270 ISelect an output sequence and initiate start waveform output 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SEQ1 lwaveform sequence 290 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwai
95. RST Condition SOURce SWEep COUNt 1 Example Setting the Sweep Count SWE COUN 10 Sets 10 sweeps per INITiate DIRection SOURce SWEep DIRection direction selects the direction of the frequency sweep Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units direction discrete DOWN UP none Comments The available directions are DOWN The sweep starts at the stop frequency specified by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN and ends at the start frequency UP The sweep starts at the start frequency specified by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN and ends at the stop frequency Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE SPAN START and STOP SOURce SWEep POINts and SPACing RST Condition SOURce SWEep DIRection UP Example Setting the Sweep Direction SWE DIR DOWN Sweeps down in frequency Chapter 8 Command Reference 373 SOURce SWEep POINts SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt selects the number of points in a frequency sweep The frequencies generated by the sweep are evenly spaced linearly or logarithmically depending on the SOURce SWEep SPACing setting between the frequencies specified by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN inclusive Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter
96. Roy Ra Ra ERR RR ct 403 CONFigure LBUSEMODELEAUTUO cuoc a RR RS 404 CONF TEST CONFi gire 24 024 608 ee Room ERROR RR OO 405 CONPisQre TEST DAT A 2240 ke RR OROE ARA BBO 406 CONFigure VMEE MODB 2 446444 o RR RR RE E RU RR 406 CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA 407 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents 9 CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy o o oo 407 DENG abra OR de ii 4 a ida dd d 408 SCPI Command Quick Referenc 2e o ox ROC as EE 409 SCPI Conformance Information usos ok ao toC eO RARA 414 IBEE 488 2 Common Commands i suos apo ok Hk RR OR CR amp RR OR 416 ELS uus dx Xue Nu Vor d d ut ono s UR ooi abi Rob OHA E de 416 DMC cd ades dq hs aad E ex dex EN EUN RU RUE ERE Ee 416 ENTE an ERE wis qeu doge es dee pode ede ap bon re Ue e e de 417 TESEI TESET nuo au Ub Re y Eck AA a 417 ESR AAA IET 418 e A A as o i ade ad iC Oe 418 PDR 4d da ee Rw SE EOS EE ORS dedo RE iode db dedo dde 419 CEBIT ee ct ud dedos dedo Je endo a in a ed e ode cile emt Dy 419 puc TTD TTTTTESE 420 OPC uk poto ddr det defuere II 420 a A A dao oo di Jed odo E dile oc Bk ii Qo pe ned E a 421 e dod wu CESS E qe EDEL ED qeu I PE qe 421 PUD And PUD ko rra Ree oto dede de iei Role 422 RECE ud AA A S EK E A EGG HS 423 SRUN S hee hee de Sh e eee db d ud NA ded dra 423 SEES ae doge bs cie dh EA 424 SAV AE NUR Ro e a o Kd GE SRS 424 GRE GE SRE eio 03 X402 4 AA ROUEN E SUE
97. SOURce FREQuency 1 is used Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 197 Note Divide by N Frequency Synthesis AFG Frequency Modes Frequency Sweeping and Lists Direct frequency control that is the SOURce FREQuency commands is only available with the INTernall and INTernal2 time base sources For all other sources the output frequency depends upon the frequency of the time base source SOURce FREQuency commands will be accepted with other time base sources but become effective when the source is changed to INTernal or INTernal2 Fixed frequency continuous waveforms are the only signals allowed by the Divide by N frequency synthesis method SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem All waveforms except standard function sine waves can be output using Divide by N frequency synthesis There are four frequency modes available using the DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 The modes selected by the SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE command are e CW FlXed single frequency mode e FSKey frequency shift keying mode LIST frequency list mode e SWEep frequency sweep mode CW or FIXed is the default mode but is specified in many of the programs to emphasize that the arm source specified by ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce source is for fixed continuous frequency waveforms Frequency sweeping and frequency lists are only available using the DDS time base When setting the frequency mode SWEep must be selected for fre
98. SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC commands Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency and voltage Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE RST Condition SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal Example Setting the DAC Data Source ARB DAC SOUR DPOR Selects front panel Digital Port connector as source Chapter 8 Command Reference 315 SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt enables the direct download mode to the waveform segment or segment sequence memory It selects the download source waveform segment or segment sequence name and number of points The available download sources are DPORt The HP E1445A s front panel Digital Port In connector Only waveform segment memory may be downloaded via this source LBUS The VXIbus local bus Only waveform segment memory may be downloaded via this source VXI The VXIbus data transfer bus Waveform The waveform segment data consists of a single 16 bit word for each voltage point gm g ge p Segment Data The format for downloaded waveform segment data is Bits 15 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DAC code unused marker last point The DAC code is a 13 bit two s complement or unsigned number see the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command on page 313 With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitu
99. SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe e RST Condition SOURce MARKer ECLTrg0 FEED ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 P SOURce MARKer ECLTrg1 FEED TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Example Setting the VXI ECLTRGO Trigger Line Source MARK ECLTO FEED SOUR LIST Sets marker list as source ECLTrg lt n gt STATe Parameters Comments Example SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe mode enables or disables the routing of the selected marker signal SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED command to the specified VXIbus ECL trigger line ECLTRGO or ECLTRG1 Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED e RST Condition SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe OFF Enabling Marker Output to ECLTRGO0 MARK ECLTO ON Enables ECLTRGO 362 Command Reference Chapter 8 FEED SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer FEED lt source gt selects the source for the front panel Marker Out BNC The available sources are Parameters ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 For arbitrary waveforms the marker level changes with the first waveform point of the first repetition A marker pulse is then output with the next to last waveform point of each repetition For sine waves the marker is a 50 duty cycle square wave at t
100. SSEQuence MARKer SPOint point is a short cut method for defining a marker list with marker pulse generation enabled on a single waveform segment It creates a marker list whose length is the same as the current waveform segment list and which enables marker pulse generation only on the segment specified The waveform segment list must have been previously defined Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units point numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The valid range for point is 1 through the length of the current waveform segment list MINimum selects the first segment of the current waveform segment list MAXimum selects the last segment Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Creating a Single Segment Marker List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C D E F G H Defines segment sequence LIST SSEQ MARK SPO 3 Enables marker pulse on segment C Chapter 8 Command Reference 355 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt selects a segment sequence for subsequent SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence subsystem commands This command will define the segment sequence name if it is undefined but does not reserve any segm
101. STOP SOURce HOLD Setting the Stop Trigger Source TRIG STOP SOUR TTLT1 Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRGI as source SWEep IMMediate Comments TRIGger SWEep IMMediate advances a frequency sweep or list to the next frequency regardless of the selected trigger source The trigger system must have been initiated and the sweep trigger sequence must be in the wait for trigger state The selected trigger source remains unchanged Executing this command when frequency sweeps or lists are not enabled or with the sweep trigger sequence not in the wait for trigger state generates Error 211 Trigger ignored Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group none Related Commands INITiate IMMediate SOURce SWEep commands Chapter 8 Command Reference 399 TRIGger e RST Condition None Example Advancing a Frequency Sweep SWE STAR 1E3 STOP 10E3 Sets sweep frequency limits SWE POIN 10 Sets 1 kHz steps ARM LAY2 SOUR IMM Sets output to start immediately ARM SWE SOUR IMM Sets sweep to start immediately TRIG SWE SOUR HOLD Sets sweep to advance sweep manually INIT Initiates trigger system TRIG SWE Advances to next frequency SWEep LINK TRIGger SWEep LINK lt link gt selects the internal event that advances a frequency sweep or list when TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to LINK The only defined internal event to advance a sweep or list is ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 There is no need to send this command s
102. SUBEND 50 Getting Started Chapter 1 Gene rating From the power on reset configuration you can output a 0 16187 Vp Sine Waves 0KkHz sine wave by setting the AFG to the wait for arm state with the INITiate IMMediate command This is done with the RSTSINE program 20us DIV HP BASIC Program Example RSTSINE 1 IRE STORE RSTSINE 2 This program outputs a sine wave based on the reset conditions 3 lof the AFG 4 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and AFG 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 IReset the AFG 60 CALL Rst 70 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM loutput sine wave using reset conditions 80 END 90 100 SUB Rst 110 Rst subprogram which resets the AFG 120 COM OAfg 130 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 140 ENTER Afg Complete 150 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program RSTSINE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example program RSTSINE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 1 Getting Started 51 Notes 52 Getting Started Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter Contents The following setup the AFG units for exa and offset T Q O 5 O 5 Note For informati Waveforms ri Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 53 Standard Waveforms Flowchart The flowchart in Figure 2 1 shows the sequence used to generate stan
103. SUBEND 260 270 SUB Rst 280 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 290 COM OAfg 300 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 310 ENTER Afg Complete 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Errmsg 350 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 360 COM OAfg 370 DIM Message 256 380 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 390 B SPOLL Afg 400 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 410 OUTPUT Afg 420 OUTPUT A fg ABORT labort output waveform 430 REPEAT 440 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 450 ENTER Afg Code Message 460 PRINT Code Message 470 UNTIL Code 0 480 STOP 490 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DCVOLTS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DCVOLTS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 57 Generating Sine Waves 2 VIDIV Output applied to a 50 load 2 msec DIV The SINEWAVE program outputs a Sine Wave at 1 kHz and 5 V output level The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the sinusoid function output impedance and output load to 50 Q 2 Set the Waveform Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed frequency This command specifies the waveform frequency You must use the direct synthesis frequen
104. Shows that the format is an indefinite length arbitrary block format the 0 number must be sent since a different number shows the definite length arbitrary block format e lt 8 bit data bytes gt Is the data 1 e DAC codes sent to the AFG LF END Means line feed LF sent with END EOD asserted It indicates to the AFG that the end of data has been reached Data Byte Size The DAC codes are transferred to the AFG as 16 bit integer values that meet the coding set by the IEEE 488 2 standard Since IEEE 488 2 requires an 8 bit code the 16 bit integer must be sent as 2 8 bit values for each 16 bit integer For example to send a waveform segment consisting of 1000 DAC codes 1000 points the actual number of digits and 8 bit data bytes equals 1000 2 2000 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 235 HP BASIC Program Example DACBLOK2 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 The DACBLOK2 program shows how to store a waveform segment i e points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The waveform segment is stored as DAC codes in the Unsigned number format This program is the same program as UNS_DAT beginning on page 230 The data is transferred to the AFG using the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V negative going ramp To transfer Indefinite Length Block Data to the AFG requires that the data sent with the SOURce
105. Since RST automatically sets the range to the lower range it is executed in this program for good programming practice Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 65 5 Set the Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed frequency This command specifies the frequency Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 6 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe TRlangle This command selects the TRlangle function For the RAMP function use the RAMP parameter instead of the TRlangle parameter 7 Set the Number of Ramp Points SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt This command specifies the number of ramp points The more points give better resolution but lower frequency response 8 Select the Triangle Wave Polarity SOURce RAMP POLarity INVerted This command selects the polarity of the TRlangle RAMP wave Use NORMal for the initial voltage to go positive Use INVerted for the initial voltage to go negative 9 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 10 Set the Offset SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet offset This command specifies the offset Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 11 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This comm
106. Units period numeric 00125 through 4 19430375 seconds MINimum MAXimum MINimum selects 1 25 mS MAXimum selects 4 19430375 S The above values bound the valid range for period Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce LIST2 FREQuency SOURce SWeEep POINts SOURce SWEep TIME TRIGger S WEep SOURce e RST Condition SOURce SWEep TIME 1 is set TRIGger S WEep TIMer is the dependent value Example Setting the Sweep Advance Period TRIG SWE TIM 1 Sets 1 S per frequency value 402 Command Reference Chapter 8 VINStrument VINStrument The VINStrument subsystem operates with the SOURce ARBitrary and SOURce PM subsystems to control the virtual instrument features of the HP E1445A These features include the ability to use the VXIbus Local Bus and normal data transfer bus to download data to the segment and segment sequence memories directly drive the main output DAC and provide phase deviations for sine waves Subsystem Syntax VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt AUTO lt state gt TEST CONFigure lt ength gt no query DATA query only VME RECeive ADDRess DATA query only READy query only MODE edge IDENtity CONFigure LBUS MODE VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE mode selects the operating mode for the V XIbus Local Bus Parameters
107. WAVEFORM SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage INITiate IMMediate SECMENT DEFINITION FINISH Figure 3 1 Commands for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms continued from previous page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 85 How the AFG Generates Arbitrary Waveforms Refer to Figure 3 2 An arbitrary waveform consists of two parts a waveform segment or all points on a waveform and a segment sequence The segments are the actual voltage points of the waveform The segment sequence determines the order in which one or more waveform segments are output Voltage V v A v y Waveform Segment A Waveform Segment B Time Segment Sequence Outputs Segment A And Then Segment B Figure 3 2 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms To output a waveform the waveform segment must be stored into the AFG s segment memory To do this you must assign a unique name use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt for each waveform segment to be stored into memory This allows you to select one of many waveform segments which may exist in memory to be output Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters The AFG generates an error for duplicate names Besides the name the AFG must also know the size use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMe
108. a ee ew ES EES A 278 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Select a Sequence 219 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Download Data 279 High Speed Operation Program Comments gt a pe a sasda o 280 Amplit de Effects on DAC Codes lt as ies arrere RR RR Rem sa 280 Incorrect AFG Operation from Incorrect DAC Codes o oo 280 cis IEA 280 la Lu ac go IE II ok HSE dd 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment List 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment Sequence List 280 Chapter 8 Command Reference o o e 281 Chapiert Gites pd AA A AAA TA e REE RR da 281 Command a uaa due EEA SSE EAS SEO Ge EME eR EE 284 Common Command Pongal ociosa A 284 SCPi Command Ponadt 2 422 4c e465 dara AA 284 Command Spardir o pa ap kon Sed AR EERE DRA A GRMED EE PERS 285 Abbreviated Commands 4 4444 446646 ed dh EA SEE EROR OR 285 Implied Optional Commande s s e a soe E hha Rea 285 Variable Command Synfax pcb ee kee eR RR doy RO ORC BOR EEO 285 SCPI Command Paramete ccc Ak ach oe KR AREER EERE RE 286 Parameter Types Explanations and Examples co eee eee 286 phone Parmeter sosi ask ae e ee ob ok wk ok ep diode Ae e fede 287 Querying Parameter Settings oo ee eK ERE EDD DERE RISE e d 287 SCPI Command ExeCU s uu ek ek eR RS SOS 4 3 9 ER Rex AUR RE OS Do 288 Command CONDIME sa ee Gob hh Ee OEE HEL ERS SESE EG 288 LIS Commands sk ketene del th Gee
109. a frequency list to be performed The direction of a frequency sweep The number of points in a frequency sweep A linear or logarithmic frequency sweep with respect to time The sweep rate for frequency sweeps and frequency lists when TRIGger SWEep SOURce TIMer is set Frequency sweeping generation requires that TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal1 and SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWeEep be set A sweep is started by a sweep arm ARM SWEep subsystem and is advanced by a sweep advance trigger TRIGger SWEep subsystem SOURce SWEep COUNt number DIRection direction POINts number SPACing mode TIME lt time gt SWEep COUNt SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt specifies the number of sweeps or repetitions of a frequency list the HP E1445A will perform after an INITiate IMMediate command before the sweep subsystem returns to the idle state This command is equivalent to the ARM SWEep COUNt command either command may be used and executing either one changes the value of the other Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units number numeric 1 through 2147483647 9 9E 37 none INFinity MINimum selects 1 sweep MAXimum selects 2147483647 sweeps 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands INITiate IMMediate 372 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce SWEep e
110. a sweep from 1 kHz to 10 kHz 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 Iwhich is armed and advanced on IMMediate command COM Afg Pts OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 IDDS time base OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 1E3 Istart frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 10E3 Istop frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE POIN 10 Ifrequency points OUTPUT Afg ARM SWE SOUR HOLD Isuspend sweep arm OUTPUT QAfg TRIG SWE SOUR HOLD Isuspend sweep trigger OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state CALL Step SUBEND SUB Step 380 Step Subprogram which starts and advances sweep 390 400 410 420 430 COM OAfg Pts DISP Press Continue to arm trigger system PAUSE OUTPUT Afg ARM SWE IMM Istart sweep sweep does not advance OUTPUT Afg SOUR S WE POIN Iquery number of waveform points Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 191 440 ENTER Afg Pts 450 FOR l 1 TO Pts 1 460 DISP Press Continue to advance to next frequency 470 PAUSE 480 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG SWE IMM Istep to next frequency 490 NEXT I 500 DISP 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Rst 540 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 550 COM OAfg Pts 560 OUTPUT OAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG 570 ENTER Afg Complete 580 SUBEN
111. and clears its error register if lipromptf addr RST OPC n 95i amp into time out rst clr send RST command if lipromptf addr CLS OPC W i amp into time out rst clr send CLS command N CK KK kk KK KK KK IK IK KK IK IK KK KR RR RR KK OK void check_error char func_tion char into 257 Continued on Next Page 44 Getting Started Chapter 1 ipromptf addr SYSTem ERRor n t into Query error register if atoi into Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit printf n nThe program detected the following error s n n while atoi into printf s t in function s n into func_tion ipromptf addr S YSTem ERRor W t into Query error register Close communication iclose addr Release SICL resource allocation not needed for Windows NT _ Siclcleanup printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 1 NK Ck kk kk kk kk kk ck koc AAA AAA KK KK KR RR RR RK ck kck k void time out char func name printf n n tThe program timed out in function s func name Close communication iclose addr Release SICL resource allocation not needed for Windows NT _siclcleanup printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 1 Chapter 1 Getting Started 45 Introductory Programs AFG Self Test The introductory programs in this section include
112. comma separated list The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V positive going ramp Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 225 The commands are Reset the AFG RST Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude Select the DAC Data Source SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use INTernal to transfer the data using the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed number format Setup the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine length Store the Waveform Segment as Signed DAC Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC voltage list This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory using the Signed number format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command Setup the Segment Sequence and Generate Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list SOURce FUNCtion US
113. data using the VXIbus instead of transferring it directly to the AFG using HP IB IRE STORE VXISRCE This program uses the V 360 embedded controller to send waveform Idata directly to the AFG dac over the VXlbus backplane lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM Afg Addr Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and determine the base laddress of the registers in A24 address space CALL Rst CALL A24 offset IScale the amplitude set the dac data format and dac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR VXI Idac data source OUTPUT Afg OPC Wait for the SCPI commands to complete ENTER QAfg Complete ICall the subprogram which sends data directly to the dac Continued on Next Page 506 Register Based Programming Appendix C 180 CALL Dac_drive 190 END 200 210 SUB A24 offset 220 A24 offset ISubprogram which determines the base address for 230 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space then adds the 240 loffset and register number to the base to get the 250 Icomplete address 260 COM Afg Addr 270 ICONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO 280 A16_addr DVAL D400 16 IAFG A16 base address 290 Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register 300 Base addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address 310 Add the regist
114. determines which set of commands control the frequency subsystem Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete CW FIXed FSKey LIST none SWEep Comments The mode parameter has the following meanings CW or FlXed Selects single frequency mode SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FIXeg selects the sample rate or waveform frequency CW and FlXed are equivalent FSKey Selects frequency shift keying mode SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey and the front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC select the two sample rate or waveform frequencies LIST Selects frequency list mode SOURce LIST2 FREQuency sets the sample rate or waveform frequencies SWEep Selects frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer SPAN STARt and STOP commands set the sample or waveform frequency range The SOURce SWEep ARM S WEep and TRIGger SWEep subsystems control the sweep Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem SOURce LIST2 subsystem SOURce SWEep subsystem e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 MODE FlIXed Example Setting the Frequency Sweep Mode FREQ MODE LIST Sets the frequency sweep mode Chapter 8 Command Reference 325 RANGe SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe range enables or disables frequency doubling for non sine wave
115. error occurs among coupled commands 490 OUTPUT Afg 500 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 510 REPEAT 520 OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 530 ENTER Afg Code Message 540 PRINT Code Message 550 UNTIL Code 0 560 STOP 570 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP LEVL FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_LEVL C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 146 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Frequency Shift Keying FSK Using the FSK Control Source Note Frequency shift keying FSK changes the frequency of the output waveform or sample rate based on the signal level of the frequenc y shift keying control source FSK frequencies can range from 0 0 Hz to 10 MHz The command subsystems associated with frequency shift keying include e SOURce ROSCillator e TRIGger e SOURce FREQuency 1 FSK mode and related commands The FSK1 program shows the basic steps involved in setting up and using the frequency shift keying function of the AFG A 5 V 1 MHz square wave control signal is applied to the AFG s front panel FSK port Output frequencies of 3 MHz and 10 MHz occur as the level of the 1 MHz signal changes When the frequency shifts there is a delay of 20 reference oscillator clock cycles before the frequency is active This delay occurs with all refe
116. for FSK control or as a stop trigger source Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity SOURce FREQuency 1 FSK SOURce TRIGger STOP SOURce RST Condition TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce EXTernal Setting the Sample Gate Source TRIG GATE SOUR TTLTO Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRGO as sample gate source STARt GATE STATe TRIGger STARI GATE STATe mode enables or disables sample gating When enabled the TRIGger STARt subsystem is suspended no new samples are generated while the gate source selected by TRIGger STARt GATE SOURCe is asserted Normal sample generation resumes when the gate is unasserted Parameters Comments Example Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STARt GATE STATe OFF Enabling Sample Gating TRIG GATE STAT ON Enables sample gating 394 Command Reference Chapter 8 TRIGger STARt IMMediate Comments Example STARt SLOPe Parameters Comments Example TRiGger STARt IMMediate immediately advances to the next sample in a waveform regardless of the selected trigger source provided that the trigger system has been initiated and a start arm received The selected
117. frequencies selected by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN LOGarithmic Selects the logarithmic sweep mode The sample rate or waveform frequency increases or decreases logarithmically between the start and stop frequencies selected by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN e Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE SPAN START and STOP SOURce SWEep DIRection and POINts e RST Condition SOURce SWEep SPACing LlNear Example Setting the Frequency Sweep Spacing SWE SPAC LOG Selects logarithmic spacing Chapter 8 Command Reference 375 SOURce SWEep TIME SOURce SWEep TIME lt number gt selects the duration of the sweep or frequency list generation when TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to TIMer The duration is the time from the start of the sweep or list until when the last frequency begins to be output The value set by this command is coupled to the TRIGger SWEep TIMer command value by the following equation TIME TIMer points 1 where points is the SOURce SWEep POINts value for frequency sweeps or the length of the frequency list for frequency list generation When changing the frequency list length when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST is set or the SOURce S WEep POINts value when any other MODE is set the TIME or TIMer value remains the same depending on which comma
118. frequency list Marker Outputs MARKSEG1 HP BASIC Visual BASIC Outputting marker pulses with selected amplitude points Visual C C Chapter 6 MARKSEG2 j Outputting a single marker pulse MARKTRG 7 Outputting a marker pulse with each amplitude point DRIFT Two AFGs using the same reference osc Appendix B Useful Tables 465 Table B 1 HP E1445A Example Program Listing continued Program Type Program Name Language Description High Speed SIGN_DAT HP BASIC Visual BASIC Downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed DAC Data Visual C C codes Transfer UNS_DAT Downloads arbitrary waveform data as unsigned DAC Chapter 7 codes DACBLOK1 2 Downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed DAC codes in a definite length block DACBLOK2 y Downloads arbitrary waveform data as unsigned DAC codes in an indefinite length block COMBSIGN m Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data as signed DAC codes in a definite length block COMBUNS i Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data as unsigned DAC codes in an indefinite length block COMBSEQ i Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data as signed DAC codes in definite length blocks Downloads the output sequence including repetition count marker and segment address in an indefinite length block VXIDOWN y Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data over the VXIbus backplane VXISRCE Writes data directly to the DAC from the VXIbus backpl
119. generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the different length lists are the marker pulse and or repetition count list and have a length of 1 Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Defining a Segment Sequence Combined List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 1 ABC is 1 point long LIST SSEQ COMB 786432 Outputs segment at address 0 one time with markers enabled SSEQuence COMBined POINts Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected segment sequence s combined waveform segment marker pulse and repetition count list Executing this command with waveform segment marker pulse and repetition count lists defined with different lengths generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the different length lists are the marker pulse and or repetition count list and have a length of 1 In this case the length of the waveform segment list is returned Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Query Combined Point List Length LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ COMB POIN Queries combined point lis
120. has been selected and enabled AC output leveling maintains the amplitude at a constant level over the frequency sweep or frequency list AC leveling which is performed by the CALibration STATe AC ON command reset setting applies to the sine wave function only AC Leveling When AC leveling is enabled during a sweep or frequency list errors in the Am plitude Errors output amplitude still occur during a frequency change In most cases the errors are negligible However in applications where the step to step frequency changes are large 10 or greater or when frequency changes occur near the filter s cutoff frequency the error is such that settling times on the order of milliseconds are required for the output to settle to the correct amplitude Table 4 1 shows typical non warranted amplitude errors versus settling times when a frequency change occurs These worst case settling times represent frequency changes freqi to freq2 of 10 and 1 from the filter s cutoff frequency 160 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Amplitude Errors Versus Settling Times Amplitude 5 Vpk 10 MHz filter frequency change 10 Freqi 10 7 MHz Freq2 0 9 Freqi Error in Volts Settling Time ms Error dB Error 0 532 0 01 10 6 0 878 0 5 0 48 10 0 0 828 0 25 1 16 5 0 0 424 0 1 2 04 2 0 0 172 0 05 2 62 1 0 0 086 Amplitude 5 Vpk 10 MHz filter frequency change 1 Freq 10 7 MHz Freq2 0
121. he nk de ed oe RO ee eA ee 288 SCPI Command Referenc s du ur ERG RES RR OR S REARS E ACE a 289 ABROR spk See SERS ESL LES REV Ro esa REE SERS SERS 290 ANI doe Peete hee Sod d Rog eh Bh aie ek ee tee ee ee Sw Sr ee ere v 291 ESTAMIELA YA UTECQUNE sirios Ge eh em eS 291 ESTARILAYSA COUN 5444144445640 44 04 2D EMRD ROSES 292 ESTARILA Yer bIMMediate ines ee MEO ES RU RSE ERS 293 STARIELATYQG SLOPE rr a A RANA 293 ESTARELA Yen SGUIRCS 2 acdc eee eho cd OA 9 ds 294 IM EESCDUBNE ow dese ed Ce eae PE ded d eS OOS Ewe SER 295 SSW Be MMediate e a e oarpen A ee cR dogo dd 295 ISWESNLINE ono wA SOR DRORGRSUR SOR UROGOK P ESHER KS gode d 296 SS WEENSOURES 26 445 484 YXOeo9 wo ox b wc X OUR ROO od RC x 207 CARDOD o od susc sca OSE Ee n Re Ss hee ee ee oe QC SUN bee S d 208 RID I co P cC IT 298 DATA leal hee De Roo e ARA A A OR RSD 299 6 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents DATACDED ia e AR A ARA ORK RR AAA 300 kE eaa E EA 300 OCRE a o ee NB dde 301 SBCume CODE siert teirte ed ER a POE EOE 302 Sure STATS A E 303 DLE die di d ib Nd ico dedi a dc dai 304 ISTIS TOSS udo edd os dope de dO diede de Soo ede b ooo Gh ee 304 BLA TED au accede DA Ke RA CR e de b ue ce ade d HR ce CS ode D 305 A AI 306 PRIS EFE 306 OUTP uk de ik aaa 308 PU Der PASSDPREQUENGN 22 044 c UE X x wh VOR e RO C OY ROCA 308 IBIETerEL LPASSI ESTATS u kom Roh Ree a O3 ge RUE RO RR Re 309 uhzlacunvs APT hao eee eee ERK eee ee RE EE Ge eH 309 TE
122. length arbitrary block COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seqi_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg1 FOR 2047 TO 2048 IF I 0 THEN I 1 E 38 Waveform l 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform l 2048 SHIFT Waveform l4 2048 3 NEXT I OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN X Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END Iterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN X Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SIN X Continued on Next Page 274 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 32767 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ1 sequence name
123. length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END Iterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN D Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SIN D Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ Isequence name OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segm execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Based Programming 503 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq2_addr SUBEND SUB Spike_def 1940 Spike def Compute the waveform sine wave with spike Download the 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 Idata as a combined list voltage and marker of signed Inumbers in an indefinite length block Download the sequence as la combine
124. mem base addr SUBEND SUB Wave_change 800 Wave_change Once the AFG has been INITiated this subprogram changes 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 Ithe output waveform sequence by writing the location of the Isequence s base address in sequence base memory to the IWaveform Select register COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER I CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO Read the waveform select register and write back the value read in lorder to clear the WFUSED bit in the Status register Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Based Programming 501 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 Wav_sel READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 Wav_sel ISelect a waveform by writing to the Waveform Select register following a 0 to 1 transition of the WFUSED bit in the Status lregister The transition indicates a new waveform can be selected 1256 selects sequence 1 512 selects sequence 2 and 768 selects Isequence 3 Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 LOOP FOR 256 TO 768 STEP 256 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav_sel REPEAT UNTIL BIT READIO 16 Bas
125. must have a length of 1 If not executing INITiate IMMediate generates Error 1114 Sequence lists of different lengths A marker enable list of length 1 is treated as though it were the same length as the waveform segment list with all marker enable values the same as the specified value Changing marker enable values preserves the waveform segment and repetition count lists and vice versa Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Defining a Segment Sequence Marker Enable List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C D E F G H Defines segment sequence LIST SSEQ MARK 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Enables marker output on segments A and E 354 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected segment sequence s marker pulse list Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Query Marker Pulse List Length LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ MARK POIN Queries marker pulse list length SSEQuence MARKer SPOint Parameters Comments Example SOURce LIST 1
126. of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technol ogy formerly National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by that organization s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Hewlett Packard product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years from date of ship ment Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into becomes a part of other HP products During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard HP Buyer shall pre pay shipping charges to HP and HP shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to HP from another country HP warrants that its software and firmware designated by HP for use with a product will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that product HP does not warrant that the operation of the product or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The fo
127. of the Questionable Signal Event Register are included in its Summary bit The Summary bit is the bit for bit logical AND of the Event Register and the unmasked bit s Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus QUEStionable ENABle O Setting the Questionable Signal Register Enable Mask STAT QUES ENAB H0040 Enables summary on Waiting for Arm bit 386 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus QUEStionable EVENt Comments Example STATus QUEStionable EVENt returns the contents of the Questionable Signal Event Register Reading the register clears it to 0 e The Event Register is also cleared to 0 by the CLS common command e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition The Event Register is cleared to 0 Querying the Questionable Signal Event Register STAT QUES EVEN Queries the Questionable Signal Event Register QUEStionable NTRansition Parameters Comments Example STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt sets the negative transiti
128. operation status group 436 437 phase modulation 75 77 80 365 367 questionable signal status group 432 434 signed data combined 239 244 signed data number format 225 228 240 signed data to generate waveforms 225 228 standard event status group 440 441 start and span frequencies 127 129 start and stop frequencies 121 123 stop triggers 180 182 196 TTLTrgn control source 150 151 unsigned data combined 245 249 unsigned data number format 229 230 245 unsigned data to generate waveforms 229 230 VXIbus backplane 259 271 506 508 V Variable Command Syntax 285 VINStrument Subsystem 403 408 VINS CONF LBUS MODE 403 VINS CONF LBUS MODE AUTO 404 VINS CONF TEST CONF 405 VINS CONF TEST DATA 406 VINS CONF VME MODE 406 VINS CONF VME REC ADDR DATA 407 VINS CONF VME REC ADDR READ 407 VINS IDENtity 408 Virtual Instrument Commands 403 408 Visual BASIC Language Programs 32 39 ARBWAVE FRM 33 39 list of 464 466 running a program 32 system configuration 32 using SICL 32 Visual C C Language Programs 40 45 ARBWAVE C 41 45 compiler used 40 list of 464 466 running a program 40 system configuration 40 using HP SICL 40 VME Register Access 461 Voltage generating DC 56 57 list amplitude effect on 113 output offset 380 output waveform segment 337 338 345 347 VXIplug amp play Example Programs See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug amp play Function Reference a A
129. or 49 152 LADDR 64 where C000 16 49 152 is the starting location of the register addresses LADDR is the AFG s logical address and 64 is the number of address bytes in A16 per VXI device The AFG s factory set logical address is 80 If this address is not changed the base address of the AFG s configuration registers in A16 is C00016 80 64 16 C00016 140016 D40016 or decimal 49 152 80 64 49 152 5120 2 54 272 Given the base address and number of the Offset Register 06 in Figure C 1 the base address of the operational registers in A24 can be determined as in the following program Reading the Offset Register 10 20 30 40 50 ASSIGN Afg to 1680 Path from V 360 to AFG via VXI backplane COM OAfg Base_addr CALL A24 offset END SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for tthe AFG registers in A24 address space COM OAfg Base_addr CONTROL 16 2522 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16 addr DVAL D400 16 Iconvert A16 base address to decimal number Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register Base addr Offset 256 Imultiply offset for 24 bit address SUBEND As mentioned multiplying the value of the Offset Register by 256 or 10016 converts the 16 bit register value to a 24 bit address 486 Register Based Programming Appendix C Changing the Output Frequency This section explains how the frequency of the output signal is changed
130. oscillator signal is loutput on VXI backplane trigger line ECLTO lAssign I O paths between the computer and the AFGs ASSIGN Afg_m TO 70910 Imaster AFG ASSIGN Afg_s TO 70911 Iservant AFG COM Afg_m Afg_s ISet up error checking CALL Rst OUTPUT Afg_m CLS Imaster OUTPUT QAfg m SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_m ESE 60 OUTPUT Afg_m OPC ENTER Afg_m Complete OUTPUT Afg_s CLS Iservant OUTPUT Afg_s SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_s ESE 60 OUTPUT Afg_s OPC ENTER QAfg s Complete ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 Call the subprograms which reset the AFGs output sine waves 180 Idegrees out of phase CALL Square wave m CALL Square wave s ISet master AFG to wait for arm state OUTPUT Afg_m INIT IMM Istart waveform WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Square wave m 350 Square wave m ISubprogram which sets up master AFG 360 370 380 390 400 410 COM Afg_m Afg_s OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 lreference osc source OUTPUT EAfg_m TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Itrigger source OUTPUT EAfg_m SOUR FREQ2 FIX 1E6 Ifrequency OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude Continued on Next Page 220 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 420 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR MARK ECLT0 FEED SOUR ROSC Ifeed ref osc 430 OUTPUT CEAfg_m SOUR MARK ECLTO STAT ON lenable ECLTO trig line 440 OUTPUT
131. output waveform 1270 REPEAT 1280 OUTPUT Afg_m SYST ERR tread master AFG error queue 1290 ENTER Afg_m Code Message 1300 PRINT Code Message 1310 UNTIL Code 0 1320 1330 IRead servant AFG status byte register clear service request bit Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 179 1340 B SPOLL Afg_s 1350 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 1360 OUTPUT Afg_s 1370 OUTPUT Afg_s ABORT labort output waveform 1380 REPEAT 1390 OUTPUT OAfg_s SYST ERR Iread servant AFG error queue 1400 ENTER Afg_s Code Message 1410 PRINT Code Message 1420 UNTIL Code 0 1430 STOP 1440 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LOCKSTEP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LOCKSTEP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Using Stop Triggers The STOPTRIG program shows you how to use stop triggers to abort the remaining cycles of a cycle count ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt The program sets up five 5 000 cycle bursts Stop triggers are used to abort the burst before all of the 5 000 cycles occurs An external arm is used to start the bursts A stop trigger aborts a burst at the end of the current cycle The steps of the program are 1 Set the start trigger source TRIGger STARt SOURce source 2 Set the stop trigger source TRIGger STOP SOURce source 3 Set th
132. outputs When doubling is enabled the waveform is advanced on both edges instead of one edge of the square wave generated by the direct digital synthesis chip thus doubling the maximum sample output rate However since the square wave symmetry is not perfect doubling introduces some systematic jitter in the sample rate Also in doubled mode the frequency resolution worsens by a factor of two Setting range to any value less than or equal to the maximum undoubled frequency specified below disables frequency doubling Values greater than the maximum undoubled frequency enable frequency doubling Parameters Comments Arbitrary Waveforms The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units range numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz MINimum selects 0 Hz MAXimum selects twice the maximum undoubled frequency The above values bound the legal range for range Since the maximum undoubled frequency depends on waveform shape and the reference oscillator frequency frequency doubling may be alternately enabled an
133. programming practice If you wish to use the Divide by N frequency generator use SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal2 5 Select the Sample Source TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the sample source for the DDS generator that is trigger start source INTernal 1 Although RST selects this trigger start source it is selected here for good programming practice The USER that is arbitrary waveform function can use any of the trigger start sources see Sample Sources on page 115 If you wish to use the Divide by N generator use TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal2 6 Set the Sample Frequency Range SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe range This command specifies the upper sample frequency limit see Frequency1 Generator Range on page 116 for the DDS generator Do not send this command if using the Divide by N generator 7 Set the Segment Sample Rate SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency This command sets the rate at which the points in a waveform segment are output by the AFG The frequency is sample frequency number of points Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 8 Select the Arbitrary Waveform Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER This command selects the arbitrary waveform function Couple the command to the previous frequency command 9 Set the Maximum Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command sp
134. read the README files The different directories are e VBPROG for Visual BASIC programs e VCPROG for Visual C C programs HP BASIC The following information identifies the system on which the HP BASIC 8 y Lang uage Prog rams Programs were written and shows how the programs are structured System Configuration Except where noted the example programs in HP BASIC were developed on the following system Controller HP 9000 Series 300 Mainframe HP 75000 Series C Slot 0 Resource Manager HP E1406A Command Module HP E1445A Logical Address 80 Instrument Language SCPI Chapter 1 Getting Started 29 Typical HP BASIC The structure of an example program in HP BASIC is shown below This Example Program program enables output leveling by sweeping 1 IRE STORE SWP LEVL 2 This program enables output leveling over the 0 Hz to 10 MHz sweep 3 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ONINTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT QAfg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Swp levl 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Swp levl 210 Swp levl Subprogram which sets output leveling for sweeping from 220 10 TO 10 MHz 230 COM Afg 240 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 250 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FRE
135. sample frequency lists 154 sample FSK 154 sample standard waveform 78 sample sweeping 154 start trigger 396 stop trigger 199 398 sweeping setting 297 Span frequencies sweeping with 127 129 327 Specifying frequency lists 124 126 sweep times 158 Speed comparisons 224 increasing 223 280 Spiked Sine Waves generating 109 SPIKES Example Program 109 Square Waves doubling frequency 155 generating 61 64 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 polarity 369 SQUWAVE Example Program 63 64 SRE 425 SRE 425 Standard Event Status enable register 440 group 439 441 register 439 Standard Waveforms commands flowchart 54 55 frequencies setting 331 generating 53 82 generating ramp waves 65 68 generating sine waves 58 60 generating square waves 61 64 generating triangle waves 65 68 phase modulation data sources 366 phase modulation default angle units 367 phase modulation disabling 367 phase modulation enabling 367 phase modulation selecting deviation units 80 365 phase modulation using 75 77 program comments 78 selecting amplitude levels 72 74 selecting output loads 69 71 selecting output units 72 74 Start arm slope setting 293 arm source setting 294 DC calibration 300 301 frequencies 121 123 frequencies setting 328 frequencies sweeping with 127 129 trigger slope setting 395 trigger sources 396 Start Arm In BNC arm slope 293 Status register 4
136. segment sequence selects the waveform segment to be output for waveform generation The segment sequence is stored in the AFG s sequence memory For square ramp and triangle functions the AFG calculates the waveform segments and segment sequences and stores them in memory For the user generated waveforms the user transfers the waveform segments and segment sequences to the AFG which stores them into memory See Generating Sinusoid Waveforms on page 450 for sinusoid waveforms 446 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 Generating Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms Refer to Figure 10 2 The following describes the blocks that generate non sinusoid waveforms LBUS LBUS VXI DPORt EN nsn DAC TIEF Circuitry Reference Clock ERE E ERE BUS HOLD Figure 10 2 AFG Simplified Block Diagram EXTernal CLK10 ECLTrg lt n gt INTernal Micro processor TILTrg lt n gt ECLTrg lt n gt EXTernal INTernal 1 INTernal2 Output DAC The AFG uses the 13 bit DAC to generate the waveforms Each time the AFG s frequency generator clocks the DAC the DAC outputs a voltage value that corresponds to the point value in the waveform segment The bits set in the DAC determine the voltage value For non sinusoid functions the DAC codes in the AFG s segment memory set the appropriate bits of the DAC For the sinusoid function the output of the frequency generator sets the bits to the appropriate valu
137. set SOURce RAMP POINts to a value larger than the largest contiguous amount of available waveform segment memory when ramp or triangle wave output is selected will generate Error 1000 Out of memory Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency and voltage e RST Condition SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid Selecting Square Wave Generation Mode FUNC SQU Selects square wave mode SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt selects which one of the 128 possible stored segment sequences the HP E1445A generates when arbitrary waveform generation is selected by SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units name character data defined waveform none sequence name NONE NONE selects no segment sequence Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RST Condition SOURce FUNCtion USER NONE Selecting an Arbitrary Waveform FUNC USER Selects arbitrary waveform mode FUNC USER ABC Selects segment sequence Chapter 8 Command Reference 333 SOURce LIST 1 SOURce LIST 1 The SOURce LIST 1 subsystem defines the waveform segments and segment sequence for arbitrary waveform generation The HP E1445A can simultaneously store up to 256 waveform segments and up to 128 segment sequences Subsystem syntax FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt S
138. set the sweep time The program also sets 4 Ithe direction of the sweep 5 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 Call the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Swp_pvst 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Swp pvst 210 Swp pvst Subprogram which sets sweep direction points and time 220 COM OAfg 230 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 5E3 Istart frequency 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 15E3 Istop frequency 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWEEP DIR DOWN Isweep direction 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWEEP POIN 100 Isweep points 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 290 OUTPUT Afg TRIG SWE SOUR TIM Isweep advance source 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE TIME 12375 Isweep time 310 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function 320 OUTPUT A fg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 330 OUTPUT A fg INIT IMM lwait for trigger state 340 SUBEND 350 360 SUB Rst 370 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 380 COM OAfg 390 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 400 ENTER Afg Complete 410 SUBEND 420 430 SUB Errmsg Continued on Next Page 136 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 440 E
139. single program statement In HP BASIC programs the EOL terminator is suppressed by placing a semicolon following the quotation mark which closes the command string In the previous program the commands in lines 240 270 are in the frequency coupling group line 280 is in the frequency voltage coupling group and line 290 is in the voltage coupling group The semicolons following the command strings in lines 240 through 280 suppress the EOL terminator therefore lines 240 290 are sent as a single statement Since the command in line 290 is not coupled to the commands in lines 300 320 the EOL terminator is not suppressed on line 290 Chapter 1 Getting Started 31 Visual BASIC Language Programs Using HP SICL System Configuration What s Needed to Run the Programs How to Run a Program These example programs are written in the Visual BASIC language for the HP 82340 82341 HP IB Interface Cards using the HP Standard Instrument Control Library SICL The following identifies the system on which the programs are written shows how to compile the programs and gives a typical example program The Visual BASIC programs were developed on the following system Controller HP Vectra PC HP IB Interface Card HP 82341 HP IB Interface with HP SICL Required Program See What s Needed to Run the Programs below Mainframe HP 75000 Series C Slot 0 Resource Manager HP E1406A Command Module HP E1445A Logical Addr
140. stored in memory Set the Segment Sequence Length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine length This command defines the length of the selected segment sequence The length must be equal to or greater than the number of waveform segments in the sequence next step Define the Segment Sequence Order SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list This command determines the order in which the waveform segments are to be executed Each waveform segment name must be separated by a comma for example A B C see Executing Several Waveform Segments on page 93 for more information Select the User Name SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt This command selects the segment sequences to be output Make the name in this command the same name as the stored segment sequence to be output Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information Query the Segment Memory Optional SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE This command returns the amount of segment memory remaining first number in the AFG and the amount of memory used second number Query the Segment Sequence Memory Optional SOURce JLIST 1 SSEQuence FREE This command returns the amount of segment memory remaining in the AFG the first number and the amount of memory used the second number 90 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 H
141. string was specified when another parameter type i e discrete numeric boolean is required Appendix B Useful Tables 475 Table B 6 HP E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 161 Invalid block data The number of bytes in a definite length data block does not equal the number of bytes indicated by the block header 168 Block data not allowed Block data was specified when another parameter type i e discrete numeric boolean is required 178 Expression data not allowed The parameter was specified as an expression e g SOUR FREQ1 FIX A B 183 Invalid inside macro definition Voltage or segment list is inside a macro 211 Trigger ignored Trigger was received and the AFG was not in the wait for trigger state Or a trigger was received from a source other than the specified source 212 Arm ignored Arm was received and the AFG was not in the wait for arm state Or an arm was received from a source other than the specified source 213 Init ignored INITiate IMMediate received while the AFG was currently initiated 221 Settings conflict See Settings Conflict Error Messages at the end of this table 222 Data out of range Parameter value is out of range for any AFG configuration e g SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E9 224 Illegal parameter value The calibration security code required to disable calibration security does not match
142. that bit in the Operation Condition Register will set the same bit in the Operation Event Register Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units unmask numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the 4H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus OPERation NTRansition O Setting the Operation Register Negative Transition Mask STAT OPER NTR H0008 Sets the Event bit when sweeping condition is cleared 384 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus OPERation PTRansition Parameters Comments PRESet Example Comments Example STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt sets the positive transition mask For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Operation Condition Register will set the same bit in the Operation Event Register Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected Power on Condition STATus OPERation PTRansition 32767
143. the HP BASIC example programs found throughout the manual The conditions monitored by the Standard Event Status Register are identified below 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON unused CME EXE DDE QYE unused OPC Power on PON Bit 7 is set 1 when an off to on transition has occurred Command Error CME Bit 5 is set 1 when an incorrect command header is received or if an unimplemented common command is received Execution Error EXE Bit 4 is set 1 when a command parameter is outside its legal range Device Dependent Error DDE Bit 3 is set 1 when an error other than a command error execution error or query error has occurred Query Error QYE Bit 2 is set 1 when the AFG output queue is read and no data is present or when data in the output queue has been lost Operation Complete OPC Bit 0 is set 1 when the OPC command is received OPC is used to indicate when all pending or previous AFG commands have completed Note that bits 7 5 4 3 2 and O have corresponding decimal values of 128 32 16 8 4 and 1 Reading the Standard Event Status Register The settings of the Standard Event Status Register can be read with the command ESR The bits are cleared at power on or by ESR or CLS Chapter 9 AFG Status 439 The Standard Event Status Enable Register Program Example The Standard Event Status Enable Register specifies which bit
144. the stored code 241 Hardware missing Command was intended for the HP E1446A which was not present or is outside the servant area of the HP E1445A AFG 270 Macro error RMC lt name gt was executed and name is not defined 272 Macro execution error Macro program data sequence could not be executed due to a syntax error within the macro definition 273 Illegal macro label The macro label defined in the DMC command was too long the same as a common command keyword or contained invalid header syntax 276 Macro recursion error A macro program data sequence could not be executed because the sequence leads to the execution of a macro being defined 277 Macro redefinition not allowed A macro label in the DMC command could not be executed because the macro label was already defined 476 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 6 HP E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 312 PUD memory lost The protected user data saved by the PUD command has been lost 313 Calibration memory lost The nonvolatile calibration data used by the CAL command has been lost 330 Self test failed Note the information associated with the message for a description of the failure 350 Too many errors The HP E1445A error queue is full and additional errors have occurred 410 Query INTERRUPTED The HP E1445A was sent a command before it was fi
145. waveform repetitions to be output for each start arm accepted Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 1 through 65536 9 9E 37 none INFinity MINimum MAXimum 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity MINimum selects 1 repetitions MAXimum selects 65536 repetitions Comments Use the ABORt or TRIGger STOP IMMediate command to terminate the output when ARM STARt LAYer1 COUNt is set to INFinity or 9 9E 37 e For standard function sine waves the actual number of cycles which appear at the output relative to the programmed count is approximate and is not specified Chapter 8 Command Reference 291 ARM e Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None e Related Commands ABORt TRIGger STOP IMMediate e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer1 COUNt INFinity Example Setting Waveform Repetitions per Arm ARM COUN 10 Sets 10 repetitions arm STARt LAYer2 COUNt ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt specifies the number of waveform start arms the HP E1445A will accept after an INITiate IMMediate command before returning the trigger system to the idle state Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 1 through 65535 MINimum none MAXimum 9 9E 37 INFinity MINimum selects 1 arms MAXimum selects 65535 arms 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity Comme
146. when a new waveform can be selected from sequence base memory Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 216 other status bits WF other status bits USED WFUSED A 0 to 1 transition of this bit indicates that a new waveform can be selected from sequence base memory This bit is cleared by reading and then writing to the Waveform Select Register Appendix C Register Based Programming 499 Sequence Selection The WAVE_SEL program shows how to change the output waveform Prog ram sequence without aborting the current waveform and re initializing the AFG HP BASIC Program Example WAVE_SEL 1 IRE STORE WAVE_SEL 2 This program changes the output waveform sequence once the AFG has been 3 IN Tiated by writing the location of a sequence s base address to the 4 IWaveform Select register All register reads and writes are 16 bit 5 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and the AFG 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 30 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 1680 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data 40 COM OAfg OAfg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seg2_addr Seq3_addr 50 60 ISubprograms which reset the AFG and erase all existing waveforms 70 CALL Rst 80 CALL Wf del 90 100 ISCPI commands which configure the AFG 110 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 ISample rate 120 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER tfunction 130 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 2 1V lamplitude 140
147. with an intended MIN or MAX value As a result MIN and MAX are not recommended for specifying the value of a parameter Linking IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Use a semicolon between the commands For example RST CLS OPC Linking Multiple SCPI Commands Use both a semicolon and a colon between the commands For example SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Some commands are listed as two commands separated with a vertical bar I This means that either command name can be used For example use either CW or FlXed when CW FlXed is shown 288 Command Reference Chapter 8 SCPI Command Reference This section describes the SCPI commands for the HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and also within each subsystem A command guide is printed in the top margin of each page The guide indicates the subsystem listed on that page Chapter 8 Command Reference 289 ABORt ABORt The ABORt command places the TRIGger subsystem in the idle state regardless of any other settings The command halts waveform generation but keeps the output voltage at the value generated when ABORt was executed Only another INITiate IMMediate command will restart waveform output Subsystem Syntax ABORt no query Comments ABORt does not affect any other settings of the HP E1445A The Pending Operation Flag set true by the INITiate IMMediate command will be set false as a conseque
148. x 1 S1 or noise waveform N1 sequence Comment out the line of Ithe one you DO NOT want to select OUTPUT Afg ABORT OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER S1 Iselect waveform sequence Sin x OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER N1 Iselect waveform sequence Noise OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 141 210 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 220 230 OFF INTR 7 240 END 250 260 SUB Wvfm manage 270 Wvfm manage ISubprogram which calls the subprograms which delete 280 lall existing waveforms and define Sin x x and 290 Ipseudo random noise 300 COM OAfg 310 CALL Rst 320 CALL Wf del 330 CALL Sinx def IComment out this line if line 180 is commented 340 CALL Noise def Comment out this line if line 190 is commented 350 SUBEND 360 370 SUB Sinx def 380 Sinx def Set sweep mode specify start and stop sample rates for a 390 11 kHz to 2 kHz sweep set arbitrary waveform function 400 ICompute waveform Sin x x define waveform segment and 410 Isequence 420 COM OAfg 430 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 440 OUTPUT EAfg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 4 096E6 start sample rate 450 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 8 192E6 stop sample rate 460 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 470 OUTPUT A fg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Ifunction arbitrary 480 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V Iscale arb values 490
149. 0 670 Download the waveform segment to segment memory using WRITEIO and tthe AFG s high speed data register The register s address is llocated in A24 address space FOR l 1 TO 2048 WRITEIO 16 Base addr IVAL 26 16 Waveform l NEXT I OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ARB DOWN COMP Idisable downloading SUBEND SUB Tri wave 680 Tri wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and downloads 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 Ithe corresponding dac codes to segment memory over the IVXIbus Marker pulses coincide with the output voltages IWaveform 1024 through Waveform 1033 COM OAfg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Isegment name OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size ICalculate triangle wave dac codes and shift bits to code positions INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 FOR I 1 TO 1023 Waveform l I 0048828 00125 Waveform l SHIFT Waveform l 3 NEXT I FOR I 1024 TO 1033 Waveform l I 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 2 linclude marker bit NEXT FOR l 1034 TO 2048 Waveform l 2 2048 1 0048828 00125 Waveform l SHIFT Waveform l 3 NEXT I ISet last point bit actual last point 3 Waveform 2045 Waveform 2045 1 Enable downloading from the VXIbus OUTPUT QAfg ARB
150. 0 DAC code unused marker reserved The DAC code is a 13 bit two s complement or unsigned number see the SOURce JARBitrary DAC FORMat command With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 5 11875 V set and a matched output load the least significant bit LSB represents 1 25 mV If the marker bitis 1 a marker pulse will be output with this point if the marker bit in the segment sequence memory location generating this segment is also a 1 MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command f the comma separated list of values format is used the values must be in two s complement format i e values should range from 32768 to 432767 If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first The combined list must be at least four points long but no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine If the combined list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the combined list is generated when outputting the waveform segment Executing the query form of this command with voltage point and marker pulse lists defined with different lengths generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the marker pulse list has a length of 1 Using combined lists is faster than separately defining the voltage point and marker pulse lists e Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands S
151. 0 0 i eee eee es Page 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment PSU e Wak fede NE AN TE de a RU oU etd Page 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment Sequence List xj eb e Ee ce bn angel doe ue Page 280 Data Transfer Methods and Speed Comparisons Table 7 1 shows the timing relationship of the different data transfer methods used The table lists the relative timing in descending order with the slowest method on top Table 7 1 Speed Relationships of Data Transfer Methods Approximate Method Command Time Savings Segment Voltage List SOURceLIST 1 SEGMent VOL Tage 0 Segment DAC Code List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC 35 Segment Combined List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined 35 Segment DAC Codes as Block Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC 88 Segment Combined List as Block Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined 94 Segment Sequence Combined List as SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined 94 Block Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined The time saving percentages are referenced to the speed of the Segment Voltage List method 224 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms Note Using the Signed Number Format Transferring DAC Codes in the Signed Number Format Determining DAC Codes in the Signed Number Format Transferring waveform segments as Digital to Analog Converter DAC Codes to
152. 0 Controller to download the data using the VXIbus instead of transferring 1t directly to the AFG using HP IB 1 IRE STORE VXISRCE 2 This program uses the V 360 embedded controller to send waveform 3 Idata directly to the AFG dac over the VXlbus backplane 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 30 COM QAfg Addr 40 50 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and determine the base 60 laddress of the registers in A24 address space 70 CALL Rst 80 CALL A24 offset 90 100 IScale the amplitude set the dac data format and dac data source 110 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude 120 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed 130 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR VXI Idac data source 140 OUTPUT Afg OPC Wait for the SCPI commands to complete 150 ENTER Afg Complete 160 170 Call the subprogram which sends data directly to the dac 180 CALL Dac_drive 190 END 200 210 SUB A24 offset 220 A24 offset ISubprogram which determines the base address for 230 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space then adds the 240 loffset and register number to the base to get the 250 Icomplete address 260 COM QAfg Addr 270 ICONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO 280 A16_addr DVAL D400 16 IAFG A16 base address 290 Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register 300 Base addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit addre
153. 0 ISequence 2 1 is the repetition count marker enable and last point 1330 lindication for the segment sequence Sequence 2 2 is the starting 1340 laddress of segment TRI 1350 Sequence 2 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addrm2 DIV 65536 12 1360 Sequence 2 2 Addrm2 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm2 MOD 65536 gt 32767 1370 1380 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE OUT sequence name 1390 OUTPUT CAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Isegments in sequence 1400 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DOWN VXI WAVE_OUT 2 1410 OUTPUT Afg OPC 1420 ENTER Afg Ready 1430 1440 Download the waveform sequence to sequence memory using WRITEIO 1450 land the AFG s Sequence register The register s address is 1460 llocated in A24 address space 1470 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 22 16 Sequence 1 1 116 MS Bits 1480 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 24 16 Sequence 1 2 116 LS Bits 1490 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 22 16 Sequence 2 1 116 MS Bits 1500 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 24 16 Sequence 2 2 116 LS Bits 1510 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ARB DOWN COMP Idisable downloading 1520 SUBEND 1530 1540 SUB A24 offset 1550 A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for 1560 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space 1570 COM Afg Base_addr Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 267 1580 CONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO 1590 A16_addr DVAL D400 16 IAFG A16 base address 1600 Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG
154. 0 or 2000 the non zero digit value equals 3 or 4 respectively lt digits gt Shows the number of data bytes to be sent for example if 100 data bytes are to be sent digits equals 100 see Data Byte Size below e lt 8 bit data bytes gt Is the data 1 e DAC codes sent to the AFG A typical example of a data block sending 2000 8 bit data bytes is 42000 lt data bytes The DAC codes are transferred to the AFG as 16 bit integer values that meet the coding set by the IEEE 488 2 standard Since IEEE 488 2 requires an 8 bit code the 16 bit integer must be sent as 2 8 bit values for each 16 bit integer For example to send a waveform segment consisting of 1000 DAC codes 1000 points the actual number of digits and 8 bit data bytes equals 1000 2 2000 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 231 HP BASIC Program Example DACBLOK1 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 The DACBLOKI program shows how to store a waveform segment i e points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The waveform segment is stored as DAC codes in the Signed number format This program is the same program as SIGN_DAT beginning on page 227 except the data is transferred to the AFG using the Definite Length Arbitrary Block method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V positive going ramp To transfer Definite Length Block Data to the AFG requires that the data sent with t
155. 00 Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address 310 SUBEND 320 330 SUB Output function Continued on Next Page 492 Register Based Programming Appendix C 340 Output function ISubprogram which uses SCPI commands to set the 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 140 MHz reference oscillator to set divide by n frequency synthesis to set the output frequency lfunction amplitude and to start the waveform COM OAfg Base_addr OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator 40 MHz OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Ifrequency generator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 1E6 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state OUTPUT QAfg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC Iwait for INIT to complete ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Divide by n Reference osc Frequency Points 500 Divide by n Subprogram which changes the output frequency by writing 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 Ito the register which controls divide by n frequency Isynthesis COM OAfg Base_addr INTEGER Divider CONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO Read register 63 Write to register 63 setting the SHOLD bit bit 7 Iso sample signals are ignored Sample holdZREADIO
156. 10 10 MHz line e EXTernal The AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC TTL levels e ECLTrg0 or 1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines e NTernal 1 The internal 42 94967296 MHz oscillator default source e INTernal2 The internal 40 MHz oscillator The INTernal 1 reference oscillator is recommended for use with the Direct Digital Synthesis DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem for high resolution and frequency range The INTernal2 reference oscillator is recommended for use with the divide by n time base SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem to produce exact frequencies such as 10 MHz 20 MHz etc When outputting a fixed continuous frequency signal the DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 or the divide by N time base SOURce FREQuency2 are the most often used In addition to these time bases other sources which can be selected with the TRIGger STARt SOURce command are e BUS the HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command e ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 the VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal the AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC e HOLD suspends sample generation INTernal 1 the SSOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem DDS frequency synthesis INTernal2 the SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem Divide by n frequency synthesis e TTLTrgO through 7 the VXIbus TTL trigger lines In programs where the time base trigger source is not specified the default DDS time base
157. 104 Data type error The wrong data type number character string expression was used when specifying the parameter 108 Parameter not allowed Parameter specified in a command which does not require one 109 Missing parameter Command requires a parameter s 112 Program mnemonic too long Command keyword gt 12 characters 113 Undefined header Command header keyword was incorrectly specified 121 Invalid character in number A character other than a comma or number is in the middle of a number 123 Numeric overflow A parameter value is greater than what can be represented with the number format 124 Too many digits More than 256 digits were used to specify a number 128 Numeric data not allowed A number was specified when a letter was required 131 Invalid suffix Parameter suffix incorrectly specified e g VO rather than VP 138 Suffix not allowed Parameter suffix is specified when one is not allowed 141 Invalid character data Discrete parameter specified is not a valid choice 144 Character data too long A segment or sequence name is too long or a discrete parameter is gt 12 characters Segment and sequence names must be 12 characters or less 148 Character data not allowed Discrete parameter was specified when another type e g numeric boolean is required 151 Invalid string data The string data specified e g for the SOUR MARK FEED lt source gt command is not a valid choice 158 String data not allowed A
158. 11 e Boolean Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false Any non zero value is considered true ON OFF 1 0 e Discrete Selects from a finite number of values These parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting An example is the TRIGger STARt SOURce source command where source can be BUS ECLTrg0 ECLTrg1 EXTernal HOLD INTernal 1 INTernal 2 or TTLTrgO through TTLTrg1 e Arbitrary Block Program Data This parameter type is used to transfer a block of data in the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a header which indicates either 1 The number of data bytes which follow definite length block or 2 That the following data block will be terminated upon receipt of a New Line message with the EOI signal true indefinite length block 286 Command Reference Chapter 8 Optional Parameters Querying Parameter Settings The syntax for data in the blocks is as follows Definite length block lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zero digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Indefinite length block 0 lt data byte s NL END Examples of sending 4 data bytes 14 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt 3004 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt 0 lt byte gt lt byte
159. 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ1 Isequence name OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 Isegm execution order OUTPUT OAfg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq1_addr SUBEND SUB Sind_def Sind_def Compute the damped sine waveform Download the data las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_ addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg2 A 4 4096 W 2 PI 50 FOR T 1 TO 4096 Waveform T EXP A T SIN W T 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform T SHIFT Waveform T 3 NEXT T OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_D Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform lindefinite
160. 1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Swp levl 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Swp levl 210 Swp lev Subprogram which sets output leveling for sweeping from 220 10 TO 10 MHz 230 COM Afg 240 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 0 Istart frequency 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 10E6 Istop frequency 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 280 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction 290 OUTPUT A fg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 300 OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS FREQ 10 MHZ tfilter cutoff frequency 310 OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS STAT ON lenable output filter 320 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 330 SUBEND 340 350 SUB Rst 360 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 370 COM Afg 380 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 390 ENTER Afg Complete 400 SUBEND 410 420 SUB Errmsg 430 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 440 COM Afg Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 145 450 DIM Message 256 460 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 470 B SPOLL Afg 480 End of statement if
161. 16 680 ENTER Cmd Traffic 690 Traffic BINIOR BINAND Traffic IVAL 3FFF 16 IVAL 8000 16 Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 273 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 OUTPUT ECmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 8 16 Traffic Write the location of the sequence base address waveform index Ito the Waveform Select register Write the base address of lof the sequence in sequence memory to the Sequence Base register OUTPUT ECmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 252 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq3_addr OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 253 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq1_addr OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 254 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq2_addr OUTPUT OCmg DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 255 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq3_addr OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 0 SUBEND SUB Sinx_def 920 Sinx def Define the waveform Sin x x Download the waveform data 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite
162. 161 loads comments 79 loads selecting 69 71 310 311 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 519 marker 203 222 marker program comments 222 marker pulse 342 343 354 355 offset voltage 380 relay 311 units comments 80 units selecting 72 74 voltage waveform segment 337 338 345 347 waveforms 86 87 waveforms suspending 183 OUTPut 1 Subsystem 308 311 OUTP FILT LPAS FREQ 308 OUTP FILT LPAS STAT 309 OUTP IMPedance 309 OUTP LOAD 310 OUTP LOAD AUTO 311 OUTP STATe 311 P PACKed Data Format 335 Parameters arbitrary block 286 boolean 286 discrete 286 MAXimum using 81 MINimun using 81 numeric 286 optional 287 query settings 287 SCPI commands 286 287 Password changing 302 PHAS CHNG Example Program 496 497 Phase control program 496 497 control registers 495 increment registers 487 load strobe register 495 Phase Modulation 75 commands 365 367 data source 366 default units 367 deviation 76 365 disabling 367 enabling 367 registers 495 selecting deviation units 80 365 using 75 77 PHS MOD Example Program 76 77 Pinout digital port in connector 278 279 plug amp play See VXIplug amp play Online Help PM See Phase Modulation PMC 421 Points combined list length query 338 349 frequency sweep 374 marker pulse list length query 343 355 output voltage 345 347 output voltage list length query 347 ramp waves 368 s
163. 2 4223658 SQUare 000524032031 to 000349354678 to 2 80642166 to 4 56733425 to 524032031 349354678 27 1935783 25 4326657 TRlangle 000174677344 to 000116451562 to 7 57763421 to 9 33854680 to 174677344 116451562 22 4223658 20 6614532 RAMP 000174677344 to 000116451562 to 7 57763421 to 9 33854680 to 174677344 116451562 22 4223658 20 6614532 Double the values for Open Circuit Loads selected by OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity Not available with OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity selected Appendix B Useful Tables 471 Power On Reset Configuration Table B 5 HP E1445A Power On Reset Configuration as returned by LRN Output frequency Frequency shift keying FSK frequencies FSK trigger source Frequency mode Frequency range Sweep start frequency Sweep stop frequency Output frequency divide by n generator Reference oscillator source External oscillator frequency Sweep count Sweep direction Sweep points FREQ FIX FREQ FSK FREQ FSK SOUR FREQ MODE FREQ RANG FREQ STAR FREQ STOP FREQ2 FIX ROSC SOUR FREQ EXT SWE COUN SWE DIR SWE POIN Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Macro usage EMC 1 Calibration state CAL STAT 1 enabled AC calibration CAL STAT AC 1 enabled DC calibration CAL STAT DC 1 enabled DAC data source ARB DAC SOUR INTernal Phase modulation units PM UNIT ANGL RADians Waveform amplitude units VOLT AMPL UNIT VOLT
164. 2 FORM MARK ECLTO FEED MARK ECLTO STAT MARK ECLTI1 FEED MARK ECLTI STAT MARK FEED MARK POL HOLD IMMediate TIMer SINusoid 100 NORMal 1 61869088E 001 0 00000000E 000 5 00000000E 001 5 00000000E 001 1 on 9 90000000E 037 1 00000000E 000 POS IMMediate NONE ASCii 9 ASGii 10 ARM 0 off TRIG 0 off ARM NORM Appendix B Useful Tables 473 Table B 5 HP E1445A Power On Reset Configuration continued Local bus automatic mode MODE AUTO Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Marker Out BNC state MARK STAT 1 on Output state OUTP STAT 1 on Output filter frequency FILT FREQ 2 50000000E 005 Output filter state FILT STAT O off Phase modulation deviation PM DEV 0 00000000E 000 Phase modulation source PM SOUR INTernal Phase modulation state PM STAT 0 off External waveform advance TRIG SLOP POS trigger slope External stop trigger slope TRIG STOP SLOP POS Local bus mode VINS LBUS REC MODE OFF 1 on 474 Useful Tables Appendix B Error Messages Table B 6 HP E1445A Error Messages Code Message Description 101 Invalid character Unrecognized character in parameter 102 Syntax error Command is missing a space or comma between parameters 103 Invalid separator Parameter is separated by a character other than a comma
165. 200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 ISequence 2 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment M2 Sequence 2 2 is the starting address of segment M2 Sequence 2 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addrm2 DIV 65536 4 enable marker Sequence 2 2 Addrm2 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm2 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL M_OUT Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Isegments in sequence OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM OAfg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf del Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Afg1 DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT QAfg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT QAfg SYST E
166. 21 HP BASIC Program Example SMPLSWP1 IRE STORE SMPLSWP1 2 This program specifies start and stop frequencies to sweep 3 la sine wave from 0 to 1 MHz 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Sweep1 150 CALL Query 160 170 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 180 OFF INTR 7 190 END 200 210 SUB Sweep1 220 Sweep1 Subprogram which outputs a swept sine wave from 0 Hz to 1 MHz 230 COM Afg 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT15 Ireference oscillator 250 OUTPUT CAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT15 Ifrequency1 generator DDS 260 OUTPUT A fg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 0 Istart frequency 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 1E6 Istop frequency 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 300 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction 310 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 320 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM lwait for arm state 330 SUBEND 340 350 SUB Rst 360 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 370 COM Afg 380 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 390 ENTER Afg Complete 400 SUBEND 410 420 SUB Query 430 Query Subprogram which queries sweep parameters 440 COM Afg Continued on Next Page
167. 220 230 280 This program is similar to the SIN X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences IRE STORE NOISE This program outputs a pseudo random noise waveform as an larbitrary waveform Call the subprogram which defines the noise signal and loutput sequence CALL Noise def ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER NOISE OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUB Noise def 290 Noise def Subprogram which defines the noise signal and output 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 Isequence COM OAfg DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR I 1 TO 4096 Waveform 2 RND 1 NEXT OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM SEL NOISE Iselect segment to be defined OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEF 4096 Ireserve memory for segment OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL NOISE OUT define sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber segments in sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ NOISE segment order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program NOISE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program NOISE C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 112 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments The following comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapt
168. 24 MHz Example Setting the Frequency Span FREQ SPAN 1E3 Sets the frequency span to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 327 SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt sets the starting sample rate or waveform frequency for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt start_freq gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for start freq as well as the MINimum and MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE RANGe SPAN and STOP SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 STARt 0 0 Hz Example Setting the Starting Frequency FREQ STAR 1 KHZ Sets the starting frequency to 1000 Hz 328 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP s op freq sets the stopping sample rate or waveform frequency for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units stop freq numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for stop freq as well as the MINimum an
169. 24 Width J Waveform Waveform 9 J Width 00125 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO Width 1 1024 Width J Waveform Waveform 9 J Width 00125 NEXT J Ishift bits to dac code positions FOR I 1 TO 4096 Waveform l SHIFT Waveform l 3 NEXT I OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SPIKE Isegment name OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END Iterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SPIKE Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SPIKE Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg3 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 32767 OUTPUT CAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ3 Isequence name Continued on Next Page 276 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segm execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END terminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ A
170. 280 initiating the 306 307 installing in mainframe 25 lock stepping multiple 176 180 memory description 452 operating multi AFGs together 218 222 servant area 23 specifications 453 462 status 420 444 A triggering the 172 185 AFGGEN 1 Example Program 102 A24 Address AFGGEN Example Program 104 base address 484 486 Amplitude query space 407 Abbreviated SCPI Commands 285 ABORt subsystem 290 using 196 Aborting waveforms 196 AC Calibration Corrections 304 AC Output Leveling 144 146 160 161 characteristics 457 458 effects on DAC codes 280 errors AC leveling 160 161 levels selecting 72 74 limits 471 output default voltage units 379 output setting 72 74 377 380 voltage list effect 113 Arbitrary Block HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 509 data 156 157 frequency lists using 130 132 SCPI command parameters 286 Arbitrary Waveforms commands flowchart 84 85 description 446 doubling frequency 155 FSK using 152 153 generating 83 116 generating damped sine waves 107 108 generating description 86 87 generating exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 generating half rectified sine waves 111 generating marker pulses 206 generating noise 112 generating non sinusoid 447 generating sample programs 104 109 111 112 generating simple 88 92 generating sin x x 105 106 generating spiked sine waves 109 generating with different frequency generators
171. 3 Iburst frequency 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 2 5VPP amplitude 270 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR EXT larm source 280 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP POS larm slope 290 OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY2 COUN INF larm count 300 OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 5 Icycle count 310 OUTPUT QAfg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM Afg 370 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Errmsg Continued on Next Page 170 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 420 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 COM Afg DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT A fg OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program BURST FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program BURST C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 171 Triggering the AFG Arming the AFG places the dev
172. 4 3 2 1 0 base B316 unused Phase modulation value through base B116 The Phase Load Strobe Register Register B3 This register contains the eight most significant bits of the 12 bit phase modulation value bits 11 4 Register B1 Bits 7 4 of this register are the four least significant bits of the 12 bit phase modulation value bits 3 0 Bits 3 0 of register B1 are ignored Writing any value to the Phase Load Strobe Register adds the data in the Phase Modulation Registers to the output of the phase accumulator Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 8B16 unused Strobe Data Stobe Data Writing any value to this register adds the data in the Phase Modulation Registers to the output of the phase accumulator Once the phase has been added it takes 14 reference oscillator clock cycles for the new phase to appear at the output Appendix C Register Based Programming 495 Phase Control The PHAS CHNG program demonstrates how to change the sine wave Prog ram signal phase while the waveform is currently at the AFG output HP BASIC Program Example PHAS CHNG 170 180 190 200 IRE STORE PHAS CHNG This program changes the phase of the output signal by writing Iphase offset data to the phase modulation registers ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM OAfg Base_addr Call the subprograms which reset the AFG which determine the base laddress of the AFG registers in A2
173. 4 address space and which set the output function CALL Rst CALL A24 offset CALL Output function DISP Press Continue to change the signal phase register writes PAUSE DISP Call the subprogram which changes the signal phase and pass the new phase value CALL Phase_change 180 END SUB A24 offset 210 A24 offset ISubprogram which determines the base address for 220 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space 230 COM OAfg Base_addr 240 CONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO 250 A16_addr DVAL D400 16 IAFG A16 base address 260 Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register 270 Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address 280 SUBEND 290 300 SUB Output function 310 Output function ISubprogram which uses SCPI commands to set DDS 320 frequency synthesis to set the output frequency 330 lfunction amplitude to set up phase modulation and 340 Ito start the waveform 350 COM OAfg Base_addr 360 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 frequency generator 370 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 60 frequency 380 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM SOUR INT Iphase modulation source 390 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM STAT ON lenable phase modulation 400 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction Continued on Next Page 496 Register Based Programming Appendix C 410 OUTPUT CAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 420 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM DEV ODEG Iphase modulation angle 430 OUTPUT QAfg
174. 424 RSTCLS Program Example 47 RSTSINE Program Example 51 S Safety Warnings 14 Sample frequency range 155 gate disabling 394 gate enabling 394 gate polarity 393 gate source 393 programs 104 109 111 112 rate 87 160 rate arbitrary waveforms 331 454 rate characteristics 454 456 rate frequency span 327 rate FSK source 324 rate non swept 322 rate setting center 321 rate setting FSK 323 rate starting 328 rate stopping 329 sources arbitrary waveforms 115 sources frequency lists 154 sources FSK 154 sources standard waveforms 78 sources sweeping 154 Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register 488 SAV 424 SCPI conformance information 414 415 instrument language 26 programming 26 version number 390 SCPI Commands 281 abbreviated 285 ABORt subsystem 290 arbitrary block parameters 286 ARM subsystem 291 297 boolean parameters 286 CALibration subsystem 298 305 command separator 285 conformance information 414 415 coupling 27 28 288 467 469 discrete parameters 286 execution 288 format 284 285 implied 27 implied optional 285 INITiate subsystem 306 307 linking 27 288 numeric parameters 286 optional 27 OUTPut 1 subsystem 308 311 parameters 286 287 quick reference 409 413 reference 281 312 root keyword 26 SOURce subsystem 312 380 SOURce ARBitrary subsystem 313 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem 319 329 SOURce FREQuen
175. 469 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 FSK programming 118 119 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 511 GMC 418 IDN 419 INITiate 306 307 linking 27 288 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 marker pulses 204 342 343 354 355 362 364 OPC 420 OPC 421 OUTPut 1 308 311 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47 424 SAV 424 SCPI structure 26 SOURce 312 380 SOURce ARBitrary 313 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 319 329 SOURce FREQuency2 330 331 SOURce FUNCtion 332 333 SOURce LIST 1 334 357 SOURce LIST2 358 360 SOURce MARKer 361 364 SOURce PM 365 367 SOURce RAMP 368 369 SOURce ROSCillator 370 371 SOURce SWEep 372 376 SOURce VOLTage 377 380 SRE 425 SRE 425 standard waveform generation 54 55 STATus 381 388 STB 426 SYSTem 389 390 TRG 426 TRIGger 391 402 triggering 172 391 402 TST 46 426 types 284 VINStrument 403 408 WAT 427 E Ll el d Comment Sheet reader 17 Common Commands 416 428 CLS 47 416 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 format 284 GMC 418 IDN 419 linking 288 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 OPC 420 OPC 421 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 quick reference 428 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47 424 SAV 424 SRE 425 SRE 425 STB 426 TRG 426 TST 46 426 WAI 427 Condi
176. 5 sine wave frequency 155 square wave frequency 155 triangle wave frequency 155 Memory characteristics 453 454 deleting segment sequence definitions 351 deleting waveform segment definitions 340 description 448 452 518 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index determining amount 113 downloading segment data into 259 268 freeing 113 query segment sequence 347 353 query waveform segment 336 341 reserving for segment sequence 350 reserving for waveform segment 339 segment characteristics 453 sequence characteristics 454 storing segment sequence 87 storing waveform segment 86 Microprocessor Description 450 Minimum arbitrary waveform frequency 155 parameters in coupling groups 288 parameters using 81 ramp wave frequency 155 sine wave frequency 155 square wave frequency 155 triangle wave frequency 155 Module getting started 19 52 installing in mainframe 25 removing from mainframe 25 MULSEG Example Program 96 98 Multiple AFG operations 203 222 AFG operations program comments 222 AFG operations together 218 222 AFGs lock stepping 176 180 marker pulses 207 211 SCPI commands linking 288 segment lists 207 211 N Naming Segment Sequences query 348 Naming Waveform Segments 86 query 336 Negative Transition Filter 384 387 431 435 NOISE Example Program 112 Noise generating 112 Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms 447 Number of arms setting 169 171 o
177. 520 2530 2540 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segm execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR ENTER Afg Seq3_addr SUBEND SUB Rst Isequence location Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM OAfg OAfg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr OUTPUT EAfg RST CLS OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf del Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 2550 COM OAfg OAfg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seg2_addr Seq3_addr 2560 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 2570 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 2580 OUTPUT OAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 2590 SUBEND Comments e SCPI commands are included in this program to load segment and Visual BASIC and Visual C C Program Versions sequence memory and initialize the AFG This program executes as intended when the SCPI commands are executed prior to writing to the registers e The sequence in which the Waveform Selection Registers are written to and the register contents are summarized below The Traffic Register selects the source which specifies addresses in sequence base memory that in turn select the waveform sequences The Waveform Select Register selected by the Traffic
178. 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and which 130 generate the square wave 140 CALL Rst 150 CALL Squ_wave Continued on Next Page 174 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Squ wave 210 Squ wave Subprogram which selects reference oscillator source 220 IINTernal2 trigger source INTernal2 and the output 230 frequency function and amplitude 240 COM Afg 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator 260 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Itrigger source 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 10E6 loutput frequency 280 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU loutput function 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1VPP lamplitude 300 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM lwait for arm state 310 SUBEND 320 330 SUB Rst 340 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 350 COM Afg 360 OUTPUT OAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG 370 ENTER Afg Complete 380 SUBEND 390 400 SUB Errmsg 410 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 420 COM Afg 430 DIM Message 256 440 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 450 B SPOLL Afg 460 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 470 OUTPUT Afg 480 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 490 REPEAT 500 OUTP
179. 8 Kelerente Oscillator uuu ete hee eee ERR ee 448 Frequency Generating e o tk ee HE A Ee Re we a 448 Torr CNY e ARE AREER RAR SRDS AA e de 450 CUETO aca EK AS AAA E Ru Rede qeu dd 450 VICTOR og oh ed adeo oho uode Ro deeper d 450 Generating Sinusoid Waveforms een 450 Output Circuitry Despont 14 0434 68 A ROCK X XO RR ON Se ees 451 FICO AA A ecce Be Rew A 451 PUES ok ke he ek he ee oH A Oo OE Oe Ee NE RARE ORG 451 DUGAN eds BREE ARA A de EKER AEG 451 nr ffl MEC Pr CM rm 451 APG Memory Descrpfloli deck Ree RO m ELS RES EA OO HS 452 Appendix A HP E1445A Specifications llle 453 PPO Comens aua usd C een oe e dede AA Bob e Re dp Cod 453 Memory Characteristics eo r eer a ee eh KA Oe POR RO AR edo 453 Frequency and Sample Rate Characteristics o 454 Amplitude CEaracteristio cios ra e Xe ee Rd 457 Interface Characteristics 2c po eee eh tinter etie EEEE s 459 Appendix B Usetul Tables o kso RO E dX RE RE RR v 463 APRITE COMEN lt lt dh a dee Bd iia dO etm des 463 Example Program Listing 2er rr A 464 Command Coupling GITOUDE corria AA 467 lua poids fe a A at sd S 470 A de deeded Wend te OR Ge Renda ee Bedok a Ores aS 471 Power On Reset CostigitalibD ius dou a oce po bee e oo Os EOS REG SE OS 472 e Lond da CRA ERPS dee ooo ER Re Ske de ub es 475 Settings Conflict Error Messages xd sek 9 eb SER Eo HSE AA 480 Appendix C Register Based Programming o 483 Append LOUIS
180. 9 AFG Status Introduction This chapter describes the HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator status system Included is information on the status groups used by the AFG the conditions monitored by each group and information on how to enable a condition to interrupt the computer This main sections of this chapter include e Status System Registers 00 0 0 esee Page 429 The Questionable Signal Status Group Page 431 The Operation Status Group 0005 Page 435 The Standard Event Status Group 4 Page 439 The Status Byte Status Group 0005 Page 442 Status System Registers Operating conditions within the AFG are monitored by registers in various status groups The status groups implemented by the AFG are e Questionable Signal Status Group Condition Register Transition Filter Event Register Enable Register Operation Status Group Condition Register Transition Filter Event Register Enable Register e Standard Event Status Group Standard Event Status Register Standard Event Status Enable Register e Status Byte Status Group Status Byte Register Service Request Enable Register The relationship between the registers and filters in these groups is shown in Figure 9 1 Chapter 9 AFG Status 429 Questionable Signal Status Group Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition m STATus QUEStionable NT
181. 96 860 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform 870 880 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SINX_S 890 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 900 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN X 910 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FUNC USER SINX S 920 930 OUTPUT QAfg s INIT IMM 940 SUBEND 950 960 SUB Rst 970 Rst Subprogram which resets the master and slave AFGs 980 COM OAfg_m OAfg_s Waveform 990 OUTPUT Afg_m RST OPC lreset master AFG 1000 ENTER Afg_m Complete 1010 1020 OUTPUT Afg_s RST OPC lreset servant AFG 1030 ENTER Afg_s Complete 1040 SUBEND 1050 1060 SUB Wf del 1070 Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 1080 COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform 1090 OUTPUT Afg_m FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 1100 OUTPUT Afg_m LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences 1110 OUTPUT Afg_m LIST SEGM DEL ALL Idelete all segments 1120 1130 OUTPUT Afg_s FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 1140 OUTPUT Afg_s LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences 1150 OUTPUT Afg_s LIST SEGM DEL ALL Idelete all segments 1160 SUBEND 1170 1180 SUB Errmsg 1190 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 1200 COM OAfg_m OAfg_s Waveform 1210 DIM Message 256 1220 IRead master AFG status byte register clear service request bit 1230 B SPOLL Afg_m 1240 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 1250 OUTPUT Afg_m 1260 OUTPUT Afg_m ABORT labort
182. 98 TRIG STOP SOURce 398 TRIG SWEep IMMediate 399 TRIG SWEep LINK 400 TRIG SWEep SOURce 401 TRIG SWEep TIMer 402 Triggering and arming 163 202 and arming a frequency list 193 195 and arming a frequency sweep 190 192 and arming frequency sweeps and lists 186 189 and arming immediately 201 and arming program comments 197 201 commands 172 391 402 the AFG 172 185 TRIWAVE Example Program 67 68 TST 46 426 TTLTren control source 150 151 functions 460 trigger lines driving the 162 U UNS_DAT Example Program 230 Unsigned data combined 245 249 data generating waveforms with 229 230 number format 229 245 Useful Tables 463 482 amplitude limits 471 command coupling groups 467 469 error messages 475 479 error messages settings conflict 480 482 example program listing 464 466 frequency limits 470 power on reset configuration 472 474 Using ABORt 196 arbitrary blocks 130 132 arbitrary blocks definite length 231 234 arbitrary blocks indefinite length 235 238 arbitrary waveforms 152 153 combined waveform segments 250 258 combined waveform sequences 250 258 DAC codes to send data 114 different frequency generators 99 102 104 digital port in connector 272 279 divide by n frequency generator 174 175 embedded controller 23 FSK control source 147 149 gating 196 HP El446A with AFG 23 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 527 maximum parameters 81 minimum parameters 81
183. 99 system registers 429 430 Status Byte register 442 status group 442 Status Register 429 430 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 525 description 381 operation 381 operation status group 435 437 questionable signal 381 questionable signal group 431 434 standard event status group 439 441 status byte status group 442 STATus Subsystem 381 388 STAT OPC INITiate 382 STAT OPERation CONDition 383 STAT OPERation ENABle 383 STAT OPERation EVENt 384 STAT OPERation NTRansition 384 STAT OPERation PTRansition 385 STAT PRESet 385 STAT QUEStionable CONDition 386 STAT QUEStionable ENABle 386 STAT QUEStionable EVENt 387 STAT QUEStionable NTRansition 387 STAT QUEStionable PTRansition 388 STB 426 Stop arm cycle 397 398 frequencies 121 123 frequencies setting 329 trigger slope setting 398 trigger sources 398 triggers external slope 200 triggers sources 199 triggers using 180 182 196 Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC gating polarity 393 STOPTRIG Example Program 181 182 Subsystems SCPI Commands ABORt 290 ARM 291 297 CALibration 298 305 INITiate 306 307 OUTPut 1 308 311 SOURce 312 380 SOURce ARB itrary 313 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 319 329 SOURce FREQuency2 330 331 SOURce FUNCtion 332 333 SOURce LIST 1 334 357 SOURce LIST2 358 360 SOURce MARKer 361 364 SOURce PM 365 367 SOURce RAMP 368 369 SOURce ROSCillator 370 371 SOURce SWEep 372 376 SOU
184. 992 4 kVCD 8 kVAD IEC 801 3 1984 EN50082 1 1992 3 V m TEC 801 4 1988 EN50082 1 1992 1 kV Power Line 0 5 kV Signal Lines Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC inclusive 93 68 EEC and carries the CE marking accordingly Tested in a typical HP C Size VXI Mainframe July 29 1996 ft QA Manager European contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Herrenberger Strafe 130 D 71034 B blingen Germany FAX 49 703 1 14 3143 HP E1445A User s Manual 15 Notes 16 HPE1445A User s Manual cut along this line Please fold and tape for mailing Reader Comment Sheet HP E1445A User s Manual Edition 3 You can help us improve our manuals by sharing your comments and suggestions In appreciation of your time we will enter you in a quarterly drawing for a Hewlett Packard Palmtop Personal Computer U S government employees cannot participate in the drawing Your Name City State Province Company Name Country Job Title Zip Postal Code Telephone Number with Area Code Please fist the system controller operating system programming language and plug in modules you are using fold here NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO 37 LOVELAND CO AE POS
185. A atk Rok NA A od ot EEA dee PR 310 ALC rd 3o 8 NOR Spoleto god Endo dede eae dad 311 ETAR ereet ahaa a E a eae Chee eo 311 MORT nta as da E EE EEEE EE a 12 SOU ARBOL a A SOS 313 DACIPORMA rro Gog be OO A A A A hoe OR 313 DAL SOURCE 624 Sb eK sara HAH A o S 315 POSNI AAA 316 JOCIWNIGARQCOMPISUE uuu auos RR ac OR SE ee da 318 SOURCE IPREQUEOSTO ob et hd OME Ee e RARA 319 LENT S bk kes oes bh ORE RE RAE EDK Oe ke EE KE Re Se 321 LEW FRA 4 apa sobres AA bE MCA Ow Y ded EAR 322 TOKO a he ER Ge ey WR berber dea de A far de de de ee 323 FSKey SOURC oc kK EY RAE ORR E E QE ROSOE RO OE ORDER EEE EEG 324 MODE 108 4 aw GC EEE AEDS EE ERED OLED EE AAA 325 Dos o goat idk wee ee a he a a e E E 326 wg V fh tt tha ESSER RE BREED GEER ERS ORE 327 SIRE cara ARA A AAA RORIS MEA 328 AA AI rc ub COR Rope ek pe E Ce 329 SOURCE PREQUGHCY2 a ri ode a DKK EERE e RO eR HE po 330 fW PLE uude xoxo dd AEE RE ROR ESS Se Re cd 331 SOURCE FUNCOM e ere REE EE RESTA 332 HAPE NM 332 USER raras ada a A E ad 333 POURS IESE o2ks 204846844 044460424 Fe Red ee BR oe esos 334 PORMA DATA CD ee ode a me eth ke oa 335 SEGMentl ADDRess 2 4 2 4 44454 cross HE EO x X HS 336 SECGBMIentE CATG 3 42 s RR ARA X R 336 SEGMent CONIBiBed codo ORO A AA AT SEGMent COMBined POINts 2e 338 ESEEMERTDERDS 4o owes dk tsik kie e ROO oh OC REE EERO ED 339 3EGNTent SPB ALE uu uuu Robe a COR ee Oe ee 340 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual C
186. A A See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug amp play Programming See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug amp play Soft Front Panel See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIbus A24 address space query 407 backplane downloading segment data 259 268 backplane using 259 271 506 508 characteristics 461 data transfer bus operating mode 406 ECL trigger lines 361 362 factory settings 20 loading DAC from 506 508 local bus operating mode 403 404 local bus testing 405 406 VXIDOWN Example Program 264 268 VXISRCE Example Program 270 271 506 508 W WAI 427 Wait for Arm State 164 Wait for Trigger State 164 WARNINGS 14 Warranty 13 WAVE SEL Example Program 500 505 Waveform Select Register 499 Waveforms aborting 196 arming immediately 293 FSK using arbitrary 152 153 generating arbitrary 83 116 generating arbitrary command flowchart 84 85 generating arbitrary damped sine waves 107 108 generating arbitrary description 86 87 generating arbitrary exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 generating arbitrary half rectified sine waves 111 generating arbitrary noise 112 generating arbitrary sample programs 104 109 111 112 generating arbitrary sample rate setting 331 generating arbitrary simple 88 92 generating arbitrary sin x x 105 106 generating arbitrary spiked sine waves 109 generating arbitrary with different frequency generators 99 102 104 generating arbitrary wit
187. A AFG Module User s Manual Index H Half Rectified Sine Waves generating 111 High Speed Data Register 506 High Speed Operation 223 280 program comments 280 How HP BASIC transfers 32 bit integer data 255 the AFG generates arbitrary waveforms 86 87 to free memory 113 HP BASIC how to transfer 32 bit integer data 255 HP BASIC Language Programs 29 31 464 466 AFGGENI 102 AFGGEN2 104 ARBWAVE 91 92 BURST 170 171 CHARGE 108 109 COMBSEQ 255 258 COMBSIGN 242 244 COMBUNS 247 249 DACBLOKI 232 234 DACBLOK2 236 238 DCVOLTS 56 57 DIV_N 174 175 DRIFT 220 222 end of line terminator 31 ERRORCHK 49 441 EXT_ARM 167 168 FREQI REG 489 491 FREQ2 REG 492 494 FSK1 148 149 FSK2 150 151 FSK_ARB 152 153 GATE 184 185 LISTI 125 126 LIST_STP 194 195 LIST_TME 139 140 LISTDEF 131 132 LOCKSTEP 177 180 LOG_SWP 133 134 LRN 48 MARKSEGI 209 211 MARKSEG2 213 MARKTRG 215 217 MULSEG 96 98 NOISE 112 OSG_RQS 437 OUTPLOAD 70 71 OUTPUNIT 73 74 PHAS_CHNG 496 497 PHS_MOD 76 77 QSSG_RQS 433 434 RSTCLS 47 RSTSINE 51 SIGN_DAT 227 228 SIN_D 107 108 SIN_R 111 SIN_X 105 106 SINEWAVE 59 60 SLFTST 47 SMPLSWPI 122 123 SMPLSWP2 128 129 SPIKES 109 SQUWAVE 63 64 STOPTRIG 181 182 SWP_ARB 141 143 SWP_LEVL 30 31 145 146 SWP_PVST 136 137 SWP_STEP 191 192 SWP_TRIG 188 189 system configuration 29 TRIWAVE 67 68 UNS_DAT 230 VXIDOWN 264 268 VXISRCE 270 271 506 508 WAVE_SEL 500 505 WAVSE
188. ALL Idelete all segments 640 SUBEND 650 660 SUB Errmsg 670 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 COM Afg DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 153 770 ENTER Afg Code Message 780 PRINT Code Message 790 UNTIL Code 0 800 STOP 810 SUBEND Visual BASIC and Visual C C Program Versions The Visual BASIC example program FSK_ARB FRM is in directory VBPROG and the Visual C example program FSK_ARB C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Sweeping and FSK Program Comments Reference Oscillator Sources Sample Sources The following information is associated with sweeping frequency lists and frequency shift keying Included are details on the operation of these functions and on the various modes ranges etc used in the programs in this chapter There are five reference oscillator sources for the AFG which are selected by the SOURce ROSCillator SOURce command CLK10 The VXIbus CLK10 10 MHz line EXTernal The AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or 1 The VXIbus ECL trigger l
189. ASIC and The Visual BASIC example program COMBUNS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program COMBUNS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A This program sends the combined list using Unsigned data as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data It is thus very similar to the UNS DAT program beginning on page 230 and the DACBLOK2 program beginning on page 236 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 249 Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment Sequences Using Combined Segment Lists and Combined Segment Sequence Lists to generate arbitrary waveforms is one of the fastest methods to download or transfer waveform segments and segment sequences to the AFG Both can be downloaded to the AFG either as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data The Combined Segment Lists transfers both the arbitrary waveform segment data and marker pulses to the AFG The lists are sent as 16 bit Integers in either the Signed or Unsigned number format See Using Combined Signed Data on page 239 for more information The Combined Segment Sequence List selects the waveform segments enables the marker output and sets the repetition count for each waveform segment to be output Each data code in a Combined Segment Sequence List is sent as a 32 bit Integer in the Unsigned number format Combined Seg ment Figure 7 2 shows a single 32 bit integer used for a Combine
190. AVSELPP 272 277 Executing coupled commands 28 288 SCPI commands 288 several waveform segments 93 98 Exponential Charge Discharge Waveform generating 108 109 EXT_ARM Example Program 167 168 External reference oscillator frequency 370 stop trigger slope 200 F Factory Settings 20 Filter description 451 low pass output 308 309 negative transition 384 387 431 435 positive transition 385 388 431 435 Flowchart arbitrary waveform commands 84 85 ARM TRIG 164 frequency lists commands 118 119 frequency sweep commands 118 119 frequency shift keying FSK commands 118 119 marker pulse commands 204 standard waveform commands 54 55 Format combined segment list 239 240 245 combined segment sequence list 250 260 combined waveform segment list 259 common comands 284 DAC codes 313 314 definite length block data 231 indefinite length block data 235 SCPI commands 284 285 signed number 225 226 signed number combined list 240 unsigned number 229 unsigned number combined list 245 FREQ1_REG Example Program 489 491 FREQ2_REG Example Program 492 494 Frequency agility 456 characteristics 454 456 external reference oscillator 370 generator DDS 79 99 102 449 489 491 generator description 448 449 generator divide by n 99 101 104 174 175 449 492 494 limits 470 list advance trigger 201 list arming 193 195 201 295 list defining 359 list query length 360 list setting up
191. Afg_m SOUR MARK ECLT1 FEED ARM STAR LAY2 Ifeed arm source 450 OUTPUT QAfg m SOUR MARK ECLT1 STAT ON lenable ECLT1 trig line 460 SUBEND 470 480 SUB Square wave s 490 Square wave s ISubprogram which sets up servant AFG square wave 500 lin phase with master AFG reference oscillator source 510 lexternal 520 COM Afg_m Afg_s 530 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR ROSC SOUR ECLTO lreference source 540 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR ROSC FREQ EXT 40E6 lreference frequency 550 OUTPUT Afg_s TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Itrigger source 560 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FREQ2 FIX 5E6 frequency 570 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function 580 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 590 OUTPUT Afg_s ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR ECLT1 larm source 600 610 OUTPUT QAfg s INIT IMM lwait for arm state 620 OUTPUT Afg_s STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC lallow setup to complete 630 ENTER Afg_s Complete 640 SUBEND 650 660 SUB Rst 670 Rst Subprogram which resets the AFGs 680 COM Afg_m Afg_s 690 OUTPUT Afg_m RST OPC lreset the master AFG 700 ENTER Afg_m Complete 710 720 OUTPUT OAfg_s RST OPC lreset the servant AFG 730 ENTER Afg_s Complete 740 SUBEND 750 760 SUB Errmsg 770 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 COM Afg_m Afg_s DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg_m IF B TH
192. BEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FSK2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program FSK2 C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A FSK Using an TheFSK ARB program uses frequency shift keying with an arbitrary Arbitrary Waveform _ waveform to shift between two sample rates The control source is a 5 V signal applied to the AFG s front panel FSK In BNC connector HP BASIC Program Example FSK ARB 1 IRE STORE FSK ARB 2 This program shifts the frequency of an arbitrary waveform 3 Ibased on a control signal applied to the FSK In BNC connector 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 Call the subprogram which resets and clears the AFG 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Wf del 150 ISet the FSK mode the FSK sample frequencies for 1 kHz and 160 12 kHz output frequencies the FSK source the function and 170 loutput level 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FSK IFSK mode 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK 4 096E6 8 192E6 Isample frequencies 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT IFSK source 210 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V lamplitude 230 Call the su
193. C FORMat command The data is sent as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data can also be sent as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data Setup the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine length Store the Second Waveform Segment as Signed Combined Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC voltage list This command stores the waveform segment and marker bit into segment memory in the Signed format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The data is sent as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data can also be sent as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data In this example the marker bit is set at the center of the triangle Select the First Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess These commands selects the first waveform segment and then returns the address Divide the address by 8 and store it into the first element of the 32 bit Integer data array that is used to transfer the sequence list to the AFG Add the First Waveform Segment s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment is to be executed of the first waveform segment to the value in the first element of the data array Select the Second Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess Thes
194. CAL unused FREQ unused The Transition Filter FREQuency Bit 5 is set 1 when the frequency generated by the divide by n SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem differs from the programmed frequency by greater than 1 Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 CALibration Bit 8 is set 1 when an error is detected in non volatile calibration memory Reading the Condition Register The settings of bits 5 and 8 can be determined by reading the Condition Register with the command STATus QUEStionable CONDition Bit 5 has a corresponding decimal value of 32 and bit 8 has a decimal value of 256 Reading the Condition Register does not affect the bit settings The bits are cleared following a reset RST Bit 8 calibration will remain set however if the error condition persists The Transition Filter specifies which type of bit transition in the Condition Register will set corresponding bits in the Event Register Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions 0 to 1 or negative transitions 1 to 0 The commands used to set the transitions are STATus QUEStionable NTRansition unmask STATus QUEStionable PTRansition unmask NTRansition sets the negative transition For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Condition Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register PTRansition sets the positive transition For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Conditi
195. Command Reference 389 SYSTem VERSion SYSTem VERSion returns the SCPI version number to which the HP E1445A complies 1991 0 Comment Executable when Initiated Yes e RST Condition None Example Querying the SCPI Revision SYST VERS Queries SCPI revision 390 Command Reference Chapter 8 TRIGger TRIGger Subsystem Syntax The TRIGger subsystem operates with the ARM subsystem to control the behavior of the trigger system as follows The source and slope for generating the individual samples of a waveform The source and slope of the signal that may gate sample generation The source and slope for prematurely stopping one trigger cycle without aborting the entire trigger system The source for advancing a frequency sweep or list TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt number GATE POLarity polarity SOURCe source SSTATe state IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce source no query STOP SEQuence2 IMMediate SLOPe edge SOURce source no query SWEep SEQuence3 IMMediate LINK link SOURce lt source gt TlMer period no query Chapter 8 Command Reference 391 TRIGger STARt COUNt TRIGger STARt COUNt lt number gt would normally specify the number of triggers the HP E1445A would accept after an INITiate IMMediate command before returning the start trigger sequence to the wait for arm state However
196. Contents HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual AUTEM e de A E a AA TT 15 bo nor PR eee eh rep SA AA a EAS AAA A 14 oslety Symbols 4 2x9 4o EEG RARA 14 Deslosabob of ESO a deu apres deo Ur Ope obe e t ev pale e ode De i ead 15 asi SEEE 244 044 6464 9 93 9 9 d 5 9 ka ue poe Pu obedece 17 Chapter L Deng SING udo ue dur WE e do deest a e ode OES 19 Chapter ontebl o doe ood RR e dede a dede ehe reed a 19 Preparan foy URSS ck che ea A ARCA ode oi 19 YXIbus Factory Settings gc a AAA AA RE 20 The ARG Losa Addiesl i seta o ee bt o Rd AA eo 21 Addressing the AFG External Controller and PC 22 Setting the AFG Servant Agee uoo se a RARE A Za The AFG Bus Request Level se cna cen kk dm Rom A 24 AFG Installation in a Mainframe leen 25 Instrument Language SCP 2c ck bch ede rs AA 26 CPU da e oes ds Se SS ES A 26 Command Coupling i sod em A be de dd RR eS 21 Program Languages 4 229 woe ok RRR ARR ADEA RRR k ERED HSS 29 HP BASIC Language Programs 46054 64 bbe 44 S eh EW OS 29 Visual BASIC Language Programs Using HPSICL 32 Visual C C Language Programs Using HPSICL 40 Introductory ProgtAMmS os ok ae ARR Y SCR RON a A A ERE ERS 46 APO ST ach de a ea ES E A Ge Bee d 46 HP BASIC Program Example SLFIST 44 6606 04a oS Res 47 Resetting and Clearing the APG 24 426 sux Kd dS ERE RR EA 47 HP BASIC Program Example RSLS goo aspe Wwo d ew oS Se ee RC 47 Querying the Power On Reset Config
197. D 590 600 SUB Errmsg 610 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 620 COM OAfg Pts 630 DIM Message 256 640 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 650 B SPOLL Afg 660 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 670 OUTPUT Afg 680 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 690 REPEAT 700 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 710 ENTER Afg Code Message 720 PRINT Code Message 730 UNTIL Code 0 740 STOP 750 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP STEP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP STEP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 192 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Arming and Frequency lists are started and advanced using the same arming and Triggering a triggering commands used for sweeps The LIST_STP program sets the Frequency List arm and list advance sources to BUS Thus the AFG is armed and advanced through the frequency list using the HP IB group execute trigger command TRIGGER 7 Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 on page 118 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency generator which allows frequency lists hopping TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt 2 Select the frequency list mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 3 Set the frequency list SOURce LIST 2 FREQuency freq list
198. DDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq3_addr SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seqi_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr OUTPUT Afg RST CLS OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf del Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seqi_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_ addr OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Clear sequence memory OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL Clear segment memory SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program WAVSELFP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program WAVSELFP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 277 Digital Port In Connector Pinout EE RET FEH E gs 2 HP E1445A Figure 7 6 shows a pinout of the Digital Port In connector jl Oj O j DO 3 E C2 59 8 C9 99 69 5 C2 0 0 9 CO 6909 6 9 CA 0 OO 09 k a z ONO ARWD SIGNAL FPDOO FPDO1 FPDO3 FPD04 FPDO6 FPDO7 GND FPD10 FPD11 FPD13 FPD14 FPCLK FPPACE GND FPD02 GND FPDO05 GND FPDO8 FPDO9 GND FPD12 GND FPD15 GND Figure 7 6 HP E1445A Digital Port In Connector 278 High Speed Operati on Chapter 7 Using the Digital Figure 7 7 shows
199. DON 4 46 po Rok bed ee XR RO NOR o Rok E ES 383 OPERSSGEENABIe 23 6444 amp e BOSE DES ERES OR ROCA S A 383 JOPERaBOn EVENTI cian see ad 60 Ro ad amp p CUR OR E eS 384 OPERatiom N TR HHSIIOD us ox om CKD RR a ER ROHR A 384 3OPRBRalomnPTERSIUSIBON xoa 4 RG Reh ARR Aa 385 PRESA aa ee tee hk del Se eb ee d 385 QUEStionable CONDition ee 386 i DUTESuonable ENABI 42 44 6466 oAE SOR ERS ORE ERR HSE 386 CGUEStonable EVEN 44449 84 6d bee be OLED ROHR AA 387 QUEStionable NTRansition 2 ee 387 QUEStionable PTRansition 564 6 he eR eR RA ROE RES RE 3 A A 388 SOc s oe eS EG ded ee qe sci qu a3 d oed ee Oe eu 389 unc n AM ye ek ede aR OE aa Em a eI ob ob eee eo Gh eee he ale BOS 389 VERSION 25 ici eo E 4 RA bende Gd ub Ro Rode ok Ewe eK 390 WRITES 4 6 A Che ODE EEE ARERR EERE dO SEES 391 STAR COUME ba eed de o ee eR dede SE ow desine de 392 STABITGATBIPOLSAS IBU irritar 393 ST ABRE TESSOLIBGS sre dod ia OCC e OO EIC de 393 LS PARUHIATE STAVE ai 64 ae WSR Auk RE EC RO ORO ORE EEN 394 S TARIDINMBM SIS risa do a ek RS 395 ESTARIESDOPS 112 4 20550 OES A RRS 395 ESTARE SOURES e E AR 396 ie AAA 397 DOSES ua a a a A aa 398 TDI A PAS BOSS ES SESE RS BREE BER dei E 398 SWEspl Tate 000000 ao doo E Oe ok ek dog end 399 SJSWESELINK scort a a E EO OK EES 400 SWEEPSOURCE 15 4454 V Xx GC ARA A 401 WP LM a e PRESSES SOAR e OS EGE ES 402 VINSE etae ka ad dde e ded te S 403 CONFisare E LBUSCMODE 4424 a 6a
200. DOWN VXI TRI 2048 OUTPUT Afg OPC ENTER Afg Ready IDownload the waveform segment to segment memory using WRITEIO and tthe AFG s high speed data register The register s address is llocated in A24 address space FOR l 1 TO 2048 WRITEIO 16 Base addr IVAL 26 16 Waveform l NEXT I OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ARB DOWN COMP Idisable downloading SUBEND Continued on Next Page 266 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 1080 1090 SUB Seq list 1100 Seq lis This subprogram downloads the sequence list repetition 1110 Icount marker segment address to sequence memory over 1120 the VXIbus 1130 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 1 2 1140 REAL Addrm1 Addrm2 1150 COM Afg Base_addr 1160 CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with WRITEIO 1170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SINE Idetermine segment address 1180 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR 1190 ENTER Afg Addrm1 1200 Addrm1 Addrm1 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment 1210 1220 ISequence 1 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for 1230 Isegment SINE Sequence 1 2 is the starting address of segment SINE 1240 Sequence 1 1 SHIFT 4096 2 4 Addrm1 DIV 65536 1250 Sequence 1 2 Addrm1 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm1 MOD 65536 gt 32767 1260 1270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Idetermine segment address 1280 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR 1290 ENTER Afg Addrm2 1300 Addrm2 Addrm2 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment 1310 132
201. DRess 347 SSEQuence CA Talog 348 SSEQuence COMBined 348 SSEQuence COMBined POINts 349 SSEQuence DEFine 350 SSEQuence DELete ALL 351 SSEQuence DELete SELected 351 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt 352 SSEQuence DWEL I COUNt POINts 353 SSEQuence FREE 353 SSEQuence MAR Ker 354 SSEQuence MAR Ker POINts 355 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint 355 SSEQuence SELect 356 SSEQuence SEQuence 357 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents 357 SOURce LIST2 Subsystem 358 360 FORMat DATA 358 E CI ILC 524 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index FREQuency 359 FREQuency POINts 360 SOURce MAR Ker Subsystem 361 364 ECL Trgn FEED 361 ECLTren STATe 362 FEED 363 POLarity 364 STATe 364 SOURce PM Subsystem 365 367 DEViation 365 SOURce 366 STATe 367 UNIT ANGLe 367 SOURce RAMP Subsystem 368 369 POINts 368 POLarity 369 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem 370 371 FREQuency EXTernal 370 SOURce 371 SOURce SWEep Subsystem 372 376 COUNt 372 DIRection 373 POINts 374 375 TIME 376 SOURce PM Subsystem 377 380 LEV IMM AMPL 377 378 LEV IMM AMPL UNIT VOLT 379 LEV IMM OFFSet 380 Sources arming 199 arming setting 166 168 294 DAC 280 315 downloading 280 FSK control 161 FSK sample rate 324 gating 200 393 marker available 205 206 361 363 phase modulation data 366 reference oscillator 78 115 154 197 371 sample arbitrary waveform 115
202. EGMent ADDRess CATalog COMBined combined list POINts DEFine length DELete ALL SELected FREE MARKer marker list POINts SPOint point SELect lt name gt VOLTage voltage list DAC voltage list POINts SSEQuence ADDRess CATalog COMBined combined list POINts DEFine length DELete ALL SELected DWELI COUNt repetition list POINts FREE MARKer marker list POINts SPOint point SELect lt name gt SEQuence segment list SEGMents query only query only query only no query no query query only query only no query query only query only query only query only no query no query query only query only query only no query query only 334 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt specifies the format of numeric waveform segment and segment sequence list return data in the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem The available numeric list return data formats are ASCii Returns numeric data as an NR1 or NR3 number as defined in IEEE 488 2 PACKed Returns data in IEEE 488 2 definite block format Internal to the block the format depends on the query being executed as list below The most significant byte of each value is always sent first SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBine
203. EGMent SELect command SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL deletes all segment data currently in the segment memory Use the command if there is insufficient segment memory available to store new segments Amplitu de Effects Ifthe segment data is sent as voltage values the AFG changes the data into on Voltage Lists digital to analog converter DAC codes This requires that the voltage value of the segment data MUST NOT exceed the AFG s current amplitude level set by SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude If it does the AFG generates an error Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 113 Using DAC Codes Besides sending the points in a waveform segment as voltage data they can to Send Seg ment also be sent as signed or unsigned DAC codes data Since the AFG always Data stores DAC codes into memory setting the amplitude levels is not necessary if sending segment data as DAC codes instead of voltages See Chapter 7 on how to store DAC codes Sending Segment e SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list selects Sequ ences the sequence in which the waveform segments are to be executed The waveform segments must be in memory or the AFG generates an error Each waveform segment name to be executed must be separated by a comma For example to execute the sine and tri waveform segments send the command as SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ sine tri A waveform segment can be executed more than once in a
204. EN Imaster error End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg_m OUTPUT Afg_m ABORT labort output waveform PRINT Master AFG PRINT REPEAT OUTPUT Afg_m SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg_m Code Message Continued on Next Page Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 221 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP ELSE Iservant error B SPOLL Afg_s End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg_s OUTPUT Afg_s ABORT labort output waveform PRINT Servant AFG PRINT REPEAT OUTPUT Afg_s SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg_s Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP END IF SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DRIFT FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DRIFT C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Marker Program Comments The following program comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapter Determining the Use SOURce LIST 1 MARKer POINts to determine the length of the g Number of Marker marker pulse list selected by SOURce LIST 1 MARKer The command Points of a returns the marker list size of the currently selected waveform segment Waveform Segment Determining the Use SOURce
205. END SUB Fsk 220 Fsk Subprogram which sets up frequency shift keying and the front 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 panel FSK In BNC as the control source COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency1 generator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FSK IFSK mode OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 FSK 5E6 10E6 IFSK frequencies OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT IFSK source OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS FREQ 10 MHZ tfilter OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS STAT ON lenable filter OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND Continued on Next Page 148 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 370 SUB Rst 380 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 390 COM Afg 400 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 410 ENTER Afg Complete 420 SUBEND 430 440 SUB Fsk info 450 Fsk info X Subprogram which queries FSK frequencies and source 460 COM Afg 470 DIM Frequencies 80 480 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 FSK Iquery FSK frequencies 490 ENTER OAfg Frequencies 500 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ FSK SOUR Iquery FSK source 510 ENTER Afg Source 520 PRINT FSK frequencies are Frequencies 530 PRINT FSK control source is Source 540 SUBEND 550 560 SUB Errmsg 570 Errmsg Subprogram which displ
206. EQuency2 subsystem If the programmed frequency differs from the actual output frequency by greater than 1 a service request interrupt is sent to the computer which responds with a message indicating the condition The steps of the program are 1 Set the bit transition which will latch the event frequency error in the Event Register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt or STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt 432 AFG Status Chapter 9 2 Unmask bit 4 FREQ in the Enable Register so that the event latched into the Event Register will generate a Questionable Signal Status Group summary bit STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt 3 Unmask bit 3 QUE in the Service Request Enable Register so that a service request is generated when the Questionable Signal Status Group summary bit is received SRE lt unmask gt HP BASIC Program Example QSSG_RQS 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 IRE STORE QSSG_RQS This program generates a service request when the output frequency Igenerated by the SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem differs from the programmed frequency by more than 1 lAssign an l O path between the computer and the E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg IReset the AFG CALL Rst ISet up the computer to respond to the service request ON INTR 7 CALL Disp msg ENABLE INTR 7 2 ISet up the AFG to monitor the output frequency OUTPUT Afg CLS Icle
207. ER lt name gt INITiate IMMediate 226 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 HP BASIC Program Example SIGN_DAT 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 The SIGN_DAT program is very similar to the example programs used in Chapter 3 The only difference is that this program generates in line 360 and transfers in line 430 segment data as DAC codes in the Signed number format instead of voltage values IRE STORE SIGN_DAT This program downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed 1 2 s complement DAC codes The waveform defined is a 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT OAfg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function arbitrary OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp wave 310 Ramp wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 Isequence COM OAfg DIM Waveform 1 200 ICalculate wavefo
208. ERRor 389 SYSTem VERSion 390 T Time sweep advance trigger 402 sweeps 376 versus frequency lists 138 140 159 versus points 135 137 159 Traffic Register 498 Transferring calibration constants 299 300 combined list in signed number format 240 combined list in unsigned number format 245 DAC codes in signed number format 225 240 DAC codes in unsigned number format 229 245 data 32 bit integer in HP BASIC 255 data using definite length arbitrary blocks 231 234 data using indefinite length arbitrary blocks 235 238 Transition Filters negative 384 387 431 435 operation status group 435 positive 385 388 431 435 questionable signal status group 431 TRG 426 Triangle Waves doubling frequency 156 generating 65 68 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 368 polarity 369 Trigger circuitry description 450 gating signals 183 185 lines ECLTrgn 204 205 361 362 lines TTL Trgn 150 151 162 slope setting 395 398 stop triggers external slope 200 stop triggers sources 199 stop triggers using 180 182 196 system ABORt command 290 system ARM commands 291 297 system INITiate command 306 307 TRIGger Subsystem 391 402 TRIG STARt COUNt 392 TRIG STARt GATE POLarity 393 TRIG STARt GATE SOURce 393 TRIG STARt GATE STATe 394 TRIG STARt IMMediate 395 TRIG STARt SLOPe 395 TRIG STARt SOURce 396 TRIG STOP IMMediate 397 oma TRIG STOP SLOPe 3
209. ES 425 A A Eb pete de xe ab do vb fe tabe b opes iuda e be de 426 ITR area Ed dab dede HEE 3 pop a aped 426 PIRE xn QURE RC RES EUR Au ee eh eee CE A A BOR e de RS 426 ONAL ed dci ook A d d tete uh Qoa A to a hw petet da 427 Common Commands Quick Reference ao case 22e 428 Chapter 9 AFG Slats socorro ARA EUR OR OHS 429 A a eek Bele We te dee ee Bo eh ae Ee Ba 429 Status System Registers 2 4 44 oe cor ko radii at EE EEE AR o OR E 429 The Questionable Signal Status Group 431 Propran Examples 22 ds a Se a e dr A EH ve id 432 HP BASIC Program Example QSSG_RQS 0 o o oo o 433 The Pperation Status GOUD ux ue ka ee AA A A 435 Program Examples d 4 4d kOe e EDR E CELE DRO EE AA A 436 HP BASIC Program Example OSG_RQS 437 The Standard Event Status Group o o eee eee 439 Program Example 4 2 us Ru OR PRO SEE OR RE VOY RE ow 440 HP BASIC Program Example ERRORCHK o 441 The Status Byte Status GMO uso eso Shoe A 442 Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description o 445 Chapter Contents id ARA HB wh a a a 445 APG Dspace SKA SOK ERR RAKE RS KREEM X REOR 3 B o CREE RC LA RC 445 Juburry Waveform D schp bk lt io s eke eae AAA 446 10 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents Generating Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms o o e 447 Cult DA a uideo ae RA dedo A ARA dedo d 447 RIGS A O ee 44
210. IM Message 256 Continued on Next Page Ireference oscillator Itrigger source frequency range frequency function Iwaveform points lamplitude Idc offset Iwait for arm state lreset the AFG Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 67 450 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 460 B SPOLL Afg 470 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 480 OUTPUT Afg 490 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 500 REPEAT 510 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 520 ENTER Afg Code Message 530 PRINT Code Message 540 UNTIL Code 0 550 STOP 560 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program TRIWA VE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program TRIWAVE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 68 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Selecting the Output Loads 50 Q LOADS 75 O LOADS NNN 500 Load Value 750 Load Value AFG Impedance 502 AFG Impedance 750 For open circuit outputs the actual OPEN CIRCUITS output amplitude is twice the matched load amplitude Select the 50 Q or 75 Q Load Value OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity AFG Impedance Open Circuit or Infinity command for the AFG to output the correct amplitude value for open circuits AFG Impedance 50 Q or 75 Q0 The OUTPLOAD program sets the AFG s output impedance to the output load value of 75
211. IME number 6 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 7 Setthe number of waveform points triangle wave SOURce RAMP POINts number 8 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate 138 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 HP BASIC Program Example LIST_TME IRE STORE LIST_TME 2 The following program steps through a frequency list at a rate 3 Isuch that a new frequency is output every 1 second 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL List_time 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB List time 210 List count Subprogram which continuously outputs a frequency list 220 lin which the frequencies are 1s apart 230 COM Afg 240 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST list mode 250 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST2 FREQ 2 5E3 5E3 7 5E3 10E3 freq list 260 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR SWE COUN INF Ihop through list continuously 270 OUTPUT Afg TRIG SWE SOUR TIM list advance source 280 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR SWE TIME 3 Itime through list 290 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP TRI Ifunction 300 OUT
212. Ithe frequency to registers on the AFG 520 COM OAfg Base_addr 530 CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO 540 550 ICalculate frequency value written to registers 560 IF Range 0 THEN 570 Phase DVAL Freq Npts Reference 0sc 2 4 294967296E 9 16 580 ELSE 590 Phase DVAL Freq Npts Reference_osc 4 294967296E 9 16 600 END IF 610 620 IWrite the first byte of the frequency value to register A7 the 630 Isecond byte to register A5 the third byte to register A3 and the 640 fourth byte to register A1 650 WRITEIO 16 Base addr IVAL A7 16 IVAL Phase 1 2 16 660 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A5 16 IVAL Phase 3 2 16 670 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A3 16 IVAL Phase 5 2 16 680 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A1 16 IVAL Phase J7 2 16 690 700 IGenerate the pulse which loads the new frequency Once the pulse is 710 lreceived it takes 20 reference oscillator clock cycles before the 720 Inew frequency appears at the output 730 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8D 16 0 740 SUBEND 750 760 SUB Rst 770 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 780 COM OAfg Base_addr 790 OUTPUT EAfg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 800 ENTER Afg Complete 810 SUBEND 490 Register Based Programming Appendix C Comments To simplify the program SCPI commands are included to select the reference oscillator the DDS subsystem and to start the waveform This requires that the only registers written to be the P
213. L RMC Parameters Comments Comments RCL lt number gt restores a previously stored programming state from one of the 10 possible stored state areas The lt number gt indicates which of the stored state areas should be used This command affects the same command settings as does RST Notable exceptions include the DAC code format signed vs unsigned the SOURce LIST commands including waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECure command state Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 0 through 9 none e Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands LRN RST SAV e RST Condition all saved states set to the same state as the RST state RMC lt name gt purges only the specified macro definition NOTE At printing time RMC is a command proposed and accepted for a revision and re designation of IEEE 488 2 Use the PMC command to purge all macro definitions in one command e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands DMC PMC e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 423 RST RST resets the HP E1445A as follows Sets all commands to their RST state Aborts all pending operations including waveform generation RST does not affect The state of V XIbus word ser
214. LFP 272 277 HP E1446A settings conflict error messages 482 using AFG with 23 HP IB address 22 command module port 22 interface card 22 primary address 22 secondary address 22 Idle State 164 IDN 419 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands See Common Commands Immediate arming and triggering 201 arming of waveform 293 frequency sweep or list 295 Impedance output setting 69 71 309 Implied SCPI Commands 27 285 Increasing Speed 223 280 Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks 130 132 157 data byte size 235 data format 235 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 517 transferring data using 235 238 INITiate Subsystem 306 307 INIT IMMediate 306 307 Initiating the AFG 306 307 waveforms 165 Installing Module 25 Instrument action state 164 virtual commands 403 408 Instrument Language SCPI 26 Interface characteristics 459 local bus 403 406 select code 22 Introductory Programs 46 AFG self test 46 checking for errors 49 generating sine waves 51 query power on reset configuration 48 resetting and clearing AFG 47 L LADDR 22 Linear Sweeping 375 Linking commands 288 sweep advance trigger 400 List of Example Programs 464 466 LISTI Example Program 125 126 LIST_STP Example Program 194 195 LIST_TME Example Program 139 140 LISTDEF Example Program 131 132 LMC 419 Loading DAC from VXIbus 506 508 Local Bus operating mode 403 404 specifications 460 test data 406 testing co
215. LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL to delete all waveform segment definitions with one command Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect RST Condition None 340 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Deleting a Waveform LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEL Deletes segment SEGMent FREE SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE returns information on waveform segment memory availability and usage The return data format is numeric value numeric value The first numeric value shows the amount of waveform segment memory available in points the second the amount of waveform segment memory used in points Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None RST Condition None e Power On Condition All of the waveform segment memory is available Example Querying Waveform Segment Memory Usage LIST FREE Queries segment memory usage Chapter 8 Command Reference 341 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer marker list defines for each voltage point of a waveform segment whether the HP E1445A may output a marker pulse To actually output a marker pulse the marker enable list value for the segment sequence entry for the segment must also be set to 1 SOUR
216. LR ELEME Page 235 e Using Combined Signed Data o oooooooocoooo Page 239 Combined Segment List Format Page 239 Using the Combined List with the Signed Number FO iE Page 240 e Using Combined Unsigned Data Page 245 Using the Combined List with the Unsigned Number Format cenk vs ovis IRURE pco Page 245 e Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment SEQUENCES suicido eem ee aed eee oe ees Page 250 Combined Segment Sequence List Format Page 250 e Using the VXIbus Backplane 00 Page 259 Downloading Segment Data 40 Page 259 Downloading Segment Data into Memory Page 259 Downloading Data Directly into the DAC Page 269 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 223 e Using the Front Panel s Digital Port In Connector tucanes ad ptr di Page 272 Digital Port In Connector Pinout Page 278 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Select amp SEQUENCE soeben ee o eet pane Page 279 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Download Dita i seta ke dee e aa da a Page 279 e High Speed Program Comments o ooo oococcoocoooo Page 280 Amplitude Effects on DAC Codes Page 280 Incorrect AFG Operation from Incorrect DAC Codes ms ERR dass gue ds Page 280 DAGC SOUICeS8 Loue xe t ge AE E per Page 280 Download Sources 0
217. M DEL ALL IClear segment memory 640 SUBEND 650 660 SUB Errmsg Continued on Next Page 216 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 670 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 COM Afg DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT A fg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MARKTRG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MARKTRG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 217 Operating Multiple AFGs Together The DRIFT program shows how to operate multiple AFGs together to synchronize their outputs to each other One AFG the master AFG uses its Reference Oscillator Output as the Reference Oscillator source for the second AFG the servant AFG Thus any frequency change caused by drift of the master AFG reference results in the same amount of change in the servant AFG The master AFG generates a 1 MHz square wave the servant a 500 KHz square wave HP E1445A HP E1445A Master Serva
218. ND 300 310 SUB Ramp wave 320 Ramp wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output 330 Isequence 340 COM Afg Afg1 350 INTEGER Waveform 1 200 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes 360 FOR 12100 TO 99 STEP 1 370 Waveform 101 1 2 I 050505 00125 44096 380 NEXT I 390 400 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 410 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM UNS Idac data format unsigned 420 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP segment name 430 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size 440 OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC 0 450 OUTPUT QAfg1 Waveform 460 OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END terminate with line feed LF and EOI 470 480 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT sequence name 490 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size 500 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Rst 540 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 550 COM QAfg Afg1 560 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 570 ENTER Afg Complete 580 SUBEND 590 600 SUB Wf del 610 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 620 COM QAfg Afg1 630 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 640 OUTPUT QGAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 650 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 660 SUBEND 670 680 SUB Errmsg 690 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 700 COM
219. NIT IMM Iwait for trigger state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Setup ttl5 350 Setup ttl5 Subprogram which sets up trigger line TTL Trg5 to 360 Ichange the AFG frequency shift keying frequencies 370 COM Afg Cmd_mod 380 OUTPUT Cmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 STAT ON lenable line TTLTrg5 390 OUTPUT Cmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 SOUR INT Idrive TTLTrg5 internally 400 Loop which shifts frequency 410 DISP Press Continue to shift frequency 420 PAUSE 430 DISP 440 FOR I 1 TO 10 450 IF BIT 1 0 THEN 460 OUTPUT Cmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 LEV IMM 1 level is electrically low 470 ELSE 480 OUTPUT Cmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 LEV IMM 0 llevelis electrically high 490 END IF 500 WAIT 1 510 NEXT 520 SUBEND 530 540 SUB Rst 550 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 560 COM OAfg 570 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 580 ENTER Afg Complete 590 SUBEND 600 610 SUB Errmsg 620 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 630 COM Afg Cmd_mod 640 DIM Message 256 650 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 660 B SPOLL Afg 670 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 680 OUTPUT Afg 690 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 151 700 REPEAT 710 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 720 ENTER Afg Code Message 730 PRINT Code Message 740 UNTIL Code 0 750 STOP 760 SU
220. NITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example EXT ARM 180 190 200 IRE STORE EXT ARM This program arms the AFG with an external signal applied to the IAFG Start Arm In port When armed a 10 kHz 1 VPP square wave is loutput Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL External_arm WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB External_arm 210 External_arm Subprogram which externally arms the AFG and outputs 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 la square wave COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX lfrequency mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1VPP lamplitude OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR EXT larm source OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP NEG Isignal edge OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 167 340 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 350 COM EAfg 360 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 370 ENTER EAfg Complete 380 SUBEND 390 400 SUB Errmsg 410 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 420 COM Afg 430 DIM Message 256
221. OFF Example Setting the Local Bus Operation Mode VINS CONF LBUS PIP CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO rode indicates whether the VXIbus Local Bus operation mode should be automatically set to CONSume when downloading segment or segment sequence data SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload LBUS command directly driving the main output DAC SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce LBUS command or providing phase deviation data SOURce PM SOURce LBUS command and set to OFF when none of these are active If AUTO ON is set the Local Bus operation mode is changed as needed if OFF is set the mode must be explicitly set by the VINStrument CONFigure L BUS MODE command Sets pipeline pass through mode Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce JARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE 404 Command Reference Chapter 8 VINStrument e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO ON Example Uncoupling Local Bus Operation Mode VINS CONF LBUS AUTO OFF Uncouple operation mode CONFigure TEST CONFigure VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure lt length gt configures the HP E1445A for Local Bus testing The length parameter ind
222. OLT Waveform load points 850 860 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEL N1 Iselect sequence 870 OUTPUT OAfg LIST SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments 880 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEQ NOISE Isegment order in sequence 890 SUBEND 900 910 SUBRst 920 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 930 COM OAfg 940 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 950 ENTER Afg Complete 960 SUBEND 970 980 SUB Wf del 990 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 1000 COM Afg 1010 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 1020 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences 1020 OUTPUT QMAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL Idelete all waveform segments 1040 SUBEND 1050 1060 SUB Errmsg 1070 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 1080 COM OAfg 1090 DIM Message 256 1100 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 1110 B SPOLL Afg 1120 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 1130 OUTPUT Afg 1140 OUTPUT QAfg ABORT labort output waveform 1150 REPEAT 1160 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 1170 ENTER Afg Code Message 1180 PRINT Code Message 1190 UNTIL Code 0 1200 STOP 1210 SUBEND Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 143 Program Modifications To select another waveform comment out line 180 or 190 depending on the waveform sequence S1 or N1 you DO NOT want to output You must also comment out line 330 if line
223. OM Afg DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program OUTPLOAD FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program OUTPLOAD C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 71 Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units The OUTPUNIT program shows how to set the output amplitude using the VPP volts peak to peak output unit The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source DDS sample source that is trigger start source sinusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Select the Output Units SOURce VOLTage LEVel I MMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage lt units gt This command selects the following output units V Volts VPK Volts peak VPP Volts peak to peak VRMS Volts rms W Watts DBM DBMW GB referenced to 1 milliwatt These units are assumed only if no other units are specified in the SOURce VOLTage LEVel
224. OUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V Set the amplitude SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Select the Ref Oscillator SetCommands 3 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Select the sample source SetCommands 3 SOUR FREQ1 FIX 100ES Set the sample frequency SetCommands 3 SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Command to select the user Wo Nee y a SetCommands 4 SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL ramp Define the ramp segment name SetCommands 5 SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Define the segment size Use the OutCommands array to generate output OutCommands 1 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL ramp out Define the sequence name as ramp out OutCommands 2 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define the sequence size OutCommands 3 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ ramp Set the segment execution order OutCommands 4 SOUR FUNC USER ramp out Define the user name OutCommands 5 INIT IMM Start waveform generation Use SegCommand to store segments SegCommand SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Command to send volts data Setup the AFG Call CmdExe SetCommands Call sub to check for AFG errors Call CheckError GenSeg SetCommands Generating and storing segments into string For 0 To 99 If I 99 Then SegCommand SegCommand Str I 0505 Else SegCommand SegCommand Str I 0505 End If Next Send command with segment data Call iwrite Addr ByVal SegCommand Chr 10 Len SegCommand 1 1 Actual Call sub to check for AFG errors C
225. OURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOL Tage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Chapter 8 Command Reference 337 SOURce LIST 1 Example Defining a Waveform Segment Combined List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST COMB 16000 32000 16000 0 16000 32000 16000 0 Defines waveform segment SEGMent COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected waveform segment s combined voltage point and marker pulse list Comments Executing this command with voltage point and marker pulse lists defined with different lengths generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the marker pulse list has a length of 1 In this case the length of the voltage point list is returned e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Query Combined Point List Length LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST COMB POIN Queries combined point list length 338 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt reserves enough waveform segment memory for a waveform segment of length points for the segment currently selected by SOURce LI
226. OURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer marker list or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint point before they are output Generate the Output SOURce JFUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate IMMediate 208 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 HP BASIC Program Example MARKSEG1 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 IRE STORE MARKSEG1 This program computes a sine wave and a triangle wave as arbitrary Iwaveforms A corresponding marker list is defined for the triangle lwave The program sets the output sequence to consist of both Iwaveforms and enables marker pulses to be output with selected Itriangle waveform amplitude points Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and delete all existing Iwaveform segments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf del ISet up the AFG OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 512E3 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 Imarker source OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK POL INV Imarker polarity OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK STAT ON lenable marker CALL Sine_wave CALL Tri_wave CALL Seq_list
227. OURce VOL Tage L EVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage STATus OPC INITiate STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus PRESet TRIGger STAR1 lMMediate TRIGger STARt SLOPe TRIGger STOP IMMediate TRIGger SWEep IMMediate VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA VINStrument CONFigure V ME MODE VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy VINStrument IDENtity Frequency ARM SWEep COUNt ARM SWEep SOURce Appendix B Useful Tables 467 Table B 2 HP E1445A Command Coupling Groups continued Coupling Group Commands Frequency continued SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer SOURce FREQuency 1 C W FlXed SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP SOURce FREQuency2 C W FIXed SOURce LIST2 FREQuency SOURce PM SOURce SOURce PM STATe SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTer
228. OURce lt source gt Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freg gt Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP stop freq Set the number of points frequencies in the frequency sweep SOURce S WEep POINts number Set the source which starts the frequency sweep ARM SWEep SOURce source Set the source which advances the sweep to the next frequency TRIGger SWEep SOURce source Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate 190 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_STEP 170 180 190 200 IRE STORE SWP_STEP This program sets the AFG arm source and trigger source to IHOLD The AFG is armed and advanced through the sweep points lusing arm immediate and trigger immediate commands Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Pts ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Swp_step WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Swp_step 210 Swp_step Subprogram which sets up
229. OURce to TTLTrg lt n gt both must be set to the same trigger line n Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce e RST Condition ARM SWEep SOURce IMMediate Example Setting the Sweep Arm Source ARM SWE SOUR TTLT1 Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRGI as sweep arm source Chapter 8 Command Reference 297 CALibration CALibration The CALibration subsystem has commands that calibrate the HP E1445A The subsystem also includes commands to prevent and detect accidental or unauthorized calibration of the HP E1445A The calibration procedure using these commands is located in the HP E1445A Service Manual Subsystem Syntax CALibration COUNt query only DATA AC 1 block AC2 block DC block DC BEGin no query POINt value query only SECure CODE lt code gt no query STATe lt mode lt code gt STATe state AC state DC estate COUNt CALibration COUNt returns a number that shows how often the HP E1445A has been calibrated Since executing CALibration DATA AC1 AC2 and DC commands and the CALibration POINt query upon completion of the calibration procedure increment the number the CALibration COUNt command may be used to detect any accidental or unauthorized HP E1445A calibration Comments The HPE1445A was calibrated before it left the factory Before using read the cali
230. OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Define segment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points Continued on Next Page 102 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 450 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT 460 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 470 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP 480 SUBEND 490 500 SUB Rst 510 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 520 COM Afg 530 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 540 ENTER Afg Complete 550 SUBEND 560 570 SUB Wf del 580 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 590 COM QAfg 600 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 610 OUTPUT OAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 620 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 630 SUBEND 640 650 SUB Errmsg 660 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 670 COM QAfg 680 DIM Message 256 690 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 700 B SPOLL Afg 710 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 720 OUTPUT Afg 730 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 740 REPEAT 750 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 760 ENTER Afg Code Message 770 PRINT Code Message 780 UNTIL Code 0 790 STOP Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program AFGGENI FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program AFGGENI C is in V
231. OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 150 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format 160 170 ISubprograms which define waveforms and load them into segment 180 land sequence memory which determine the AFG s register locations 190 lin A24 and which configure the AFG s sequence base memory 200 CALL Waveform_def 210 CALL A24 offset 220 CALL Build_ram 230 240 ISelect an output sequence and initiate start waveform output 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SEQ lwaveform sequence 260 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 270 280 ISubprogram which changes the output sequence with register writes 290 CALL Wave_change 300 END 310 320 SUB Waveform def 330 COM Afg Aig1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr 340 CALL Sinx def 350 CALL Sind def 360 CALL Spike def 370 SUBEND 380 390 SUB A24 offset Continued on Next Page 500 Register Based Programming Appendix C 400 A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM OAfg OAtfg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seg2_addr Seq3_addr CONTROL 16 25 2 access A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 IAFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 Iread AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address SUBEND SUB Build_ram 500 Build_ram This subprogram configures the AFG s sequence base memor
232. OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 560 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FUNC SHAP USER 570 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V 580 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR MARK ECLTO FEED TRIG STAR 590 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR MARK ECLTO STAT ON 600 610 IDefine the waveform segment and download the amplitude points 620 IDefine the output waveform sequence 630 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN X Iselect segment 640 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Ireserve memory 650 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform lload points 660 670 OUTPUT QAfg m SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SINX M Iselect sequence 680 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Ispecify segments 690 OUTPUT EAfg_m SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN X Isegment order 700 SUBEND 710 720 SUB Sinx s 730 Sinx s Setthe trigger source frequency mode function and 740 lamplitude for the slave AFG waveform 750 COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform 760 OUTPUT Afg_s TRIG STAR SOUR ECLTO 770 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIXED 780 OUTPUT QAfg s SOUR FUNC SHAP USER 790 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V 800 810 IDefine the waveform segment and download the amplitude points 820 IDefine the output waveform sequence Select the sequence for 830 loutput and place the slave AFG in the Wait for arm state Continued on Next Page 178 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 840 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN X 850 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 40
233. Oint point is a short cut method for defining a marker list with marker pulse generation enabled on a single point It creates a marker list whose length is the same as the current voltage point list and which enables marker generation only on the point specified The voltage point list must have been previously defined Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units point numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The valid range for point is 1 through the length of the current voltage point list MINimum selects the first point of the current voltage point list MAXimum selects the last point Comments Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer Chapter 8 Command Reference 343 SOURce LIST 1 e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Creating a Single Point Marker List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST VOLT 1 5 5 5 5 0 5 1 Defines waveform voltages LIST MARK SPO 5 Outputs a marker pulse on the fifth voltage point SEGMent SELect SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt selects a waveform segment for subsequent SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent subsystem commands This command will define the waveform segment name if it is undefined but does not reserve any waveform segment memory
234. Oscillator TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Select the sample source SOUR FREQ1 FIX 100E3 Set the sample frequency SSOUR FUNC SHAP USER Command to select the user function Continued on Next Page 42 Getting Started Chapter 1 SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V Set the amplitude SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL ramp Define the ramp segment name SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Define the segment size seg commands Use seg_commands to store segments SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Command to send volts data out commands Use the out commands array to generate output SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL ramp_out Define the sequence name as ramp_out SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define the sequence size SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ ramp Set the segment execution order SOUR FUNC USER ramp out Define the user name INIT IMM Start waveform generation E float Wave seg int loop Seg size 100 Set the segment size to 100 points char send str 50 Allocate sufficient memory for storing the segments into computer memory Wave seg float malloc seg size sizeof float Setup the AFG cmd exe set commands sizeof set commands sizeof char gen seg set commands Call routine to check for AFG errors check error gen seg set commands Calculate the segments for loop 0 loop seg size loop Wave seg loop loop 0505 Setup for iprintf function sprintf send str
235. P BASIC Program Example ARBWAVE 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 IRE STORE ARBWAVE This program demonstrates the procedure for developing and loutputting an arbitrary waveform Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM QAfg Seg mem 256 Seq mem 256 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Wf del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 100E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V lamplitude CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT lwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state PRINT Segment memory points available used Seg mem PRINT PRINT Sequence memory points available used Seq mem WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave 340 Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 Isequence COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem DIM Waveform 1 100 ICalculate waveform points FOR I 1 TO 100 Waveform l I 0505 NEXT OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT W
236. P E1445A The above example programs use the HP E1406A Command Module to download the data to the DAC However the command module is only used to demonstrate the downloading method for those programs A better method is to use an embedded controller Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 271 Using the Front Panel s Digital Port In Connector You can use the Digital Port In connector to download data to the segment memory SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload command to change segment sequences without aborting the present operation or to drive the DAC directly SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce command The WAVSELFP program selects three different sequences using the Digital Port In connector Sequence 1 is a Sin X X waveform sequence 2 is a damped sine waveform and sequence 3 is a sine wave with spikes waveform The program downloads segment data as indefinite length arbitrary block data using the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined command Select the sequences as follows FPCLK is clocked other data lines open Sequence 3 FPCLK is clocked FP000 to low Sequence 2 FPCLK is clocked FPOO1 to low Sequence 1 HP BASIC Program Example WAVSELFP 1 IRE STORE WAVSELFP This program changes the output waveform sequence once the AFG has been INITiated by writing the location of a sequence s base address to the IWaveform Select register All register reads and writes are 16 bit IThe program uses the front panel Digital
237. P Sets default units to volts peak to peak Chapter 8 Command Reference 379 SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet SOURce VOL Tage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet offset sets the output offset voltage for all waveform shapes except DC Output offset amplitude is programmed in volts Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units offset numeric see below MINimum MAXimum volts DC Output When a matched load has been specified MINimum selects 5 0 V MAXimum selects 5 0 V Arbitrary Waveform Ramp Sine Square and Triangle Outputs When a matched load has been specified if the output amplitude in volts is greater than 1 02426 V peak MINimum selects the greater of 6 025 V output amplitude value and 5 0 V rounded down if needed to a multiple of 2 5 mV MAXimum selects the lesser of 46 025 V output amplitude value and 5 0 V again rounded down If the output amplitude in volts is less than or equal to 1 02426 V MINimum selects the greater of 1 205 V output amplitude value and 99993 V rounded down if needed to a multiple of 499966 mV MAXimum selects the lesser of 1 205 V output amplitude value and 99993 V again rounded down For all waveform shapes when an open circuit load has been specified double all the above voltages The above values bound the legal range for offset Comments Related Commands SOURce VOLTage LEVe
238. PROG and the Visual C example program PHS MOD C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 77 Standard Waveform Program Comments Sinusoid Function Requirements Reference Oscillator Sources Sample Sources The following comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapter The sinusoid requires that the sample source see Sample Sources below is set to INTernal 1 that is TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This selects the DDS frequency generator No other sample source can generate a sinewave The SINusoid SQUare TRlangle and RAMP functions can use any of the reference oscillator sources The sources selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce are INTernal 1 42 94967296 MHz power on value INTernal2 40 MHz CLK10 10 MHz the V XIbus CLK line EXTernal User provided value the front panel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or 1 User provided value the VXIbus ECL trigger lines If using either the EXTernal or ECLTrg0 or 1 reference oscillator sources enter the source frequency to the AFG using SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal lt frequency For best frequency linearity use the 42 9 MHz that is INTernal 1 reference oscillator source with the DDS frequency1 frequency generator This combination provides 01 Hz resolution For higher frequency values use the 40 MHz that is INTernal2 ref
239. PUT Afg SOUR RAMP POIN 1E3 11000 point waveform 310 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 320 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 330 SUBEND 340 350 SUB Rst 360 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 370 COM Afg 380 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 390 ENTER Afg Complete 400 SUBEND 410 420 SUB Errmsg 430 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 440 COM Afg Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 139 450 DIM Message 256 460 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 470 B SPOLL Afg 480 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 490 OUTPUT Afg 500 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 510 REPEAT 520 OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 530 ENTER Afg Code Message 540 PRINT Code Message 550 UNTIL Code 0 560 STOP 570 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LIST TME FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LIST TME C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 140 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweeping Arbitrary When sweeping arbitrary waveforms the start and stop frequencies Waveforms _ specified are start and stop sample rates The corresponding output frequency is the sample rate divided by the number of points in the waveform The following p
240. PUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed 210 OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 Imarker pulse source 220 230 CALL Sine_wave 240 CALL Tri_wave 250 CALL Seq_list 260 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER WAVE OUT lwaveform sequence 280 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 290 300 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 310 OFF INTR 16 320 END 330 340 SUB Sine wave 350 Sine wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave and downloads 360 Ithe corresponding dac codes to segment memory over the 370 IVXIbus A combined list is used but no marker pulse is 380 Ispecified 390 COM OAfg Base_addr 400 CONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO 410 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SEGM SEL SINE Isegment name 420 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size 430 440 INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 450 ICalculate sine wave dac codes and shift bits to dac code positions 460 FOR I 1 TO 2048 470 Waveform l 5 SIN 2 PI I 2048 00125 480 Waveform l SHIFT Waveform l 3 490 NEXT I 500 ISet last point bit actual last point 3 510 Waveform 2045 Waveform 2045 1 520 530 Enable downloading from the VXIbus 540 OUTPUT QAfg ARB DOWN VXI SINE 2048 550 OUTPUT Afg OPC 560 ENTER Afg Ready 570 Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 265 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 66
241. Page 26 Command Coupling 0 0 0 2 eee eee eee Page 27 e Program Languages 0 cece eee eee Page 29 HP BASIC Language Programs 4 Page 29 Visual BASIC Language Programs Page 32 Visual C C Language Programs Page 40 e Introductory Programs 0 ce eee ee eee Page 46 HAFG Sel Test untada ir ai eae Page 46 Resetting and Clearing the AFG Page 47 Querying the Power On Reset Configuration Page 48 Checking for Errors Page 49 Generating Sine Waves 0 00 0 eee eee ee Page 51 Preparation for Use This section contains the HP E1445A AFG VXIbus information required to configure the device and install it in the HP 75000 Series C mainframe Note The following VXIbus configuration information pertains to the HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator For more VXIbus system configuration information refer to the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 VXlbus Factory The HP E1445A AFG shown in Figure 1 1 is configured at the factory as Settings shown in Table 1 1 gr C7 J ARB FUNCT GEN Failed Access Output 50 75 Q HP E1445A HA A an ae a NA I Wr vA Y 0 L 0 L pes es sg s
242. Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete CONSume OFF PIPeline none Comments The available modes are CONSume Local Bus data is used and not passed through This mode must be selected when downloading segment and segment sequence memory data directly driving the main output DAC and providing phase deviations for sine waves OFF The Local Bus interface is disabled Local Bus data is neither used nor passed through PIPeline Local Bus data is passed through and not used Select this mode when data should be transparently passed through the HP E1445A Chapter 8 Command Reference 403 VINStrument e With VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO ON set the Local Bus Operation mode is automatically set to CONSume when downloading segment or segment sequence data SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload LBUS command directly driving the main output DAC SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce LBUS command or providing phase deviation data SOURce PM SOURce LBUS command the mode is set to OFF when none of these are active Executing the VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE command sets VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO OFF e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE
243. Protocols and Common Commands Frequency Points The number of frequencies generated points in a frequency sweep can be from 2 to 1 073 741 824 The default number is 800 The number of points is set with the SOURce SWEep POINts command and applies to sweeps only Sweep Spacing The spacing between the frequencies points in a sweep can be either linear or logarithmic as set by SOURce S WEep SPACing Linear sweeps can start at 0 Hz Logarithmic sweeps can start at the reference oscillator frequency 4 294 967 296 npts The number of waveform points npts for sine waves and arbitrary waveforms is 1 for square waves npts is 4 for ramp and triangle waves npts is the number of ramp points Sweep Direction The direction of the frequency sweep can be up or down When the direction is up the sweep begins at the specified start frequency and stops at the specified stop frequency When the direction is down the sweep begins at the stop frequency and stops at the start frequency You must stop abort the sweep before changing direction For arbitrary waveforms when the direction is up sampling begins at the start frequency and stops at the stop frequency When the direction is down sampling begins at the stop frequency and stops at the start frequency You must stop abort sampling before changing direction Frequency lists begin with the first frequency in the list and end with the last frequency There is no directional control Chap
244. Q The commands are 1 Setup the AFG RST Use the RST command to setup the AFG You can also use the commands listed in the previous sections of this chapter Generating Sine Waves on page 58 to setup the AFG 2 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 3 Select the Auto Load On Off or Once OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO lt mode gt With this command the assumed load applied to the AFG s Output 50 75 Q terminals tracks the AFG output impedance The modes are ON load value tracks output impedance OFF load value does not track output impedance ONCE load value tracks output impedance once and then goes to OFF 4 Select the Output Impedance OUTPut 1 IMPedance impedance This command selects the AFG output impedance The AFG output impedance can be either 50 Q or 75 Q Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 69 5 Select the Output Load Value OUTPut 1 LOAD lt load gt This command selects the load value expected at the Output 50 75 Q terminals The values are 50 for 50 Q loads must be same as output impedance 75 for 75 Q loads must be same as output impedance 9 9E 37 or INFinity for open circuit output value is twice the normal matched load output value 6 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMe
245. Q1 STAR 0 Istart frequency 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 10E6 Istop frequency 270 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 300 OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS FREQ 10 MHZ tfilter cutoff frequency 310 OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS STAT ON lenable output filter 320 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 330 SUBEND 340 350 SUB Rst 360 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 370 COM Afg 380 OUTPUT EAfg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 390 ENTER Afg Complete 400 SUBEND 410 420 SUB Errmsg 430 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 440 COM Afg Continued on Next Page 30 Getting Started Chapter 1 450 DIM Message 256 460 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 470 B SPOLL Afg 480 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 490 OUTPUT Afg 500 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 510 REPEAT 520 OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 530 ENTER Afg Code Message 540 PRINT Code Message 550 UNTIL Code 0 560 STOP 570 SUBEND Turning Off As mentioned earlier coupled commands must be contiguous and executed Suppressing the in the same program statement By suppressing the end of line EOL End Of Line Terminator terminator Line Feed on a command line coupled commands can be sent on separate lines yet as a
246. R 194 AROS Dr pin T SES oe ee ESO ee Te eee 196 Using ABORt Stop Triggers or Gating o o e 196 Arming and Triggering Program Comments o o o e 197 Reterence Cenillator SOLES RR AAA 197 AFG Frequency Synthesis Modes ee ek de AAA A A 197 APG Prequency Modes amp s sso RB KER RA RR UR E ROBO RR NOR EEC SERBS A 198 ATO Ane SOOKE se kG a eS CK ES OR RON EORR O4 EA ERU SR 199 PPG PORE OUED dose br S ace po cde ED 1e pn e bh t ons 199 Waveform Repetition Count 4 os ss rok onse es bee KR eS 9 199 Stop Ingsec QOBOME sb ee AA 199 Extemoal Stop DHeser Sope 2 644 h 0565S Wok eso eo SEER GRE He deter deo 200 AFG Ganne SOURS ud bake ee bee d E demos d EE EEE dep qx d 200 APO Gate PODA og noue 3d RA AA CREME ER ORA Oe A 200 4 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents Bab ae A RS 200 Frequency Sweep List AXmilg isa ce eG de eed es ERK RRR EHS 201 Frequency Sweep List Advance Trigger o 201 Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 203 Chapter Content 4 2242 do ok RR DEAE ee REE ERE RRS REED 203 Marker Pulse Enable Flowchart 256 044 646 p dS 64 GA 6G EG E Y d x 204 Aulae Marker SOMES uuo ee ek dee E ok dep deo RR p de eh cdd 205 Arbitrary Generated Marker Pulses 2552s cw x E RR RE 206 Generating Marker Pulses for Arbitrary Waveforms 206 Generating Multiple Marker Pulses in Multiple Segment Lists 207 HP BASIC Progra
247. RR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program COMBSEQ FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program COMBSEQ C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 258 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using the VXlbus Backplane You can use the VXIbus backplane to download or transfer segment and sequence data to the AFG and to set the phase modulation angle Downloading There are two ways to use the VXIbus backplane to download the data Segment Data downloading the list into memory to be executed later downloading directly to the DAC for immediate execution Downloading Download a Combined Segment List and a Combined Sequence List into Seg ment Data into memory using the requirements in this section Memory Combined Waveform Figure 7 4 shows a single 16 bit integer used to download a Combined Segment List Format Waveform Segment List Bits 3 through 15 are the DAC codes for the waveform voltage values bit 1 is the marker bit and bit O the last point Last Point Bit Unused Fsp4nst2p110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 iS v J DAC Codes for the 13 Bit DAC Marker Bit Figure 7 4 Combined List Format for Downloading e Store the list either as Signed or Unsigned Combined Segment Lists into memory Use either Definite Length or Indefinite Len
248. Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 2 through 1073741824 MINimum none MAXimum MINimum selects 2 points MAXimum selects 1073741824 points SOURce SWEep POINts specifies the number of points with SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE set to SWEep the length of the SOURce LIST2 FREQuency list specifies the points with SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE set to LIST When changing the SOURce SWEep POINts value when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWEep set the SOURce SWEep TIME or the TRIGger S WEep TIMer value remains the same depending on which command was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new SWEep POINIs value Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE SPAN START and STOP SOURce SWEep DIRection and SPACing RST Condition SOURce SWEep POINts 800 Example Setting the Number of Points in the Sweep SWE POIN 100 Sets 100 points in sweep 374 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce SWEep SPACing SOURce SWEep SPACing mode selects either linear or logarithmic frequency sweep mode Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt discrete LiNear LOGarithmic none Comments The available modes are LiNear Selects the linear sweep mode The sample rate or waveform frequency increases or decreases linearly between the start and stop
249. Ransition lt unmask gt Transition Filter STATus Questionable PTRansition lt unmask gt Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle unmask Status Byte Register Summary Bit MM Standard Event Status Group e pa U Event Register ESR O QUES A Enable Register ESE unmask MAV O Summary Bit ESB ESB O OR NV p OPR Operation Status Group STB SRE lt mask gt SPOLL Condition Register STATus OPERation CONDition Es a STATus OPERation NTRansition unmask Tr nsition Filter STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt Event Register STATus OPERation EVENt Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle unmask Summary Bit q E es ES UE m ae aa c Ex wr Figure 9 1 HP E1445A Status Groups and Associated Registers 430 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Questionable Signal Status Group The Condition Register The Questionable Signal Status Group monitors the quality of various aspects of the output signal In the AFG the Questionable Signal Status Group monitors the frequency accuracy of the divide by n subsystem and also error conditions in non volatile calibration memory Divide by n frequency accuracy and non volatile calibration memory errors are monitored with the following bits in the Condition Register All other bits are unused 15 14 13 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 unused
250. Rce VOLTage 377 380 STATus 381 388 A UU A A A a aa SYSTem 389 390 TRIGger 391 402 VINStrument 403 408 Summing Amplifier DAC See HP E1446A Suspending Output Waveforms 183 Sweep advance source 158 advance trigger 201 399 advance trigger linking 400 advance trigger source 401 advance trigger time 402 arm linking 296 arming 190 192 201 295 297 372 count 156 count setting 295 372 direction 157 373 linear 375 points 374 points versus time 135 137 159 sources setting 297 spacing 157 time 158 376 time specifying 158 time versus points 135 137 159 triggering 190 192 399 402 using triggers 186 189 with output leveling 30 31 Sweeping and frequency lists 120 and frequency shift keying 117 162 arbitrary waveforms 141 frequency range 155 logarithmic frequency spacing 133 134 program comments 154 162 pseudo random noise 141 143 sin x x 141 143 using start and span frequencies 127 129 using start and stop frequencies 121 123 Switches logical address 22 servant area 23 SWP_ARB Example Program 141 143 SWP_LEVL 30 31 SWP_LEVL Example Program 145 146 SWP_PVST Example Program 136 137 SWP_STEP Example Program 191 192 SWP_TRIG Example Program 188 189 System Configuration HP BASIC programming 29 Visual BASIC programming 32 Visual C C programming 40 SYSTem Subsystem 389 390 526 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index SYSTem
251. Reference 335 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess returns the address in the waveform segment memory at which the currently selected waveform segment is located e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition No waveform segment is selected Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Query Waveform Segment Memory Address LIST SEGM ADDR Queries segment address SEGMent CATalog Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog returns a comma separated list of quoted strings each containing the name of a defined waveform segment If no waveform segment names are defined a single null string is returned e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segment names are defined Cataloging Waveform Segment Names LIST CAT Catalog waveform segments 336 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined combined list defines in one step both the output voltage and marker pulse lists that constitute a waveform segment The combined list may be either a comma separated list of values or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 16 bit integer format Each value has the following format Bits 15 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit
252. Register contains the waveform index which is the location in sequence base memory where the base address of the sequence in sequence memory is located Waveform Select Register Traffic Register Sequence Base Register Sequence Memory 0 reserved 1 Seq1_addr A 2 Seq2_addr 3 Seq3_addr 816 A16 2016 The Visual BASIC example program WAVE SEL FRM is in directory VBPROG and the Visual C example program WAVE_SEL C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Appendix C Register Based Programming 505 Loading the DAC from the VXIbus This section shows how to load waveform data into the AFG s DAC directly from the VXIbus backplane For additional information on loading the DAC directly refer to Chapter 7 The High Speed Data Waveform data from the VXIbus is loaded into the DAC via the following Register register e High Speed Data Register base_addr 2616 Address 5 14 13 12 11110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 0 base 2616 DAC code unused DAC Code The DAC code is a 13 bit signed 2s complement or unsigned number With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude set to 5 12 V and a matched output load the least significant bit LSB is 1 25 mV HP BASIC Program Example VXISRCE N 10 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 The program uses the V360 Controller to download the
253. Remaining Frequency Coupled Commands Frequency Voltage Coupled Commands i e function Voltage Coupled Commands Figure 5 3 AFG Triggering Command Sequence Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 173 Using the The DIV_N program shows how to set the AFG trigger source The program Divi de by N selects the AFG s divide by N frequency generator SOURce FREQuency2 Fre quency subsystem This generator is recommended for use with the AFG s 40 MHz reference oscillator also selected in the program to produce exact frequencies Generator such as 10 MHz 20 MHz etc The steps of this program are 1 Select the 40 MHz reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source 2 Select the divide by N time base TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt 3 Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed frequency 4 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 5 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 6 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example DIV N 1 IRE STORE DIV N 2 This program selects the 40 MHz reference oscillator and the 3 ISOURce FREQuency2 subsystem divide by N frequency synthesis to 4 generate an exact square wave frequency of 10 MHz 5 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR
254. SET VALUE ON SET THE ARM SOURCE TO IMMEDIATE ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce RESET VALUE IMMediate SET THE ARM COUNT ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt RESET VALUE 1 SET THE REPETITION COUNT TO INFINITY ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt RESET VALUE INFinity INITIATE THE WAVEFORM INITiate IMMediate FINISH UNCOUPLED UNCOUPLED Figure 4 1 Commands for Frequency Sweeps Frequency Lists and FSK Keying continued from previous page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 119 FSK Command Reference Detailed information on the commands introduced in this chapter can be found in Chapter 8 Command Reference The commands in this chapter are shown in their entirety optional headers included to help you locate them in the reference Sweeping and Frequency Lists The AFG offers linear frequency sweeping of standard waveforms that is sine square triangle ramp and arbitrary waveforms from 0 0 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz and logarithmic sweeping of standard and arbitrary waveforms from 0 01 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz The AFG can also frequency hop where the AFG outputs a sequence of discrete frequencies from a pre defined list Up to 256 frequencies from 0 0 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz can be specified in a single list and the AFG can sequence through the list at up to 800 frequencies per second Sweeps and frequency lists are programmed with the same commands The command subsystems covered in t
255. SIN function 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 260 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 270 SUBEND 280 290 SUB Rst 300 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 310 COM Afg 320 OUTPUT EAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG 330 ENTER Afg Complete 340 SUBEND 350 360 SUB Errmsg 370 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 380 COM Afg 390 DIM Message 256 400 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 410 B SPOLL Afg 420 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 430 OUTPUT Afg 440 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 450 REPEAT Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 59 460 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 470 ENTER QAfg Code Message 480 PRINT Code Message 490 UNTIL Code 0 500 STOP 510 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SINEWA VE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SINEWAVE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 60 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Generating Square Waves Output applied to a 50 Q load O5us DIV The SQUWAVE program outputs a square wave at 1 Mhz 4 V output level and 1 V offset The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator
256. SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents Appendix B Useful Tables 469 Frequency Limits Table B 3 HP E1445A Frequency Limits Trigger Start Frequency Function Source Low Limit High Limit DC N A N A N A SINusoid INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 SQUare INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 16 INTernal2 Ref Osc freq 4 Ref Osc freq 4 131072 TRlangle INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 Ramp Points INTernal2 Ref Os
257. ST 1 SEGMent SELect Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt length gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The length will be rounded up if needed to a multiple of 8 points All defined waveform segments share the waveform segment memory Any one segment may use any part of or all of this memory MINimum reserves 8 points MAXimum reserves the largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory up to 262 144 points if no waveforms other than standard function sine waves exist Comments Once a waveform segment has been DEFined it must be deleted SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected command before its reserved length may be redefined The voltage point and marker pulse list values and length may be changed repeatedly without re executing the DEFine command e SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine initializes the waveform segment voltage point list to zero length and the marker pulse list to a length of 1 with a value of 0 no markers will be generated e While the reserved length must be a multiple of 8 rounded up if necessary the only restriction on the current waveform segment length number of voltage points stored is that it be at least four points long e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No waveform segments
258. SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 570 ENTER Afg Code Message 580 PRINT Code Message 590 UNTIL Code 0 600 STOP 610 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program STOPTRIG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program STOPTRIG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 182 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Gating Trigger Gating is the process of suspending the output waveform When the gate is Signal S active AFG triggering is suspended The output remains at the last amplitude point triggered When the gate is inactive the output resumes with the next amplitude point The gating commands are frequency coupled and are executed relative to other AFG commands as shown in Figure 5 3 The GATE example shows how to use the AFG s Gate In BNC to suspend AFG triggering and thus generation of the output signal A high TTL levels on the BNC activates the gate The steps of program are as follows 1 10 Set the reference oscillator source SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source Set the start trigger source TRIGger STARt SOURce source Set the trigger gating source TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce source Set the gating signal polarity TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity polarity Enable trigger gating TRIGger STARt GATE STATe lt mode gt Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlX
259. See also Sinusoid SINEWAVE Example Program 59 60 Single marker pulses 212 213 waveform segments 212 213 Single Point Marker 343 355 Sinusoid function requirements 78 phase modulation 75 365 367 waveforms generating 450 Sinusoid Waves See Sine Waves SLFTST Program Example 47 Slope external stop trigger 200 start arm setting 293 start trigger setting 395 stop trigger setting 398 SMPLSWP1 Example Program 122 123 SMPLSWP2 Example Program 128 129 Soft Front Panel See VXIplug amp play Online Help SOURce Subsystem 312 380 SOURce AR Bitrary Subsystem 313 318 DAC FORMat 313 314 DAC SOURCce 315 DOWNload 316 317 DOWNload COMPlete 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 Subsystem 319 329 CENTer 321 CWI FIXed 322 FSKey 323 FSKey SOURce 324 MODE 325 RANGe 326 SPAN 327 STARt 328 STOP 329 SOURce FREQuency2 Subsystem 330 331 CWI FIXed 331 SOURce FUNCtion Subsystem 332 333 SHAPe 332 USER 333 SOURce LIST 1 Subsystem 334 357 FOR Mat DATA 335 SEGMent ADDRess 336 SEGMent CA Talog 336 SEGMent COMBined 337 SEGMent COMBined POINts 338 SEGMent DEFine 339 SEGMent DELete ALL 340 SEGMent DELete SELected 340 SEGMent FREE 341 SEGMent MARKer 342 SEGMent MARKer POINts 343 SEGMent MARKer SPOint 343 SEGMent SELect 344 SEGMent VOL Tage 345 346 SEGMent VOLTage DAC 346 SEGMent VOLTage POINts 347 SSEQuence AD
260. Standard Event Status Summary Bit of the Status Byte Register The mask is the sum of the decimal weights of the bits to be enabled ESE returns the current enable mask Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mask numeric 0 through 255 none A lina bit position enables the corresponding event a O disables it e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands ESR SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected Chapter 8 Command Reference 417 e Power On Condition No events are enabled Example Enable All Error Events ESE 60 Enables error events ESR ESR returns the value of the Standard Event Status Register The register is then cleared all bits 0 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Power On Condition Register is cleared GMC GMC lt name gt returns the definition of the specified macro in IEEE 488 2 definite block format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt name gt string data defined macro name none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands DMC e RST Condition None Power On Condition No macros are defined Example Query Macro Definition GMC RESTART Queries macro definition 418 Command Reference Chapter 8 IDN LMC Note Comments
261. Subsystem Syntax SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer center freq CW FlXed frequency FSKey lt frequencyl gt lt frequency2 gt SOURCe source MODE lt mode gt RANGe lt range gt SPAN freq span STARt start freq STOP stop freq 320 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer center freq sets the center sample rate or waveform frequency for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units center freq numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for center freq as well as the MINimum and MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE RANGe SPAN STARt and STOP SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 CENTer 5 36870912 MHz Example Setting the Center Frequency FREQ CENT 1E3 Sets the center frequency to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 321 SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FIXed SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency selects the non swept sample rate for arbitrary waveforms or waveform frequency for the built
262. T OAfg TRIG SWE SOUR BUS ladvance on HP IB trigger 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function 300 OUTPUT A fg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 V lamplitude 310 OUTPUT QAfg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 10 kHz is output 320 WAIT 1 wait in case of error 330 CALL Step 340 SUBEND 350 360 SUB Step 370 Step Subprogram which starts and advances frequency list 380 COM OAfg Pts 390 DISP Press Continue to arm trigger system 400 PAUSE 410 TRIGGER 7 Istart frequency list 10 kHz is still output 420 FOR l 1 TO 4 ITriggers for the four remaining frequencies 430 DISP Press Continue to advance to next frequency 440 PAUSE Continued on Next Page 194 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 450 460 470 480 490 500 TRIGGER 7 ladvance to next frequency NEXT DISP SUBEND SUB Rst 510 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 520 530 540 550 560 570 COM OAfg Pts OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg 580 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 COM OAfg Pts DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message
263. TAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE ph A A HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY Measurement Systems Division oo Learning Products Department P O Box 301 Loveland CO 80539 9984 Hold dildo fold here Please pencil in one circle for each statement below Disagree Agree e The documentation is well organized O O O O O e Instructions are easy to understand O O O O O e The documentation is clearly written O O O O O e Examples are clear and useful O O O O O e Illustrations are clear and helpful O O O O O The documentation meets my overall expectations O O O O O Please write any comments or suggestions below be specific 18 HPE1445A User s Manual Chapter 1 Getting Started Chapter Contents This chapter shows you how to configure install and begin using the HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator AFG The main sections of this chapter include e Preparation for Use 0 0 eee eee eee Page 19 VXIbus Factory Settings 0 00 00 00 008 Page 20 The AFG Logical Address 0005 Page 21 Addressing the AFG 0 0 eee eee eee Page 22 Setting the AFG Servant Area esee es Page 23 The AFG Bus Request Level o o o oo ooo Page 24 AFG Installation in a Mainframe Page 25 e Instrument Language SCPD oooococoocoocoooo Page 26 SCPI Programming 0 cece eee eee eee
264. Te OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt enables or disables the output filter Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency e RST Condition OUTPutt FILTerLPASs STATe OFF Example Enabling the 10 MHz Low pass Filter OUTP FILT FREQ 10 MHZ Selects 10 MHz output filter OUTP FILT ON Enables output filtering IMPedance OUTPut 1 IMPedance lt impedance gt sets the HP E1445A s output impedance to either 50Q or 75Q Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt impedance gt numeric 50 75 MINimum MAXimum Ohms MINimum selects 50Q output impedance MAXimum selects 75Q Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Voltage Related Commands OUTPut 1 LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO RST Condition OUTPut1 IMPedance 50 Example Setting 75 O Output Impedance OUTP IMP 75 Sets 75 Q output impedance Chapter 8 Command Reference 309 OUTPut 1 LOAD Parameters Comments Example OUTPut 1 LOAD lt load gt indicates whether the actual load applied to the HP E1445A s Output 50 7509 is either matched to the output impedance specified by OUTPut 1 IMPedance or is an open circuit The output voltage into an open circuit is twice tha
265. Trig FSK Gate In BNC which terminates the current start arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition This edge is significant only with TRIGger STOP SOURce set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used when other sources are selected Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units edge discrete NEGative POSitive none Example STOP SOURCce Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STOP SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STOP SLOPe POSitive Setting the Stop Trigger Slope TRIG STOP SLOP NEG Sets negative stop trigger slope TRIGger STOP SOURce source selects the source that can terminate the current start arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition When the HP E14454A receives a stop trigger the start trigger sequence is placed into the wait for arm state at the end of the current waveform repetition aborting the remaining ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt repetitions of the current arm cycle Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete BUS EXTernal HOLD TTLTrgO none through TTLTrg7 Comments The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET HP IB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Stop Trigger FSK Gate In BNC c
266. UNt CALibration DATA AC 1 lt block gt CALibration DATA AC2 lt block gt CALibration DATA DC lt block gt CALibration DC BEGin CALibration DC POINt lt value gt CALibration SECure CODE lt code gt CALibration SECure STATe lt mode gt lt code gt CALibration STATe lt state gt CALibration STATe AC lt state gt CALibration STATe DC lt state gt INITiate INITiate IMMediate OUTPut 1 OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency frequency OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt OUTPut 1 IMPedance lt impedance gt OUTPut 1 LOAD load OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO lt mode gt OUTPut 1 STATe node Chapter 8 Command Reference 409 Table 8 1 HP E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SOURce ARBitrary SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat format SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce source SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer center freq SOURce FREQuency 1 C W FIXed frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequency1 gt lt frequency2 gt SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce source SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe range SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN lt freg_span gt SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP stop freq SOURce
267. URce LIST commands including waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECure command state LRN should be sent singly in a program message since the number of commands in the returned sequence is large and may vary depending on firmware revision e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands RCL RST SAV e RST Condition None OPC causes the HP E1445A to wait for all pending operations to complete The Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event Status Register is then set If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set the Operation Complete bit will be set when all commands received prior to the OPC have been executed If ON is set OPC waits for waveform generation to complete before setting the Operation Complete bit No other commands will be executed until the Operation Complete bit is set e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC WAI e RST Condition None 420 Command Reference Chapter 8 OPC OPC causes the HP E1445A to wait for all pending operations to complete A single ASCII 1 is then placed in the output queue If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set the ASCII 1 will be placed in the output queue when all commands received prior to the OPC have been executed If ON is set OPC waits for waveform generation to complete before placing the 1
268. URce PM STATe mode enables or disables phase modulation for sine wave output Phase modulation is always disabled for other waveform shapes Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RST Condition SOURce PM STATe OFF Example Enabling Phase Modulation FUNC SHAP SIN PM STAT ON INIT Starts output PM DEV 78648 Selects sine wave output Enables phase modulation Sets deviation to 14 PM UNIT ANGL DEG UNIT ANGLe SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe units sets the default angle units for subsequent SOURce PM DEViation commands The available default units are DEG Degrees RAD Radians Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units units discrete DEG RAD none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce PM DEViation e RST Condition SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe RAD Example Setting the Default Angle Units Sets default units to degrees Chapter 8 Command Reference 367 SOURce RAMP SOURce RAMP The SOURce RAMP subsystem selects the polarity of ramp waveforms and the number of points on generated ramps and triangle waveforms Subsystem Syntax SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt POLarity polarity
269. UT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Swp_trig 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 8 180 END 190 200 SUB Swp trig 210 Swp trig Subprogram that triggers a sweep 220 COM OAfg 230 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE ISweep mode 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 1E3 Istart frequency 250 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 1E6 Istop frequency 260 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR SWE COUN INF Irepetition count 270 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR SWE POIN 100 frequency points 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE TIME 13 Isweep time 290 OUTPUT QAfg ARM SWE SOUR LINK Itrigger mode 300 OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 65536 Iwaveform repetitions 310 OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY2 COUN INF Iwaveform starts 320 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR BUS Itrigger source 330 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction 340 OUTPUT A fg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 350 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM lwait for arm state 360 CALL Step 370 SUBEND 380 390 SUB Step 400 Step Subprogram which starts sweep 410 COM OAfg 420 DISP Press Continue when ready to start a sweep 430 PAUSE 440 TRIGGER OAfg Itrigger AFG Continued on Next Page 188 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 450 FOR l 1 TO 10 460 DISP Wait until sweep completes then press Continue to start a new sweep 470 PAUSE 480 TRIGGER Afg trigger AFG 490 NEXT 500 DISP 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Rst
270. UT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 510 ENTER Afg Code Message 520 PRINT Code Message 530 UNTIL Code 0 540 STOP 550 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DIV_N FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DIV_N C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 175 Lock Stepping The LOCKSTEP program configures two AFGs such that they share the Mu Itiple AFGs same trigger source A master AFG is programmed to output its triggers on ECLTrg trigger line 0 The trigger source of a servant AFG is set to ECLTrg 0 Thus both AFGs output waveforms sin x x at the same frequency and changing the frequency of the master changes the frequency of the servant simultaneously HP E1445A Master a dl HP E1445A Slave Oscilloscope AFG Master CH A 5 V DIV AFG Slave CH B 5 V DIV ECLTO Line on Backplane Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DI Channel Logical Address 80 Logical Address 88 The programming sequence for lock stepping multiple AFGs is given below 1 Set the reference oscillator source for the master and slave as desired or use the default source SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source Set the trigger source of th
271. UTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED TRIG STAR 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK POL NORM 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK STAT ON function lamplitude Imarker source Imarker polarity lenable marker 240 250 CALL Ramp wave 260 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP OUT Iwaveform sequence 280 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 290 300 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 310 OFF INTR 7 320 END 330 340 SUB Ramp wave Iwait for arm state 350 Ramp wave Subprogram which computes a ramp wave and sets the 351 loutput sequence 360 COM OAfg 370 DIM Waveform 1 10 ICalculate ramp wave 380 FOR l 1 TO 10 390 Waveform l I 5 400 NEXT 410 420 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name 430 OUTPUT COAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 10 Isegment size 440 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform lamplitude points 450 460 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT sequence name 470 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments 480 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegments in sequence 490 SUBEND 500 510 SUB Rst 520 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 530 COM OAfg 540 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 550 ENTER Afg Complete 560 SUBEND 570 580 SUB Wf del 590 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 600 COM OAfg 610 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 620 OUTPUT QGAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 630 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEG
272. UTPUT OAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 860 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 870 SUBEND 880 890 SUB Errmsg 900 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 910 COM OAfg 920 DIM Message 256 930 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 940 B SPOLL Afg Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 97 950 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 960 OUTPUT QAfg 970 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 980 REPEAT 990 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 1000 ENTER Afg Code Message 1010 PRINT Code Message 1020 UNTIL Code 0 1030 STOP 1040 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MULSEG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MULSEG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 98 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Using Different Frequency Generators Ramp generated as an Arbitrary Waveform 2 V DN Output applied to a 500 load value 2 usec DIV The AFG can use either the DDS Frequency1 Frequency Generator or the Divide by N Frequency2 Frequency Generator to generate arbitrary waveforms The DDS generator gives lower frequency response with better resolution The Divide by N generator gives higher frequenc
273. V Sample source TRIG SOUR INTernal Sample gate polarity TRIG GATE POL INVerted Sample gate source TRIG GATE SOUR EXTernal Gating State TRIG GATE STAT 0 off 1 000000000E 004 1 000000000E 004 1 000000000E 007 EXTernal FIXed 0 000000000E 000 0 000000000E 000 1 073741824E 007 1 000000000E 004 INTernal1 4 294967296E 007 1 000000000E 000 UP 800 472 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 5 HP E1445A Power On Reset Configuration continued Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Sweep spacing points SWE SPAC LINear Sweep time SWE TIME 1 000000000E 000 Stop trigger source Sweep start source Sweep advance source Function Ramp triangle waveform points Ramp triangle waveform polarity Output amplitude DC offset Output impedance Output load Load Impedance coupling Waveform repetitions burst Waveform arm count External arm slope Arm source Arbitrary waveform sequence Segment sequence return data format and length Frequency list return data format and length ECL trigger line 0 marker source Marker routing ECLTO line ECL trigger line 1 marker source Marker routing ECLT1 line Marker Out BNC source Marker Out signal polarity TRIG STOP SOUR ARM SWE SOUR TRIG SWE SOUR FUNC SHAP RAMP POIN RAMP POL VOLT AMPL VOLT OFFS OUTP IMP OUTP LOAD OUTP LOAD AUTO ARM COUN ARM LAY2 COUN ARM LAY2 SLOP ARM LAY2 SOUR FUNC USER LIST FORM LIST
274. VE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 64 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Generating Triangle Ramp Waves 2 VIDIV Output applied to a 50 Q load 0 2 msec DIV The TRIWAVE program outputs a triangle wave at 10 kHz 4 V output level and 1 V offset The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source DDS sample source that is trigger start source sinusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the reference oscillator source see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 78 Although RST selects 42 9 MHz reference oscillator 1t is selected here for good programming practice 3 Select the Sample Source TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the sample source that is trigger start source Although RST selects trigger start source that selects the DDS frequency generator it is selected here for good programming practice The TRlangle RAMP functions can use any of the trigger start sources see Sample Sources on page 78 4 Set the Frequency Range SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe range This command specifies the triangle ramp wave upper frequency limit see DDS Frequency Generator Ranges on page 79
275. VE voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 shift left by 3 32768 For example to output 5V DAC Code 5 00125 shift left by 3 32768 32000 32768 768 To output a marker at a particular point add 2 to the combined list DAC code value of the point For example to add a marker bit of a point with a voltage value of 5 V Code 5 00125 shift left by 3 32768 2 32000 32768 2 766 The COMBUNS program shows how to store a combined list 1 e waveform segment and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The list is stored in the Unsigned number format The data is transferred to the AFG using the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V negative going ramp A marker is output at the zero crossing or center of the ramp Chan A applied to AFG s Output Terminal Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Terminal Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV 246 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 The commands are the same ones listed on page 241 except on how to select the Unsigned format and how to generate the data These exceptions are as follows 5 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned This command selects the UNSigned data number format 8 Store the
276. VXIbus backplane The AFG has the following sources available to download waveform segments and segment sequences into memory DPORt The front panel s Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus Local Bus VXI The VXIbus backplane Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts to determine the size of the number of points of the waveform segment and marker pulse list of the currently selected waveform segment Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts to determine the size of the number of waveform segments marker pulse enable lists and repetition count lists of the currently selected segment sequence 280 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Command Reference Chapter Contents This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI command set and the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands for the HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator AFG Included in this chapter are the following sections Command Types ra S ses Oa ed BEA Page 284 e SCPI Command Format llle Page 284 e SCPI Command Parameters o Page 286 e SCPI Command Execution llle Page 288 e SCPI Command Reference o o o Page 289 e SCPI Command Quick Reference Page 409 e SCPI Conformance Information Page 414 e EEE 488 2 Common Commands Page 416 e Common Commands Quick Reference Pa
277. Waveform Segment as Combined Signed DAC Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined lt combined_list gt This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory in the Unsigned format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command The data is sent as a comma separated combined list with the marker bit selected HP BASIC Program Example COMBUNS The COMBUNS program is similar to the COMBSIGN program on page 242 The only differences are that this program generates and transfers the combined list using the Unsigned number format instead of the Signed format and the list is transferred as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data IRE STORE COMBUNS This program downloads an arbitrary waveform as a combined voltage and marker list of unsigned DAC codes The data is sent lin an IEEE 488 2 indefinite length block in 16 bit integer format The waveform is a 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data COM Atg Afg1 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf del Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 247 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310
278. When the gate is low inactive the output resumes with the next point e INVerted Selects an active low gate default polarity When the gate signal is low the gate is active and the output is suspended at the last amplitude point triggered When the gate is high inactive the output resumes with the next point The gate polarity applies only to the EXTernal gate source front panel Gate In BNC If you are using a TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 trigger line as a gating source the gate is always active low Gating and Gating the triggers suspends the output at the last amplitude point triggered Signal Phase When the gate is inactive the waveform resumes with the next amplitude point Thus the phase of the signal remains continuous Enabling the Gate Before the AFG triggers can be gated the gate must be enabled This is done with the TRIGger STARt GATE STATe command When the mode is ON gating is enabled When OFF gating is disabled 200 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Frequency Sweep List Arming Frequency Sweep List Advance Trigger Immediate Arming and Triggering The source which arms the frequency sweep or list is set with the ARM SWEep SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e HOLD Suspend sweep or frequency list arming Arm using ARM SWEep IMMediate IMMediate Immediate sweep or freque
279. all CheckError GenSeg SegCommand Setup the AFG for output Call CmdExe OutCommands Continued on Next Page 36 Getting Started Chapter 1 Call sub to check for AFG errors Call CheckError GenSeg OutCommands End Sub Sub Main Main sub Dim Actual As Long Seterror routine On Error GoTo AfgErr ChkName Main Open communication path Addr iopen ShowAddr Set timeout for 10 Sec Call itimeout Addr 10000 Reset and clear the module Action Text Resetting the AFG please wait ChkName RstClr Call RstClr Generate segment list and output sequence Action Text Generate Segments ChkName GenSeg Call GenSeg Query segment and segment sequence memory Action Text Getting Memory Data ChkName RunQuery Call RunQuery Action Text DONE Close communication with instrument Call iclose Addr Clean up sicl Call siclcleanup Exit Sub In case of timeout AfgErr Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 37 Call TimeOut End Sub Sub RstClr Dim RdMsg As String 10 Dim Actual As Long Dim Length As Integer Length 10 Executes the commands that resets the module and clears its error register Call iwrite Addr ByVal RST OPC Chr 10 11 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg Length 0 Actual Length 10 Call iwrite Addr ByVal CLS OPC Chr 10 11 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg Length 0 Actua
280. ame As String Sub CheckError SubName As String Check for any errors Dim Actual As Long Dim RdErr As String 256 Dim Work As String Dim ErrNum As Integer Dim TempName As String TempName ChkName ChkName CheckError Read error message Call iwrite Addr ByVal SYSTem ERRor Chr 10 14 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdErr 256 0 Actual If error was detected ErrNum Val RdErr If ErrNum 0 Then Store message only into Work string Work Mid RdErr 1 Actual 1 Work Work in Sub SubName Enable and clear error list box ShowErr Enabled True ShowErr Visible True ShowErr Clear Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 33 Action Text The program generated the following error s Show error message ShowErr Addltem Work Loop until error message is O Do Read error message Call iwrite Addr ByVal SYSTem ERRor Chr 10 14 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdErr 256 0 Actual Store message only into Work string Work Mid RdErr 1 Actual 1 Get error number ErrNum Val Work If error show error message If ErrNum 0 Then Work Work in Sub SubName ShowErr Addltem Work End If Loop Until ErrNum 0 Close communication with instrument Call iclose Addr Clean up sicl Call siclcleanup Press to exit DispErr The program detected errors in sub function SubName Chr 10 DispErr Di
281. and generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 66 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 HP BASIC Program Example TRIWAVE 1 IRE STORE TRIWAVE 2 This program outputs a 200 point 10 kHz 4V triangle wave 3 with a 1V DC offset 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Tri_wave 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 180 END 190 200 SUB Tri wave 210 Tri wave Subprogram which outputs a triangle wave 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT15 240 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 RANG 0 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 10E3 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP TRI 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR RAMP POIN 200 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 4V 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM OFFS 1V 310 OUTPUT QAfg INIT IMM 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM Afg 370 OUTPUT EAfg RST OPC 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Errmsg 420 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 430 COM OAfg 440 D
282. and the waveform segment must be selected for marker output in the segment sequence Although RST automatically enables the AFG for marker outputs it is given here for good programming practice Setup the First Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Store the First Waveform Segment as Voltage Data Points SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage voltage list Setup the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine length Store the Second Waveform Segment as Voltage Data Points SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOL Tage voltage list Store the Marker List for the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer marker list This command stores the marker list into memory as a comma separated list A 1 selects a marker pulse and a 0 does not You can also send this list as Definite or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data as explained in Chapter 7 Setup the Segment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list Select the Waveform Segment for Marker Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer marker list This command selects the waveform segment in a segment sequence that is to output the marker pulses The marker pulses must be selected by S
283. ands are those which appear in square brackets in the command syntax The brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the AFG Suppose you send the following command ARM COUN 100 In this case the AFG responds as if you had executed the command as ARM STARt LAYer1 COUNt 100 Some commands will have what appears to be a variable syntax For example SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt In this command lt n gt is replaced by a number No space is left between the keyword ECLTrg and the number because the number is part of the keyword Chapter 8 Command Reference 285 SCPI Command Parameters Parameters are enclosed in greater than less than symbols gt in the command syntax and must always be separated from the keywords by a space When more than one parameter is allowed the parameters are separated by a vertical line The following information contains explanations and examples of the parameter types found in this chapter Parameter Numeric Types Explanations and Examples Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation 123 123E2 123 1 23E2 123 1 23E 2 1 23000E 01 Special cases include MINimum MAXimum and INFinity The Comments section within the Command Reference will state whether a numeric parameter can also be specified in hex octal and or binary HH7B 40173 B11110
284. ane See also Appendix C WAVSELFP Changes output waveform sequence by writing location of a sequence s base address to the Waveform Select Register AFG Status QSSG_RQS HP BASIC Visual C C Monitors conditions in the Questionable Signal Status Group Chapter 9 OSG_RQS Monitors conditions in the Operation Status Group Monitors programming errors using the Standard Event ERRORCHK 1 Status Group Register Based FREQ1REG HP BASIC Visual BASIC Changes the output frequency generated by the DDS Applications Visual C C Direct Digital Synthesis chip Frequency1 generator by writing directly to the registers Appendix C FREQ2REG n Changes the output frequency generated by the Divide by N chip Frequency2 generator by writing directly to the registers PHASCHNG Changes the signal phase by writing directly to the registers WAVE_SEL N Changes the output waveform sequence by writing directly to the registers VXISRCE Writes data directly to the DAC from the VXlbus backplane 466 Useful Tables Appendix B Command Coupling Groups Table B 2 HP E1445A Command Coupling Groups Coupling Group Commands None SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer POLarity SOURce MARKer STATe SOURce PM DEViation SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe S
285. angle wave The SOURce RAMP subsystem controls the polarity and number of points USER Generates an arbitrary waveform The SOURce FUNCtion USER command selects the segment sequence to be generated For the DC function The voltage level is specified by SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude e For the RAMP SiNusoid SQUare TRlangle and USER functions Use SOURce VOLTage LEVell IMMediate AMPLitude to set output amplitude For arbitrary USER waveforms this command specifies the full scale output voltage SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet specifies the offset voltage 332 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FUNCtion USER Example Parameters Comments Example TRIGger STARt SOURce selects the sample source SINusoid requires that TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernalt be selected The SOURce FREQuency 1 or SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems specify the signal frequency for RAMP SINusoid SQUare and TRlangle waveforms They specify the sample rate for arbitrary USER waveforms e When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RAMP or TRlangle is selected the greater of the SOURce RAMP POINts value and 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare is selected 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available Attempting to select one of these functions with less contiguous waveform segment memory available or to
286. ar Status Byte and Event Registers OUTPUT Afg STAT QUES PTR 32 Ipos transition of FREQ bit OUTPUT Afg STAT QUES ENAB 32 lallow FREQ bit to generate summary bit OUTPUT Afg SRE 8 lenable summary bit to generate RQS ICall subprogram which outputs a signal using the SOURce FREQ2 Isubsystem CALL Freg2 WAIT 1 allow interrupts to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Freg2 260 Freq2 Subprogram which outputs a 10 MHz square wave using the 270 280 290 300 ISOURce FREQ2 subsystem COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 frequency generator Continued on Next Page Chapter 9 AFG Status 433 310 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 10E6 frequency 320 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function 330 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1V lamplitude 340 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 350 LOOP lloop continuously until frequency error occurs 360 END LOOP 370 SUBEND 380 390 SUB Disp msg 400 Disp msg Subprogram which is called when output frequency 410 lvaries from 10 MHz by more than 1 420 COM Afg 430 IRead Status Byte Register and clear service request bit RQS 440 B SPOLL Afg 450 LOOP 460 DISP Output frequency error 470 WAIT 1 480 DISP 490 WAIT 1 500 END LOOP 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Rst 540 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 550 COM Afg 560 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 570 ENTER
287. are as follows e Arbitrary Waveforms Flowchart 4 Page 84 e How the AFG Generates Arbitrary Waveforms Page 86 e Generating a Simple Arbitrary Waveform Page 88 e Executing Several Waveform Segments Page 93 e Using Different Frequency Generators Page 99 e Sample Programs 0 0 cee eee eee ee eee Page 104 Generating a Sin X X Waveform 4 Page 105 Generating a Damped Sine Wave Page 107 Generating an Exponential Change Discharge WaVvetoEin tl thee ie IAE DR Page 108 Generating a Sine Wave with Spikes Page 109 Generating a Y Rectified Sine Wave Page 111 Generating Noise 00 eee eee eee eee Page 112 e Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments Page 113 Determining the Amount of Segment and Sequence Memory eos re AA Io VELIM Page 113 How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory Page 113 Amplitude Effects on Voltage Lists Page 113 Using DAC Codes to Send Segment Data Page 114 Sending Segment Sequences 00 5 Page 114 Reference Oscillator Sources ooooooocoomoooo o Page 115 Sample Sources 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee ii Page 115 Frequencyl Generator Range 0402 Page 116 Returning the Waveform Segment Names Page 116 Determinin
288. are defined Example Reserving Memory for a Waveform Segment LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 1024 Reserves 1024 points for ABC Chapter 8 Command Reference 339 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL deletes all defined waveform segment definitions from memory and makes all of the waveform memory available for new waveform segment definitions Comments If any waveform segment is used in any segment sequence executing this command generates Error 1102 Segment in use No waveform segments will be deleted Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected to delete only the currently selected waveform segment definition Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Deleting All Waveform Segments LIST DEL ALL Deletes all segments SEGMent DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected deletes the currently selected waveform segment definition and makes its memory available for new waveform segment definitions Comments If the waveform segment is used in any segment sequence executing this command generates Error 1102 Segment in use The waveform segment will not be deleted After deleting the currently selected waveform segment no waveform segment is SELected Use SOURce
289. arker pulse at point 5 of a 10 point waveform execute SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint 5 12 Select the Waveform Segment for Marker Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint point This command selects the waveform segment in a segment sequence that is to output the marker pulses The marker pulses must be selected by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint point or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer marker list before they are output 212 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 HP BASIC Program Example MARKSEG2 AUN 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 The MARKSEG2 program is the same as the MARKSEG1 program on page 209 except it selects the marker pulses differently The differences are as follows IRE STORE MARKSEG2 This program computes a sine wave and a triangle wave as arbitrary Iwaveforms A single marker pulse is output with amplitude point 256 lof the triangle wave ISet up the AFG OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 512E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 Imarker source OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK POL NORM Imarker polarity OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK STAT ON lenable marker Tri_wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and spe
290. ary waveforms 206 marker pulses each waveform point 214 217 marker pulses multiple 207 211 marker pulses single 212 213 noise 112 ramp waves 65 68 sine waves 51 58 60 450 sine waves damped 107 108 sine waves half rectified 111 sine waves spiked 109 square waves 61 64 standard waveforms 53 82 standard waveforms frequencies 331 standard waveforms phase modulation data sources standard waveforms phase modulation default angle units 367 standard waveforms phase modulation disabling 367 standard waveforms phase modulation enabling 367 standard waveforms phase modulation selecting deviation units 80 365 standard waveforms phase modulation using 75 77 standard waveforms ramp waves 65 68 standard waveforms selecting amplitude levels 72 74 standard waveforms selecting output loads 69 71 standard waveforms selecting output units 72 74 standard waveforms sine waves 58 60 standard waveforms square waves 61 64 standard waveforms triangle waves 65 68 triangle waves 65 68 waveforms shape selection 332 waveforms using signed data 225 228 waveforms using unsigned data 229 230 Generators frequency 1 characteristics 454 frequency 1 description 449 frequency 1 range 116 frequency 1 SCPI commands 319 329 frequency 2 characteristics 455 frequency2 description 449 frequency2 SCPI commands 330 331 Getting Started 19 52 GMC 418 516 HP E1445
291. ata format The query form returns this portion of the calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 definite block data format Both forms require that calibration security have been previously disabled e Executing this command with calibration security disabled increments the calibration count CALibration COUNt query e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration COUNt CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition Unaffected Chapter 8 Command Reference 299 CALibration DATA DC CALibration DATA DC lt block gt transfers the DC portion of the HP E1445A s calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block program data format The query form returns the current DC portion of the calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 definite block data format Both forms require that calibration security have been previously disabled See the HP E1445A Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command Comments DC BEGin Executing this command with calibration security disabled increments the calibration count CALibration COUNt query Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration COUNt CALibration SECure STATe RST Condition Unaffected CALibration DC BEGin starts the DC calibration procedure for the HP E1445A It sets the HP E1445A up for the first of the 44 measurements in the procedure Calibration security must have been pr
292. ated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subtrees or subsystems An example is the AFG s ARM subsystem ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt number LAYer2 COUNt number IMMediate no query SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce source SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt number IMMediate no query LINK lt link gt SOURCe source ARM is the root keyword of the command STARt SEQuence1 and SWEep SEQuence3 are second level keywords LAYer1 and LAYer2 are third level keywords and so on 284 Command Reference Chapter 8 Command Separator Abbreviated Commands Implied Optional Commands Variable Command Syntax A colon always separates one command keyword from a lower level command keyword as shown below ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability you may send the entire command The AFG will accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command For example if a command s syntax contains the keyword COUNt then COUN and COUNT are acceptable forms Other forms of COUNt such as COU will generate an error You can use upper or lower case letters Therefore COUNT coun or Coun are all acceptable Implied or optional comm
293. ault settings are used Thus the examples which follow the sequence do not execute every command shown on the flowchart Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired START SET REFERENCE OSCILLATOR SOURCE TO INTernal1 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce SET SWEEP DIRECTION SOURce SWEep DlRection RESET VALUE INTernall RESET VALUE UP SET SAMPLE SOURCE TO INTernal1 TRIGger STARt SOURce SET SWEEP POINTS SOURce SWEep POINts RESET VALUE INTernal1 RESET VALUE 800 SET FREQUENCY MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SET SWEEP SPACING RESET VALUE Fixed E SOURce SWEep SPACing FREQUENCY MODE FSKey SET FSKey FREQUENCIES SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey RESET VALUE 10kHz 10MHz SET FSKey SOURCE SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce RESET VALUE EXTernal RESET VALUE LiNear FREQUENCY MODE FREQUENCY MODE SWEep LIST SET SWEEP COUNT SOURce SWEep COUNt or ARM SWEep COUNt SET FREQUENCY LIST RESET VALUE 1 SOURce LIST2 FREQuency Q N 3 E Q x N 5 d Lo RESET VALUE NONE SET SWEEP ARM SOURCE TO IMMediate ARM SWEep SOURce RESET VALUE IMMediate SET START FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt RESET VALUE 0 0Hz SET CENTER FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer RESET VALUE 5 36 MHz SET STOP
294. available sources are CLK10 The VXIbus CLK10 10 MHz line EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Ref Sample In BNC ECLTrg0 and ECLTrg1 The V XIbus ECL trigger lines INTernal 1 The internal 42 94967296 MHz oscillator Using this oscillator in conjunction with the SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem gives a resolution of 01 Hz for sine waves and arbitrary waveform sample rates INTernal2 The internal 40 MHz oscillator Using this oscillator in conjunction with the SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem allows that subsystem to exactly produce frequencies such as 1 5 10 and 20 MHz for arbitrary waveform sample rates e The reference oscillator is used to generate the sample rate and waveform frequencies specified in the SOURce FREQuency 1 and SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems e Use SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal to indicate the frequency of an external reference oscillator Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce JROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal SOURce FREQuency 1 commands SOURce FREQuency2 commands e RST Condition SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal1 Example Setting the Reference Oscillator Source ROSC SOUR CLK10 Selects VXI CLKIO line as oscillator source Chapter 8 Command Reference 371 SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep Subsystem Syntax The SOURce SWEep subsystem selects The number of frequency sweeps or repetitions of
295. aveform waveform points Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 91 450 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM FREE 460 ENTER Afg Seg_mem 470 480 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT 490 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 500 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP 510 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ FREE 520 ENTER Afg Seq_mem 530 SUBEND 540 550 SUB Rst 560 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 570 COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem 580 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC 590 ENTER Afg Complete 600 SUBEND 610 620 SUB Wf del Isequence name Isequence size Isegment order lreset the AFG 630 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 640 COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem 650 OUTPUT QAfg FUNC USER NONE 660 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL 670 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL 680 SUBEND 690 700 SUB Errmsg 710 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 720 COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem 730 DIM Message 256 740 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 750 B SPOLL Afg 760 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 770 OUTPUT Afg 780 OUTPUT Afg ABORT 790 REPEAT 800 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR 810 ENTER Afg Code Message 820 PRINT Code Message 830 UNTIL Code 0 840 STOP 850 SUBEND Iselect no sequences IClear sequence memory IClear segment memory labort output waveform Iread AFG error q
296. aveforms Chapter 2 190 200 SUB Phase_mod 210 Phase_mode Subprogram which outputs a sine wave 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 60 lfrequency 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM SOUR INT Iphase modulation source 250 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR PM STAT ON lenable phase modulation 260 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function 270 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM DEV ODEG phase modulation 290 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 300 DISP Press Continue to shift phase 180 degrees 310 PAUSE 320 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM DEV 180DEG Ishift phase 180 degrees 330 DISP 340 SUBEND 350 360 SUB Rst 370 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 380 COM OAfg 390 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 400 ENTER Afg Complete 410 SUBEND 420 430 SUB Errmsg 440 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 450 COM OAfg 460 DIM Message 256 470 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 480 B SPOLL Afg 490 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 500 OUTPUT Afg 510 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 520 REPEAT 530 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 540 ENTER Afg Code Message 550 PRINT Code Message 560 UNTIL Code 0 570 STOP 580 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program PHS_MOD FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VB
297. ays E1445 programming errors 580 COM Afg 590 DIM Message 256 600 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 610 B SPOLL Afg 620 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 630 OUTPUT Afg 640 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 650 REPEAT 660 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 670 ENTER Afg Code Message 680 PRINT Code Message 690 UNTIL Code 0 700 STOP 710 SUBEND Upon completion the program displays FSKfrequencies ar 5 000000000E 006 1 000000000E 007 FSK control source 1s EXT Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FSK1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program FSK1 C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 149 FSK Using the The FSK2 program sets up frequency shift keying using a TTLTrg lt n gt TTLTrg n Control trigger line as the control source The TTLTrg trigger line is driven by the Source HP E1406A Command Module Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency shift keying mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Select the FSK frequencies SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequency1 gt lt frequency2 gt 3 Select the FSK control source SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce source 4 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion
298. based on a hierarchical structure also known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subtrees or subsystems An example is the HP E1445 s ARM subsystem shown below ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt number LAYer2 COUNt number IMMediate no query SLOPe edge SOURce source SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt number IMMediate no query LINK link SOURCe source ARM is the root keyword of the command STARt SEQuence 1 and SWEep SEQuenceS are second level keywords LAYer 1 and LAYer2 26 Getting Started Chapter 1 Manual Format Note Command Coupling are third level keywords and so on A colon always separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword as shown below ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT A semicolon is used to separate two commands within the same subsystem and can also save typing For example sending this command message ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT SLOP POS COUN 10 Is the same as sending these three commands ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT ARM LAY2 SLOP POS ARM LAY2 COUN 10 The typical format of commands listed in the command reference and throughout this manual is SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE mode Command headers enclosed in square brackets are optional Upper case letters in the header are required lower case letters can be omitted The brackets are not part of the command an
299. be used with this command If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first The voltage point list length must be at least four points long but no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine If the voltage point list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the most recent voltage point and marker pulse list is generated when the waveform segment is output The waveform segment s marker pulse list length must be the same length as its voltage point list or must have a length of 1 If not executing the INITiate IMMediate command generates Error 1104 Segment lists of different lengths Changing marker pulse values preserves the waveform segment s voltage point list and vice versa The voltage values specified by this command are scaled relative to the full scale output voltage specified by SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude in effect at the time the voltage point list is created Subsequently changing the full scale output voltage will change the actual output voltages that are generated and also the values returned by the query form of this command Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOL Tage DAC SOURce VOL Tage L EVel I MMediate AMPLitude RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No waveform seg
300. bprogram which defines the Sin x x waveform and 240 loutput sequence 250 CALL Sinx_def 260 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform Continued on Next Page 152 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN_X_OUT 290 280 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 300 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 310 OFF INTR 7 END 330 SUB Sinx def 340 Sinx def Define Sin x x waveform and output sequence 320 350 COM OAfg 360 DIM Waveform 1 4096 370 FOR l 2047 TO 2048 380 IF 1 0 THEN 1 E 38 390 Waveform l 2048 2 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 400 NEXT I 410 420 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SEGM SEL SIN X Iselect segment 430 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Ireserve memory 440 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load points 450 460 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN X OUT select sequence 470 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments 480 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN X Isegment order 490 SUBEND 500 510 SUB Rst 520 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 530 COM Afg 540 OUTPUT QAfg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 550 ENTER Afg Complete 560 SUBEND 570 580 SUB Wf del 590 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 600 610 620 630 COM OAfg OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT QAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL
301. bration count to determine its initial value e The HP E1445A stores the calibration number in its non volatile calibration memory which remains intact even with power off e The maximum value of the number is 2 147 483 647 after which it wraps around to 0 e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration SECure STATe CALibration DC BEGin e RST Condition Unaffected 298 Command Reference Chapter 8 Example DATA AC 1 Comments DATA AC2 Comments CALibration Querying the Calibration Count CAL COUN Queries calibration count CALibration DATA AC 1 block transfers the 250 kHz filter portion of the HP E1445A s calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block program data format The query form returns this portion of the calibration constants in TEEE 488 2 definite block data format Both forms require that calibration security have been previously disabled See the HP E1445 Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command Executing this command with calibration security disabled increments the calibration count CALibration COUNt query e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration COUNt CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition Unaffected CALibration DATA AC2 block transfers the 10 MHz filter portion of the HP E1445A s calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block program d
302. byte size definite length blocks 231 byte size indefinite length blocks 235 downloading directly into the DAC 269 271 506 508 downloading segment into memory 259 268 downloading using backplane 259 downloading using digital in port 279 format ASCii 335 358 format definite length blocks 231 format indefinite length blocks 235 format PACKed 335 format REAL 358 phase modulation 366 segment sequence 316 sending DAC codes 114 signed combined 239 244 signed to generate waveforms 225 228 transfer bus 24 transfer bus operating mode 406 transfer methods 224 transferring 32 bit integer 255 unsigned combined 245 249 unsigned to generate waveforms 229 230 VXIbus local bus test 406 waveform segment 316 DC calibration corrections 305 calibration starting 300 301 voltage generating 56 57 DCVOLTS Example Program 56 57 DDS Frequency Generator control 489 491 description 449 generating waveforms with 99 102 ranges 79 Declaration of Conformity 15 Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks 130 132 156 data byte size 231 data format 231 transferring data using 231 234 Deviation angle default units 367 angle setting 76 365 units for phase modulation 80 365 367 Digital Port In Connector downloading data 279 pinout 278 selecting a sequence 279 specifications 460 using 272 279 Disabling analog output 311 calibration corrections 304 305 downloading mode 318 ECL trigger lines 362 freque
303. c freg Ref Osc freq 131072 Ramp Points Ramp Points RAMP INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 Ramp Points INTernal2 Ref Osc freg Ref Osc freq 131072 Ramp Points Ramp Points USER INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 INTernal2 Ref Osc freq Ref Osc freq 131072 Multiply High Limit frequency values by 2 if frequency doubling is selected by the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command 470 Useful Tables Appendix B Amplitude Limits Table B 4 HP E1445A Amplitude Limits Amplitude Limits for Volts VPP Function V volts VPK volts peak volts peak to peak VRMS volts rms DC 5 12 to 5 11875 N A N A N A SINusoid 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 to 114458730 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 3 61950284 SQUare 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 to 161869088 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 5 11875 TRlangle 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 to 0934551614 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 2 9553117 RAMP 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 to 0934551614 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 2 9553117 USER 161869088 to 161869088 to N A N A 5 11875 5 11875 Amplitude Limits for Watts and dB Ww W DBM DBMW DBM DBMW Function Watt 2509 load Watt 0750 load dBmW 50Q load dBmW 0750 load DC N A N A N A N A SINusoid 000262016016 to 000174677344 to 5 81672162 to 7 57763421 to 262016016 174677344 24 1832784 2
304. ce MARKer FEED must be set to SOURce LIST to output the marker pulse on the Marker Out BNC SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED must be set to SOURce LIST to output the marker pulse on the corresponding V XIbus ECLTRG line The marker list may be either a comma separated list of values or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 16 bit integer format A value of 0 generates no marker pulse any non zero value enables marker pulse generation MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command e If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first Marker pulses are one sample period wide nominally 25 nS at 40 MHz clock rate To widen the pulses enable marker pulse generation on consecutive points Usually marker pulse generation is enabled on no more than one point of a waveform segment The SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint command is the most efficient way to enable marker pulse generation on a single point e The waveform segment s marker pulse list length must be the same length as its voltage point list or must have a length of 1 If not executing the INITiate IMMediate command generates Error 1104 Segment lists of different lengths e A marker pulse list of length 1 is treated as though it were the same length as the voltage point list with all marker pulse values the same as the specified value The marker pulse list len
305. ce command are e BUS The HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e EXTernal The AFG s front panel Stop Trigger FS K Gate In BNC connector TTL levels HOLD Suspend stop triggering Use the TRIGger STOP IMMediate command to terminate a start arm cycle default source e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 199 External Stop An external stop trigger signal is applied to the AFG s Stop Trig FSK Gate Trigger Slope In BNC connector The edge of the signal on which the AFG is triggered is set with the TRIGger STOP SLOPe command The edges are e POSitive Selects the rising edge of the signal e NEGative Selects the falling edge of the signal AFG Gating The source which gates the triggers is specified with the Sources TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce command The available sources are e EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector default source This BNC is driven by TTL levels e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines AFG Gate Polarity The polarity of the signal which gates the output is specified with the TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity command The polarities which can be selected are e NORMal Selects an active high gate When the gate signal is high the gate is active and the output is suspended at the last amplitude point triggered
306. ce timing TTLTrg0 through TTLTrgl The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e If TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to TTLTrg lt n gt and you want to set ARM SWEep SOURce to TTLTrg lt n gt both must be set to the same trigger line lt n gt Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands SOURce SWEep TIME e RST Condition TRIGger SWEep SOURce TlMer Example Setting the Sweep Advance Trigger Source TRIG SWE SOUR TTLT1 Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRG1 as sweep advance source Chapter 8 Command Reference 401 TRIGger SWEep TIMer TRIGger SWEep TIMer period selects the time between frequency values for sweep or frequency list generation when TRIGger S WEep SOURCe is set to TIMer This value set by command is coupled to the SOURce SWEep TIME command value by the following equation TIME TIMer points 1 where points is the SOURce SWEep POINts value for frequency sweeps or the length of the frequency list for frequency list generation When changing the frequency list length when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST is set or the SOURce S WEep POINts value when any other MODE is set the TIME or TIMer value remains the same depending on which command SOURce SWEep TIME or TRIGger S WEep TIMer respectively was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new points value Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values
307. cifies la marker pulse to be output with amplitude point 256 COM OAfg DIM Waveform 1 512 FOR l 1 TO 256 Calculate triangle wave Waveform l 21 0195313 NEXT I FOR 1 257 TO 512 Waveform l 2 512 1 0195313 NEXT I Load waveform points and specify a single marker pulse OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Isegment name OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 512 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform lamplitude points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM MARK SPO 256 marker on point 256 SUBEND SUB Seq_list Seq list This subprogram defines the sequence list and enables la marker signal to be output with the triangle wave Isegment COM OAfg OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE OUT sequence name OUTPUT QAfg SOUR ILIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Inumber of segments OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SINE TRI Isegments in sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ MARK SPO 2 lenable marker on segment TRI SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MARKSEG2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MARKSEG2 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 213 Generating Marker Pulses for Each Waveform Point The MARKTRG program shows how to generate and output a 12 nS wide marker pulse at each point of the waveform The pulses are output at the Marker Out BNC Since the p
308. clock marker bits stored with arbitrary waveforms reference frequency waveform clock a pulse indicating each waveform repetition a level change at the start and the end of each burst of waveform repetitions frequency change phase change trigger source i e the waveform clock waveform clock gate FSK Input start arm enables waveform clock waveform clock stop causes the current waveform repetition to be the last sweep arm starts sweep or frequency list sweep trigger go to next point in sweep or frequency list none 25 pin D type receptacle 16 data ext clock int clock TTL data to DAC download to segment memory waveform select Note 2 phase modulation 8 bits 1M transfers s typical ECL data to DAC download to segment memory waveform select Note 2 phase modulation 8 bits data pass through 7Msa s 2M s for phase modulation 460 HP E1445A Specifications Appendix A VME Register Access General VXlbus Characteristics All hardware registers are mapped directly into VME A24 space permitting advanced users to bypass the on board uP The manual documents a functional subset While a waveform is running waveform memory may not be loaded but on the fly re selection Note 2 permits a new sequence to begin immediately upon completing the present sequence Note 2 Waveform Select Up to 128 waveforms sequences can be stored in mem
309. commands are value coupled This means that sending a command can change parameter values set by previous commands Often this results in Settings Conflict errors when the program executes To prevent these errors the AFG commands must be executed in Coupling Groups The coupling groups and associated commands are listed in Table B 2 in Appendix B The coupling groups identified in Table B 2 are frequency and voltage Some commands like SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe are associated with both groups These commands are a bridge linking coupling the two groups Commands not in a coupling group must precede or follow commands in the coupling groups Executing un coupled commands in a coupling group breaks the coupling and can cause a Settings Conflict error Command queries commands with are uncoupled commands and should be executed before or after coupled commands See Executing Coupled Commands on page 28 for information on executing coupled commands When MINimum or MAXimum is the parameter of a command in a coupling group that command should be the last command executed in the group Unlike other parameters that are set when an end of line indication is received MIN and MAX are evaluated by the AFG processor when the command is parsed Thus the value of MIN or MAX is based on the values of the other coupling group commands at that time Settings conflict errors will occur if the current values are incompatible
310. cts waveform segment ABC LIST VOLT POIN Queries voltage point list length SSEQuence ADDRess Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess returns the address in the segment sequence memory at which the currently selected segment sequence is located e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Query Segment Sequence Memory Address LIST SSEQ ADDR Queries sequence address Chapter 8 Command Reference 347 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog returns a comma separated list of quoted strings each containing the name of a defined segment sequence If no segment sequence names are defined a single null string is returned e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequence names are defined Cataloging Segment Sequence Names LIST SSEQ CAT Catalogs segment sequence names SSEQuence COMBined Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined combined list defines in one step the waveform segment marker enable and repetition count lists that constitute a segment sequence The combined list may be either a comma separated list of values or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 32 bit integer format Each value has the foll
311. cy generator for the sinusoid function Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 3 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SlNusoid This command selects the sinusoid function Although RST automatically selects this function it is selected here for good programming practice 4 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOL Tage L EVel IMMediate AMPL itude amplitude This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 5 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 58 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 HP BASIC Program Example SINEWAVE 1 IRE STORE SINEWAVE 2 The following program generates a 1 kHz 5 Vp sine wave 3 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ONINTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT QAfg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Sine_wave 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Sine wave 210 Sine wave Subprogram which outputs a sine wave 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 frequency 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP
312. cy2 subsystem 330 331 SOURce FUNCtion subsystem 332 333 SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 334 357 SOURce LIST2 subsystem 358 360 SOURce MARKer subsystem 361 364 SOURce PM subsystem 365 367 SOURce RAMP subsystem 368 369 SOURce ROSCillator subsystem 370 371 SOURce SWEep subsystem 372 376 SOURce VOLTage subsystem 377 380 square bracket description 287 STATus subsystem 381 388 structure 26 SYSTem subsystem 389 390 TRIGger subsystem 391 402 variable command syntax 285 vertical line description 286 288 VINStrument subsystem 403 408 Secondary HP IB Address 22 522 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index Security Code disabling 303 enabling 303 setting 302 Segment data downloading into DAC 269 271 506 508 data downloading into memory 259 268 data downloading using backplane 259 list combined 239 250 list combined waveform format 259 list determining size 280 list multiple 207 211 marker pulses determining number 222 marker pulses multiple 207 211 marker pulses single 212 213 memory characteristics 453 memory determining amount 113 memory freeing 113 number of points 87 sample rate 87 sequence list combined 250 sequence list combined format 250 260 sequence list determining size 280 sequence list query length 357 sequence combined list 348 349 sequence data 316 sequence defining 357 sequence defining outputs 352 353 sequence d
313. d The data is returned in the format described under the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined command SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer The data is returned in 16 bit integer format SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage The data is returned in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC The data is returned as 16 bit signed or unsigned DAC codes as specified by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt The data is returned in 16 bit integer format SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined The data is returned in the format described under the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined command SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer The data is returned in 16 bit integer format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt format gt discrete ASCii PACKed none length numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none If ASCII format is specified length must either be omitted or must be 9 or MINimum or MAXimum Packed format ignores the length parameter Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Example Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence commands RST Condition SOURce LIST1 FORMat DATA ASCii Setting PACKed Return Data Format LIST FORM PACK Sets packed format Chapter 8 Command
314. d disabled as these settings change if range is greater than 0 Setting SOURce FREQuency1 RANGe 0 is a good way to guarantee that frequency doubling is always disabled Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE STARt and STOP SOURce JFUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 RANGe 0 0 Hz 326 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 Example Enabling Frequency Doubling FUNC SHAP SQU Selects square wave output ROSC SOUR INT1 Selects 42 94 MHz oscillator FREQ RANG 5MHZ Sets frequency range to 5 MHz SPAN SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN freq span sets the sample rate or waveform frequency span for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units freq span numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for freq span as well as the MINimum and MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE RANGe STARt and STOP SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 SPAN 10 737418
315. d MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE RANGe SPAN and STARt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 STOP 10 73741824 MHz Example Setting the Stopping Frequency FREQ STOP 1E3 Sets the stopping frequency to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 329 SOURce FREQuency2 SOURce FREQuency2 The SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem controls the second of the HP E1445A s two frequency generators SOURce FREQuency 1 controls the first generator This second generator consists of a simple divide by n of the currently selected reference oscillator source where n may be 1 2 3 or any even value between 4 and 131 072 This generator has better phase noise characteristics and permits higher frequency operation than the direct digital synthesis NCO technique used by the first generator The first generator has finer resolution and frequency sweeping capability Also sine wave output is possible only with the first generator Either generator may be used for square ramp triangle and arbitrary waveform output The values programmed by this subsystem are only used when TRIGger STARt SOURce is set to INTernal2
316. d Segment Sequence List Sequence List Bits 0 through 16 select the combined or regular waveform Format segments for output bit 18 enables the marker output and bits 20 through 31 sets the repetition count A Combined Segment Sequence List determines the order and how often a waveform segment is to be executed Thus each waveform segment marker enable and repetition count has a unique data code 32 Bit Combined List that defines the segment lists to be executed enables the marker and defines the repetition count for the segment lists Reserved Unused 31 3029 28 27 2625 24 23 22 2 1J20h 9 8 7 1 6 15 1441 3 1 2 1 iro 9 817615 4 3 2 1 Jo 12 Bit Code that sets the Address of the Segment segment repetition count Marker List in Memory 17 Bits Enable Bit Figure 7 2 Combined Sequence List Format 250 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Selecting the To select a waveform segment determine the address of the waveform Waveform Segments segment and include the address in the Combined Sequence List Do the following to determine the address 1 Select the Waveform Segment Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt command where lt name gt is the name of the waveform segment to be output 2 Get the Selected Waveform Segment Address Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess query command to get the address The address is the start location of the waveform segment in segment memory To use the retur
317. d are not sent to the instrument To aid in learning the AFG command set all headers are included in the example programs however the headers are abbreviated In an example program the previous statement with a mode parameter of FIX would appear as SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX Many of the AFG SCPI commands are value coupled This means that the value set by one command may affect the valid limits for the values of other commands This can result in Settings Conflict errors when the program executes To prevent these errors the AFG commands must be executed in Coupling Groups The coupling groups are frequency and voltage Some commands like SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe are associated with both groups These commands are a bridge linking coupling the two groups Commands not in a coupling group must precede or follow commands in the coupling groups Executing uncoupled commands in a coupling group breaks the coupling and can cause a Settings Conflict error The coupling groups and associated commands can be found in Table B 2 in Appendix B Chapter 1 Getting Started 27 Executing Coupled Command coupling determines the AFG programming sequence The Commands Note high level sequence based on the coupling groups is shown in Figure 1 5 Frequency Coupled Commands Frequency Voltage Coupled Commands T Voltage Coupled Commands Uncoupled Commands Figure 1 5 Hi
318. d list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_ addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg3 FOR I 1 TO 4096 Waveform SIN 2 PI l 4096 00125 NEXT Width 50 FOR J 1 TO Width 1024 Width J Waveform l Waveform l 9 JWidth 00125 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO Width 1 1024 Width J Waveform Waveform 9 J Width 00125 NEXT J Ishift bits to dac code positions FOR I 1 TO 4096 Waveform l SHIFT Waveform l 3 NEXT I OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SPIKE Isegment name OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END terminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SPIKE Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SPIKE Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg3 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ3 Isequence name Continued on Next Page 504 Register Based Programming Appendix C 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 2430 2440 2450 2460 2470 2480 2490 2500 2510 2
319. d marker list of signed 2 s complement DAC codes IThe data is sent in an IEEE 488 2 definite length block in 16 bit linteger format The waveform is a 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data COM Afg Afg1 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst Continued on Next Page 242 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 160 CALL Wf_del 170 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 frequency 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude 210 220 CALL Ramp wave 230 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP OUT Iwaveform sequence 250 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 260 270 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 280 OFF INTR 7 290 END 300 310 SUB Ramp wave 320 Ramp wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output 330 Isequence 340 COM Afg Afg1 350 INTEGER Waveform 1 200 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes 360 FOR l 100 TO 99 370 IF 1 0 THEN 380 Waveform l 101 0 2 Iset marker bit with this amplitude point 390 ELSE 400 Waveform l 101 1 050505 00125 410 Ishift bits to dac code positions 420 Waveform l
320. dard waveforms The reset power on values of each command are also noted on the flowchart The programs in this chapter begins with a reset the IEEE 488 2 RST command which places the AFG into its power on state Thus the programs do not execute all of the commands on the flowchart Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired SET THE OUTPUT FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 SET THE DC OFFSET SET THE FUNCTION lj I SET REFERENCE OSCILLATOR I O oJ l SOURCE TO INTernal1 I SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe Roa SOURce ROSCillator SOURce RESET VALUE SlNusoid m e RESET VALUE INTernal1 1 Ni l I G a 1 z SET TRIANGLE OR WG e RAMP WAVEFORM POINTS 3 1 SET SAMPLE SOURCE Ma S O NTS En SOURce RAMP POINts m l o TRIGger STARt SOURce RA E RESET VALUE 100 N RESET VALUE INTernali a ra m I 1 is d I 1 T Qa Y B SET TRIANGLE OR RAMP i a a O WAVEFORM POLARITY Gl gt SET FREQUENCY MODE TO i SOURce RAMP POLarity Ray i CW OR FlXed s i Ey x SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE Q QA lt RESET VALUE NORMal SG S RESET VALUE FlXed gt I DB is gt m s SET THE FREQUENCY A E RANGE NON SINE WAVE SET THE WAVEFORM AMPLITUDE SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe SOURce VOL Tage EVel IMMediate AMPLitude i RESET eee RESET VALUE 16187V 1 r
321. data 406 waveform segment address 336 waveform segment combined list 338 waveform segment marker pulse list 343 waveform segment memory 341 waveform segment names 116 336 waveform segment size 116 waveform segment voltage point list 347 Questionable Signal Status condition register 386 431 enable register 386 432 event register 386 432 event register query contents 387 group 431 434 negative transition filter 387 431 435 positive transition filter 388 register 381 431 434 summary bit 386 using 432 434 Quick Reference common commands 428 SCPI commands 409 413 R Ramp Waves doubling frequency 156 generating 65 68 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 368 polarity 369 Ranges DDS frequency generator 79 frequency 155 frequency generator 116 RCL 423 Reader Comment Sheet 17 Reading condition register 431 435 error queue 389 offset register 485 486 standard event status register 439 status byte status register 442 REAL Data Format 358 Rectified Sine Waves generating 111 Ref Sample In BNC trigger slope 395 398 Reference Oscillator description 448 frequency 370 sources 78 115 154 197 371 Register Based Programming 483 508 accessing registers 484 changing output frequency 487 changing signal phase 495 497 frequency control programs 489 494 frequency control registers 487 488 offset register reading 485 486 phase control program 496 497 selectin
322. de 5 11875 V set and a matched output load the least significant bit LSB represents 1 25 mV If the marker bit is 1 a marker pulse will be output with this point if the marker bit in the segment sequence memory location generating this segment is also a 1 Last point is 1 for the waveform segment s third to last point actual last point 3 When downloading waveform segment data from the V XIbus data transfer bus the address for writing the data is offset 38 decimal 26 hex in the HP E1445A s A24 address space Segment The segment sequence data consists of a 32 bit wide value for each segment in the Sequence Data sequence The value should be sent as two 16 bit words with the most significant word sent first The format for downloaded segment sequence data is Bits 31 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bits 16 0 repetition last marker unused segment count point enable address The repetition count is 12 bit unsigned value that is 4096 the desired repetition count a value of 4095 in these bits indicates 1 repetition a value of O indicates 4096 repetitions Last point is 1 for the segment sequence s last point Marker enable is 1 to enable marker pulse generation for that waveform segment Segment address is the starting address of the segment divided by 8 Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess query to obtain the address of a waveform segment 316 Command Reference Chapter 8 Parameters SOURce ARBitrar
323. diate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information HP BASIC Program Example OUTPLOAD IRE STORE OUTPLOAD 2 This program sets the AFG s output impedance and output load 3 Ito 75 ohms 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 Call the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Out_load 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Out load 210 Out load Subprogram which sets the output load 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 240 OUTPUT QAfg OUTP LOAD AUTO OFF Idecouple load from impedance 250 OUTPUT QAfg OUTP IMP 75 loutput impedance 260 OUTPUT Afg OUTP LOAD 75 loutput load 270 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 280 SUBEND 290 Continued on Next Page 70 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 300 SUB Rst 310 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 320 330 340 350 360 370 COM OAfg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg 380 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 C
324. directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Resetti ng and The commands used to reset and clear the AFG are Clearing the AFG RST CLS Resetting the AFG sets it to its power on configuration and clearing the AFG clears its Status Registers Status Register programming is covered in Chapter 9 HP BASIC Program Example RSTCLS 1 IRE STORE RSTCLS 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and AFG 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 ICall the subprogram 50 CALL Rst_cls 60 END 70 80 SUB Rst cls 90 Rst_cls subprogram which resets and clears the AFG 100 COM Afg 110 OUTPUT Afg RST CLS OPC Ireset and clear the AFG 120 ENTER Afg Complete 130 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program RSTCLS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example program RSTCLS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Getting Started 47 Querying the After resetting the HP E1445A or cycling power the AFG parameters are Power On Reset setto their power on values These values are listed in Table B 5 in Configuration PP ndix B The command which queries each AFG parameter setting is LRN HP BASIC Program Example LRN 1 IRE STORE LRN 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and AFG 20 ASSIGN Afg to 70910 30 Call the subprogram 40 Lrn_conf Afg 50 END 60 70 SUB Lrn_conf Afg 80 Lr
325. ds TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity INVerted Example Setting the Sample Gate Polarity TRIG STARt GATE POL NORM Sets active high gate STARt GATE SOURce TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce lt source gt selects the source which gates the TRIGger STARt subsystem The TRIGger STARt subsystem is suspended no new samples are generated while the selected gate source is asserted Normal sample generation resumes when the gate is unasserted Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete EXTernal TTLTrgO through none TTLTrg7 Comments The available sources are EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e When a VXIbus TTLTrg lt n gt line is selected as the gate source the low level on the line asserts the gate The TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity command selects Chapter 8 Command Reference 393 TRIGger Example the active level for the front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC when used as the gate source The front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC is a three use connector for FSK control as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source Only one of these uses may be active at any time If a VXIbus TTLTrg trigger line is used as the sample gate source then no TTLTrg trigger lines can be used
326. ds Page 214 e Operating Multiple AFGs Together Page 218 e Marker Program Comments 2 00000 eee Page 222 Determining the Number of Marker Points of a Waveform Segment 0 00 02 ee ee eee Page 222 Determining the Number of Marker Points of a Segment Sequence 0 0 cece eee ee eee Page 222 Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 203 Marker Pulse Enable Flowchart The flowchart in Figure 6 1 shows how to select and output the different marker pulses at the front panel Marker Out BNC and the ECL trigger lines Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired START Are the Marker Pulses for the front panel Marker Out connector NO YES SELECT THE MARKER SOURCE SELECT THE MARKER SOURCE FOR ECL TRIGGERS SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED RESET VALUE RESET VALUE ECLTrgO ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 RESET VALUE ECLTrg1 TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 SELECT THE MARKER POLARITY SOURce MARKer POLarity RESET VALUE ENABLE THE MARKER OUTPUT NORMal SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe VALUE OFF ENABLE THE MARKER OUTPUT SOURce MARKer STATe RESET VALUE ON Is the Marker Source SOURce LIST
327. dvanced using the arm and trigger signals described in this section The commands used to set up the arming and triggering of sweeps and lists are ARM SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt number IMMediate LINK lt link gt SOURce source TRIGger SWEep SEQuence3 IMMediate LINK lt link gt SOURce source TIMer period The frequency sweep and frequency list arming and triggering commands are frequency coupled Thus they are executed in the sequence shown in the flowchart in Figure 4 1 on page 118 The AFG can output frequency sweeps each time it is triggered However the maximum sweep time and frequency steps depend on the number of waveform repetitions and the average sweep frequency To determine the maximum sweep time SOURce SWEep TIMe lt number gt divide the number of waveform repetitions to be output 1 e maximum is 66536 by the average frequency For example STARt frequency is 1 kHz STOP frequency is 1 MHz then sweep time 66536 1000 1000000 2 66536 500 500 1329 To determine the maximum number of frequency steps or points SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt divide the sweep time by the minimum time between frequency points 1 e 00125 S For example using the above calculated time 1329 00125 106 points The SWP TRIG program shows how to output a sweep using a user selected trigger mode 186 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 The steps of this pr
328. e 340 COM Afg Afg1 350 INTEGER Waveform 1 200 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes 360 FOR l 100 TO 99 370 Waveform 101 I 050505 00125 380 NEXT 390 400 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 410 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed 420 OUTPUT A fg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name 430 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size 440 OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC 3400 450 OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform 1400 bytes 3 digits 2 bytes ampl point 460 OUTPUT QAfg ICR LF 470 480 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT sequence name 490 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size 500 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Rst 540 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 550 COM QAfg Afg1 560 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 570 ENTER Afg Complete 580 SUBEND 590 600 SUB Wf del 610 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 620 COM QAfg Afg1 630 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 640 OUTPUT QGAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 650 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 660 SUBEND 670 680 SUB Errmsg 690 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 700 COM Afg Afg1 710 DIM Message 256 720 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 730 B SPOLL Afg 740 E
329. e Ed E Litt me EEE HEEL V Logical Address Servant Area Access switches through top of cover Device Information Device Type message based C Size 1 Slot Connectors P1 and P2 Addressing Modes A16 A24 A24 Size 4096 bytes Dynamically Configurable Non Interrupter Non Interrupter Handler VXIbus Revision Compliance 1 3 SCPI Revision 1991 0 See side of AFG for power cooling requirements Figure 1 1 The HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator Table 1 1 HP E1445A VXIbus System Factory Settings Parameter Setting Logical Address 80 Servant Area 0 Bus Request Level 3 20 Getting Started Chapter 1 Note The AFG Logical Address Assigning the AFG to a Commander Appendix A has the complete list of HP E1445A VXIbus system specifications The HP E1445A AFG logical address is used to place the AFG in the servant area of a commander HP E1406A Command Module or an embedded controller for example with the AFG servant area switch to set the AFG servant area and to address the AFG see Addressing the AFG on page 22 and Using an Embedded Controller on page 23 In a VXIbus system every device must be in the servant area of a commander with the exception of the top level commander Note the following when assigning the HP E1445A AFG to a commander A commander s servant area is defined as Servan
330. e RESET VALUE 16187V SET THE DC OFFSET SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate OFFSet RESET VALUE OV SET OUPUT IMPEDANCE OUTPut 1 IMPedance RESET VALUE 500 SET OUTPUT LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD RESET VALUE AUTO ON LOAD MATCHED TO IMPedance SET FILTER FREQUENCY OUTPut 1 FiLTer LPASs FREQuency RESET VALUE 250kHz ENABLE FILTER OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe RESET VALUE OFF ENABLE OUTPUT OUTPut 1 STATe RESET VALUE ON VOLTAGE COUPLED Figure 3 1 Commands for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms continued on next page 84 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 SET THE ARM SOURCE DEFINE SEGMENT SEQUENCE NAME ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ SELect RESET VALUE IMMediate DEFINE SEGMENT SEQUENCE LENGTH SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ DEFine SET THE ARM COUNT ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt RESET VALUE 1 UNCOUPLED DEFINE SEGMENT SEQUENCE LIST SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ SEQuence SET THE REPETITION COUNT ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt RESET VALUE INFinity ARMING SET DWELL COUNT SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ DWELI COUNt SEQUENCE DEFINITION AND SELECTION DEFINE SEGMENT NAME SELECT WAVEFORM SEGMENT SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect SEQUENCE SOURCe FUNCtion USER UNCOUPLED DEFINE SEGMENT LENGTH SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine UNCOUPLED LOAD WAVEFORM POINTS INITIATE THE
331. e Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 231 and Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 235 respectively This section shows how to transfer the lists as DAC codes using the Unsigned number format The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus if the AFG currently contains Signed data and you wish to send Unsigned data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Unsigned data This section shows how to setup the AFG to receive a combined list in the Unsigned number format and how to generate the list from voltage values With the AFG set to receive codes in the Unsigned number format it receives the codes as unsigned or offset binary numbers Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command to select the format For outputs into matched loads and with the amplitude set to maximum 5 11875V the following DAC codes generate the following outputs Code 32768 outputs 0 V Code 0 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 8 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 245 To calculate combined list codes from NEGATIVE voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 shift left by 3 32768 For example to output 2V DAC Code 2 00125 shift left by 3 32768 12800 32768 19968 To calculate combined list codes from POSITI
332. e FSK uius ke ek e ROR EUR ROSEO ERROR RC 148 FSK Using the TTLTrg lt n gt Control Source oo e 150 HP BASIC Program Example PSK2 2 0 4 5 ce 0 150 FSK Using an Arbitrary Waveform sasana REOR ed Ee ERS 152 HP BASIC Program Example FSK_ARB 24 04 4 05 664444444 ads 152 Sweeping and FSK Program Comments o o a 154 Reterence Oscillator SOLES amp sr AAA 154 Sou oe dates a od RR RA A a Re 154 APG Frequency Mod s oos s 6k Rr RR RR SEHR EERE MESS 155 Frequency Range Sweeping and Sampling less 155 Frequency Range Frequency Lists and FSK 155 Sweep Count and Frequency List Repetition Count 156 ibi Bek Dela ira RA AAA 156 Freguenoy POMS AMEN M ek TETTE 157 SRECPSPICIID y ide era a SS ROE A DEA 157 DES EDNOSHON iuda guo dos E AAA ARA 157 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents 3 E LIS 4 a a he a pcd a A AA 158 Output Frequency and Sample Rate gt s s c bbe ee ed ee ER Re Hw 160 AC LOVE PARE E COR SAREE EL Re RA 160 FSK CODIOLSOUES y och eek A RES OR REO SEW SOR RS d 161 Prequeucy Shit Delay e sr eerta do dex EEL ES REE EHR RED 162 Drying the TIL Trasi gt Trigger Limes 222 522 Re REE DE REE 162 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 0 000000 0 2 ee eee 163 Chapter Contents a4 uu kg Gk KREG SR A A RES SRR RE EEE REG A 163 The ARM TRIG Configurati n ius po RE ee ee VA A wee 164 TEARM IRIG SHEE a ot ogg a
333. e FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel lMMediate AMPLitude amplitude Set the arm source ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce source Set the slope of the external arm signal ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt Set the arm count ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt Set the number of waveform cycles burst count ARM STARE LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 169 HP BASIC Program Example BURST IRE STORE BURST 2 This program sets the arm count to infinity and the cycle count 3 Icount to 5 The arm source is set to external and a 1 kHz square 4 Iwave is applied to the AFG s Start Arm In BNC connector The 5 AFG outputs a 5 cycle burst on each positive edge of the external 6 larm signal 7 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Burst_arm 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Burst arm 210 Burst arm Subprogram which outputs a 5 cycle burst on each 220 Ipositive edge of an external arm signal 230 COM Afg 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 10E
334. e and define segment 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 COM OAfg DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform l ZSIN 2 PI I 4096 NEXT I Width 50 FOR J 1 TO Width 2 Waveform J 1024 Waveform J 1024 J 04 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO Width 2 Waveform J 1024 Width 2 Waveform J 1024 Width 2 1 J 04 NEXT J OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SPIKES select segment to be defined OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory for segment OUTPUT QGAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SPIKES OUT Define sequence name OUTPUT QAfg SOURILIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 IDefine sequence size OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SPIKES Define segment execution order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SPIKES FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SPIKES C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 110 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Gene rating a l The SIN_R program generates a Rectified sine wave using 4096 segments Rectified Sine Wave Points 5 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV HP BASIC Program Example SIN R This program is similar to the SIN X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences
335. e external stop trigger slope TRiGger STOP SLOPe edge 4 Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency 5 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 6 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 7 Set the arm source ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce source 8 Set the external arm slope ARM STARI LAYer2 SLOPe edge 9 Set the arm count ARM STAR1 LAYer2 COUNt number 180 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 10 Set the number of waveform cycles ARM STARI LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt 11 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example STOPTRIG 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 IRE STORE STOPTRIG This program sets the arm count to 5 and the repetition count to 15 000 A stop trigger applied to the Stop Trig BNC connector laborts the remaining cycles of the current burst An arm signal lapplied to the Start Arm In BNC re arms the AFG which then loutputs the next burst lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Stop_trig WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Stop_trig 200 Stop_trig Subprogram which sets up the AFG to out
336. e see Generating Sinusoid Waveforms on page 450 The DAC can also receive segment data from external sources like the VXIbus The external sources immediately set the DAC to an output voltage that corresponds to the DAC code value sent by the source Each time the DAC receives a new code the DAC s output is set to the value in the new code Thus the waveform frequency depends on the rate at which the DAC receives the codes The output DAC s voltage range is from 5 12 V to 5 11875 V Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 447 Memory Concurrent with the DAC the frequency generator also clocks the segment memory to output the next code to set the DAC bits to the next point on the waveform By clocking both the memory and DAC at a certain clock rate i e sample rate the AFG outputs a waveform at a frequency determined by the length and number of waveform segments and the sample rate See AFG Memory Description on page 452 for more information on how the memory operates Waveform segments and segment sequences can also be stored into memory using external sources like the VXIbus for user generated waveforms Reference Oscillator The reference oscillator provides the clock signal for the frequency generator Thus frequency stability depends on the stability of the reference oscillator The oscillator also determines the frequency range of the frequency generators The AFG allows for user supplied reference oscilla
337. e 450 e Generating Sinusoid Waveforms 0 5 Page 450 e Output Circuitry Description 0000 Page 451 Attenuator 2d rua wt wives ep ER net ies Gewese Page 451 Biller soca A di NI Page 451 Output Amplifier ceo ye ids eee ee eve ee Page 451 Offset Circuitry s es Der He ek een eee Page 451 e AFG Memory Description eese Page 452 AFG Description The AFG can output standard waveforms like sinusoid square triangle and ramp waveforms and user defined arbitrary 1 e USER function waveforms The AFG can also perform frequency sweeping frequency shift keying output frequency lists and DC volts All waveforms that the AFG generates except DC volts are arbitrary waveforms The only difference is that the AFG generates the data for the standard waveforms internally and the user supplies the data for the arbitrary waveforms Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 445 Arbitrary Waveform Description Refer to Figure 10 1 An arbitrary waveform is equally divided into points that are the actual voltage points of the waveform The AFG stores these points as a waveform segment in its segment memory The waveform segments are stored as Digital to Analog Converter DAC codes The codes set the output DAC to the voltage values of the waveform Voltage v Points of a Waveform pine Segment Sequenc Figure 10 1 Arbitrary Waveform The
338. e B 7 HP E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages Settings Conflict Error Messages SOUR FREQ1 FIX frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 FIX MIN set SOUR FREQ1 FIX frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 FIX MAX set SOUR FREQ2 FIX frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ2 FIX MIN set SOUR FREQ2 FIX frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ2 FIX MAX set SOUR FREQ1 RANG frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 RANG MAX set TRIG STAR GATE SOUR EXT and SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT TRIG STAR GATE STAT OFF set TRIG STAR GATE SOUR TTLT lt n gt and SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR TTLT lt n gt TRIG STAR GATE STAT OFF set SOUR FREQ1 FSK frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 FSK MIN set SOUR FREQ1 FSK frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 FSK MAX set TRIG STAR SOUR and SOUR ROSC SOUR both EXT SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 set TRIG STAR SOUR and TRIG STOP SOUR both BUS TRIG STOP SOUR HOLD set TRIG STOP SOUR EXT and TRIG STAR GATE SOUR EXT TRIG STOP SOUR HOLD set TRIG STOP SOUR EXT and SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT TRIG STOP SOUR HOLD set OUTP LOAD not equal to OUTP IMP or INF OUTP LOAD set to OUTP IMP value SOUR FUNC SHAP DC and INIT INIT ignored SOUR ARB DAC SOUR not INT and INIT INIT ignored Frequency list value out of range SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX set SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST and no frequency list defined SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX set SOUR VOLT SOUR VOLT OFFS lt minimum SOUR VOLT OFFS MIN set SOUR VOLT SOUR VOLT OFFS gt
339. e Format ARB DAC FORM UNS Sets unsigned format 314 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce source selects the DAC s data source Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete DPORt INTernal LBUS VXI none The available sources are DPORt The HP E1445A s front panel Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus local bus INTernal The SOURce LIST 1 subsystem or built in waveforms VXI The VXIbus data transfer bus When driving the DAC from the VXIbus data transfer bus the address for writing the data is offset 38 decimal 26 hex in the HP E1445A s A24 address space Setting the DAC data source to a setting other than INTernal disables the ARM subsystem the INITiate command the SOURce subsystem except for the SOURce ARBitrary SOURce MARKer and SOURce VOLTage subsystems and the TRIGger subsystem The HP E1445A immediately outputs each DAC data point when received Also the output amplitude must be specified in terms of volts or volts peak V or VPK Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command to select the format of the data two s complement or unsigned when directly driving the DAC from the V XIbus local bus the front panel Digital Port or the VXI backplane or when programming waveforms using DAC codes via the SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload
340. e Sweep Arm ARM SWE SOUR LINK Links sweep arm to start arm ARM SWE LINK ARM 296 Command Reference Chapter 8 ARM SWEep SOURce ARM SWEep SOURce source selects the source that starts a frequency sweep orlist The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET HP IB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command HOLD Suspend sweep or list arming Use ARM SWEep IMMediate to start the frequency sweep or list IMMediate Immediate sweep or list arming If the sweep advance trigger source TRIGger SWEep SOURce command is set to TlMer the first frequency sweep or list starts when the first start arm is received For multiple sweeps or lists the last frequency point of each sweep or list is output for the same TRIGger SWEep TIMer time as between all other points of the sweep or list If TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to any other source the frequency sweep or list starts when the INITiate IMMediate command is executed For multiple sweeps or lists a last frequency is output until the next sweep advance trigger is received LINK The next valid start arm starts a sweep or list TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete BUS HOLD IMMediate LINK none TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments If ARM SWEep SOURCe is set to TTLTrg lt n gt and you want to set TRIGger S WEep S
341. e commands selects the second waveform segment and then returns the address Divide the address by 8 and store it into the second element of the data array Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 253 13 Add the Marker Enable Add the value of the marker enable bit of the second waveform segment to the value in the second element of the data array 14 Add the Second Waveform Segment s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment is to be executed of the second waveform segment to the value in the second element of the data array 15 Setup the Sequence List SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt 16 Store the Segment Sequence as Unsigned Combined Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined combined list This command stores the segment sequence in the data array into sequence memory The list is in the Unsigned format and sent as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data can also be sent as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data 17 Generate the Output SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate IMMediate 254 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 HP BASIC Program Example COMBSEQ Sending the Combined Segment Lists is similar to the other HP BASIC programs in this chapter However since HP BASIC does not support 32 Bit Integer variables sending a Combined Segment Sequence List is done differently How HP BASIC The Combined Segment Seque
342. e formula Code voltage value 00125 shift left by 3 For example to output 2V DAC Code 2 00125 shift left by 3 12800 To output a marker at a particular point of a waveform add 2 to the combined list DAC code value of the point For example to add a marker bit of a point with a voltage value of 5 V Code 5 00125 shift left by 3 2 32000 2 32002 240 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 The COMBSIGN program shows how to store a combined list 1 e points and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The list is stored in the Signed number format The data is transferred to the AFG using the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V positive going ramp A marker is output at the zero crossing or center of the ramp Chan A applied to AFG s Output Terminal Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Terminal Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 509 load value 2 msec DIV The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Select the DAC
343. e information e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands STATus subsystem e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency2 FlXed 10E3 Example Setting the Sample Rate or Waveform Frequency FREQ2 1E3 Sets frequency to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 331 SOURce FUNCtion SOURce FUNCtion The SOURce FUNCtion subsystem controls what waveform shape arbitrary sinusoid etc the HP E1445A generates For arbitrary waveforms generation the subsystem controls which of the 128 possible segment sequences are selected Subsystem Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape USER lt name gt SHAPe SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape selects what waveform shape the HP E1445A generates Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt shape gt discrete DC RAMP SiNusoid SQUare none TRlangle USER Comments The lt shape gt parameter values are shown as follows DC Generates a DC output voltage RAMP Generates a stepped ramp The SOURce RAMP subsystem controls the polarity and number of points SINusoid Generates a sinusoidal voltage SINusoid requires that TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernalt be selected SQUare Generates a square wave The SOURce RAMP POLarity command controls the polarity TRlangle Generates a stepped tri
344. e is placed into the wait for arm state at the end of the current waveform repetition The selected stop trigger source remains unchanged Comments Executing this command with the start trigger sequence in the idle or wait for arm states generates Error 211 Trigger ignored If the start trigger sequence is on the last of ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt trigger cycles or if ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt 1 is set TRIGger STOP IMMediate places the trigger system in the idle state at the end of the current waveform repetition An INITiate IMMediate command must be executed to restart waveform generation TRIGger STOP IMMediate differs from ABORt in that ABORt terminates all start arm cycles immediately whereas TRIGger STOP IMMediate terminates only the current arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands ABORt INITiate IMMediate TRIGger STARt COUNt RST Condition None Example Stopping an Arm Cycle ARM LAY2 COUN 5 Allows 5 arms ARM LAY2 SOUR HOLD Sets manual start arm ARM COUN 100 Sets 100 repetitions per arm INIT Initiates trigger system ARM LAY2 Starts arm waveform TRIG STOP Terminates arm cycle at end of waveform repetition ARM LAY2 Starts arm waveform again Chapter 8 Command Reference 397 TRIGger STOP SLOPe TRIGger STOP SLOPe edge selects the edge rising or falling on the HP E1445A 5 front panel Stop
345. e master AFG as desired Set the trigger source of the slave AFG to the source driven by the master TRIGger STARt SOURce source Set the frequency mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the output frequency of the master SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency or SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed frequency Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVell IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 176 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 7 Feed the master AFG trigger to the trigger source of the slave AFG SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED source 8 Enable the routing of the trigger signal SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example LOCKSTEP 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 IRE STORE LOCKSTEP This program lock steps two AFGs The trigger source which ladvances the waveform of the master AFG DDS time base is shared by Ithe slave AFG Thus changing the frequency of the master AFG Ichanges the frequency of the slave AFG simultaneously Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A dimension an array Ivariable for the sin x x waveform amplitude points ASSIGN Afg_m TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg_s TO 70911 COM Afg_m Afg_s REAL Waveform 1 4096 ISet up error chec
346. e point in the segment sequence memory e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected Defining a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C Defines segment sequence SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected segment sequence s waveform segment list e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Query Segment Sequence Length LIST SSEQ SEQ SEGM Queries segment sequence length Chapter 8 Command Reference 357 SOURce LIST2 SOURce LIST2 The SOURce LIST2 subsystem defines the sample rate or frequencies list to be generated when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE is set to LIST Frequency list generation requires that TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal and SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST be set Frequency list generation is started by a sweep arm ARM SWEep subsystem and is advanced by a sweep advance trigger TRIGger SWEep subsystem Subsystem Syntax SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt FREQuenoy freq list POINts query only FORMat DATA SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt specifies the format of frequency list return data for the SOURce LIST2 FREQuency command The available frequency list return data for
347. e_addr 2 10 NEXT END LOOP SUBEND SUB Sinx_def Sinx_def Define the waveform Sin x x Download the waveform data las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_ addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg1 FOR 2047 TO 2048 IF I 0 THEN I 1 E 38 Waveform l 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform l 2048 SHIFT Waveform l4 2048 3 NEXT I OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_X Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING Z K SOUR ILISTI SEGM COMB 0 Iwaveform points OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END Iterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN X Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SIN X Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 gt 32767 Continued on Next Page 502 Register Based Programming Appendix C 1390 1400 1410 1420
348. ear service request bit 810 B SPOLL Afg 820 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 830 OUTPUT Afg 840 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 850 REPEAT 860 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 870 ENTER Afg Code Message 880 PRINT Code Message 890 UNTIL Code 0 900 STOP 910 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program COMBSIGN FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program COMBSIGN C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A This program sends the combined list using Signed data as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data It is thus very similar to the SIGN DAT program beginning on page 227 and DACBLOK1 example program beginning on page 232 244 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Combined Unsigned Data Note Using the Combined List with the Unsigned Number Format Transferring the List in the Unsigned Number Format Determining the Codes in the Unsigned Number Format The Combined Segment Lists transfers both the arbitrary waveform segment data and marker pulses to the AFG see Chapter 6 for information on marker pulses You can use either the Signed or Unsigned number format for the list The Combined Segment List can be sent as a comma separated list see Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 or as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data se
349. eared 0 otherwise SWEeping Bit 3 is set 1 while a frequency sweep or list is in progress The bit is cleared 0 when waveform generation is halted when frequency sweeping or lists are not selected and at the end of each sweep or list Waiting for ARM Bit 6 is set 1 when the AFG enters the wait for arm state The bit is cleared 0 when a start arm is received or when waveform generation is aborted INITiated Bit 8 is set 1 when the INITiate IMMediate command is executed The bit is cleared 0 when waveform generation is complete and the AFG returns to the Idle state Reading the Condition Register Bit settings in the Condition Register can be determined with the command STATus OPERation CONDition Bits 0 3 6 and 8 have corresponding decimal values of 1 8 64 and 256 Reading the Condition Register does not affect the bit settings The bits are cleared following a reset RST The Transition Filter specifies which type of bit transition in the Condition Register will set corresponding bits in the Event Register Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions 0 to 1 or negative transitions 1 to 0 The commands used to set the transitions are STATus OPERation NTRansition unmask STATus OPERation PTRansition unmask NTRansition sets the negative transition For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Condition Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register
350. ecifies the maximum output amplitude The amplitude must be equal or greater than the maximum voltage value of the waveform segment Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits 100 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt This command names the waveform segment Set the Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt This command defines the size of the selected waveform segment Store the Waveform Segment as Volts SOURce JLIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage voltage list This command stores the segments into the AFG s segment memory Name the Segment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt This command names the segment sequence Set the Segment Sequence Length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine length This command defines the length of the selected segment sequence Define the Segment Sequence Order SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list This command determines the order in which the waveform segments are to be executed Select the User Name SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt This command sets the AFG to output the selected segment sequence Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information Chapter 3
351. ed frequency Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the number of waveform points SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel lMMediate AMPLitude amplitude Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 183 HP BASIC Program Example GATE IRE STORE GATE 2 The following program gates the output of a 40 point triangle 3 Iwave whose frequency is 1 MHz When the signal on the Gate In BNC 4 lis high the gate is active and the output is suspended at the last 5 lamplitude point triggered When the signal is low the gate is inactive 6 land the waveform resumes 7 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Tri_wave 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Tri wave 210 Tri wave Subprogram which outputs a triangle wave 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator 240 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Ifrequency2 generator 250 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR GATE SOUR EXT Igate source 260 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR GATE POL NORM Igate polarity 270 OUTPUT
352. ed in the sequence memory see How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory on page 113 for more information 3 Clear the AFG Memory of All Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL This command clears all segment data stored in the segment memory see How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory on page 113 for more information 4 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source This command selects the reference oscillator source see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 115 88 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 5 Set the Segment Sample Rate SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency This command sets the rate at which the points in a waveform segment are output by the AFG The waveform frequency is determined by sample frequency number of points Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 6 Select the Arbitrary Waveform Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER This command selects the arbitrary waveform function Couple the command to the previous frequency command 7 Set the Maximum Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the maximum output amplitude The amplitude must be equal to or greater than the maximum voltage value of the waveform segment Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits 8 Name the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt na
353. eform frequencies A TTL high level on the selected source generates frequency a TTL low level generates frequency2 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range o f Default Name Type Values Units lt frequencyl gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz lt frequency2 gt MINimum selects 0 Hz Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the MAXimum value by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command The above values bound the legal range for lt frequency1 gt and lt frequency2 gt Comments Executable when Initiated Yes However the frequency being generated will not change until the FSK control source changes levels Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 FSKey 10 kHz 10 MHz Example Setting the Frequency Shift Frequencies FREQ FSK 1E6 1 KHZ Sets 1 MHz and 1 kHz frequencies Chapter 8 Command Reference 323 SOURce FREQuency 1
354. egisters are written to The subprogram Output_function sets the initial reference oscillator frequency to 40 MHz Ifa different reference oscillator frequency is used that is 42 94967296 MHz or an externally supplied oscillator specify that frequency when the Divide_by_n subprogram is called line 200 Standard function sine waves are not available with the divide by n subsystem SOURce FREQuency2 Frequency doubling should not be used with the divide by n subsystem Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FREQ2REG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program Versions VBPROG and the Visual C example program FREQ2REG C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 494 Register Based Programming Appendix C Changing the Signal Phase The Phase Control Registers The Phase Modulation This section explains how the phase of a sine wave generated by the DDS SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem is changed by writing phase data to the Phase Modulation Registers The following phase control registers are used to change the phase of the sine wave generated by the DDS subsystem e Phase Modulation Registers base_addr B316 through base_addr B116 e Phase Load Strobe Register base_addr 8B16 Phase Modulation Registers B3 and B1 contain the 12 bit phase modulation Registers data that is added to the output of the phase accumulator Address 15 8 7 6 5
355. egment query memory 336 341 segment query names 116 336 segment query size 116 segment reserving memory for 339 segment sample rate 87 segment selecting 251 344 segment single marker pulses 212 213 segment storing in memory 86 87 segment using combined 250 258 segment using combined sequence 250 258 segment using different 93 98 sequence determining marker points 222 sequence determining memory 113 sequence freeing memory 113 sequence registers 498 499 sequence selecting 498 505 sequence using combined 250 258 setting cycle count 169 171 shape selection 332 sweeping arbitrary 141 using DDS generator 99 102 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 529
356. egment sequence repetition query 353 single 343 355 triangle waves 368 versus time 135 137 159 Polarity gating 200 marker signal 364 ramp waves 369 sample gate 393 square waves 369 triangle waves 369 Positive Transition Filter 385 388 Power On Configuration 48 472 474 Preparation For Use 19 Primary HP IB Address 22 Program frequency control 489 494 introductory 46 languages 29 register based 483 508 Program Comments arbitrary waveforms 113 116 arming and triggering 197 201 high speed operation 280 marker outputs 222 multiple AFG operations 222 standard waveforms 78 sweeping and FSK 154 162 Pseudo Noise generating 112 sweeping 141 143 PUD 422 PUD 422 Q QSSG_RQS Example Program 433 434 Query A24 address space offset 407 calibration 298 error queue 389 frequency list length 360 marker list size 222 operation condition register 383 520 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index operation event register 384 parameter settings 287 power on reset configuration 48 questionable signal condition register 386 questionable signal event register 387 repetition count list length 116 353 SCPI version number 390 segment sequence address 347 segment sequence combined list 349 segment sequence list length 357 segment sequence list names 116 348 segment sequence marker pulse list 355 segment sequence memory 353 virtual instrument capacity 408 VXTIbus local bus test
357. eleting from memory 351 sequence marker pulses 354 355 sequence query list names 116 348 sequence query memory 347 353 sequence query repetition count list 116 sequence reserving memory for 350 sequence selecting 356 sequence sending 114 sequence storing in memory 87 single marker pulses 212 213 single waveform 212 213 using different segments 93 98 waveform deleting from memory 340 waveform marker pulses 337 338 342 343 waveform naming 86 waveform output voltage 337 338 345 347 waveform query memory 336 341 waveform query names 116 336 waveform reserving memory for 339 waveform selecting 251 344 waveform storing in memory 86 Select Code 22 Selecting amplitude levels 72 74 DAC data source 315 deviation units 80 365 367 marker enable 251 output 73 74 output loads 69 71 310 311 output units 72 repetition count 251 See also Setting waveform segments 251 344 waveform sequence 498 505 Self Test 46 codes 46 example program 47 Sequence base register 499 memory characteristics 454 memory determining amount 113 memory freeing 113 segment combined list 348 349 segment defining 357 segment defining outputs 352 353 segment deleting from memory 351 segment determining marker pulses 222 segment marker pulses 354 355 segment query list length 357 segment query list names 116 348 segment query memory 347 353 segment quer
358. emove a module from a mainframe 1 Loosen the top and bottom screws securing the module in the mainframe 2 Move the extraction levers away from each other As the levers are moved the module will detach from the backplane connectors 3 Slide the module out Chapter 1 Getting Started 25 Note The extraction levers will not seat and unseat the backplane connectors on older HP VXIbus mainframes and non HP mainframes You must manually seat the connectors by pushing the module into the mainframe until the front panel is flush with the front of the mainframe The extraction levers may be used to guide or remove the module Instrument Language SCPI The HP E1445A AFG uses the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments called SCPI as the instrument control language The programs shown in this manual are written in HP BASIC which uses the SCPI commands for instrument controls These programs and also programs in other languages are contained on the CD that came with the instrument see Program Languages on page 29 for more information SCPI Prog rammi ng SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments is an ASCII based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments The message based AFG has an on board microprocessor which interprets the ASCII command strings and returns ASCII formatted results SCPI Command The HP E1445A SCPI command set is found in Chapter 8 SCPI commands Structure are
359. en data such as a query response is in the AFG s output queue Standard Event Summary Bit ESB Bit 5 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Standard Event Status Group is present and the appropriate bit is set in the group s Event Register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable Register Service Request Bit RQS Bit 6 is set 1 when any other bit in the Status Byte Register is set Operation Status Summary Bit OPER Bit 7 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Operation Status Group is present when the appropriate bit is latched into the group s Event Register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable Register Reading the Status Byte Register The Status Byte Register can be read with either of the following commands STB SPOLL Both commands return the decimal weighted sum of all set bits in the register The difference between the commands is that STB does not clear bit 6 RQS service request The serial poll SPOLL does clear bit 6 All bits in the Status Byte Register with the exception of MAV are cleared with the command CLS CLS also aborts the current waveform MAV is cleared when data is read from the output queue 442 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Service Request Enable Register Presetting the Enable Register and Transition Filter The Service Request Enable Register specifies which status group summary bit s will send a service request mes
360. ency EXTernal frequency SOURce lt source gt FREQuency EXTernal SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal frequency indicates to the HP E1445A the frequency of an external reference oscillator source The SOURce FREQuency 1 and SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems use this value to generate sample rate and waveform frequencies when SOURce JROSCillator SOURce is set to EXTernal or ECLTrgn Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric 1 Hz through 42 94967296 MHz Hz MINimum MAXimum MINimum selects 1 Hz MAXimum selects 42 94967296 MHz Comments Indicating an incorrect frequency for an external reference oscillator will cause incorrect sample rate and waveform frequencies to be generated by the SOURce FREQuency 1 and SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e RST Condition SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal 42 94967296 MHz Example Specifying the External Reference Oscillator Frequency ROSC FREQ EXT 5 MHZ External oscillator is 5 MHz 370 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce SOURce ROSCillator SOURce source selects the reference oscillator source Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete CLK10 ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 none EXTernal INTernal 1 INTernal2 Comments The
361. ent sequence memory Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units name character data 1 through 12 characters NONE none NONE selects no segment sequence Legal names must start with an alphabetic character and contain only alphabetic numeric and underscore characters Alphabetic character case upper versus lower is ignored No segment sequence may have the same name as any waveform segment A maximum of 128 segment sequence names may exist at any time Use the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL or SELected commands to delete names that are no longer needed Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Power On Condition SOURce LIST1 SSEQuence SELect NONE RST Condition Unaffected Example Selecting a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC 356 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence Parameters Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt defines the ordered sequence of waveform segments that constitute a full waveform The lt segment_list gt is a comma separated list of waveform segment names The waveform segment names must have been previously defined The maximum length of the segment sequence is 32 768 points By using the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt command up to 4096 repetitions of a segment sequence name take only on
362. ep Points To demonstrate the relationship between the number of points frequencies Versus Time i a frequency sweep and the time of the sweep the SWP_PVST program uses 100 frequency points to continuously sweep from 5 kHz to 15 kHz in 0 125 seconds The program also shows you how to control the direction of a sweep Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 10 11 Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freg gt Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP stop freq Set the direction up or down of the frequency sweep SOURce SWEep DIRection direction Set the number of points frequencies in the frequency sweep SOURce S WEep POINts number Set the number of sweeps SOURce S WEep COUNt number Set the frequency advance source TRIGger SWEep SOURce source Set the duration of the sweep SOURce SWEep TIME number Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 135 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_PVST IRE STORE SWP_PVST 2 This program sweeps from 5 kHz to 15 kHz in 0 1 seconds to 3 Idemonstrate how to
363. er Dete rmining the e To determine the amount of segment sequence data remaining in the Amount of AFG and the amount of data used execute the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE command The command Segment and returns two number values The first number shows in points the Seq uence Memory amount of segment sequence memory available The second number shows in points the amount of segment sequence memory used To determine the amount of segment data remaining in the AFG and the amount of segment data used execute the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE command The command returns two number values The first number shows in points the amount of segment memory available The second number shows in points the amount of segment memory used How to Free e Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected to delete the Seament and currently selected segment sequence data that was last selected by g the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect command Sequence Memory SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL deletes all segment sequence data stored in the AFG s sequence memory Use the command if there is insufficient segment sequence memory available to store new segment sequences Note that a segment sequence cannot be deleted if it is currently selected by the SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt command Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected to delete the currently selected segment data that was last selected by the SOURce LIST 1 S
364. er number of the high speed data register 320 Ito the A24 base address 330 Addr Base_addr IVAL 26 16 340 SUBEND 350 360 SUB Dac_drive 370 Dac_drive Subprogram which computes a 128 point 5 Vpp triangle wave and 380 writes the corresponding codes directly to the DAC via 390 Ithe VXIbus and High Speed Data register 400 COM Afg Addr 410 ICONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO 420 430 INTEGER Waveform 1 128 Calculate triangle wave dac codes 440 FOR l 1 TO 64 450 Waveform l I 0755 00125 460 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions 470 NEXT 480 FOR 1265 TO 128 490 Waveform l 2 128 1 0755 00125 500 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions 510 NEXT 520 530 IContinuously write data in 16 bit words to the dac via the 540 IVXIbus and High Speed Data register 550 LOOP 560 FOR l 1 TO 128 570 WRITEIO 16 Addr Waveform l 580 NEXT I 590 END LOOP 600 SUBEND 610 620 SUB Rst 630 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 640 COM EAfg Addr 650 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 660 ENTER Afg Complete 670 SUBEND Appendix C Register Based Programming 507 Comments e To simplify the program SCPI commands are included so that the only register written to is the High Speed Data Register This program executes as intended when those SCPI commands which configure the AFG are executed before the register is written to
365. er pulse is specified COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 ICalculate sine wave dac codes FOR l 1 TO 2048 Waveform l 5 SIN 2 PI I 2048 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M1 Isegment name OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 44096 OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform 14096 bytes 4 digits 2 bytes ampl point OUTPUT Afg ICR LF SUBEND SUB Tri_wave Continued on Next Page 256 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 540 Tri_wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and downloads 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 Ithe corresponding dac codes as signed numbers in a Idefinite length block to segment memory Marker pulses Icoincide with the output voltages of Waveform 1024 tthrough Waveform 1033 COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 ICalculate triangle wave dac codes FOR l 1 TO 1023 Waveform l 21 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to code positions NEXT FOR l 1024 TO 1033 Waveform l 21 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 2 Ishift bits set marker bit NEXT FOR 121034 TO 2048 Waveform l 2048 1 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to code positions NEXT Output marker as defined by se
366. eration Event Register are included in its Summary bit The Summary bit is the bit for bit logical AND of the Event Register and the unmasked bit s Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Example Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus OPERation ENABle 0 Setting the Operation Register Enable Mask STAT OPER ENAB H0040 Enables summary on Waiting for Arm bit Chapter 8 Command Reference 383 STATus OPERation EVENt Comments Example STATus OPERation EVENt returns the contents of the Operation Event Register Reading the register clears it to 0 e The Operation Event Register is also cleared to 0 by the CLS common command e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected Power on Condition Operation Event Registers are cleared to 0 Querying the Operation Event Register STAT OPER EVEN Queries the Operation Event Register OPERation NTRansition Parameters Comments Example STATus OPERation NTRansition unmask sets the negative transition mask For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of
367. erence oscillator source with the Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator Use the other sources for custom frequency values However any reference oscillator sources can be used with any frequency generator The SINUsoid function only operates with the INTernal 1 sample source The SQUare TRIangle and RAMP functions operate with any of the sample sources selected by the TRIGger STARt SOURce command The functions can use either the DDS frequency 1 frequency generator or the Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator for waveform generation However the DDS frequency generator gives better frequency resolution and should be used for the these functions The Divide by N frequency generator should be used for arbitrary waveform generation where high frequency values are needed The different sample sources are INTernal 1 power on value selects the DDS frequency generator INTernal2 selects the Divide by N frequency generator BUS the HP IB GET or TRG commands EXTernal the front panel Ref Smpl In BNC 78 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 DDS Frequency Generator Ranges Number of Points versus Frequency Output Load Comments ECLTrg0 or 1 the VXIbus ECL trigger lines HOLD suspends sample generation TTLTrg0 through 7 the VXIbus TTL trigger lines The SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command selects frequency doubling of the DDS frequency generator for the SQUare TRIangle and RAMP functions Thi
368. ersions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 103 HP BASIC Program Example AFGGEN2 This program is similar to the AFGGEN1 program on page 102 except it selects different reference oscillator and sample sources The differences are as follows 1 IRE STORE AFGGEN2 2 This program outputs a ramp arbitrary waveform using the 3 IAFG s frequency2 generator 160 ISet waveform parameters 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 180 OUTPUT EAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 RANG 40E6 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 40E6 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program AFGGEN2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program AFGGEN2 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Sample Programs The programs in this section generate various arbitrary waveforms All programs output waveforms at a 1 kHz repetition frequency and 5 V amplitude These programs do not delete any waveform segments and segment sequences stored in memory Thus once a program is executed it generates Error 1100 Illegal segment name and Error 1110 Illegal sequence name if executed again Due to the similarity of all the programs only the first program is completely presented here Only the differences are shown by the other programs 104 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3
369. ess 80 Instrument Language SCPI You need to include the SICL BAS program file in your Visual BASIC project to run the example programs To add the file be sure you have opened a project you will be using Then Press Ctrl D and enter the path and file name or select the Add File menu item under the File menu and select the SICL BAS file see the Visual BASIC documentation for more information You can run the example program in the Visual BASIC environment or compile it to make an executable file Use the appropriate menu in the environment to compile the program see the Visual BASIC documentation for more information Note that the program can only operate under Windows 32 Getting Started Chapter 1 Typical Visual BASIC The following is an example program written in Visual BASIC using the Example Program HP Standard Instrument Control Library The program Using HP SICL sends commands to the AFG to generate an arbitrary waveform receives data from the AFG shows how to send coupled commands and performs error checking of the AFG Only program codes are given here Refer to the actual program on the CD to see the data that generates the form buttons etc ARBWAVE FRM This program generates a 100 points ramp The data to generate j the ramp is transferred to the AFG as comma separated voltages Instrument HP IB address Const ShowAddr hpib7 9 10 Dim Addr As Integer Dim ChkN
370. ess value see Chapter 7 for more information To output a waveform the AFG sets the DAC to the voltage value of each waveform segment in the segment sequence The sample frequency determines the rate at which the DAC is set to the different voltage values Depending on the sample source selected by TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt the sample rate is set by the DDS frequency1 frequency generator SOURce FREQuency 1 Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator SOURce FREQuency2 or the samples rates of the external sample sources The sample rate and the number of points in the waveform segment determine the waveform repetition frequency The repetition frequency is the sample rate number of points Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 87 Generating a Simple Arbitrary Waveform Ramp generated as an Arbitrary Waveform 2 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV The ARBWAVE program shows how to generate an arbitrary waveform with a single waveform segment The example generates a 100 point ramp The AFG stores the waveform segment into segment memory as voltage data points The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST The RST command aborts any waveform output and sets the AFG to a defined state 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL This command clears all segment sequence data stor
371. eviation or phase of a sinusoid wave while it is output This only works in the sinusoid function The PHS_MOD program shows how change the deviation from 0 to 180 The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source DDS sample source that is trigger start source sinusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Set the Waveform Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed frequency This command specifies the waveform frequency You must use the direct synthesis frequency generator for the sinusoid function Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 3 Select the Phase Modulation Source SOURce PM SOURce source This command sets the phase modulation source The command determines which source to use for a phase change The available sources are INTernal SOURce PM DEViation sets the deviation angle power on value DPORt The front panel Dig Port connector LBUS The VXI Local Bus VXI The VXI Backplane 4 Enable Phase Modulation SOURce PM STATe lt mode gt This command turns phase modulation on or off A 1 one or ON turns it on and a 0 zero or OFF turns it off Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 75 5 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid This command selects the sinusoid function Although RST automatically selec
372. eviously disabled See the HP E1445A Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command Comments Most of the HP E1445A s commands cannot be executed while calibration is in progress The RST command may be used to prematurely terminate the calibration procedure without affecting the stored calibration constants Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration DC POINt CALibration SECure STATe RST Condition None 300 Command Reference Chapter 8 CALibration DC POINt CALibration DC POINt value takes the measured value for the current DC calibration point computes needed calibration constants and sets up the HP E1445A for the next measurement When all measurements have been made the calibration constants are checked for validity If the validity check passes the constants are stored in the HP E1445A s non volatile calibration memory and the calibration count CALibration COUNt query is incremented The RST command should be sent after completing the calibration procedure to restore normal operation Calibration security must have been previously disabled See the HP E1445A Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command Comments Most of the HP E1445A s commands cannot be executed while calibration is in progress The RST command may be used to prematurely terminate the calibration procedure without affecting the stored calibrati
373. f frequency sweep points 374 of marker points determining 222 of points 87 374 of points vs frequency 79 of sweep arms setting 295 372 of waveform cycles setting 169 171 signed number format 225 226 signed number format combined list 240 unsigned number format 229 unsigned number format combined list 245 Numeric Command Parameters 286 O Offset A24 address space 407 485 486 circuitry description 451 register reading 485 486 OPC 420 OPC 421 Operation from incorrect DAC codes 280 high speed 223 280 multiple AFGs 203 222 multiple AFGs together 218 222 Operation Status condition register 383 435 enable register 383 436 event register 383 436 event register query contents 384 group 435 437 negative transition filter 384 positive transition filter 385 register 381 435 437 summary bit 383 transition filter 435 using 436 437 Optional SCPI Commands 27 285 parameters 287 Oscillator Sources 78 115 154 197 OSG_RQS Example Program 437 OUTPLOAD Example Program 70 71 OUTPUNIT Example Program 73 74 Output amplifier description 451 amplitude default voltage units 379 amplitude setting 72 74 377 379 circuitry 450 circuitry description 451 DAC description 447 filters 160 filters cutoff frequency 308 filters disabling 309 filters enabling 309 frequency arbitrary waveform 160 frequency changing 487 impedance setting 69 71 309 leveling AC 144 146 160
374. fies which bits of the Status Byte Register are enabled to generate a service request V XIbus reqt signal Event and summary bits are always set and cleared in the Status Byte Register regardless of the enable mask The lt mask gt is the sum of the decimal weights of the bits to be enabled SRE returns the current enable mask Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mask gt numeric O through 255 none A 1 in a bit position enables service request generation when the corresponding Status Byte Register bit is set a O disables it e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No bits are enabled Enable Service Request on Message Available Bit SRE 16 Enables request on MAV Chapter 8 Command Reference 425 STB TRG TST Comments Comments STB returns the value of the Status Byte Register Bit 6 decimal weight 64 is set if a service request is pending STB should not be used to read the Status Byte Register if a service request is generated by a message available MAV condition e STB is a query Thus sending the command in response to a MAV condition will generate Error 410 Query interrupted e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SRE e RST Condition None TRG is the command equivalent of the HP IB Group Execute Trigger and the VXIbus Trigger
375. following describes the different parts of the circuitry Output Amplifier Output From Filt Attenuat ANNAN DAC Iter enuator 250 500 Offset Circuitry Figure 10 6 AFG Output Circuitry Attenuator The attenuator provides 30 dB attenuation in 01 dB steps for the output voltage The AFG automatically sets the attenuator to the appropriate value dependent on the output amplitude selected by the user The DC volts function does not use the attenuator For this function the output of the output DAC is directly output through the output amplifier to the Output connector Filter The AFG provides a 250 kHz low pass filter 10 MHz low pass filter or no filter The filters are used to filter the high frequency components such as clock signals of the output DAC s output signal Output Amplifier The output amplifier provides the necessary current to drive output loads of 50Q and 75Q loads applied to the Output connector For matched loads the output amplitude are from 5 12 V to 5 11875 V In addition the amplifier can also be set for open circuit or infinite loads applied to the Output connector For open circuit outputs the amplitude range is twice the matched load values Offset Circuitry This circuitry offsets the output amplifier to provide an offset voltage Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 451 AFG Memory Description The segment memory that stores the segment list as DAC codes can s
376. format unsigned Idefine marker output Isegment name Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END Iterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT sequence name OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP SUBEND SUB Rst 670 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 Continued on Next Page Isequence size Isegment order 248 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 680 COM Afg Afg1 690 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 700 ENTER Afg Complete 710 SUBEND 720 730 SUB Wf del 740 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 750 COM QAfg Afg1 760 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 770 OUTPUT QGAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 780 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 790 SUBEND 800 810 SUB Errmsg 820 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 830 COM Afg Afg1 840 DIM Message 256 850 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 860 B SPOLL Afg 870 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 880 OUTPUT Afg 890 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 900 REPEAT 910 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 920 ENTER Afg Code Message 930 PRINT Code Message 940 UNTIL Code 0 950 STOP 960 SUBEND Visual B
377. formed on downloaded data Erratic operation may occur if invalid data length or format is downloaded Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 commands RST Condition Downloading disabled Set up to download 512 points from the VXI backplane to waveform segment ABC LIST SEL ABC Creates segment name LIST DEF 512 Reserves 512 points of segment memory ARB DOWN VXI ABC 512 Sets up for download download data ARB DOWN COMP Indicates download complete Chapter 8 Command Reference 317 SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete disables direct downloading mode Send it when downloading is complete Comments Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload e RST Condition Downloading disabled Example Set up to download 512 points from the VXIbus to waveform segment ABC LIST SEL ABC Creates segment name LIST DEF 512 Reserves 512 points of segment memory ARB DOWN VXI ABC 512 Sets up for download download data ARB DOWN COMP Indicates download complete 318 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FREQuency 1 Coupling Rules The SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem controls the first of the HP E1445A s two frequency generators SOURce FREQuency2 controls the second generator The first generator uses a direct digital syn
378. frequency list 230 COM Afg 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 lreference oscillator 250 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency1 generator 260 OUTPUT A fg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST list mode 270 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST2 FREQ 1E3 10E3 100E3 1E6 freq list 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 290 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 300 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 310 SUBEND 320 330 SUB Rst 340 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 350 COM OAfg 360 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 370 ENTER Afg Complete 380 SUBEND 390 400 SUB List_lengih 410 List_length Subprogram which queries frequency list length 420 COM OAfg 430 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST2 FREQ POIN Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 125 440 ENTER Afg Points 450 DISP Number of frequencies in list Points 460 SUBEND 470 480 SUB Errmsg 490 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 500 COM OAfg 510 DIM Message 256 520 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 530 B SPOLL Afg 540 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 550 OUTPUT Afg 560 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 570 REPEAT 580 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 590 ENTER QAfg Code Message 600 PRINT Code Message 610 UNTIL Code 0 620 STOP 630 SUBEND Upon completion the pr
379. g SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 8 lamplitude 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM OFFS 1 loffset 260 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 270 SUBEND 280 290 SUB Rst 300 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 310 COM Afg 320 OUTPUT EAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG 330 ENTER Afg Complete 340 SUBEND 350 360 SUB Errmsg 370 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 380 COM Afg 390 DIM Message 256 400 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 410 B SPOLL Afg 420 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 430 OUTPUT Afg 440 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 450 REPEAT Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 73 460 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 470 ENTER QAfg Code Message 480 PRINT Code Message 490 UNTIL Code 0 500 STOP 510 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program OUTPUNIT FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program OUTPUNIT C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 74 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Using Phase Modulation Use the ac power line frequency triggering feature of the oscilloscope to trigger the waveform The dashed lines indicate output after the phase shift to a 50 Q load 2 msec DIV Phase modulation allows you to change the output d
380. g commands for continuous waveforms are uncoupled commands They are executed relative to other AFG commands in the sequence of Figure 5 2 Frequency Coupled Commands Frequency Voltage Coupled Commands i e function Voltage Coupled Commands Arm source slope arm count and cycle count commands Initiate Figure 5 2 AFG Arming Command Sequence Note Detailed information on the commands introduced in this chapter can be found in Chapter 8 Command Reference The commands in this chapter are shown in their entirety optional headers included to help you locate them in the reference Setting Arming The EXT_ARM program shows how to select the source which arms the Sources AFG The program selects the AFG s Start Arm In BNC connector as the arming source When an arming signal is received a 10 kHz 1 Vpp square wave is output The steps of this program are 1 Select the FIXed frequency mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency 3 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 4 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 166 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 5 Set the arm source ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce source 6 Set the trigger edge of the external trigger signal ARM STAR1 LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt 7 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state I
381. g the Waveform Segment Size Page 116 Returning the Segment Sequence List Names Page 116 Returning the Repetition Count List Length Page 116 Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 83 Arbitrary Waveforms Flowchart FREQUENCY AND SAMPLING FUNCTION I The flowchart in Figure 3 1 shows the commands and the command execution order to generate arbitrary waveforms The reset power on values of each command are also noted on the flowchart Note that the IEEE 488 2 RST command places the AFG into its power on state Thus it may be unnecessary to execute all of the commands on the flowchart Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired START SET REFERENCE OSCILLATOR SOURCE TO INTernal1 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal1 SET SAMPLE SOURCE TO INTernal1 TRIGger STARt SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal1 SET FREQUENCY MODE TO CW OR FlXed SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE RESET VALUE FlXed SET THE SAMPLE FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FIXed RESET VALUE 10kHz SET THE FUNCTION TO USER SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RESET VALUE SlNusoid FREQUENCY COUPLED pee ener FREQUENCY VOLTAGE COUPLED Re SET THE WAVEFORM AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT O AMPLITUDE SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitud
382. g waveform sequence 498 505 system configuration 484 Registers accessing 484 486 condition register 431 435 enable register 383 386 432 436 event register 432 436 event register query contents 384 387 event register summary bit 383 386 frequency control 487 488 frequency load strobe 488 high speed data 506 offset reading 485 486 operation status 381 436 437 operation status group 435 phase control 495 phase increment 487 phase load strobe 495 phase modulation 495 questionable signal status 381 431 434 ROSCN N divider 488 sample hold and ROSC N control 488 sequence base 499 standard event status 439 standard event status enable 440 standard event status group 439 441 status byte 442 status byte status group 442 status register 499 traffic register 498 transition filter 431 435 waveform select 499 waveform sequence 498 499 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 521 Removing Modules 25 Repetition Count 251 segment sequence list 353 segment sequence output 352 Repetition Frequency determining 87 Reset Configuration list 472 474 query 48 Reset Configuration Query 48 Resetting AFG 47 example program 47 Returning ASCii data format 335 358 definite block data format 335 358 PACKed data format 335 REAL data format 358 repetition count list length 116 segment sequence list names 116 waveform segment names 116 RMC 423 ROSC N Divider Register 488 RST 47
383. ge 428 ABORT sisi sinia uuaa 290 STATS uiii td 304 IA o ee D pere taedia 304 ARM ziii exiens 291 DG ege tette 305 STARt SEQuence 1 291 LAYer 1 s 291 INI Tiate e meto 306 OON ustedes oct 291 IMMediate as1i nie arean1aaea n 306 LAYGr2i cierto li 292 COUNT korni tret 292 OUTPut 1 5 moe 308 IMMediate 293 FIETeE inte 308 BL OPB sacerdo dene lios 293 ELCPASS Sinite oci 08 SOURCGe nigneidesS 294 FREQuenoy sss 308 SWEep SEQuence3 295 ESTATe ohio 309 COUNT ente 295 IMPedance ned 309 IMMediate 295 O A 810 LINK A etd ect uin 296 AUTO i i eed SOURCE d ette das 297 ESTATE a a a o 311 CALibration eene 298 SQURCce niat prt merce 313 COOP iii cei 298 ARBitrar ynierii eiii 313 DATA suscitan 209 DAG r re aaea diia 313 IAE E 299 FORMat coronan ronca 313 A see ete ages 299 ISOURCe nse Ree 315 EDO pica ama 300 DOWNIload eee 316 EDO ite peto etr es 300 COMPITE s sss 918 BEGIN e eines 300 POINt 301 SEGUI Oui 302 CODE aU exe 302 ELO oen see end 303 Chapter 8 Command Reference 281 SQURcGe eter 319 SSEQuence iedit 347 FREQuency 1 esses 319 ADDRESS ssssss sss 047 ANA CATa
384. gh Level HP E1445A Programming Sequence Coupled commands must be contiguous and executed in the same program statement This is done by placing the commands in the same program line or by suppressing the end of line terminator until the last coupled command has been sent To send multiple commands in a single line or in a single statement the commands are linked with a semicolon and a colon This is illustrated in the following lines SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Or SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Both techniques are used in the programs found throughout this manual Note that the semicolon and colon link commands within different subsystems Only a semicolon is required to link commands within the same subsystem see SCPI Command Structure on page 26 See page 31 for information on suppressing the end of line terminator 28 Getting Started Chapter 1 Program Languages The program language shown in this manual is HP BASIC This language was selected since 1t easily shows how to program the AFG However the same programs except where noted are also supplied in Visual C C and Visual BASIC using the HP Standard Instrument Control Library SICL The programs using SICL are Windows programs All programs are supplied on the CD that came with this manual see next section Example Program CD To determine the location of the different programs and the required libraries
385. gment and sequence list OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M2 Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 44096 OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform 14096 bytes 4 digits 2 bytes ampl point OUTPUT QAfg ICR LF SUBEND SUB Seq_list 840 Seq list This subprogram downloads the sequence list as a combined 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 repetition count marker segment address list in an lindefinite length arbitrary block INTEGER Sequence 1 2 1 2 REAL Addrm1 Addrm2 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M1 Idetermine segment address OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addrm1 Addrm1 Addrm1 4 4 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment M1 Sequence 1 2 is the starting address of segment M1 Sequence 1 1 SHIFT 4096 2 4 Addrm1 DIV 65536 Sequence 1 2 Addrm1 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm1 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M2 Idetermine segment address OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addrm2 Addrm2 Addrm2 4 4 to set starting address boundary of segment Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 257 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1
386. gment in number of points 1 e the same size set in SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 261 8 10 11 12 13 14 Place the AFG into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This commands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until it executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the previous commands Generate Download and Store the First Waveform Segment as a Combined Signed List This step stores the Combined waveform segment into segment memory using the Signed number format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The command or downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded controller You can also use the command module like the HP E1406A Command Module but at a slower data transfer rate Be sure to set the last point bit at the appropriate point on the waveform Notify the AFG that Downloading is Completed SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete Send this command to the AFG after all data is downloaded Setup the Second Combined Segment List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Select the Download Source for the Second Segment List SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt
387. gment name 1111 Too many sequence names There are gt 256 sequence names defined Use SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL SEL to delete the current selected sequence or SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL ALL to delete all sequences 1112 Sequence in use Trying to delete a sequence currently selected by SOUR FUNC USER 1113 Sequence contains zero length Segment contains no voltage or dac code data segment 1114 Sequence lists of different lengths The length of a sequence s segment list does not equal the length of its marker list and its marker list does not equal 1 1115 Sequence list has zero length Query of a marker list dwell count list or sequence segment list and no data is in the list Also occurs following INIT IMM or SOUR FUNC USER when no segments are in the sequence list 1116 Sequence name not DEFined Trying to define an ordered sequence of waveform segments and sequence memory has not been reserved with the SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF command 1117 Sequence name already defined Defining a sequence and a sequence by that name already exists 1118 No sequence name SELected SOUR LIST1 SSEQ subsystem command executed without a segment sequence first selected by SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL 1121 Frequency list has zero length SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST is set and no frequency list exists 1122 Frequency list length less than Frequency list has less than two frequencies minimum Appendix B Useful Tables 479 Settings Conflict Error Messages Tabl
388. gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt NL END gt Command parameters shown within square brackets are optional The brackets are not part of the parameter and are not sent to the AFG If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value For example consider the ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt MIN MAX INF gt command If you send the command without specifying a parameter the present ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt value is returned If you send the MIN parameter the command returns the minimum count available If you send the MAX parameter the command returns the maximum count available There must be a space between the command and the parameter Unless otherwise noted in the reference section parameter settings can be queried by adding a question mark to the command which set the parameter For example SOUR FREQ1 FIX 20E3 sets the frequency to 20 kHz The value can be queried by executing SOUR FREQ1 FIX The MINimum or MAXimum value of a parameter is determined as follows SOUR FREQ1 FIX MIN SOUR FREQ1 FIX MAX The minimum and maximum values returned are based on the settings of other AFG commands at that time Chapter 8 Command Reference 287 SCPI Command Execution Command Coupling MIN and MAX Parameters in Coupling Groups Linking Commands Command Choices The following information should be remembered when executing SCPI commands Many of the AFG SCPI
389. gth Arbitrary Block Data to store the data The list uses a 16 bit word for each point of the waveform segment Download the segment data directly into the AFG s High Speed Data Register The data must go to the register address with a 38 decimal 26 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space e Be sure to set the last point bit bit 0 in the list This indicates to the AFG that all the segment data has been transferred Set the bit at the third to last point of the waveform segments the actual last point 3 For example for a Combined list with a size of 2048 set the bit at point number 2048 3 2045 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 259 Combined Segment Figure 7 5 shows a single 32 bit integer used to download a Combined Sequence List Format Segment Sequence List Bits 0 through 16 select the combined waveform segments for output bit 18 enables the marker output and bits 20 through 31 sets the repetition count 32 bit combined list that defines the segment lists to be executed enables the marker enables the last point and defines the repetition count for the segment lists Last Point Bit Reserved 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21f20 91817165 4 31 2 1 10 9 8 7 615 4 3 2 1 0 12 Bit Code that sets the Address of the Segment segment repetition count Marker List in Memory 17 Bits Enable Bit Figure 7 5 Combined Sequence List Format A Combined Segment Sequence List determines the order and how ofte
390. gth must be no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine If the marker pulse list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the most recent marker pulse and voltage point lists is generated when the waveform segment is output e Changing marker pulse values preserves the waveform segment s voltage point list and vice versa Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined 342 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 Example Defining a Waveform Segment Marker Pulse List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST VOLT 1 5 5 5 5 0 5 1 Defines waveform voltages LIST MARK 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Outputs a marker pulse on first and fifth voltage points SEGMent MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected waveform segment s marker pulse list Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Query Marker Pulse List Length LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST MARK POIN Queries the marker pulse list length SEGMent MARKer SPOint SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SP
391. h different waveform segments 93 08 generating arbitrary with single waveform segment 88 92 generating standard 53 82 528 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index generating standard command flowchart 54 55 using divide by n generator 99 101 104 174 175 generating standard frequencies setting 331 WAVSELFP Example Program 272 277 generating standard ramp waves 65 68 generating standard selecting amplitude levels 72 74 generating standard selecting output loads 69 71 generating standard selecting output units 72 74 generating standard sine waves 58 60 generating standard square waves 61 64 generating standard triangle waves 65 68 generating using signed data 225 228 generating using unsigned data 229 230 initiating 165 outputting 86 87 phase modulation data sources 366 phase modulation default angle units 367 phase modulation disabling 367 phase modulation enabling 367 phase modulation selecting deviation units 80 365 point marker pulses for each 214 217 repetition count 199 291 repetition frequency determining 87 repetition per start arm 291 segment data 316 segment deleting from memory 340 segment determining marker points 222 segment determining memory 113 segment freeing memory 113 segment marker pulses 337 338 342 343 segment multiple marker pulses 207 211 segment naming 86 segment number of points 87 segment output voltage 337 338 345 347 s
392. hapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 79 Output Units e The selected unit type can be overridden by sending a unit suffix Comments with the amplitude command For example if the selected unit is VPP sending SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 5V changes the unit type to volts that is V for that command However the default unit type remains in effect for subsequent amplitude commands that are sent without the unit suffix The V volts suffix and VPK volts peak suffix generate the same amplitude values for all time varying waveforms like SINusoid SQUare TRlangle and RAMPS The default unit type only applies for amplitudes and not for offsets The unit for offsets is always specified in V for volts For example executing SOURce VOLTage OFFSet 1VPP causes an error To prevent the error execute either SOURce VOLTage OFFSet 0 1 or SOURce VOLTage OFFSet 0 1V e The W DBM and DBMW unit types references the amplitude levels to the 50 Q or 75 Q output load values set by the OUTPut 1 LOAD command Thus the W DBM and DBMW values are meaningless and not available when selecting an open circuit load Selecting the Use either degrees or radians to change the phase in the phase modulation Deviation Units for function There are two ways to select the units either send the unit type Phase Modulation with the de viation command like SOURce PM DEViation 90DEG or select the unit type with the unit com
393. hase Increment and Frequency Load Strobe Registers This program executes as intended when the SCPI commands in subprogram Output_function are executed before the registers are written to The subprogram Output_function sets the initial reference oscillator frequency to 42 94967296 MHz If a different reference oscillator frequency is used that is 40 MHz or an externally supplied oscillator specify that frequency when the Freq_change subprogram is called line 200 If frequency doubling is in effect SOUR FREQ1 RANG command in subprogram Output_function the doubled frequency can be changed to another doubled frequency by passing a number other than 0 as the fourth parameter to the Freq_change subprogram line 200 Note the following when specifying the number of waveform points Npts value passed to the Freq_change subprogram sine waves and arbitrary waveforms Npts 1 square waves Npts 4 ramp and triangle waves Npts RAMP POINts value Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FREQIREG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program Versions VBPROG and the Visual C example program FREQIREG C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Appendix C Register Based Programming 491 Divide by N Frequency The FREQ2_REG program changes the signal frequency that is generated Control using the Divide by N SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem and the reference oscillator from any of the avai
394. he SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC command must be contiguous To do this sent no carriage return CR and line feed LF before all the data is transferred The format in line 440 disables the CR and LF The CR and LF sent in line 460 tells the AFG that the data transfer is complete IRE STORE DACBLOK1 This program downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed 1 2 s complement DAC codes The data is sent in an IEEE 488 2 Idefinite length block in 16 bit integer format The waveform is la 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data COM Atg Afg1 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf_del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 Continued on Next Page 232 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 290 END 300 310 SUB Ramp_wave 320 Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output 330 Isequenc
395. he center of the triangle waveform The program generates a512 point 5 V sine wave and 5 V triangle wave Chan A applied to AFG s Output Connector Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Connector Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 50 load value 5 msec DIV The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOL Tage L EVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 4 Select the Marker Source SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 This command selects the marker source for the front panel s Marker Out connector to output marker pulses generated by arbitrary waveforms See Available Marker Sources on page 205 for the different sources 5 Select the Marker Polarity SOURce MARKer POLarity polarity NORMal lt polarity gt selects active high marker pulses INVerted selects active low marker pulses Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 207 10 11 12 13 14 Enable Marker Outputs SOURce MARKer STATe ON This commands enables the AFG to output marker pulses However before the marker pulses can be output they must be selected in the waveform segment
396. he idle state Initiating Waveform Generation INIT Initiates waveform generation Chapter 8 Command Reference 307 OUTPut 1 OUTPut 1 The OUTPut 1 subsystem controls the characteristics of the output waveform The subsystem sets the low pass output filter sets the output source impedance and enables or disables the output Subsystem Syntax OUTPut 1 FIL Ter LPASs FREQuency frequency STATe lt mode gt IMPedance impedance LOAD load AUTO mode STATe mode FILTer LPASs FREQuency OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt frequency gt sets the output filter s cutoff frequency to either 250 kHz or 10 MHz Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric 250 kHz 10 MHz MINimum Hz MAXimum MINimum selects the 250 kHz filter MAXimum selects the 10 MHz filter Comments Selecting the cutoff frequency does not enable the output filter Use the OUT Put 1 FILTer LPASs STATe command to enable or disable the output filter Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe e RST Condition OUTPutl FILTer LPASs FREQuency 250 KHZ Example Setting the Low pass Filter to 10 MHz OUTP FILT FREQ 10 MHZ Selects 10 MHz output filter OUTP FILT ON Enables output filtering 308 Command Reference Chapter 8 OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STA
397. he sine wave frequency ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Once a start arm is received the marker is asserted when the first amplitude point is triggered The marker is unasserted with the last amplitude point of the last waveform repetition or following an ABORt SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a frequency change occurs This shows that the new steady state frequency has been reached SOURce LIST 1 Outputs marker pulses specified by the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SSEQuence MARKer commands The pulse is normally one sample period wide but may be widened by placing markers on consecutive output points This source is only useful with SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER i e arbitrary waveform output SOURce PM DEViation CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a phase change occurs This shows that the new phase has been reached SOURce ROSCillator The reference oscillator as selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Outputs a nominal 12 nS marker pulse for each point of the segment list Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt string ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 none ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge SOURce LIST 1 SOURce PM DEViation CHANge
398. his product have been im paired either through physical damage excessive moisture or any other reason REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until safe operation can be verified by service trained personnel If necessary return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Of fice for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained DO NOT service or adjust alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product Return the product to a Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained 14 HP E1445A User s Manual Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Loveland Manufacturing Center Manufacturer s Address 815 14th Street S W Loveland Colorado 80537 declares that the product Product Name Arbitrary Function Generator Model Number HP E1445A Product Options All conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 Incl Amend 2 1995 EN61010 1 A2 1995 CSA C22 2 1010 1 1992 UL 3111 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A TEC 801 2 1991 EN50082 1 1
399. his program executes as intended when the SCPI commands in subprogram Output function are executed before the registers are written to Phase modulation is only available with standard function sine waves Standard function sine waves are only available with the DDS SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program PHASCHNG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program PHASCHNG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Appendix C Register Based Programming 497 Selecting the Waveform Sequence This section shows how to select and output an arbitrary waveform without aborting the current waveform and re initializing the AFG The Waveform The following Waveform Sequence Registers are used to change the output Seq uence Registers waveform sequence e Traffic Register base_addr 816 e Waveform Select Register base_addr Aj6 e Sequence Base Register base_addr 2016 e Status Register base_addr 216 The Traffic Register The Traffic Register specifies the source which selects the waveform sequence Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0 base 816 Sequencer High speed clock High speed data source other control data source source bits Sequencer Data Source The Sequencer data source field specifies the source which selects addresses in sequence base memory that
400. his section include e SOURce ROSCillator e TRIGger e SOURce FREQuency 1 Sweep mode and related commands Frequency list mode and related commands e SOURce SWEep e ARM SWEep The following programs show how to perform sweeps and frequency lists 120 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweeping Using St art and Stop Frequencies The SMPLSWP1 program specifies a start frequency and a stop frequency and continuously sweeps between O and 1 MHz The program also queries the start frequency stop frequency center frequency and frequency span to show the relationship between them Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source Select the frequency generator that allows frequency sweeping TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt start freq Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP stop freq Set the number of sweeps SOURce S WEep COUNt number Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude amplitude Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 1
401. ial protocol The output queue The Service Request Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register The enable masks for the Operation Status and Questionable Signal Registers Calibration data Calibration security state Protected user data The DAC code format signed vs unsigned Waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None SAV SAV lt number gt stores the current programming state into one of the 10 possible stored state areas The lt number gt indicates which of the stored state areas should be used This command stores the states of all commands affected by RST Notable exceptions include the DAC code format signed vs unsigned the SOURce LIST commands including waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECure command state Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 0 through 9 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None 424 Command Reference Chapter 8 SRE and SRE Parameters Comments Example e Related Commands LRN RCL RST e RST Condition unaffected e Power on Condition all saved states set to the same state as the RST state SRE lt mask gt speci
402. icates that during the test that number of bytes will be sent to the HP E1445A The data will be placed into unused waveform segment memory When all data has been sent use the VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA query to retrieve what the HP E1445A received Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt length gt numeric see below none The valid range for length is 2 through the size of largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory in bytes 2 bytes per point lt ength gt must be an even number MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA RST Condition None Power On Condition Local Bus testing not configured Example Testing Local Bus Operation VINS CONF TEST CONF 100 Configures for 100 byte test send data VINS CONF TEST DATA Reads back test data Chapter 8 Command Reference 405 VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA Comments Example VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA returns the received V XIbus Local Bus test data The data is returned in 16 bit integer format in an IEEE 488 2 definite block Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure e RST Condition None Power On Condition Local Bus testing not configu
403. ice in the Wait for Trigger state Figure 5 1 When a trigger occurs the AFG digital to analog converter DAC outputs one waveform amplitude point The information in this section covers the commands and programming sequence used to trigger the AFG when outputting fixed frequency waveforms Trigge ring The commands which trigger the AFG allow you to specify the following Commands the start trigger source the slope of an external start trigger signal the stop trigger source the slope of an external stop trigger signal the sample gating source the polarity of an external gating signal to enable sample gating The triggering commands include TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt number GATE POLarity polarity SOURCe source STATe state IMMediate SLOPe edge SOURCe source STOP SEQuence2 IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce source Note The trigger count TRIGger STARt COUNTt is always equal to the number of amplitude points in the current waveform multiplied by the number of waveform cycles This value is not programmable other than 9 91E37 but 1s included for SCPI compatibility purposes only 172 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 The commands in the TRIGger subsystem are frequency coupled They are executed relative to other AFG commands in the sequence shown in Figure 5 3 Reference Oscillator Trigger Source Gating Stop Trigger Commands
404. in waveforms sine square etc Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz divided by 16 MINimum selects 0 Hz The above values bound the legal range for lt frequency gt Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency Ramps and Triangle Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the MAXimum value by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 FlXed 10 kHz Example Setting the Sample Rate or Waveform Frequency FREQ 1E3 Sets the frequency to 1000 Hz 322 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequency1 gt lt frequency2 gt sets the two sample rates or waveform frequencies for frequency shift keying SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce sets the source which selects between the two sample rates or wav
405. inary format COM Afg Afg1 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 path for ASCII data ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL List1 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB List1 Listi ISubprogram which downloads a list of 100 frequencies 1 kHz to 100 kHz in a definite length arbitrary block COM OAfg OAfg1 DIM Freglist 1 100 FOR I 1 TO 100 Freglist I 21000 l NEXT I OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency1 generator OUTPUT A fg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST Ifrequency list mode OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST2 FREQ 3800 download freqs OUTPUT A fg1 Freqlist I 800 bytes 3 digits OUTPUT QAfg ICR LF OUTPUT OAfg SOUR SWE TIME 100 time seconds through list OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 131 440 SUB Rst 450 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 460 COM Afg Afg1 470 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 480 ENTER Afg Complete 490 SUBEND 500 510 SUB Errmsg 520 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 progra
406. ince there is only one defined internal event The command is included for SCPI compatibility purposes only Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units link string ARM STARt SEQuence1 LAYer2 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands TRIGger S WEep SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger SWEep LINK ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Example Linking the Sweep Advance Trigger TRIG SWE LINK Links sweep advance trigger to start arm TRIG SWE LINK ARM LAY2 400 Command Reference Chapter 8 TRIGger SWEep SOURce TRIGger SWEep SOURce source selects the source that causes a frequency sweep or list to advance to the next frequency Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete BUS HOLD LINK TIMer none TTL TrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET HP IB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command HOLD Suspend sweep or list frequency advance triggering Use TRIGger SWEep IMMediate to advance to the next frequency LINK The next valid start arm advances the sweep or list Thus the frequency change always occurs at the start of ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt repetitions of the waveform TIMer The SOURce SWEep TIME and TRIGger SWEep TIMer commands control the sweep or list frequency advan
407. ined OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory for segment OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT QGAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL CHARGE OUT Define sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 IDefine sequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ CHARGE ISet execution order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program CHARGE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program CHARGE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Generati nga Sine The SPIKES program generates a sine wave with spikes using 4096 segments Wave with Spikes or Points 5 V DWV Output applied to a 50N load value 2 msec DIV HP BASIC Program Example SPIKES 180 190 200 210 220 230 290 This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences IRE STORE SPIKES This program generates a spiked sine wave as an arbitrary waveform Call the subprogram which defines a sine wave with a spike and Ithe output sequence CALL Spike def ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SPIKES OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUB Spike def Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 109 300 Spike_def Compute waveform sine wave with spik
408. ines INTernal 1 The internal 42 94967296 MHz oscillator INTernal2 The internal 40 MHz oscillator The INTernal 1 reference oscillator is recommended for use with the Direct Digital Synthesis DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem for high resolution and frequency range INTernal 1 is the default reference oscillator source Thus in many programs the source is not specified Sweeping frequency lists and frequency shift keying are only available using the direct digital synthesis DDS frequency synthesis method SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem The method by which the output is advanced to the next sample point is selected with the TRIGger STARt SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC HOLD Suspends sample generation INTernal 1 The SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem DDS frequency synthesis e INTernal2 The SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem Divide by n frequency synthesis 154 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 e TTLTrgO through 7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines INTernal 1 is the source selected at power on or following a reset but is specified in the programs to emphasize that sweeping frequency lists and frequency shift keying are only allowed when INTernal 1 is the sou
409. instantaneously by writing frequency codes to the appropriate registers The section shows how to change the frequency when either the direct digital synthesis SOURce FREQuency 1 or divide by n SOURce FREQuency2 frequency synthesis method is used The Frequency The following Frequency Control Registers are used to change the output Control Registers frequency generated with the direct digital synthesis DDS and divide by n methods e Phase Increment Registers DDS base_addr A716 through base addr A116 e Frequency Load Strobe Register DDS base_addr 8D16 e Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register DIV N base_addr 6316 e ROSC N Divider Registers DIV N base_addr 7D16 through base_addr 7F16 The Phase Increment Phase Increment Registers A7 A5 A3 and A1 contain the 32 bit phase Registers increment data that is written to the DDS micro chip The phase increment value determines the output frequency Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base A716 unused frequency value through base A116 Register A7 Bits 31 24 of the phase increment value These are the most significant bits MSBs Register A5 Bits 23 16 of the phase increment value Register A3 Bits 15 8 of the phase increment value Register Al Bits 7 0 of the phase increment value These are the least significant bits LSBs Appendix C Register Based Programming 487 The Frequency Load Strobe Registe
410. ion register 383 operation event summary bit 383 questionable signal condition register 386 questionable signal event summary bit 386 Block Diagram description 445 452 Boolean Command Parameters 286 BURST Example Program 170 171 Bus data transfer bus 24 request level 24 request level guidelines 24 request lines 24 Byte size definite length block data 231 size indefinite length block data 235 C CALibration Subsystem 298 305 CAL COUNt 298 CAL DATA AC 1 299 CAL DATA AC2 299 CAL DATA DC 300 CAL DC BEGin 300 CAL DC POINt 301 510 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index CAL SECure CODE 302 CAL SECure STATe 303 CAL STATe 304 CAL STATe AC 304 CAL STATe DC 305 Cataloging segment sequence names 348 waveform segment names 336 Certification 13 Changing output frequency 487 security passwords 302 signal phase 495 CHARGE Example Program 108 109 Checking for Errors 49 Clearing AFG 47 example program 47 CLS 47 416 Combined segment list 239 250 segment list defining 337 segment list determining size 280 segment list format 239 240 245 segment list query 338 segment sequence list 250 348 349 segment sequence list format 250 260 segment sequence list determining size 280 segment sequence list query 349 segments and sequences 250 258 sequences using 250 258 signed data using 239 244 unsigned data using 245 249 waveform segment list format 259 COMBSEQ E
411. ion to complete With state OFF set these commands will complete immediately With state ON set they will wait for the Pending Operation Flag set true by INITiate IMMediate to return false indicating that the trigger system is in the idle state and that waveform generation has completed or been aborted by the ABORt or RST commands Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units state boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC OPC RST WAI ABORt INITiate IMMediate STATus PRESet e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus OPC INITiate ON Example Setting Immediate Completion Mode STAT OPC INIT OFF Completes immediately for OPC etc 382 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus OPERation CONDition Comments STATus OPERation CONDition returns the contents of the Operation Condition Register Reading the register does not affect its contents e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition All bits of the Operation Condition Register are cleared as a result of the state present after RST Example Querying the Operation Condition Register STAT OPER COND Queries the Operation Condition Register OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt specifies which bits of the Op
412. irectory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program UNS DAT C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A These program is very similar to the example programs used in Chapter 3 The only difference is that this program transfers the segment data as DAC codes in the Unsigned number format instead of voltage values 230 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data Definite Length Block Data Format Data Byte Size The AFG can receive DAC codes as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data using either the Signed or Unsigned number format This is a much faster method to transfer data than using a comma separated list that was used in Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 and Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms on page 229 The speed is about the same as the method used in Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 235 A typical data block using the definite length format consists of non zero digit digits lt 8 bit data bytes Start of Data Block Data Bytes Number of Digits in digits Number of Bytes in Data where e 4 Shows that the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block format non zero digit gt is a single digit number that shows the number of digits contained in digits for example if the digits value equals 10
413. ired output sine wave fc Total Harmonic Distortion through 9th harmonic 10 Hz 250 kHz 60 dBc 250 kHz 4 MHz 60 20 logio fc 250k dBc 4 MHz 10 MHz 36 dBc Nonharmonic Spurious and Clock Components to 150 MHz 10 Hz 1 MHz the greater of 60 dBc or 60 dBm 1 MHz 4 MHz 50dBc 4 MHz 10 MHz 45 dBc Arbitrary Waveforms includes square triangle and ramp waveforms DAC Full Scale into 50 Q or 75 Q 0 16187 to 5 11875 volts into open circuit 0 32374 to 10 2375 volts The output voltage corresponding to DAC full scale can be adjusted over the indicated 30 dB range with resolution equivalent to steps of 0 01 dB DC Accuracy 0 9 of setting add for each C beyond Tcal X5 0 05 of setting Add DC Offset see below Step Response no filter typical Rise Fall Time 10 90 17 nsec Precursors Overshoot 196 Slew Rate no filter typical into 50 O 750 V us into open circuit 1470 V us DC Offset Resolution 12 bits including sign Limit of waveform offset into 50 Q or 75 Q waveform peak volts gt 1 02486 5 5 v waveform peak volts lt 1 02486 1 1v into high impedance load waveform peak volts gt 2 04972 tiiv waveform peak volts lt 2 04972 t2 2v As used in this table waveform peak volts means the voltage corresponding to DAC full scale Accuracy 1 of setting 0 2 of limit Beyond Tcal 5 C add 0 015 of limit per C 458 HP E1445A Specification
414. is a combination of the controller s interface select code the command module s primary HP IB address and the device s secondary HP IB address An address in this form in a HP BASIC statement appears as OUTPUT 70910 SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT Interface Select Code 7 This code is determined by the address of the HP IB interface card in the controller In most Hewlett Packard controllers this card has a factory set address of 7 including the HP 82340 82341 HP IB Interface Card this card was used with an HP Vectra PC to create the Visual BASIC and Visual C C example programs Primary HP IB Address 09 This is the address of the HP IB port on the command module Valid addresses are O to 30 The module has a factory set address of 9 Secondary HP IB Address 10 This address is derived from the logical address of the device AFG by dividing the logical address by 8 Thus for the HP E1445A AFG factory set logical address of 80 the secondary address is 10 22 Getting Started Chapter 1 Using an Embedded Controller As a message based device the HP E1445A can easily be programmed across the VXIbus backplane from an embedded controller The select code of the VXI interface board in embedded controllers is typically 16 Since no secondary HP IB address is required when programming over the backplane the logical address of the HP E1445A is combined with the VXI interface select code For example
415. is the period from the generation of the first frequency in the sweep or list to the generation of the last frequency see below fi f2 f3 f4 fn Sweep Time The duration t of each frequency except the last fn is specified sweep time frequency points 1 For multiple sweeps or repetitions through the list the duration of the last frequency fn is also t To maintain a constant rate between sweeps or repetitions the duration of fn must be accounted for as follows Sweep timespecified Sweep repetition time desirea points 1 points 158 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweep Points Versus Time In SWP_PVST Sweep Points Versus Time on page 136 the program continually sweeps 100 frequency points in 0 125 seconds To maintain this rate continuously the time between the last frequency point and the first point is accounted for as follows Sweep timespecified 0 125 99 100 0 125 0 99 0 12375 Thus the actual sweep time specified is 0 12375 seconds Frequency Lists Versus Time In the LIST_TME program Frequency Lists Versus Time on page 139 the program outputs a new frequency every 1 second To maintain this rate continuously the time between the last frequency in the list and the first frequency is accounted for as follows Repetition ratespecified 4 3 4 4 0 75 3 Thus the actual repetition rate specified is 3 seconds The minimum and maximum sweep times and freq
416. is the starting address of segment SIN D Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ Isequence name OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segment execution order OUTPUT QAfg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 275 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq2_addr SUBEND SUB Spike_def Spike def Compute the waveform sine wave with spike Download the Idata as a combined list voltage and marker of signed Inumbers in an indefinite length block Download the sequence as la combined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM QOCmd QAfg QG Afg1 Base addr Seg1 addr Seq2 addr Seq3 addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr seg3 FOR I 1 TO 4096 Waveform SIN 2 PI l 4096 00125 NEXT I Width 50 FOR J 1 TO Width 10
417. itrary Waveforms 93 10 11 12 13 14 Select the Arbitrary Waveform Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER This command selects the arbitrary waveform function Couple the command to the previous frequency command Set the Maximum Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the maximum output amplitude The amplitude must be equal or greater than the maximum voltage value of the waveform segment Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits Name the First Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt This command names the first waveform segment Set the First Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt This command defines the size of the selected waveform segment Store the First Waveform Segment as Voltages SOURce JLIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage voltage list This command stores the first waveform segment into the AFG s segment memory Name the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt This command names the second waveform segment Set the Second Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine length This command defines the size of the selected waveform segment Store the Second Waveform Segment as Voltages SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage voltage list This command stores the second waveform segment into the AFG s segment
418. ke the HP E1406A Command Module but at a slower data transfer rate 26 Notify the AFG that Downloading is Completed SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete Send this command to the AFG after all data is downloaded 27 Generate the Output INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example VXIDOWN This program is similar to the COMBSEQ program beginning on page 255 except on how the data is transferred to the AFG The program uses a V360 Controller to download the data using the VXIbus instead of transferring it directly to the AFG using HP IB IRE STORE VXIDOWN This program downloads two arbitrary waveforms from the VXIbus Ibackplane The program loads segment memory by writing to the IAFG s high speed data register and loads sequence memory by writing to the Sequence register The program is written for a IHP E1480 V 360 embedded controller which allows direct access to Ithe registers via the VXlbus Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM OAfg Base_addr ISet up error checking for the SCPI commands ON INTR 16 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 16 32 OUTPUT Afg CLS Continued on Next Page 264 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Wf del 150 CALL A24 offset 160 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 2 048E6 frequency 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER tfunction 190 OUT
419. ker list using SOURce MARKer STATe lt mode gt e Define a marker list in a waveform segment using SOURce JLIST 1 SEGMent MARKer marker list or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint point Enable the waveform segment in a segment sequence to output the marker list using SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer marker list or SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint lt point gt Gene rating Marker The following programs show how to generate the marker pulses using two Pulses for Arbitrary different methods The two methods are Waveforms 1 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer defines for each point in a waveform segment where a marker is to be output Likewise SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer enables or disables marker outputs for each waveform segment in a segment sequence 2 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint defines a single segment or point in a waveform segment where the marker pulse is to be output Likewise SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint enables a marker output for a single waveform segment in a segment sequence 206 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 Generati ng Mu Itiple The MARKSEGI1 program shows how to generate marker pulses using Marker Pulses in SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer The program generates a sine wave Mu Itiple Segment and triangle wave It generates a 10 points wide active low marker pulses Lists starting at t
420. king ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg_m CLS OUTPUT Afg_m SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_m ESE 60 OUTPUT Afg_s CLS OUTPUT Afg_s SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_s ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFGs delete all lexisting waveform segments and sequences and which set up the AFGs to output arbitrary waveforms CALL Rst CALL Wf_del CALL Sinx_def CALL Sinx_m CALL Sinx_s ISelect the waveform sequence of the master AFG place the Imaster AFG in the Wait for arm state OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FUNC USER SINX M OUTPUT Afg_m INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 177 340 END 350 360 SUB Sinx def 370 Sinx def Subprogram which computes the sin x x waveform amplitudes 380 lused by both AFGs 390 COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform 400 FOR 12 2047 TO 2048 410 IF 1 0 THEN 1 E 38 420 Waveform 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 430 NEXT 440 SUBEND 450 460 SUB Sinx m 470 COM OAfg_m OAfg_s Waveform 480 Sinx m Set the reference oscillator source trigger source 490 frequency mode frequency and amplitude for the master 500 IAFG waveform Feed the master trigger source to the slave 510 IAFG via ECL trigger line ECLTO 520 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 530 OUTPUT Afg_m TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 540 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIXED 550
421. l End Sub Sub RunQuery Dim GetMem As String Dim RdMsg As String 100 Dim Actual As Long ShowQuery Visible True ShowQuery Enabled True Query segment memory GetMem SOUR LIST1 SEGM FREE Call iwrite Addr ByVal GetMem Chr 10 Len GetMem 1 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg 100 0 Actual ShowQuery Addltem Segment Memory Available Used Mid RdMsg 1 Actual 1 Query sequence memory GetMem SOUR LIST1 SSEQ FREE Call iwrite Addr ByVal GetMem Chr 10 Len GetMem 1 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg 100 0 Actual ShowQuery Addltem Sequence Memory Available Used Mid RdMsg 1 Actual 1 End Sub Sub TimeQut Shows timeout message and exits program Continued on Next Page 38 Getting Started Chapter 1 Dim ShowTimeMsg As String Dim ErrMsg As String Set error routine On Error Resume Next Get error message ErrMsg igeterrstr igeterrno ShowTimeMsg The program generated error message Chr 34 ErrMsg Chr 34 Chr 10 ShowTimeMsg ShowTimeMsg in Sub Function ChkName Chr 10 Chr 10 ShowTimeMsg ShowTimeMsg Press Chr 34 OK Chr 34 to exit MsgBox ShowTimeMsg 64 Verif TimeOut Close communication with instrument Call iclose Addr Clean up sicl Call siclcleanup End program End End Sub Chapter 1 Getting Started 39 Visual C C Language Programs Using HP SICL Syste
422. l IMMediate AMPLitude Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Voltage e RST Condition SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 0 V Example Setting Offset Voltage VOLT OFFS 3 Sets offset voltage to 3 volts 380 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus STATus The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI defined Operation and Questionable Signal status registers Each is comprised of a Condition Register an Event Register an enable mask and negative and positive transition filters Each Status Register works as follows When a condition occurs the appropriate bit in the Condition Register is set or cleared If the corresponding transition filter is enabled for that bit the same bit is set in the associated Event Register The contents of the Event Register and the enable mask are logically ANDed bit for bit if any bit of the result is set the Summary bit for that register is set in the status byte The Status Byte Summary bit for the Operation Status Register is bit 7 for the Questionable Signal Status Register bit 3 Operation Status Only bits 0 calibrating 3 sweeping 6 waiting for arm and 8 initiated are Register defined for the HP E1445A All other bits are always zero Bit 0 Calibrating Set 1 during the execution of the CALibration DC BEGin command Cleared 0 at the end of DC calibration or if calibration is aborted Bit 3 Sweeping Set 1 while a frequency sweep or list is in progress
423. lable sources The program accesses the Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register and the ROSC N Divider Registers HP BASIC Program Example FREQ2_REG 1 IRE STORE FREQ2_REG 2 This program changes the output frequency generated with the 3 Idivide by n frequency synthesis method by writing frequency 4 Idata to the Sample Hold and ROSC N Control register and to the 5 IROSC N Divider registers 6 10 ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 20 COM OAfg Base_addr 40 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG which determine the base 50 laddress of the AFG registers in A24 address space and which set 60 Ithe output function 70 CALL Rst 80 CALL A24 offset 90 CALL Output function 100 110 DISP Press Continue to change frequency register writes 120 PAUSE 130 DISP 140 ICall the subprogram which changes the output frequency Pass the 150 Ireference oscillator frequency the new output frequency and 160 Ithe number of waveform points Note arbitrary waveforms npts 1 170 Isquare waves npts 4 ramp triangle waves 180 Inpts RAMP POINts value 190 200 CALL Divide by n 4 E47 2 5E46 4 210 END 220 230 SUB A24 offset 240 A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for 250 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space 260 COM OAfg Base_addr 270 CONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO 280 A16_addr DVAL D400 16 IAFG A16 base address 290 Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 Iread AFG offset register 3
424. ling Group None e Related Commands SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer POLarity e RST Condition SOURce MARKer STATe ON Example Enabling Marker Output to Marker Out BNC MARK ON Enables Marker Out BNC 364 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce PM SOURce PM The SOURce PM Phase Modulation subsystem controls the modulation for sine wave output only Phase modulation is not possible with other waveform shapes Subsystem Syntax SOURce PM DEViation lt phase gt SOURCe source SSTATe mode UNIT ANGLe units DEViation SOURce PM DEViation phase sets the modulation DEViation for a sine wave output when SOURce PM SOURce is set to INTernal The query form returns the amplitude in terms of the default units specified by the SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe command Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units phase numeric n through x MINimum MAXimum see below MINimum selects x MAXimum selects n The default units for DEViation are specified by the SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe command Acceptable units are suffix multiplier RAD radians and suffix multiplier DEG degrees Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce PM SOURce SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe e RST Condition SOURce PM DEViation 0 Example Setting Phase Deviation PM DEV 180 DEG Sets deviation to 180
425. log cocccocociniccnocncononoconcnnnono 48 CW FIXeq esses 322 COMBined 948 ESKey ciem 323 POINTS fanta 349 SOURGe usc iii 324 I DEFIU0e n Iiis 350 MODE dieses docto 325 DELete usc 351 RANGE iiem at ete ee 326 A dss A is dO SPA Ni o 327 SELectegq 351 STARU ieu eR bas 328 A cate ttl aca 352 SOURCE m er drid 330 IFREE aida 353 FREQuengy2 sese 330 MARKer eseeeee 354 CW FIXeg sss 331 POIS P kiirias SOURCE n eco phe e 332 Elia Iso 356 FUNCOM 1t ie ER exe 332 SEQUENCE noii ire ei 357 E A A GO SEGMents n e e aeee 357 SOURCE 2 zt be to etos 358 SQURcGe nee tts 334 EST zc re tl NINE 358 EIS T 1 eo rte 334 FORMat esssssssssssss s 958 FORMat esses OOO A i 358 EDATA Lata thee 335 EREQuUenty eee tier 359 SEGMent sss 996 POINIS os cdi nen 960 ADDRess sssseseee 336 CATalog ssssesssss 336 SQURCO ll aded ERE 361 COMBined sssss 337 MARKer n reete ertet 361 POINtS eeuessssss 998 ECLTrgans eese 361 DEFine ts 339 FEED nitent ne 361 SELecteg 340 POLariY cocina ciar 904 FREE 41 SS 341 ESTATe s aee 364 POINIS ien 343 SOURCE Redes 365 SEL6GI inea 344 DEViation 2e 365
426. low Default units are hertz MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command The minimum frequency is 0 Hz for all waveform shapes Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs The maximum frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs The maximum frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs The maximum frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the maximum frequency by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command e When changing the frequency list length when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST is set the SOURce S WEep TIME or the TRIGger SWEep TIMer value remains the same depending on which command was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new frequency list length Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce SWEep e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No frequency list is defined Defining a Frequency List LIST2 FREQ 1000 10e3 100e3 1 MHz Defines the frequency list Chapter 8 Command Reference 359 SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts returns a number that shows the length of the c
427. lues that will be set are the minimum and maximum values that will not cause any of the STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN values to go beyond the minimum and maximum possible frequencies given the coupling equations above For example if SPAN is currently set to 1 MHz FREQuency1 CENTer MINimum would set 500 kHz The minimum possible frequency is 0 Hz except in the case of logarithmic frequency sweeps For logarithmic frequency sweeps the minimum frequency is the maximum possible frequency divided by 1 073 741 824 The maximum possible frequency depends on the frequency of the currently selected reference oscillator source SOURce ROSCillator SOURce the waveform shape Chapter 8 Command Reference 319 SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe and whether or not frequency doubling is enabled SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe according to the following rules Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs the maximum possible frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs the maximum possible frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs the maximum possible frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the above values by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command on page 326
428. m Configuration What s Needed to Compile the Programs Note How to Run a Program These example programs are written in the Visual C C language for the HP 82340 82341 HP IB Interface Cards using the HP Standard Instrument Control Library SICL The following identifies the system on which the programs are written shows how to compile the programs and gives a typical example program The Visual C C programs were developed on the following system Controller HP Vectra PC HP IB Interface Card HP 82341 HP IB Interface with HP SICL Required Libraries See What s Needed to Compile the Programs below Mainframe HP 75000 Series C Slot 0 Resource Manager HP E1406A Command Module HP E1445A Logical Address 80 Instrument Language SCPI You need the following libraries and header files These are supplied with HP SICL msapp16 lib for Microsoft Visual C and C bcapp16 lib Borland C and C sicl16 lib sicl h The programs must be compiled in the Large Memory Model To run a program first compile and link the program to make an executable file using the Large memory model You can compile from the command line or the Windows interface The two methods are From the Command Line Make sure the program to be compiled and the appropriate libraries are in a project file Do this in the C C environment Then do the following e For Borland compilers type MAKE lt project_name gt gt MAK and
429. m Example MARKSEG1 0 209 Generating Single Marker Pulses in Single Waveform Segments 212 HP BASIC Program Example MARKSEG2 0 213 Generating Marker Pulses for Each Waveform Point 4 214 HP BASIC Program Example MARKTRG 215 Operating Multiple AFGs Together o ee ee 218 HP BASIC Program Example DRIFT o o 220 Maker Posen COmMmE ree A a BSE A OS OES 222 Determining the Number of Marker Points of a Waveform Segment 222 Determining the Number of Marker Points of a Segment Sequence 222 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation o 0 000002 ee eee 223 Chapter CObieniS ape eee A A A KROES ded 223 Data Transfer Methods and Speed Comparisons o o o 224 Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms a sic 56 eb RR RS ERA 225 Usine the Signed Number Format crisis 44 468 A 225 HP BASIC Program Example SIGN DAT o o 227 Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms o o e 229 Using the Unsigned Number Format suo soo AAA 229 HP BASIC Program Example UNS DAT oc cae Gao ee EEE RR Rn 230 Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data 23 Definite Length Block Data Format voor kA 44544 9 amp 4 STRESS 231 DAD NE uude edt e hop bue dd d A dedere doeet ded 231 HP BASIC Program Example DACBLOK1 o 232 Usi
430. m or wait for trigger state as appropriate Waveform generation begins when the next start arm is received When ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt full arm cycles complete the trigger system returns to the idle state and waveform generation halts This command is an overlapped command as described by IEEE 488 2 Section 12 The exit from the idle state caused by INITiate IMMediate shall cause its Pending Operation Flag to be set true This Pending Operation Flag will be set false when the idle state is re entered either when the trigger cycle completes or when an ABORT or RST command is executed The STATus OPC INITiate command controls whether OPC OPC and WAI will test the Pending Operation Flag and wait until it is false trigger system in the idle state 306 Command Reference Chapter 8 INITiate Comments Use the ABORt command to prematurely halt the waveform generation and place Example the trigger system in the idle state e Waveform output begins immediately if ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce IMMediate is set e Executing this command when SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC is set when SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURCe is not set to INTernal or the trigger system is not in the idle state Error 213 Init ignored is generated e Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC OPC RST WAI ABORt ARM subsystem STATus OPC INITiate TRIGger subsystem e RST Condition The trigger system is in t
431. m which one is selected Figure 1 3 Bus request line 3 has the highest priority bus request line O has the lowest priority e It is not necessary to change the bus request level setting BG3 on the AFG More information on the Data Transfer Bus can be found in the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Shown BG3 Selected Bus Request Level Location NX K g LH NN XN RIK X M Nu SEL BGO BG1 BG2 tf BG3 9 L UNSEL Setting the AFG Bus Request Level 24 Getting Started Chapter 1 i i e may be installed in any slot except slot 0 in a C size us AFG Installation in The HP E1445A may be installed in any slot except slot 0 in a C size VXIb a Mainframe mainframe If an HP E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC is part of your system the amplifier should be installed in a slot next to the HP E1445A To install in a mainframe 1 Set the extraction levers out Slide the module into any slot except slot 0 until the backplane connectors touch 2 Seat the module by moving the levers toward each other 3 Tighten the top and bottom screws to secure the module in the mainframe Note For compliance with European EMI standards order the Backplane Connector Shield Kit HP Part Number E1400 80920 Figure 1 4 Installing the AFG Module in a VXIbus Mainframe Removing a Module To r
432. mand like SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe DEG or SOURce PM DEViation 90 80 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Using MINimum and MAXimum Parameters You can execute many commands like SOURce F REQuency 1 CW FlXed using the MINimum or MAXimum parameters instead of a number value However when using the parameters the commands are immediately executed when received This happens even if the commands are coupled to other commands in a coupling group This is different than sending the commands with number values where the commands are executed after a new coupling group is sent Thus if a group of coupled commands are sent where the MINimum and MAXimum parameters conflict with the current AFG setting the AFG generates an error This happens even though the commands that follow may set the AFG to a state that does not conflict with the MINimum and MAXimum parameters For best results use values in the commands and do not use the MINimum and MAXimum parameters Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 81 Notes 82 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter Contents This chapter shows how to generate arbitrary waveforms using the HP E1445A 13 Bit Arbitrary Function Generator called the AFG The following sections show how to generate arbitrary waveforms Also included are example programs that generate various arbitrary waveforms The sections
433. marker and 6 Iwaveform segment address downloaded in an indefinite length 7 larbitrary block 8 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary block data Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 255 40 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 COM QAfg GAfgt ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Wf del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 2 048E6 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Ifunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed CALL Sine_wave CALL Tri_wave CALL Seq_list OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER M OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Sine_wave 350 Sine_wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave and downloads 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 Ithe corresponding dac codes as signed numbers in a Idefinite length block to segment memory A combined list lis used but no mark
434. mats are ASCii Returns the frequency list as NR3 numbers as defined in IEEE 488 2 REAL Returns data in IEEE 488 2 definite block format containing the frequency values in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units format discrete ASCii REAL none length numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none If ASCII format is specified length must either be omitted or must be 10 or MINimum or MAXimum If REAL format is specified length must either be omitted or must be 64 or MINimum or MAXimum Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Example Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST2 FREQuency e RST Condition SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA ASCii Setting REAL Return Data Format LIST FORM REAL Sets real format 358 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST2 FREQuency Parameters Comments Example SOURce LIST2 FREQuency freq list defines the list of sample rates or frequencies to be generated when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE is set to LIST The freq list has one of the two following formats 1 A comma separated list of frequency values 2 An IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the frequency values in IEBE 754 64 bit floating point format The maximum length of the list is 256 frequency values The legal range for frequency values is given be
435. maximum SOUR VOLT OFFS MAX set SOUR2 VOLT OFFS lt minimum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MIN set 480 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 7 HP E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages continued Settings Conflict Error Messages SOUR2 VOLT OFFS gt maximum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MAX set SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN and TRIG STAR SOUR not INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 set SOUR FREQ1 START gt SOUR FREQ1 STOP values exchanged SOUR FREQ1 STAR frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 STAR MIN set SOUR FREQ1 STAR frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 STAR MAX set SOUR FREQ1 STOP frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 STOP MIN set SOUR FREQ1 STOP frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 STOP MAX set ARM SWE SOUR TTLT lt n gt and TRIG SWE SOUR TTLT lt n gt ARM SWE SOUR IMM set SWE TIME lt minimum SWE TIME MIN set SWE TIME gt maximum SWE TIME MAX set TRIG SWE TIM lt minimum TRIG SWE TIM MIN set TRIG SWE TIM gt maximum TRIG SWE TIM MAX set SOUR FUNC SHAP not SIN and SOUR PM STAT ON SOUR PM STAT OFF set SOUR FUNC MODE LIST SWE and SOUR PM SOUR not INT SOUR PM SOUR INT set SOUR VOLT voltage lt minimum SOUR VOLT MIN set SOUR VOLT voltage gt maximum SOUR VOLT MAX set SOUR FUNC SHAP not DC and SOUR VOLT voltage lt 0 0V absolute value of SOUR VOLT set OUTP LOAD INF and current SOUR VOLT unit W DBM OR DBMW SOUR VOLT AMPL MIN in V set SOUR ARB DAC SOUR not
436. me gt This command names the waveform segment Each waveform segment to be stored into memory must have a unique name Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters 9 Set the Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt This command defines the size of the number of voltages or points in the selected waveform segment The size must be equal or greater than the number of points in the waveform segment minimum value is 8 points The command reserves enough memory needed for the waveform segment 10 Store the Waveform Segment as Voltages SOURce JLIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage voltage list This command stores the points of the waveform segment into the AFG s segment memory These points are sent to the AFG as volts which are the output voltage points that constitutes the waveform segment Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 89 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name the Segment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt This command names the segment sequence Each sequence stored into memory must have a unique name Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters The names MUST be different from any waveform segment names
437. memory Name the Segment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt This command names the segment sequence The name must be different from any segment names stored in memory Set the Segment Sequence Length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine length This command defines the length of the selected segment sequence The length must be equal or greater than the number of the waveform segments stored in memory 94 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 15 16 17 18 Define the Segment Sequence Order SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list This command determines the order in which the waveform segments are to be executed The names of each waveform segment to be output must be separated by a comma for example A B C See Sending Segment Sequences on page 114 for more information Define the Waveform Segments Repetition Count SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt repetition list This command sets how many times each waveform segment is to be executed See Sending Segment Sequences on page 114 for more information Select the User Name SOURce JFUNCtion USER lt name gt This command sets the AFG to output the selected segment sequence The lt name gt in this command the same name as the stored segment sequence to be executed Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter
438. ments are defined Chapter 8 Command Reference 345 Example SOURce LIST 1 Defining a Waveform Segment Voltage Point List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is points long LIST VOLT 5 1 5 0 5 1 5 0 Defines waveform voltages SEGMent VOLTage DAC Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC voltage list defines the series of output voltage points that constitute a waveform segment The points are specified in terms of digital to analog converter DAC codes The lt voltage_list gt may be either a comma separated list of DAC codes or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the DAC codes in 16 bit integer format The DAC code is a 16 bit two s complement or unsigned number see the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 5 11875 V set and a matched output load the least significant bit LSB represents 1 25 mV The legal range for the DAC codes is 4096 through 4095 for signed numbers 0 through 8191 for unsigned numbers MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command e If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first e The voltage point list length must be at least four points long but no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine If the voltage point list length is less than the reserved length only the
439. mming errors 530 COM Afg Afg1 540 DIM Message 256 550 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 560 B SPOLL Afg 570 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 580 OUTPUT Afg 590 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 600 REPEAT 610 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 620 ENTER Afg Code Message 630 PRINT Code Message 640 UNTIL Code 0 650 STOP 630 SUBEND Program Modifications In order to download the frequency list as an indefinite length arbitrary 350 360 370 block modify lines 350 through 370 as follows OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST2 FREQ 40 Idownload fregs OUTPUT EAfg1 Freqlist OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END ILF EOI NL END Additional information on definite and indefinite length arbitrary blocks is located under Arbitrary Block Data on page 156 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LISTDEF FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LISTDEF C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 132 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Logarithmic Sweeping The LOG_SWP program shows you how to select logarithmic spacing between the frequencies in a frequency sweep The program sets up a seven point logarithmic frequency sweep from 1 Hz to 1 MHz Thus the swept frequencies are 1 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz Using the flo
440. mory available in points the second the amount of segment sequence memory used in points e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition All of the segment sequence memory is available Querying Segment Sequence Memory Usage LIST SSEQ FREE Queries segment memory usage Chapter 8 Command Reference 353 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer lt marker_list gt defines for each waveform segment of a segment sequence whether the HP E1445A may output the marker pulses defined by the marker list for that waveform segment Parameters The marker list may be either a comma separated list of values or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 16 bit integer format A value of 0 disables marker pulse generation for the waveform segment any non zero value enables marker pulse generation MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command Comments If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first Frequently marker pulse generation is enabled on no more than one waveform segment of a segment sequence The SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint command is the most efficient way to enable marker pulse generation for a single waveform segment The segment sequence s marker enable list length must be the same length as its waveform segment and repetition count lists or
441. mple SIND i usua agoa ae RORR EORR 107 Generating an Exponential Charge Discharge Waveform 108 HP BASIC Program Example CHARGE lt 108 Generating a Sine Wave Wi SPIKES cos a a ee A 109 HP BASIC Program Example SPIKES 109 Generating a 10 Rectified Sine Wave isse 3 eR Re Oe eH 111 HP BASIC Program Example SIN R o 624 2b cR Ox RE RUE OE DR RH n 111 COMES NOE oop oe ke he de eh Ge wed a od ae e Re A a 112 HP BASIC Program Example NOISE 44 5 4454 4A Ge Be R Soe iis 112 Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments 2644 4 40 46s ee ee REDE o 113 Determining the Amount of Segment and Sequence Memory 113 How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory 2 000 113 Amplitude Effects on Voltage Lists 006254 4 Bee TER wes 113 Using DAC Codes to Send Segment Data aio 524455 ee eke m 114 Sending Segment Sequences s sos eee doe eed ee cebv ee Rane d 114 Reference Oscillator Sources 4 ss ke eb ke aa Rea ESS 115 2 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents a A A 115 Preguentyl Generator Range cocoa a A A 116 Returning the Waveform Segment Names o o 116 Determining the Waveform Segment Size cenar s ee eras 116 Returning the Segment Sequence List Names o o o oo 116 Returning the Repetition Count List Length 116 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 117 Chapter Content
442. n a waveform segment is to be executed Thus each waveform segment marker enable and repetition count has a unique data code Select the combined waveform segments using their starting addresses in memory Add the address to the Combined Segment Sequence List Set bit 18 to enable the marker output for a segment sequence Add the bit value to the Combined Segment Sequence List e Determine the repetition count using 4096 the repetition count value Add the repetition count to the Combined Segment Sequence List Store the list as a 32 bit wide value for each waveform segment in the list Send the value as two 16 bit words with the most significant bit MSB sent first Download the word with the most significant bit into the AFG s Sequence Register with a 34 decimal 22 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space Download the word with the least significant bit into the AFG s Sequence Register with a 36 decimal 24 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space see Appendix C for information on registers 260 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 The VXIDOWN program shows how to download multiple Combined Segment Lists i e waveform segment and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform and a single Combined Segment Sequence List waveform segments to be executed marker enables and repetition counts into the AFG s memory using the VXIbus backplane The combined segment lists are downloaded in the Signed format and as Definite Length
443. n_conf subprogram which queries the AFG configuration 90 DIM Lrn 5000 100 OUTPUT Afg LRN 110 ENTER Afg Lrn 120 Lrn Lrn amp 130 REPEAT 140 I POS Lrn 150 PRINT Lrn 1 1 1 160 Lrn Lrn I 1 170 UNTIL Lrn 180 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LRN FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example program LRN C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 48 Getting Started Chapter 1 Checking for Errors The following HP BASIC program shows the lines and subprogram which are added to the HP BASIC programs to check for errors Line 140 clears the AFG Standard Event Status Register Lines 150 and 160 unmask the appropriate bits in the AFGs Status Byte Register and Standard Event Status Register When an error occurs the subprogram Errmsg reads the AFG error queue and displays the code and message Note that line 310 is used as an end of statement should a syntax error occur among coupled commands Otherwise line 320 would serve as the end of statement and the ABORT command would be ignored by the AFG parser Note An alternative HP BASIC error checking program can be found in the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Error checking routines for Visual C C language and Visual BASIC programs are found in programs ARBWAVE C and ARBWAVE FRM listed previously in this chapter HP BASIC Program Example
444. nal SOURce JROSCillator SOURce SOURce SWEep COUNt SOURce SWEep DIRection SOURce SWEep POINts SOURce SWEep SPACing SOURce SWEep TIME TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce TRIGger STARt GATE STATe TRIGger STARt SOURce TRIGger STOP SLOPe TRIGger STOP SOURce TRIGger SWEep SOURce TRIGger SWEep TIMer Voltage OUTPut 1 IMPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO SOURce RAMP POLarity SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude SOURce VOL Tage L EVel IMMediate OFFSet Frequency amp Voltage SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce RAMP POINts None ABORt ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt ARMESTARI LAYer2 COUNt 468 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 2 HP E1445A Command Coupling Groups continued Coupling Group Commands None ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce ARM SWEep IMMediate INITiate IMMediate OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe OUTPut 1 STATe SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete SOURce FUNCtion USER SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine
445. nal registers is through addresses mapped into A24 address space At power on the system resource manager reads the AFG s Device Type Register in A16 address space to determine the amount of A24 memory the AFG requires Once known the resource manager allocates a block of A24 memory to the AFG and writes the base starting address into the AFG s Offset Register When you are reading or writing to an AFG register a hexadecimal or decimal register address is specified The register address is the sum of A24 base address register number The base address of the AFG operational registers in A24 address space is determined by reading the AFG s Offset Register and multiplying the value by 256 10016 This converts the 16 bit value of the Offset Register to a 24 bit address The register number is identified in the register descriptions found in the following sections 484 Register Based Programming Appendix C Reading the AFG s Offset Register FFFF 16 As shown in Figure C 1 the AFG s configuration registers are mapped into the upper 25 of A16 address space The Offset Register is one of the AFG s configuration registers C00016 A16 ADDRESS SPACE 000046 FFFFFF 1g E0000016 20000016 IFOO00 6 00000016 Base Address Register Address or C00015 Logical Address
446. nc tion void rst clr void void send data char commands float Wave seg int num size void run query void void check error char func tion void time out char func name Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 41 INST addr HP IB Address identifier N CK KK kk kk kk KK IK IK IK IK IK AAA ckck ckck ckck RR RR RR ck k KK void main void Run the program if defined __BORLANDC_ amp amp defined __WIN_32 InitEasyWin Required for Borland EasyWin program endif Enable communication path to the module addr iopen DEV_ADDR if laddr printf n tUnable to communicate with the module printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 1 Set HP IB Timeout to 10 seconds if itimeout addr 10000 time_out main send timeout command rst_clr Reset the AFG gen seg Generate segment list and output sequence run query Query segment and segment sequence memory Close communication iclose addr Release SICL resource allocation not needed for Windows NT Siclcleanup printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 0 NK KK kk KK KK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK KR ckck ckck RR RR kkk k k void gen_seg void char set commands Use set_commands to setup the AFG SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL ALL Clear sequence memory SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL ALL Clear segment memory SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Select the Ref
447. nce List must be treated in HP BASIC as 2 Transfers 32 Bit 16 Bit Integers The first integer contains the repetition count marker enable Integer Data and the most significant bit MSB of and the segment address The second bit contains the rest of the segment address For example Figure 7 3 shows two 16 Bit Integers for a combined sequence that contains a waveform segment with an address of 256 the marker enable bit set and 2 repetition counts Unused Reserved 1st 16 Bit Integer 2nd 16 Bit Integer 3130 29 2827 26 25 24 2322 212019181716 1514131211109 8 76543 2 10 1114114 1 141 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0j 0 0 0 0j0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O Repetition Count Segment Address Marker Enable Figure 7 3 Sending 32 Bit Integers in HP BASIC HP BASIC determines the value for the first integer as follows Repetition Count Marker SHIFT 4096 repetition count 4 segment address DIV 65536 4 HP BASIC determines the value for the second integer as follows Segment Address segment address MOD 65536 65536 segment address gt MOD 65536232767 DIV returns the integer portion of the Dividend MOD returns the remainder of the division 1 IRE STORE COMBSEQ 2 This program downloads two arbitrary waveforms as combined lists 3 voltage and marker of signed 2 s complement DAC codes The 4 lists are downloaded in definite length arbitrary blocks The 5 loutput sequence is a combined list repetition count
448. nce of entering the trigger idle state Subsequent OPC OPC and WAI commands will therefore complete immediately e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands OPC OPC WAI INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition RST places the HP E1445A in the trigger idle state as if executing an ABORt command Example Aborting a Waveform ABOR Places HP El445A in idle state 290 Command Reference Chapter 8 ARM ARM Subsystem Syntax The ARM subsystem operates with the TRIGger subsystem to control the starting of waveform output and frequency sweeps or list generation as follows The source and slope for arming starting waveform generation The number of waveform start arms the HP E1445A will accept before trigger system returns to the idle state The number of repetitions of a waveform that will be output for each start arm accepted The number of sweep arms the HP E1445A will accept before the sweep system returns to the idle state The source and slope for arming starting a frequency sweep or list generation ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt number LAYer2 COUNt number IMMediate no query SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce source SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt number IMMediate no query LINK lt link gt SOURCe source STARt LAYer 1 COUNt ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt selects the number of
449. ncy doubling 326 low pass output filter 309 marker signal 362 364 phase modulation 367 sample gating 394 security code 303 trigger system 290 Discrete Command Parameters 286 DIV_N Example Program 174 175 Divide by N Frequency Generator control 492 494 description 449 generating waveforms with 99 101 104 174 175 DMC 416 Documentation History 14 Doubling Frequency Ranges 155 326 Downloading 316 317 combined segment sequence list 260 combined waveform segment list 259 data directly into the DAC 269 271 506 508 data using digital in port 279 disabling 318 segment data into DAC 269 271 506 508 segment data into memory 259 268 segment data using backplane 259 sources 280 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 513 DRIFT Example Program 220 222 Driving TTLTrgn Trigger Lines 162 E ECLTrgn functions 460 trigger lines 204 205 361 362 Embedded Computer See Embedded Controller Embedded Controller using 23 EMC 417 EMC 417 Enable Register 383 386 operation status group 436 questionable signal status group 432 Enabling analog output 311 calibration corrections 304 305 ECL trigger lines 362 frequency doubling 326 gate 200 low pass output filter 309 marker signal 362 364 phase modulation 367 sample gating 394 security code 303 End Of Line Terminator suppressing 31 Error AC leveling amplitude 160 161 checking for 49 messages in error queue 389 messages list of
450. ncy list arming If the sweep or frequency list advance trigger TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to TIMer the sweep or list starts when the first start arm is received If the sweep or frequency list advance source is set to any other source the sweep or list starts when INITiate IMMediate is executed e LINK The next valid start arm starts the sweep or frequency list e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines After the AFG is armed the first frequency in the sweep or list is output Trigger signals output the remaining frequencies The source which advances the sweep or frequency list to the next frequency is set with the TRIGger SWEep SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e HOLD Suspend sweep or frequency list advance triggering Advance to the next frequency using TRIGger SWEep IMMediate e LINK The next valid start arm advances the sweep or frequency list e TIMer The SOURce SWEep TIME and TRIGger SWEep TIMer commands control the sweep and frequency list advance timing default source e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Placing the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate puts the first frequency in the sweep or list at the output Trigger signals output the remaining frequencies Thus for multiple sweeps or passes through the frequency list n 1 triggers are req
451. nd SOURce SWEep TIME or TRIGger SWEep TlMer respectively was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new points value Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt time gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum seconds MINimum selects 1 25 mS points 1 MAXimum selects 4 19430375 S points 1 The above values bound the valid range for time Comments When performing multiple sweeps or list generations with ARM SWEep SOURce IMMediate set the last frequency point is output for the same length of time as all other points The SWEep TIME value is the time from the start of the sweep or list until the last frequency begins to be output and does not include the time for the last frequency point Therefore if a specific sweep repetition time is desired SWEep TIME should be set according to the following equation SWEep TIME time points 1 points Thus to set a repetition time of 1 S for a 5 point sweep SWEep TIME should be set to 8 S Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce LIST2 FREQuency SOURce SWeEep POINts TRIGger SWEep SOURce TRIGger S WEep TIMer e RST Condition SOURce SWEep TIME 1 Example Setting the Duration of the Sweep SWE TIME 10 Sets sweep to take 10 seconds 376 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce VOLTage SOURce VOLTage Subsystem Syntax
452. nd marker enable lists to a length of 1 with a value of 1 single repetition of each segment marker pulse generation enabled for all segments e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect e RST Condition Unaffected Power on Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Reserving Memory for a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 1024 Reserves 1024 points for ABC 350 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL deletes all defined segment sequence definitions from memory and makes all of the sequence memory available for new segment sequence definitions In use sequences cannot be deleted Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected to delete a single segment sequence definition Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected e RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Deleting All Segment Sequences LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Deletes all segments SSEQuence DELete SELected Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected deletes a single segment sequence definition and makes its memory available for new segment sequence definitions e Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL to delete all
453. nd Event Registers OUTPUT Afg STAT OPER PTR 64 Ipos transition of ARM bit OUTPUT Afg STAT OPER ENAB 64 lallow ARM bit to generate summary bit OUTPUT Afg SRE 128 lenable summary bit to generate RQS OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF lallow intr branching after wait for arm Call subprogram which sets up and initiates the AFG Isubsystem CALL Afg setup WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Afg_setup 280 Afg_setup Subprogram which sets up the AFG and places it in the 290 300 310 lwait for arm state COM Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT Istop current waveform Continued on Next Page Chapter 9 AFG Status 437 320 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT15 Ireference oscillator 330 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 frequency generator 340 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 frequency 350 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 360 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1V lamplitude 370 OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR HOLD hold off arm signal 380 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM OPC Iset wait for arm state 390 ENTER Afg Ready 400 OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY2 IMM larm AFG output signal 410 SUBEND 420 430 SUB Afg ready 440 Afg ready Subprogram which is called when the AFG enters the 450 Iwait for arm state 460 COM Afg 470 IRead Status Byte Register and clear service request bit RQS 480 B SPOLL Afg 490 DISP AFG is in the wait for arm state press Continue to send ARM
454. nd of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 750 OUTPUT QAfg 760 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 770 REPEAT 780 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 233 790 ENTER Afg Code Message 800 PRINT Code Message 810 UNTIL Code 0 820 STOP 830 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DACBLOK1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DACBLOKI C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 234 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data The AFG can receive DAC codes as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data using either the Signed or Unsigned number format This is a much faster 69 method to transfer data than using a comma separated list that was used in Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 and Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms on page 229 The speed 1s about the same as the method used in Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 231 Indefinite Le ngth A typical data block using the indefinite length format consists of Block Data Format 0 lt 8 bit data bytes gt LF END Start of Data M End of Line A 0 Value Data Bytes where e 4 Shows that the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block format e 0
455. nds OUTPut 1 LOAD SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Voltage e RST Condition SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 16187 V Example Setting Output Voltage VOLT 5 VPP Sets output amplitude to 5 volts peak to peak 378 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage SOURce VOL Tage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNTTT VOL Tage lt units gt sets the default units for subsequent SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude commands Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units units discrete DBM DBMW V VPK VPP none VRMS W Comments The available default units are DBM DBMW dB referenced to 1 milliwatt V Volts This is equivalent to VPK for time varying waveforms VPK Volts peak VPP Volts peak to peak VRMS Volts RMS W Watts For W DBM and DBMW the amplitude is referenced to the OUTPut 1 LOAD value they are meaningless and therefore unavailable if OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity is set e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands OUTPut 1 IMPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude e RST Condition SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage V Example Setting the Default Voltage Units VOLT UNIT VOLT VP
456. ned number format and how to generate the codes from voltage values With the AFG set to receive DAC codes in the UNSigned number format it receives the codes as unsigned or offset binary numbers Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command to select the format For outputs into matched loads and with the amplitude set to maximum 5 11875V the following DAC codes generate the following outputs Code 0 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 4096 outputs O V Code 8191 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage To calculate DAC codes from voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 4096 For example to output 2V DAC Code 2 00125 4096 1600 4096 2496 The UNS_DAT program shows how to store a waveform segment 1 e points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The waveform segment is stored in the Unsigned number format The data is transferred to the AFG as a comma separated list The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V negative going ramp The commands are the same ones listed on page 226 except on how to select the Unsigned format and how generate the data These exceptions are as follows Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 229 5 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned This command selects the UNSigned number format 7 Store the Waveform Segment as Unsigned DAC Data SOURce LIST 1
457. ned value in the Combined Sequence List divide the returned value by 8 For example if the returned value is 2048 the actual address is 2048 8 256 This is necessary due to the hardware requirements of the AFG 3 Add the Address to a Data Value in the Combined Segment Sequence List Selecting the To select the marker enable add the value of bit 18 to the Data Byte in the Marker Enable Combined Segment Sequence List Selecting the Bits 20 through 31 select the repetition count Do the following to set the Repetition Count repetition count 1 Select the Repetition Count Value The repetition count bit value 4096 desired repetition count For example 2 repetition counts 4096 2 4094 2 Shift the Repetition Count Value left by 20 3 Add the Shifted Repetition Count Value to the Data Byte in the Combined Segment Sequence List Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 251 The COMBSEQ program shows how to transfer multiple Combined Segment Lists i e waveform segments and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform and a Combined Sequence List waveform segments to be executed marker enables and repetition counts into the AFG s memory The waveform segments are transferred in the Signed number format and transferred as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data The segment sequence is transferred as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data in the Unsigned number format The example generates two 5 V sine waves and a single 0 V t
458. nel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 the VXIbus ECL trigger lines HOLD suspends sample generation TTLTrgO through 7 the VXIbus TTL trigger lines Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 115 Frequency1 Generator Range Returning the Waveform Segment Names Determining the Waveform Segment Size Returning the Segment Sequence List Names Returning the Repetition Count List Length e The SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command allows for higher sample frequency operations of the USER function This command is only used with frequency1 generator If set to O MINimum the normal setting the maximum sample frequency is the Reference Oscillator frequency 4 e f set to MAXimum the maximum sample frequency is the Reference Oscillator frequency 2 The MAXimum setting worsens the frequency resolution by a factor of two and introduces some sample rate jitter Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog to return the names of the different waveform segments stored in memory The command returns comma separated strings that contain the names of the segment lists Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts to determine the size in number of waveform segments or points of the currently selected waveform segment Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog to return the names of the different segment sequence lists stored in memory The command returns comma separated strings that contain the names of the segment seq
459. nfiguration 405 Lock Stepping Multiple AFGs 176 180 LOCKSTEP Example Program 177 180 LOG_SWP Example Program 133 134 Logarithmic Sweeping 133 134 319 375 Logical Address 22 description 21 Low pass Output Filter cut off frequency 308 disabling 309 enabling 309 LRN 48 LRN Program Example 48 LRN 48 420 Mainframe installing modules 25 removing modules from 25 Marker enable 251 out BNC disabling marker signal 364 out BNC enabling marker signal 364 out BNC marker pulses 204 out BNC output pulse 342 out BNC selecting polarity 364 out BNC selecting sources 363 outputs 203 222 outputs program comments 222 points determining number of 222 polarity 364 program comments 222 pulse arbitrary generated 206 pulse commands 204 342 343 354 355 362 364 pulse each waveform point 214 217 pulse enable flowchart 204 pulse front panel BNC 204 pulse multiple 207 211 pulse segment sequence 354 355 pulse single 212 213 pulse waveform segment 337 338 342 343 signal disabling 362 364 signal enabling 362 364 sources available 361 363 sources available 205 206 sources front panel BNC 363 MARKSEGI Example Program 209 211 MARKSEG2 Example Program 213 MARKTRG Example Program 215 217 Maximum arbitrary waveform frequency 155 arbitrary waveform sample rates 454 frequencies in frequency list 155 parameters in coupling groups 288 parameters using 81 ramp wave frequency 15
460. ng Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data 233 Indefinite Length Block Data Format sc eac os cae on oh Rx XR UR A 235 Data Bue SEE uoudc dod Rd O A OK ROH EES 239 HP BASIC Program Example DACBLOK2 o oo 236 Using Combined Simed Dada i cie 24 94 qb dr ERA 239 Combined Segment List Portal ss e dd ee RR A 239 Using the Combined List with the Signed Number Format 240 HP BASIC Program Example COMBSIGN 0 242 Using Combined Unsigned Data coccion a A A 245 Using the Combined List with the Unsigned Number Format 245 HP BASIC Program Example COMBUNS o 247 Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment Sequences 250 Combined Segment Sequence List Format 000 250 HP BASIC Program Example COMBSEQ sssaaa aaa 2235 Usina the VXlbus Backplate seirer raceri keta RR TOR EA 259 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents 5 Doymnlosdinp Segment Data lt ace a sopa ir GRO e RR A 259 Downloading Segment Data into Memory lesen 250 HP BASIC Program Example VXIDOWN c o 264 Downloading Data Directly into the DAC o o o o ooo ooo 269 HP BASIC Program Example VXISRCE occ Rs 270 Using the Front Panel s Digital Port In Connector 0 212 HP BASIC Program Example WAVSELFP sooo RR A aie Digital Post br Connector Pinout n d Cee
461. ngth Number of Sequences 32768 entries 1 to 32768 entries 1 to 128 Contents of Each Entry Designator of which segment to output Loop Count times to repeat the designated segment 1 to 4096 default 1 Marker Enable Bit a mask default enabled for the System Use Frequency and Sample Rate Characteristics Tolerances Aging rate is 20 ppm year Arbitrary Waveform Sample Rates 40MSa s Frequency Generator 1 Internal Reference Rate Generation Method Basic Range Minimum Maximum Resolution Jitter Extended Range Minimum Maximum Resolution Jitter Pertinent SCPI Commands Frequency Agility see page 456 Recommendation marker data in the specified segment When square triangle or ramp waveform is selected one entry is used All internally generated frequencies and rates are 0 005 initial tolerance Maximum arbitrary waveform sample rate internal or external rate Sa s Samples per second 42 94967296 MHz Direct Digital Synthesis DDS 0 01 Sa s 10 73741824 MSa s 0 01 Sa s 0 03 3 nsec typical rms 0 02 Sa s 21 47483648 MSa s 0 02 Sa s 0 06 3 nsec typical rms SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal1 SOURce FREQuency1 subsystem TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal1 Sweep linear or log output frequencies from a list frequency shift keying FSK phase offset Use for most applications 454 HP E1445A Specifications
462. nificant byte of the value of N 1 Register 7F Contains the least significant byte of the value of N 1 488 Register Based Programming Appendix C Frequency Control The following programs demonstrate how to change the signal frequency Prog rams While the waveform is currently at the AFG output DDS Frequency Control The FREQ REG program changes the signal frequency that is generated using the DDS SOURce FREQ 1 subsystem and the reference oscillator from any of the available sources The program accesses the Phase Increment and Frequency Load Strobe Registers HP BASIC Program Example FREQ1 REG 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 IRE STORE FREQ1 REG This program changes the output frequency generated by the direct Idigital synthesis DDS method by writing frequency value data to Ithe AFG s Phase Increment registers ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM Afg Base_addr ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG which determine the base laddress of the AFG registers in A24 address space and which set the loutput function CALL Rst CALL A24 offset CALL Output function DISP Press Continue to change frequency register writes PAUSE DISP Call the subprogram which changes the output frequency and pass the Ifrequency the number of waveform points the reference oscillator frequency and the frequency range SOUR FREQ1 RANGe command Note sine waves and arb waves npts 1 square waves npts 4
463. nished responding to a query command 420 Query UNTERMINATED The controller computer attempts to read a query response from the HP E1445A without having first sent a complete query command 430 Query DEADLOCKED The HP E1445A s input and output buffers are full and the AFG cannot continue 440 Query UNTERMINATED after Occurs when the IDN query is not the last query indefinite response executed in a command string 1000 Out of memory The HP E1445A segment or sequence memory is full 1002 Calibration security enabled Calibration security must be disabled to calibrate the HP E1445A to read or write calibration data to change the security code or to change the protected user data 1004 Calibration write fail Writing calibration or protected user data PUD to nonvolatile memory failed 1005 Calibration constant out of range Illegal calibration constant was computed 1006 Calibration constant conflict Calibration constants used during calibration set an illegal condition 1007 Calibration security defeated CALibration secure state disabled and detected at power on 1011 Illegal while download enabled or Commands such as SOUR LIST1 cannot be testing local bus executed under current conditions Execute SOUR ARB DOWN COMP to disable downloading or VINS CONF TEST DATA to complete the local bus test 1012 Illegal when not downloading SOUR ARB DOWN COMP disables downloading only after it has previously been enabled
464. nt DEFine lt ength gt of the waveform segment that is the number of points The assigned segment size must be equal to or larger than the actual size of the waveform segment The AFG generates an error if the waveform segment is larger than the size sent The segment values can be either sent as voltage values use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt or DAC digital to analog converter codes use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt If sent as voltage values the AFG converts them to DAC codes before storing them in memory 86 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 The segment sequence determines the order in which the waveform segments in memory are to be output which order is assigned by the user use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list Each segment sequence must be stored into the AFG s sequence memory To do this you must assign a unique name use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt for each segment sequence to be stored into memory This allows you to select one of many segment sequences which may exist in memory to be output Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters The AFG generates an error for duplicate names The waveform segment names in a segment sequence can either be sent as names or as an addr
465. nt Oscilloscope AFG Master H A 5 V DIV AFG Servant CH B 5 V DIV ECLTO 1 Lines on Backplane Output applied to a 500 load value 5 psec DV Channel A Logical Address 80 Logical Address 88 The commands are 1 Reset the Master and Servant AFGs RST 2 Setup the Master AFG For Output SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INT2 TRIGger STAR1 SOURce INTernal2 SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 3 Select the Master AFG s Marker Source SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED SOURce ROSCillator This command selects the marker source for the ECLTrg0 trigger line to output the Reference Oscillator clock pulses 218 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 10 11 12 13 Enable the ECLTrg0 Line SOURce MARKer ECLTrg0 STATe ON This enables the marker output on the ECLTrgo0 trigger line Although RST automatically enables the AFG for marker outputs it is given here for good programming practice Select the Master AFG s ECLTrg1 Feed Trigger Source SOURce MARKer ECLTrg1 FEED lt source gt ARM STARtLAYer2 This source outputs a marker pulse when the master s waveform output starts The marker is output on the ECLTrg1 trigger line Enable the ECLTrgl Line
466. nto 50 Q or 75 Q 5 12 to 5 11875 volts in nominal steps of 1 25 mv into open circuit 10 24 to 410 2375 volts in nominal steps of 2 5 mv Accuracy Temperature within 5 C of temperature at calibration Tcal module calibrated at 18 28 C output impedance 50 Q or 75 Q load 50 Q or 75 Q respectively or INF 0 396 of setting 0 296 of full scale add for each C beyond 5 from Tcal 0 05 of setting 0 01596 of full scale All Built In Waveforms Output Level into 50 Q or 75 Q 0 32374 to 10 2375 Vpp into open circuit 0 64748 to 20 475 Vpp Output level adjustability is equivalent to 0 30 dB of attenuation in steps of 0 01 dB Sine Waves AC Accuracy 1 kHz maximum output 0 1 dB add beyond Tcal 5 C 0 005 dB C Add if output is not at maximum 0 05 dB Add if frequency is not 1 kHz flatness error relative to 1 kHz specified for 50 Q or 75 Q only 250 kHz filter 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz 0 05 dB 100 kHz to 250 kHz 0 10dB 10 MHz filter 1 kHz to 10 73741824 MHz 0 2 dB These flainess values are achieved by active compensation for filter frequency response in sine wave mode only and do not imply dynamic characteristics of arbitrary waveforms Appendix A HP E1445A Specifications 457 Sine Wave Spectral Purity Output frequencies less than 250 kHz are characterized using the 250 kHz filter higher output frequencies with the 10 MHz filter Frequencies given below refer to the des
467. nts Use the ABORt command to return the trigger system to the idle state when ARM STAR1 LAYer2 COUNt set to INFinity or 9 9E 37 Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None e Related Commands ABORt INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt 1 Example Setting the Start Arm Count ARM LAY2 COUN 10 Sets 10 start arms per INITiate 292 Command Reference Chapter 8 ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate Comments Example ARM STARt LA Yer2 IMMediate immediately arms the waveform regardless of the selected arm source The trigger system must be initiated and the start trigger sequence must be in the wait for arm state The selected start arm source remains unchanged e Executing this command with the start trigger sequence not in the wait for arm state generates Error 212 Arm ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition None Starting a Waveform ARM LAY2 SOUR HOLD Sets manual arm source INIT Initiates trigger system ARM LAY2 Starts waveform STARt LAYer2 SLOPe Parameters Comments Example ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt selects the edge rising or falling on the HP E1445A s front panel Start Arm In BNC which starts waveform generation This edge is significant only with ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used
468. number of points specified by the most recent voltage point and marker pulse list is generated when the waveform segment is output The waveform segment s marker pulse list length must be the same length as its voltage point list or must have a length of 1 If not executing the INITiate IMMediate command generates Error 1104 Segment lists of different lengths e Changing marker pulse values preserves the waveform segment s voltage point list and vice versa e Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude e RST Condition Unaffected 346 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 Example Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Defining a Waveform Segment Voltage Point List ARB DAC FORM SIGN Selects signed DAC code format LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST VOLT DAC 400 800 400 0 400 800 400 0 Defines waveform voltages SEGMent VOLTage POINts Comments SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected waveform segment s voltage point list e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Query Voltage Point List Length LIST SEL ABC Sele
469. o 5 V triangle wave A marker is output at the center of the triangle Chan A applied to AFG s Output Terminal Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Terminal Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 5 msec DIV The commands are Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Select the DAC Data Source SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use INTernal to transfer the data using the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 252 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 10 11 12 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed data or UNSigned data format Setup the First Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Store the First Waveform Segment as Signed Combined Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC voltage list This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory in the format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DA
470. offset register 1610 Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address 1620 SUBEND 1630 1640 SUB Rst 1650 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 1660 COM Afg Base_addr 1670 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 1680 ENTER Afg Complete 1690 SUBEND 1700 1710 SUB Wf del 1720 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 1730 COM Afg Base_addr 1740 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 1750 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 1760 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 1770 SUBEND 1780 1790 SUB Errmsg 1800 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 1810 COM Afg Base_addr 1820 DIM Message 256 1830 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 1840 B SPOLL Afg 1850 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 1860 OUTPUT Afg 1870 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 1880 REPEAT 1890 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 1900 ENTER Afg Code Message 1910 PRINT Code Message 1920 UNTIL Code 0 1930 STOP 1940 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program VXIDOWN FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program VXIDOWN C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A The above example programs use the HP E1406A Command Module to download the data into memory However the command module is
471. ogram are 1 10 11 12 13 14 Set the sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWEep Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt start freq Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP stop freq Set the number of sweeps SOURce SWEep COUNt INFinity Set the number of points in a sweep SOURce S WEep POINts number Set the sweep time SOURce SWEep TIME number Select the source to start a sweep ARM SWEep SOURce LINK Set the number of waveform repetitions ARM STARIELAYer 1 COUNt number Set the number of waveform arm starts ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt number Select the source to start waveform output ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce source Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Trigger the AFG to start a sweep use the source selected above in Step 10 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 187 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_TRIG IRE STORE SWP_TRIG 2 This program triggers a sweep using the Group Execute 3 Trigger command The sweep is from 1 kHz to 1 MHz 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 80910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 8 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 8 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTP
472. ogram displays Number of frequencies in list 4 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LIST1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LIST1 C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 126 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweeping Using Start and Span Frequencies The SMPLSWP2 program specifies a start frequency and a frequency span to continuously sweep from 1 kHz to 21 kHz The program also queries the start frequency stop frequency center frequency and frequency span to show the relationship between them Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Set the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt start freq Set the frequency span SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN freq span Set the number of sweeps SOURce S WEep COUNt number Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude amplitude Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 127 HP BASIC Program Example SMPLSWP2 1 IRE STORE SMPLSWP2 2 This program continuously sweeps from 1 kHz to 21 kHz and specifies 3 la start frequency and a frequency span 4
473. oltage is less than or equal to 1 V MINimum selects the equivalent of 16187 V peak in the default voltage units if the current offset voltage is greater than 1 V MINimum selects the equivalent of 1 02486 V in the current voltage units MAXimum selects the equivalent of the lesser of 6 025 V output offset value rounded down to a value that is a multiple of 01 dB from 5 11875 and 5 11875 V For all waveform shapes when an open circuit load has been specified double the all the above voltages These values bound the legal range of values for lt amplitude gt Default units are specified by the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage command For all waveform shapes other than DC output output amplitude control is implemented as a 0 to 30 dB attenuator with 01 dB resolution For DC output the amplitude is generated using the DAC resolution is 00125 V into a matched load 0025 V into an open circuit For DC output acceptable units are V volts For arbitrary waveform output acceptable units are V volts and VPK For ramp sine square and triangle outputs acceptable units are V volts VPK volts peak VPP volts peak to peak VRMS volts RMS W watts and DBM or DBMW dB referenced to 1 milliwatt For W DBM and DBMW the amplitude is referenced to the OUTPut 1 LOAD value they are meaningless and therefore unavailable if OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity is set Comments Related Comma
474. on Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register Chapter 9 AFG Status 431 The Event Register The Enable Register Program Example lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Condition Register bit to be unmasked The decimal values of bits 5 and 8 are 32 and 256 The Event Register latches transition events from the Condition Register as specified by the Transition Filter Bits in the Event Register are latched and remain set until the register is cleared by one of the following commands STATus QUEStionable EVENt CLS The Enable Register specifies which bits in the Event Register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The AFG logically ANDs the bits in the Event Register with bits in the Enable Register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable Register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event Register are specified unmasked with the command STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Enable Register bit to be unmasked The decimal values of bits 5 and 8 are 32 and 256 The Enable Register is cleared at power on or by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 The QSSG_RQS program sets up the Questionable Signal Status Group Registers to monitor the output frequency generated by the SOURce FR
475. on constants e Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration DC BEGin CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 301 CALibration SECure CODE CALibration SECure CODE lt code gt sets the code which is required to disable calibration security Calibration security must have been previously disabled Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units code character data 0 through 12 characters none The code must start with a letter A through Z and may contain letters digits and underscores Lower case letters are converted to upper case Comments Executing this command with calibration security enabled CALibration SECure STATe ON set generates the Error 1002 Calibration security enabled Disabling calibration security requires knowledge of the previous security code e Before shipping the factory sets the calibration security code to E1445A You should change it before you use your HP E1445A to prevent unauthorized calibration Record the new security code and store it in a secure place If you forget the new code defeating the security involves instrument disassembly See the HP E1445A Service Manual if this is required The HP E14454 stores the security code in its non volatile calibration memory which remains intact even with power off e Executable when Initiated Yes
476. on mask For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Questionable Signal Condition Register will set the same bit in the Questionable Signal Event Register Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus QUEStionable NTRansition O Setting the Questionable Signal Register Negative Transition Mask STAT QUES NTR H0008 Sets the Event bit when sweeping condition is cleared Chapter 8 Command Reference 387 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt sets the positive transition mask For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Questionable Signal Condition Register will set the same bit in the Questionable Signal Event Register Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition
477. only used to demonstrate the downloading method for those programs A better method is to use an embedded controller If you wish to use the HP E1406A Command Module to download data use the method described in Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment Sequences on page 250 268 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Downloading Data Directly into the DAC This method disables the AFG s ARM subsystem and immediately outputs the DAC data point when received The DAC code received by the AFG only sets the DAC to output to the received value It thus does not disables the AFG s DAC code format triggering marker selection and enabling and amplitude setting Send the DAC codes as Combined lists e The lists can be downloaded either in the Signed or Unsigned number formats and as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data e Since the AFG stores no data into memory do not set the last point bit in the list e Download the segment data directly into the AFG s High Speed Data Register The data must go to the register address with a 38 decimal 26 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space see Appendix C for information on registers The VXISRCE program shows how to download segment data directly to the DAC The program downloads the lists using the VXIbus The segment lists are downloaded in the Signed number format and as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data The example generates a 0 to 5 V triangle wa
478. onnector HOLD Suspend stop triggering Use the TRIGger STOP IMMediate command to terminate a start arm cycle TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The V XIbus TTL trigger lines 398 Command Reference Chapter 8 Example TRIGger If a stop trigger is received while the start trigger sequence is in the idle or wait for arm states it is ignored with no error generated If the start trigger sequence is on the last of ARM STAR1 LAYer2 COUNt arm cycles a stop trigger places the trigger system in the idle state at the end of the current waveform repetition A stop trigger differs from the ABORt command in that ABORt terminates all start arm cycles immediately whereas a stop trigger terminates only the current arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition Use the TRIGger STOP SLOPe command to select the active edge rising or falling for the front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC when used as the stop trigger source The front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC is a three use connector for FSK control as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source Only one of these uses may be active at any time If a VXIbus TTL Trg trigger line is used as the stop trigger source then no TTL Trg trigger lines can be used for FSK control or as the gating source Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands ABORt INITiate IMMediate TRIGger STARt COUNt RST Condition TRIGger
479. ontents 7 SBGNlent DELete SELected acca ook rad Rn 340 DSEGMent PRBE 442522234649 EERE EC HO ex XO 341 SBEGNMent MARKEY au d RGCROROROGE A 4468 034944208 eS bees 342 SEGNIent NLARKerPOINIS sa uo oo Ro eek ec bE OSE ES dem m 343 DLSEGMent MARKerSPOint e 343 SEGNTanEESELSBL camita A de e ecu 344 SEG Ment VOL Agena ud ee eR Oe he tee oq uec cde WO eS SSE 345 SEGNMent E VOL Tape DAC o cri rr ed Ox DAD Rege Xo woo Rs 346 SbGi Ment VOL Tage PINES uu uc deu OR EAS E OR ORE EE Rn 347 eEOuence ADDRess 423226429 o RR X OE E OE E EC 347 BabOuence CA TAaloB ou os or eoe RRA Re wo os 348 SSEQuence COMBI 4 uu uno nk EO AAA 348 SSEQuence COMBined POINES s os sb d OR AR RR EERO 349 dd a uos iu ok CE UE ehe ee oe me Re eb He od 350 ebGQuence DEL te ALL uu uuu E GROS Eo US SR S AGE NOR OR S Wo EG sl So EQUuente DEL ste SELEected 2302 2 4 eee be a Pee a X S 331 paEQuence O ELICOUNE 4 6 4 cm Re ko a ROD RO A OG KO E A 352 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts 0 0 00000 ee eee 353 OOEOUHIOEPREET vrai AAA AA E A 353 aoPQuence MARKGF 9 4 25 644408 a e E Gee ESS 354 SSEQuence MARKerPOINIS o een 355 SEQuence MARKerSPUMt sicario ORR AR RH RR 353 ir IE uc Dee ee ee Ok ee Oe oe SS 356 SSEQuen e SEQUE o o eR ha A ORR GS ded Oa BA RR 357 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents o ens 397 SGDRESIISTZ ici ers RAR EN 358 PORMA UA TAY 4a he or AA dc de CC 358 PREQUEDOY 2 4 45 4444 c
480. ory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIN D C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Gene rating an The CHARGE program generates an Exponential Charge Discharge Expo nential waveform with 4096 segments or points Charge Discharge Waveform 5 V DN Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV HP BASIC Program Example CHARGE This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences 1 IRE STORE CHARGE This program generates an exponential charge discharge waveform 3 las an arbitrary waveform 180 Call the subprogram which defines the exponential charge 190 discharge waveform and output sequence 200 CALL Charge_def 210 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER CHARGE_OUT 230 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 280 SUB Charge_def 290 Charge_def Compute waveform exponential and define segment and 300 Isequence 310 COM OAfg 320 DIM Waveform 1 4096 330 Rc 400 340 FOR T 1 TO 4096 350 IF T gt 0 AND T lt 2047 THEN 360 Waveform T 1 1 EXP T Ro 370 END IF Continued on Next Page 108 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 IF T gt 2047 THEN Waveform T 1 1 EXP 2048 Rc 1 1 EXP T 2047 Rc END IF NEXT T OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL CHARGE select segment to be def
481. ory and then selected re selected on the fly by digital words arriving on the Local Bus typ 7 Msa s the Faceplate Connector typ 1 M s or the VME bus typ 2 M s Size C Slots 1 Connectors P1 P2 Weight kg 1 9 Device Type Message Based Servant VXlIbus Revision Compliance 1 3 Register Level Documentation Subset SCPI Revision 1991 0 Manufacturer Code 4095 Decimal Model Code 418 Decimal Slave A16 A24 DO8 D16 Master A16 A24 D08 D16 The HP E1445A can control the HP E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC Currents in Amps 5 V 12 V 12V 24 V 24V 5 2 V 2 V IPM lom lePw IDM Ipm lom lem lpm lem lpm lpm lpm IPM IDM 3 50 0 20 0 12 0 10 0 13 0 06 0 28 0 17 0 34 0 17 2 50 0 12 1 20 0 20 Average Watts Slot 40 44 dPressure mm H20 0 5 Air Flow liters s 3 5 Appendix A HP E1445A Specifications 461 Notes 462 HP E1445A Specifications Appendix A Appendix B Useful Tables Appendix Contents The tables in this appendix contain information often referred to during HP E1445A programming The tables in this appendix include e Table B 1 HP E1445A Example Program LAS ia Page 464 e Table B 2 HP E1445A Command Coupling GIOUDS i as eee tk etl he eee ad Page 467 e Table B 3 HP E1445A Frequency Limits Page 470 e Table B 4 HP E1445A Amplitude Limits Page 471 e Table B 5 HP E1445A Power on Reset Conditions Losa eS EUN E E de Page 472 e Table B 6 HP E1445A Error
482. ources 161 delay 162 frequency range 155 program comments 154 162 programming flowchart 118 119 sample rate setting 323 sample rate source 324 using arbitrary waveform 152 153 using FSK control source 147 149 using TTLTrgn control source 150 151 FSK1 Example Program 148 149 FSK2 Example Program 150 151 FSK_ARB Example Program 152 153 G GATE Example Program 184 185 Gating and signal phase 200 disabling 394 enabling 200 394 polarity 200 393 sources 200 393 trigger signals 183 185 using 196 Generating arbitrary wave ramp Visual BASIC program 33 39 arbitrary wave ramp Visual C C program 41 45 arbitrary waveforms 83 116 arbitrary waveforms damped sine waves 107 108 arbitrary waveforms description 86 87 arbitrary waveforms exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 arbitrary waveforms half rectified sine waves 111 arbitrary waveforms noise 112 arbitrary waveforms non sinusoid 447 arbitrary waveforms sample programs 104 109 111 112 arbitrary waveforms sample rate 331 arbitrary waveforms simple 88 92 arbitrary waveforms sin x x 105 106 arbitrary waveforms spiked sine waves 109 arbitrary waveforms with different frequency generators 99 102 104 arbitrary waveforms with different waveform segments 93 98 arbitrary waveforms with single waveform segment 88 92 DC voltages 56 57 exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 marker pulses arbitr
483. owing format Bits 31 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bits 16 0 repetition reserved marker unused segment count enable address The repetition count is 12 bit unsigned value that is 4096 the desired repetition count a value of 4095 in these bits indicates 1 repetition a value of O indicates 4096 repetitions Marker enable is 1 to enable marker pulse generation for that waveform segment Segment address is the starting address of the segment divided by 8 Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess query to obtain the address of a waveform segment MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command e f the comma separated list of values format is used the values must be in two s complement format 1 e values should range from 2147483648 to 42147483647 If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first e The combined list must be no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine If the combined list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the combined list is generated when outputting the segment sequence 348 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 Example Using combined lists is faster than separately defining the waveform segment marker enable and repetition count lists Executing this command with waveform segment marker pulse and repetition count lists defined with different lengths
484. p Length RAMP POIN 1000 Sets ramp length 368 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce RAMP POLarity SOURce RAMP POLarity polarity selects the polarity of the ramp triangle or square wave For ramps NORMal generates a positive going ramp INVerted generates a negative going ramp For triangles NORMal generates a triangle with an initial positive going slope INVerted generates an initial negative going slope For square waves NORMal generates a waveform with initial voltage being the more positive voltage INVerted generates the more negative voltage first Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units polarity discrete INVerted NORMal none Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Voltage e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RST Condition SOURce RAMP POLarity NORMal Example Selecting Ramp Polarity FUNC SHAP RAMP Selects ramp output RAMP POL INV Selects negative going ramp Chapter 8 Command Reference 369 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce ROSCillator The SOURce ROSCillator subsystem controls the reference oscillator s source and indicates the frequency of an external oscillator The HP E1445A uses the source and frequency information to generate sample output rate for arbitrary waveforms or waveform frequency for ramp sine square and triangle wave output Subsystem Syntax SOURce ROSCillator FREQu
485. pe poe ra CE OR OR pe qe og e oen 164 Tnitipting WawetoNHE uoa oce desos dos e hok e bo deg Re OR dob RR Po dede dee 165 JUNE IDE PET AER eoe RARA ERE Be OR OE d 165 Arming Commands 3 3 2d dax EEG Rec RES Ru A 165 Seting Aaming SOURCES usd ee HR A RARA 166 HP BASIC Program Example EXT ARM o 167 Setting the Arm and Waveform Cycle Count o oo oo 169 HP BASIC Program Example BURST e srra 64444 RR RR REA 170 TOPES MEAFG uou ue s eed de dede did RE OHS 172 Tegsermng Commands aa AE A AA RA AAA 172 Using the Divide by N Frequency Generator o o 174 HP BASIC Program Exemple DIV ND amp uua a RR e 174 Lock Stepping Multiple AFGs o o eee 176 HP BASIC Program Example LOCKSTEP sooo eee Soe ES 177 UN SUD ir a ar a vs Re a de Qui Bede d 180 HP BASIC Program Example STOPTRIG 4224 2 44 Rae ke a be a 181 Cate Mercer Sins av nn eo UR TR ke eot AKER EERE RAE DERE OK 183 HP BASIC Program Example GATE llle 184 Arming and Triggering Frequency Sweeps and Lists o 186 Frequency Sweeps Using Triggers oo se e kom e ee REE e d 186 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_TRIG 0 188 Arming and Triggering a Frequency Sweep oo o 190 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_STEP 4 244 6 6 6s Ree ke a OR 191 Arming and Triggering a Frequency LiSt o o 193 HP BASIC Program Example LIST_STP 2 4 46 04s R
486. press Enter 40 Getting Started Chapter 1 e For Microsoft compilers used in Windows type NMAKE lt project_name gt MAK and press Enter From the Windows Interface Select the C C Windows environment and make sure the program to be compiled and the appropriate libraries are in a project file Then do the following e For Borland compilers select Project Open Project to open the project then Compile Build All to compile the program For Microsoft compilers used in Windows type Project Open to open the project then Project Re build All to compile the program Typical Visual C C Following is an example program written in Visual C C using the Example Program HP Standard Instrument Control Library The program Using HP SICL sends commands to the AFG to generate an arbitrary waveform receives data from the AFG shows how to send coupled commands and performs error checking of the AFG ARBWAVE C This program generates a 100 points ramp The data to generate the ramp is transferred to the AFG as voltages Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt Use alloc h for Turbo C c or C c include lt sicl h gt Included with SICL define DEV_ADDR hpib7 9 10 Assign the HP IB address Functions void gen_seg void void cmd exe char commands int length char fu
487. put 5 5 000 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 Icycle bursts Sets the trigger source to INTernal1 Ithe stop trigger source to EXTernal the stop trigger Islope to NEGative The arm source is also set to IEXTernal COM Afg OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Itrigger source OUTPUT EAfg TRIG STOP SOUR EXT Istop trigger source OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STOP SLOP NEG Istop trigger slope OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1005 loutput frequency OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN loutput function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5VPP lamplitude OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR EXT larm source Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 181 330 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP POS larm slope 340 OUTPUT QAfg ARM STAR LAY2 COUN 5 larm count 350 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 5E3 lrepetition count 360 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 370 SUBEND 380 390 SUB Rst 400 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 410 COM Afg 420 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 430 ENTER Afg Complete 440 SUBEND 450 460 SUB Errmsg 470 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 480 COM Afg 490 DIM Message 256 500 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 510 B SPOLL Afg 520 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 530 OUTPUT Afg 540 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 550 REPEAT 560 OUTPUT QAfg
488. quency Page 487 The Frequency Control Registers Page 487 Frequency Control Programs ooooooococoo ooo Page 489 e Changing the Signal Phase o ooo ooomocmoo oo Page 495 The Phase Control RegisterS o ooo ooomooooo o Page 495 Phase Control Program 0 0 0 000 e eee eee ee Page 496 e Selecting the Waveform Sequence Page 498 The Waveform Sequence Registers Page 498 Waveform Sequence Selection Program Page 500 e Loading the DAC from the VXIbus Page 506 This appendix does not identify all of the AFG registers nor does it cover all of the AFG functions from the register based programming standpoint Appendix C Register Based Programming 483 System Configuration The example programs and programming techniques shown in this appendix are based on the following system configuration Mainframe HP 75000 Series C HP E1401 Controller HP E1480A V 360 select code 16 Programming Language HP BASIC UX 6 0 HP E1445A AFG Logical address 80 Each program uses a combination of SCPI commands and register reads writes In most cases SCPI commands set up the AFG and initiate the waveform Register reads writes are used to change the frequency phase waveform etc instantaneously Accessing the Registers Determining the A24 Base Address Access to the AFG s operatio
489. quency sweeps and LIST must be selected for frequency lists 198 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 AFG Arming The arming sources set by the ARM STARI LAYer2 SOURce source Sources command are e BUS The HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 and ECLTrg1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Start Arm In BNC connector TTL levels e HOLD Suspend arming Use the ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate command to start the waveform IMMediate Immediate arming An arm is internally generated two to three reference oscillator cycles after the start trigger sequence enters the wait for arm state TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines AFG Arm Count The arm count specifies the number of arms the AFG is to receive before it returns to the Idle state The arm count is set with the ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt command The range is 1 through 65535 or INFinity The default value is 1 Waveform The waveform repetition cycle count specifies the number of cycles per Repetition Count am The cycle count is specified with the ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt number command The range for the cycle count is 1 through 65536 or INFinity The default value is INFinity Stop Trigger Stop triggers abort the waveform cycle repetition count at the end of the Sources current cycle The stop trigger sources set with the TRIGger STOP SOUR
490. r Writing any value to the Frequency Load Strobe Register loads the contents of the Phase Increment Registers into the DDS micro chip Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 8D16 unused Strobe Data The Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register Stobe Data Writing any value to this register loads the contents of the Phase Increment Registers into the DDS micro chip Once the data has been loaded it takes 20 reference oscillator clock cycles for the new frequency to appear at the output The Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register enables and disables signal sampling and specifies the N value used to generate ROSC N frequencies Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 6316 unused SHOLD SMUX2 SMUX1 SMUXO The ROSC N Divider SHOLD Setting bit 7 to a 1 causes sample signals to be ignored This bit is set while setting the divide by n counter SMUX2 SMUXO bits 2 0 select N as follows 000 selects ROSC 1 001 selects ROSC 2 010 selects ROSC 3 011 selects ROSC 2N The ROSC N Divider Registers contain the value of N 1 when 2N is Registers greater than or equal to 4 The reference oscillator ROSC will be divided by 4 through 131 072 when the registers are loaded with 1 through 65 535 Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 7D46 unused value through base 7F16 Register 7D Contains the most sig
491. r following an ABORt SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a frequency change occurs This shows that the new steady state frequency has been reached SOURce LIST 1 Outputs marker pulses specified by the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SSEQuence MARKer commands The pulse is normally one sample period wide but may be widened by placing markers on consecutive output points This source is only useful with SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER i e arbitrary waveform output SOURce PM DEViation CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a phase change occurs This shows that the new phase has been reached SOURce ROSCillator The reference oscillator as selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Outputs a nominal 12 nS marker pulse for each point of the segment list Chapter 8 Command Reference 361 SOURce MARKer Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt string ARM STARi SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 none ARM STARt SEQuencef 1 LAYer2 SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge ISOURce LIST 1 SOURce PM DE Viation CHANge SOURce ROSCillator TRiGger STARt SEQuence 1 Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands
492. r segment sequence and phase deviation data the offset returned is the offset of the first of the two words that must be written e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce JARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce e RST Condition The VXI data transfer bus is not active Querying the A24 Address Space Offset LIST SEL ABC DEF 100 Creates waveform segment ARB DOWN VXI ABC 100 Starts download to segment VINS VME REC ADDR DATA Queries A24 offset for data writes CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy Comments VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy returns two values A24 112 A24 indicates that the HP E1445A s A24 address space when writing waveform segment segment sequence DAC or phase deviation data and 112 is the offset into the A24 address space to be checked Actually this indicated Status Register need never be checked The HP E1445A will always handshake any data written to it however the data will be ignored if none of the above operations are active Nevertheless bit 1 of the Status Register indicates whether the HP E14454 is in the initiated state or the idle state 1 indicates initiated 0 indicates idle This may useful when writing DAC and phase deviation data as it can be checked to indicate when these types of data will be ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce JARBit
493. rary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce Chapter 8 Command Reference 407 VINStrument Example IDENtity Comments Example e RST Condition None Querying the A24 Address Space Ready Indication Offset VINS VME REC ADDR READ Queries A24 offset for ready indication VINStrument IDENtity returns a response consisting of 4 fields indicating the virtual instrument capability of the HP E1445A HEWLETT PACKARD VIRTUAL INSTRUMENT ANY DTOA 0 A 01 00 The first and last fields indicate that the HP E1445A conforms to revision A 01 00 of HP s Virtual Instrument Local Bus System Specification The second field indicates that the HP E1445A is a digital to analog converter The third field is reserved for future use e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Querying Virtual Instrument Capability VINS IDEN Queries capability 408 Command Reference Chapter 8 SCPI Command Quick Reference Table 8 1 HP E1445A SCPI Commands Subsystem Commands TRIGger ABORt ARM ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt number ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt ARM STAR1 LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt ARM SWEep COUNt lt number gt ARM SWEep IMMediate ARM SWeEep LINK lt link gt ARM SWEep SOURce source CALibration CALibration CO
494. rates a Damped sine wave using 4096 segments or Damped Sine Wave points 5 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value msec DIV HP BASIC Program Example SIN_D This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences IRE STORE SIN_D This program outputs a damped sine wave arbitrary waveform N 180 Call the subprogram which defines a damped sine wave and 190 Ithe output sequence 200 CALL Sind def 210 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN D OUT 230 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 290 SUB Sind def 300 Sind def Compute waveform damped sine wave and define segment 310 COM OAfg 320 DIM Waveform 1 4096 330 A 4 4096 340 W 2 PI 50 350 FOR T 1 TO 4096 360 Waveform T EXP A T SIN W T 370 NEXT T 380 OUTPUT CAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN D select segment to be defined 390 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Iset segment size 400 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points 410 420 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN D OUT Define sequence name 430 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define sequence size 440 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN D Set segment execution order 450 SUBEND Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 107 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIN_D FRM is in direct
495. rbitrary block of 100 frequencies to the AFG Once the frequencies are received the AFG steps through the list at one frequency per second At the end of the listing are program modifications for sending the data in an indefinite length arbitrary block Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source 2 Select the frequency generator which allows frequency lists hopping TRIGger STARt SOURce source 3 Select the frequency list mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE mode 4 Download the frequency list SOURce LIST2 FREQuency freq list 5 Set the duration of the list SOURce SWEep TIME number 6 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 7 Setthe signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 8 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate 130 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 HP BASIC Program Example LISTDEF 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 IRE STORE LISTDEF This program sends a definite length arbitrary block of frequencies Ito the AFG Once the AFG receives the frequencies it steps through Ithe list at a rate of one frequency per second lAssign I O paths between the computer and E1445A One path sends Idata in ASCII format to the AFG the other path sends frequency list data to the AFG in b
496. rce AFG Frequency There are four frequency modes available using the INTernal1 sample Modes source DDS timebase The modes selected by the SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE command are e CW FiXed single frequency mode e FSKey frequency shift keying mode e LIST frequency list mode e SWEep frequency sweep mode Frequency Range The frequency range for sweeping or sampling depends on the reference Sweeping and oscillator used However for the INTernal1 42 94967296 MHz oscillator S amplin g the range for swept sine square triangle and ramp waveforms and the swept sampling range for arbitrary waveforms is 0 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz Frequency Range The maximum number of frequencies in a frequency list is 256 The range Freq uency Lists of frequencies allowed in a frequency list or for frequency shift keying and FSK depends on the output function e Sine Wave and Arbitrary Waveforms The minimum frequency is 0 Hz the maximum frequency is the selected reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 e Square Waves The minimum frequency is 0 Hz the maximum frequency is the selected reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 e Ramp and Triangle Waveforms The minimum frequency is O Hz the maximum frequency is the selected reference oscillator frequency divided by four multiplied by the number of waveform points Rosc 4 npts Frequency Doubling For all waveforms except sine waves the sweeping or sampling range can be do
497. red Testing Local Bus Operation VINS CONF TEST CONF 100 Configure for 100 byte test send data VINS CONF TEST DATA Read back test data CONFigure VME MODE Parameters Comments Example VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE rode selects the operating mode for the VXIbus data transfer bus The only available mode is CONSume There is no need to send this command since there is only one available mode The command is only included for compatibility with the HP Virtual Instrument Local Bus System Specification Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode discrete CONSume none Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE CONSume Setting the VXIbus Data Transfer Bus Operation Mode VINS VME CONS Sets CONSume mode 406 Command Reference Chapter 8 VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA Comments Example VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA returns two values A24 offset A24 indicates that the HP E1445A s A24 address space should be used for writing waveform segment segment sequence DAC or phase deviation data and offset is the offset into the A24 address space to be written to The offset returned depends on which of the above operations is active when the ADDRess DATA query is executed If none are active Error 1022 VXI data transfer bus not active is generated e Fo
498. regoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied prod ucts or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or im proper site preparation or maintenance The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of the Buyer HP does not warrant the Buyer s circuitry or malfunctions of HP products that result from the Buyer s circuitry In addition HP does not warrant any damage that oc curs as a result of the Buyer s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer supplied products NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HP SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CON TRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice HEWLETT PACKARD HP MAKES NO WAR RANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HP shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the f
499. rence oscillator sources Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source 2 Select the frequency generator which allows frequency shift keying TRIGger STARt SOURce source 3 Select the frequency shift keying mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 4 Select the FSK frequencies SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequency1 gt lt frequency2 gt 5 Select the FSK control source SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce source 6 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 147 7 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 8 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example FSK1 160 170 180 190 200 210 IRE STORE FSK1 This program shifts between 5 MHz and 10 MHz based on a 1 MHz Icontrol signal applied to the FSK control source The program also queries the FSK frequencies and the FSK control Isource Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Fsk CALL Fsk_info WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7
500. ria Kor BOR 4E AAA ERE A 339 FREQueney POING o criar AA RRA ERE wow VU 360 BOURGE MAREE isa O RRR ES 361 POLIS FEED 2 ko oo o5 de eee PSR EES SOE HSS BEES 361 ECL Treen eS CAT as RR ee BERR Oe ko 362 PBEDES oct acceso A uu Sn ee es ae ae doi Se 363 POLII dara ic 364 PAARI A IN ERS cde 364 POUR PM diua AI AA a E AA d 365 PE OE 0000002 eR Ree die ke a de ee e e eo 365 QUIN uuu du b d oo e di a A SEES 366 INTO an deua Re Y s xr d Wed RR Edu Sos 367 A uod EU eoe OE EO C ek ede Eo an te ed 367 SOURCES RAMP saca Kok GORGE EGRE ERK ERAS OHS GG 368 PODNE d koe Bosh A RARE ORE deae ope OR Ot de oe e USERS E 368 4 59 2 T DUCIT 369 SOUB GS IEOSCIBRE i246 ek ke tr he RR RAE Rege 370 FREQu nc y EXTernal escusa RADE BWR ES BE ERR ERE BES 370 SOURCE 24 a5 be be SEG E OE eR ERE RES HE OSS OES ESSE TES 371 POUR IS W RS gt oue ee de oto A ee ek he oe de cR ee E k 372 8 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents SWEDE OUNE e dos ob de pote pde i e RBA dde ok he 372 DIRECID sarae coc RR A AA AR dep dude s 373 PINES ai AAA E ATAR a 374 MERCER ee Oke ee Se es eee 373 TIME i a sd ie deo o ea ERK SE A AAA RRR e d 376 SOLIS VOLTS cerraron ERA A o o Be EES 377 LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude AIT LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage 379 DLLEYel IMMediat EOFPPSet i iz ak RR EYE AGERE RR YR RRS 380 SUAVES arar AR A ae AAA E Rares 381 CPCS ca a RRA AR di leo 382 OPERO CON
501. rigger Signals 0 0 0 0 00 00 0005 Page 183 e Arming and Triggering Frequency Sweeps and Lists ecce O Page 186 Frequency Sweeps Using Triggers Page 186 Arming and Triggering a Frequency Sweep Page 190 Arming and Triggering a Frequency List Page 193 e Aborting Waveforms 0 0 0 ce eee e Page 196 Using ABORt Stop Triggers or Gating Page 196 e Arming and Triggering Program Comments Page 197 Reference Oscillator Sources 0005 Page 197 AFG Frequency Synthesis Modes Page 197 AFG Frequency Modes 0 20 esses Page 198 AFG Arming Sources 2 0 0 0 cece eee ee Page 199 APG Arm Count 6 2000 aue o noes Page 199 Waveform Repetition Count 00 Page 199 Stop Trigger Sources eee eee Page 199 External Stop Trigger Slope 0005 Page 200 AFG Gating Sources 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee Page 200 AFG Gate Polarity 0 eee eee eee Page 200 Enabling the Gate llle Page 200 Frequency Sweep List Arming Page 201 Frequency Sweep List Advance Trigger Page 201 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 163 The ARM TRIG Configuration The ARM TRIG States Each standard and arbitrary waveform is a series of discrete amplitude points digital to analog DAC codes
502. rigger lines with the HP E1406A Command TTLTrg lt n gt Trigger Module note that the module uses negative true logic Thus writing a logic Lines 1 to a trigger line sets the line to an electrically low level This would select FSK frequency2 Writing a logic 0 to a trigger line sets the line to an electrically high level which selects frequency1 Refer to your Command Module manual for more information on setting up and enabling the TTLTrg trigger lines 162 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering Chapter Contents This chapter shows you how to arm and trigger the HP E1445A AFG in order to start and advance standard and arbitrary waveforms The sections of this chapter include e The ARM TRIG Configurati0N o ooo cocooocooooooo Page 164 The ARM TRIG States lese Page 164 e Initiating Waveforms 00 e Page 165 e Arming the AEG eol Epod S Page 165 Arming Commands o oococcoccccoc eee eee eee eee Page 165 Setting Arming Sources 00 00 0000 eel Page 166 Setting the Arm and Waveform Cycle Count Page 169 e Triggering the APG iss nene See uber Page 172 Triggering Commands 00 0 e eee eee Page 172 Using the Divide by N Frequency Generator Page 174 Lock Stepping Multiple AFGs Page 176 Using Stop Triggers 00 0 0 eee eee eee Page 180 Gating T
503. rm points as dac codes FOR l 100 TO 99 Waveform 101 I 050505 00125 NEXT Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 227 390 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 400 OUTPUT QGAfg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed 410 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name 420 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size 430 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC Waveform waveform pts 440 450 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP OUT sequence name 460 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size 470 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order 480 SUBEND 490 500 SUB Rst 510 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 520 COM OAfg 530 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 540 ENTER Afg Complete 550 SUBEND 560 570 SUB Wf del 580 Wf del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 590 COM OAfg 600 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 610 OUTPUT QGAfg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 620 OUTPUT QAfg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 630 SUBEND 640 650 SUB Errmsg 660 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 670 COM Afg 680 DIM Message 256 690 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 700 B SPOLL Afg 710 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 720 OUTPUT Afg 730 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform
504. rograms demonstrate how to sweep arbitrary waveforms by specifying starting and stopping sample rates Sweeping Sin x x and The SWP ARB program computes a 4096 point 8 cycle Pseudo Random Noise phase continuous Sin x x waveform with a peak amplitude of 1V Signals and a 4096 point pseudo random noise signal By sweeping the Sin x x signal the different frequencies of the signal are swept simultaneously Starting and stopping sample rates are specified such that Sin x x is swept from 1 kHz to 2 kHz The noise signal is a comb of frequencies separated by the repetition rate of the signal The pseudo random signal is repetitive Sweeping this signal effectively decreases the repetition rate by increasing the length of the signal The sampling bandwidth is 40 kHz with an effective bandwidth of 20 kHz The output is swept from 10 Hz to 20 Hz HP BASIC Program Example SWP_ARB IRE STORE SWP_ARB This program sweeps two arbitrary waveforms sin x x and pseudo lrandom noise The 4096 point waveforms are swept from 4 096 MHz to 18 192 MHz which results in an output frequency sweep from 1 kHz to 12 kHz lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Wim_manage Abort the current waveform select and initiate either the sin x
505. rrmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 560 COM Afg DIM Message 256 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT A fg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP PVST FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_PVST C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 137 Freq uency Lists To demonstrates the relationship between the number of frequencies in a Versus Time frequency list and the time to hop through the list program LIST_TME makes continuous passes through a frequency list where the frequencies are spaced 1 second apart Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency list mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Specify the frequency list SOURce LIST2 FREQuency freq list 3 Set the list repetition count SOURce S WEep COUNt number 4 Set the frequency advance source TRIGger SWEep SOURce source 5 Set the frequency hop rate SOURce SWEep T
506. ry and output DAC Divide by N Frequency Generator Frequency2 Generator Divide by N Reference Oscillator Figure 10 4 Generating Waveforms Using a Frequency2 Generator Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 449 Trig ger Ci rcuitry The trigger circuitry advances the waveform to the next segment The external trigger sources advances the waveform directly Thus the sample rate and resultant waveform frequency depend on the frequency of the applied triggers Output Circuitry The output circuitry outputs the waveform at the front panel s Output connector The circuitry sets the output amplitude offset voltages output impedances and has a 250 kHz and a 10 MHz low pass filter See Output Circuitry Description on page 451 for more information Microprocessor The AFG uses a Motorola 68000 microprocessor to generates the waveform segments and segment sequences for the standard waveforms Generating Sinusoid Waveforms Refer to Figure 10 5 The AFG uses the DDS Frequency 1 frequency generator to generate Sinusoid waveforms The generator output directly supplies the DAC data for the output DAC to generate the waveforms Output Reference Oscillator Figure 10 5 Generating Sinusoid Waveforms 450 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 Output Circuitry Description Refer to Figure 10 6 The output circuitry consists of an output amplifier attenuator offset circuitry and filter The
507. s 20 Roe ERR EER GRO RERO WO woR X OREUROR OR GE EEE RES 117 FSE Programming PIOWOlall o oc oa e xoa 65446 A 118 FSK Command RAS daa be RO dd dd eH SEES tds d 120 sweeping and Frequency Listi uuu neo bE PSR OO ARA 120 Sweeping Using Start and Stop Frequencies o o e 121 HP BASIC Program Example SMPLSWPTI 2464664 e 44 4 122 Specthying a Frequency List ug uoo ak RR Re Ree EE eR 124 HP BASIC Program Example LISTI iau 9e Raided RS 125 Sweeping Using Start and Span Frequencies o 127 HP BASIC Program Example SMPLSWP2 4 22 2 eee we ee es 128 Frequency Lists Using Definite and Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks 130 HP BASIC Program Example LISTDEP 5 5 24 400 due be KOR RRO S 131 Logarithmic SWEEPING 4534499949 ROR 9 xd OS db EE EO 133 HP BASIC Program Example LOG_SWP 24 45 04 ss ee eu as 133 Sweep Points Versus TIME saaressa moe he PR RSS ERR A 135 HP BASIC Program Example SWP PVST 136 Frequency Lists Versus Tims 444244444494 48820 8d XR A E ERS 138 HP BASIC Program Example LIST IME ics cick ok ee ae A 139 Sweeping Arbitrary Waveforms o ee eee eee 141 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_ARB 141 AC Output Leveling oro AAA Od 144 HP BASIC Program Example SWP_LEVD o 145 Exeg enes ss utt ESI uos s mire 147 FSK Using the FSK Control Sourc e s 444444444444 6h be E A 147 HP BASIC Program Exampl
508. s Appendix A Interface Characteristics BNC Connector TTL levels except for analog output Functions Outputs Output 50 75 Ohm analog output 50 Q or 75 Q nominal or open Marker Out marker bits stored with arbitrary This output is parallel waveforms terminated with 50 nominal reference frequency waveform clock a pulse indicating each waveform repetition a level change at the start and the end of each burst of waveform repetitions frequency change phase change Inputs Ref Sample In external reference frequency 40 MHz maximum trigger source i e the waveform clock Start Arm In start arm enables waveform clock for a burst of waveform repetitions Stop Trig FSK Gate In waveform clock stop causes the current waveform repetition to be the last until another Start Arm FSK Input waveform clock gate NOTE High impedance pulled up to 5 V through 4 7 KQ resistor External source must be able to sink 1 Ma Appendix A HP E1445A Specifications 459 VXI ECLTrg Functions Input Functions Output Functions VXI TTLTrg Functions Input Functions Output Functions Front Panel Digital Port In Connector Connector Type Signal Lines Logic Compatibility Functions Data Rate Local Bus Bus Type Functions Data Rate typical reference frequency in trigger source in i e the waveform clock start arm in enables waveform
509. s as DAC codes using the Signed number format The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus if the AFG currently contains Signed data and you wish to send Unsigned data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Unsigned data Refer to Figure 7 1 for the 16 bit Integer Combined Segment List Bit 1 bit value 2 sets the marker pulse Bits 3 to 15 are the DAC codes Reserved Unused asyi ati s i2 ofa 8 7 6 5 14 3 2 1 O A O O DAC Codes for the 135 Bit DAC Marker B it Figure 7 1 Combined List Format Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 239 Using the Combined This section shows how to setup the AFG to receive a combined list in the List with the Signed Signed number format and how to generate the list from voltage values Number Format Transferring the Listin With the AFG set to receive codes in the Signed number format it receives the Signed Number the codes in 16 bit two s complement numbers Use the Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command to select the format Determining Codes in For outputs into matched loads and with the amplitude set to maximum the Signed Number 5 11875V the following codes generate the following outputs Format Code 0 outputs 0 V Code 32768 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 32760 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage To calculate combined DAC codes from voltage values use th
510. s command is only used with DDS frequency1 frequency generator The lower frequency setting that is normal setting for the SQUare function is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 16 The high frequency setting for the SQUare function is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 8 The lower frequency setting that is normal setting for the TRIangle and RAMP functions is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 4 number of points The doubled frequency setting for the TRlangle and RAMP functions is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 2 number of points The doubled setting worsens the frequency resolution by a factor of two and introduces some sample rate jitter The number of points SOURce RAMP POINts determine the maximum frequency of the TRIangle and RAMP functions The more points results in a lower maximum frequency but with a better waveform shape The fewer points results in a higher maximum frequency but with lower resolution e For correct output amplitude values the load applied to the AFG Output 50 75 Q output terminals must be the same value as the selected AFG output impedance value To output to an open circuit execute OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity or 9 9E 37 this sets the auto load value off The HP E1445A then outputs the correct amplitude and offset for an open circuit The amplitude and offset range are doubled while resolution worsens by a factor of 2 C
511. s in the Standard Event Status Register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The AFG logically ANDs the bits in the Event Register with bits in the Enable Register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable Register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event Register are specified unmasked with the command ESE lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Enable Register bit to be unmasked Bits 7 5 4 3 2 0 have corresponding decimal values of 128 32 16 8 4 1 All unmasked bits in the Enable Register can be determined with the command ESE The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared at power on or with an lt unmask gt value of 0 The ERRORCHK program sets up the Standard Event Status Group Registers to monitor programming errors When a command error execution error device dependent error or query error occurs a service request interrupt is sent to the computer which then reads the AFG error queue and displays the error code and message The steps of the program are 1 Unmask bits 5 CME 4 EXE 3 DDE 2 QYE in the Standard Event Status Enable Register so that the error will generate a Standard Event Status Group summary bit ESE lt unmask gt 2 Unmask bit 5 ESB in the Service Request Enable Register so that a service request is generated when the S
512. sage to the computer over HP IB The bits are specified unmasked with the command SRE lt unmask gt All unmasked bits in the Enable Register can be determined with the command SRE The Service Request Enable Register is cleared at power on or by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 The Enable Registers and Transition Filters in the Questionable Signal and Operation Status Groups can be preset initialized with the command STATus PRESet All bits in the Enable Registers are masked i e lt unmask gt is 0 and all bits in the Condition Registers set corresponding bits in the Event Registers on positive 0 to 1 transitions Chapter 9 AFG Status 443 Notes 444 AFG Status Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description Chapter Contents This chapter shows how the HP E1445A 13 Bit Arbitrary Function Generator AFG operates The sections are as follows e AFG Description 0 0 eee ee eee Page 445 e Arbitrary Waveform Description Page 446 e Generating Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms Page 447 J Output DAC ele aorta Page 447 Memory eric a eed bey been ep ees ERES Page 448 Reference Oscillator 0 0 eee eee Page 448 Frequency Generators 0 0 00 ee eee eee eee Page 448 lt Tigger Circuitry io aes eee eme oe ee Page 450 Output Circuitry 2 eee eee eee eee ee Page 450 MICTOproceSSOF iii oust fv ots Sade Seed teg etes Pag
513. segment sequence definitions with one command e Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect e RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Deleting a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEL Deletes segment Chapter 8 Command Reference 351 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt repetition list defines for each waveform segment of a segment sequence how many times the waveform segment will be output before advancing to the next segment in the sequence Parameters The repetition list may be either a comma separated list of repetition counts or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the counts in 16 bit integer format The legal range for the counts is 1 to 4096 MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command Comments If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first The segment sequence s repetition count list length must be the same length as its waveform segment and marker enable lists or must have a length of 1 If not executing INITiate IMMediate generates Error 1114 Sequence lists of different lengths A repetition count list of length 1 is treated as though it were the same length as the waveform segment list with all repe
514. should be coupled to track the OUTPut 1 IMPedance value Comments STATe Example Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units mode boolean OFF 0 ON 1 ONCE none e With OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO ON set the OUTPut 1 LOAD value is coupled to the OUTPut 1 IMPedance value Changing the IMPedance changes the LOAD value Specifying a value for LOAD sets AUTO OFF AUTO ONCE sets the LOAD value to the IMPedance value and sets AUTO OFF e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Voltage Related Commands OUTPut 1 IMPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD e RST Condition OUTPut1 LOAD AUTO ON Uncoupling OUTPut 1 IMPedance and OUTPut 1 LOAD OUTP LOAD AUTO OFF Uncouples impedance and load OUTPut 1 STATe lt mode gt closes or opens the HP E1445A s output relay to enable or disable the analog output Disabling the output does not stop waveform generation however the output appears as an open circuit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition OUTPut1 STATe ON not SCPI compliant Disabling the Output Example OUTP OFF Disables output Chapter 8 Command Reference 311 SOURce SOURce The SOURce subsystem is divided into multiple sections each of which control a particular a
515. since this is equal to the length of the current waveform and is not configurable here the only legal value for this command is 9 91e37 or NaN not a number There is no need to send this command It is included for SCPI compatibility purposes only Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 9 91e37 NAN MINimum none MAXimum MINimum and MAXimum select 9 91e37 triggers 9 91E 37 is equivalent to NAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None e Related Commands ABORt INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition TRIGger STARt COUNt 9 91637 Example Setting the Start Trigger Count TRIG COUN NAN 392 Command Reference Chapter 8 TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity polarity selects the polarity of the HP E1445A 5 front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC which gates the TRIGger STARt subsystem NORMal polarity selects an active high gate INVerted polarity selects an active low gate This polarity is significant only when TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce is set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used when other sources are selected Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units polarity discrete INVerted NORMal none Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Comman
516. single segment sequence There are two different methods In one method a waveform segment is placed in the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list command several times The other method uses an additional command the SOURce7LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt repetition list command The following examples illustrates the two methods The examples show how to execute waveform segment sine three times and segment list tri once Method 1 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence sine sine sine tri Method 2 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence sine tri SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt 3 1 Method 1 requires more memory since the minimum segment sequence length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt must be at least the number of waveform segments in the sequence 1 e sine sin sine tri a length of 4 Since in Method 2 the waveform segments consist of sine tri the sequence length is only 2 Method 1 is required 1f the marker outputs set by the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer command are to be different for the various repetitions see Chapters 6 and 7 for marker output information 114 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Reference e The USER function can use any of the reference oscillator sources Oscillator Sources selected by the SOURce ROSCillator SOURce command The reference oscillator sources are INTernal 1 42 94967296 MHz power on value INTernal2 40 MHz
517. source DDS sample source that is trigger start source sinusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the reference oscillator source see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 78 Although RST selects 42 9 MHz reference oscillator 1t is selected here for good programming practice 3 Select the Sample Source TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the sample source that is trigger start source Although RST selects trigger start source that selects the DDS frequency generator it is selected here for good programming practice The SQUare function can use any of the trigger start sources see Sample Sources on page 78 4 Set the Frequency Range SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe lt range gt This command specifies the square wave upper frequency limit see DDS Frequency Generator Ranges on page 79 Since RST automatically sets the range to the lower range it is executed in this program for good programming practice Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 61 5 Set the Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed frequency This command specifies the frequency Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 6 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare This command selects the square wave function 7 Select the Square Wa
518. spErr Chr 10 ShowErr Press Chr 34 OK Chr 34 to exit MsgBox DispErr 64 sw vbs CheckError End End If ChkName TempName End Sub Sub CmdExe Cmd As String This sub sends SCPI commands Dim Cnt As Integer Dim Actual As Long Continued on Next Page 34 Getting Started Chapter 1 Cnt 1 While Len Cmd Cnt Send SCPI command Call iwrite Addr ByVal Cmd Cnt Chr 10 Len Cmd Cnt 1 1 Actual Cnt Cnt 1 Wend End Sub Sub ExitProg Click End program End End Sub Sub Form Load Disable showing exit program button and lists ExitProg Visible False ShowQuery Visible False Show Action Action Enabled False Action Visible True Enable form Arbwave Visible True Call program to execute instrument Call Main Enable showing exit program button and make it the focus ExitProg Visible True ExitProg SetFocus End Sub Sub GenSeg Setup AFG to generate an arbitrary waveform Static SetCommands 1 To 10 As String Static OutCommands 1 To 10 As String Dim SegCommand As String Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 35 Dim Actual As Long Use the SetCommands array to setup the AFG SetCommands 1 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL ALL Clear sequence memory SetCommands 2 SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL ALL Clear segment memory ao SetCommands SetCommands SetCommands SetCommands function SetCommands 3 SetCommands 3 S
519. spect of the HP E1445A Each section of the subsystem is separately documented in the following sections of the command reference The SOURce node itself is optional Subsystem Syntax The first level SOURce syntax tree is SOURce ARBitrary Page 313 FREQuency 1 Page 319 FREQuency2 Page 330 FUNCtion Page 332 EIST DIT en ts gs Page 334 VISTZ e c ose gal Page 358 MARKer Page 361 PM es Beat cst sta Page 365 RAMS 45s uus mta eus Page 368 ROSCIlltor Page 370 SWEep sido ees Page 372 VOLTage Page 377 312 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce ARBitrary SOURce ARBitrary The SOURce ARBitrary subsystem controls The data format for the digital to analog converter DAC The DAC data source Direct downloading of DAC data to the waveform segment memory Subsystem Syntax SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat format SOURce source DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt no query COMPlete no query DAC FORMat SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat format specifies the format for the DAC codes The format controls how to send and receive DAC codes and how the HP E1445A stores and interprets the waveform segment memory data Note The DAC code format cannot be changed after storing the waveform segment data Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL to delete waveform segment data before changing the DAC code format
520. ss 310 Add the register number of the high speed data register 320 Ito the A24 base address 330 Addr Base_addr IVAL 26 16 340 SUBEND Continued on Next Page 270 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 350 360 SUB Dac_drive 370 Dac_drive Subprogram which computes a 128 point 5 Vpp triangle wave and 380 writes the corresponding codes directly to the DAC via 390 Ithe VXIbus and High Speed Data register 400 COM Afg Addr 410 ICONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO 420 430 INTEGER I Waveform 1 128 Calculate triangle wave dac codes 440 FOR l 1 TO 64 450 Waveform l I 0755 00125 460 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions 470 NEXT 480 FOR 1265 TO 128 490 Waveform l 128 l 0755 00125 500 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions 510 NEXT 520 530 IContinuously write data in 16 bit words to the dac via the 540 IVXIbus and High Speed Data register 550 LOOP 560 FOR l 1 TO 128 570 WRITEIO 16 Addr Waveform l 580 NEXT I 590 END LOOP 600 SUBEND 610 620 SUB Rst 630 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 640 COM Afg Addr 650 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 660 ENTER Afg Complete 670 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program VXISRCE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program VXISRCE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your H
521. start arm The AFG unasserts a marker with the last amplitude point of the last waveform repetition or following an ABORt SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge The source outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse after a frequency change occurs This shows that the steady state frequency was reached SOURce LIST 1 The source outputs marker pulses specified by the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer commands Increase the pulse size by selecting marker output for consecutive points on the waveform Can only be used with arbitrary waveforms see Chapters 3 and 7 on how to generate arbitrary waveforms SOURce PM DEViation CHANge This source outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse after a phase change occurs This shows that the new phase was reached Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 205 SOURce ROSCillator The source outputs the reference oscillator selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 The source outputs a nominal 12 nS marker pulse for each point of a waveform segment Arbitrary Generated Marker Pulses To generate marker pulses for arbitrary waveforms do the following e Select the SOURce LIST 1 source for the front panel Marker Out BNC connector using SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 Select the marker pulse polarity using SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt Enable the AFG to output a mar
522. state 164 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Initiating Waveforms After the AFG has been configured to output the desired waveform the AFG is set to the Wait for Arm state with the command INITiate IMMediate INITiate is an uncoupled command and is generally the last command executed before a waveform is output SUB Sine_wave Sine_wave Subprogram which outputs a sine wave COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function OUTPUT QAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND If INITiate IMMediate is executed when the AFG is not in the Idle state Error 213 Init ignored is generated Arming the AFG In order for the AFG to accept trigger signals which output the amplitude points of the waveform the AFG must be armed The information in this section covers the commands and programming sequence used to arm the AFG for fixed frequency waveform generation Arming Commands The commands which arm the AFG allow you to specify the following the arm source the slope of an external arm signal the number of arms per INITiate IMMediate command the number of waveform cycles per arm The arming commands include ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt number LAYer2 COUNt number IMMediate SLOPe edge SOURCe source Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 165 The armin
523. t STATe lt mode gt RAMP POLarity lt polarity gt POINts lt number gt ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal frequency STATus OPC INITiate state TRIGger VINStrument STARt SEQuencef 1 GATE POLarity lt polarity gt SOURce source STATe state CONFigure LBUS MODE mode AUTO state TEST CONFigure lt length gt DATA VME RECeive ADDRess DATA READY IDENtity Chapter 8 Command Reference 415 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands CLS CLS clears the Standard Event Status Register the Operation Status Register the Questionable Signal Register and the error queue This clears the corresponding summary bits 3 5 and 7 in the Status Byte Register CLS does not affect the enable masks of any of the Status Registers Comments DMC Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands STATus PRESet RST Condition None DMC lt name gt lt data gt creates a macro with the specified name and assigns zero one or a sequence of commands to the name The sequence may be composed of SCPI and or Common Commands The sequence may be sent in IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite block format or as a quoted string Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units name string data 1 through 12 characters none data block data any valid command sequence none or string
524. t l 8 bit data bytes l Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block 8 bit data bytes Figure 4 2 Arbitrary Block Data Diagram e indicates the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block e non zero digit is a single digit number which shows the number of digits contained in digits For example if the digits value is 100 or 2000 the non zero digit value is 3 or 4 respectively S bit data bytes is the data i e frequencies sent to the AFG Note that there are eight bytes per frequency list frequency In the LISTDEF program on page 131 a list of 100 frequencies is downloaded using the definite length block format In the definite length encoding syntax digit specifies the number of bytes downloaded 800 Since 800 is three characters non zero digit is 3 156 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 In an indefinite length arbitrary block e indicates the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block 0 indicates that an indefinite length block of data is to be sent 8 bit data bytes is the data i e frequencies sent to the AFG There are eight bytes per frequency list frequency e NL END means a line feed LF is sent with END EOD asserted It indicates to the AFG that the end of the data block has been reached Additional information on arbitrary block data can be found in ANSI IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats
525. t value of 0 The OSG_RQS program sets up the Operation Status Group Registers to determine when the AFG enters the wait for arm state When the AFG enters that state a service request interrupt is sent to the computer which responds with a message indicating the state which exists The steps of the program are 1 Set the bit transition which will latch the event entering wait for arm state in the Event Register STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt or STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt 436 AFG Status Chapter 9 2 Unmask bit 6 ARM in the Enable Register so that the event latched into the Event Register will generate an Operation Status Group summary bit STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt 3 Unmask bit 7 OPR in the Service Request Enable Register so that a service request is generated when the Operation Status Group summary bit is received SRE lt unmask gt HP BASIC Program Example OSG_RQS 220 230 240 250 260 270 IRE STORE OSG_RQS This program generates a service request when the AFG enters the Iwait for arm state lAssign an I O path between the computer and the E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg IReset the AFG CALL Rst ISet up the computer to respond to the service request ON INTR 7 CALL Afg_ready ENABLE INTR 7 2 Set up the AFG to generate a service request when it enters the Iwait for arm state OUTPUT Afg CLS Iclear Status Byte a
526. t area logical address 1 through logical address servant area switch setting The HP E1445A AFG is a message based device If an embedded controller and an HP E1406A Command Module are part of your VXIbus system put the AFG in the servant area of the controller This enables you to program the AFG at higher speeds across the V XIbus backplane rather than over the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB via the command module If your system uses an external controller and the HP E1406A Command Module put the AFG in the servant area of the command module This enables the module to function as the HP IB interface to the arbitrary function generator The HP E1406A Command Module has a factory set logical address of 0 and a servant area switch setting of 255 Using the factory settings it is not necessary to change the logical address of the AFG 80 to place it in the servant area of the command module The HP E1445A AFG logical address switch is shown in Figure 1 2 HP IB is Hewlett Packard s implementation of IEEE Std 488 1 1978 Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 Logical Address Servant Area Switch Servant Area O Logical Address Switch Figure 1 2 HP E1445A Logical Address and Servant Area Switch Location Addressing the AFG External Controller and PC Devices in the C size mainframe and in the servant area of the HP E1406A Command Module are located by an HP IB address The HP IB address
527. t for arm state 300 310 IWait for AFG to start output 320 OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC 330 ENTER QAfg A 340 350 lEnable FP DPORT to control sequence selection 360 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG PEEK Base_addr 8 16 370 ENTER Cmd Traffic 380 Traffic BINIOR BINAND Traffic IVAL 3FFF 16 IVAL 4000 16 390 OUTPUT ECmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 8 16 Traffic 400 END 410 420 SUB Waveform def 430 COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr 440 CALL Sinx def 450 CALL Sind def 460 CALL Spike def 470 SUBEND 480 490 SUB A24 offset Laddr 500 A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for 510 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space 520 COM QOmd QAfg QGAfg1 Base addr Seq1 addr Seq2 addr Seq3 addr 530 OUTPUT ECmd DIAG PEEK DVAL 1FC000 16 64 Laddr 6 16 540 ENTER ECmd Offset IAFG A24 base address 550 Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address 560 SUBEND 570 580 SUB Build ram 590 Build ram This subprogram configures the AFG s sequence base memory 600 Isuch that there are valid sequence base addresses in memory 610 before the AFG is INITiated and waveforms are selected 620 COM QOCmd QAfg QAfg1 Base addr Seq1 addr Seq2 addr Seq3 addr 630 640 IPreserve Traffic register contents Set bits 15 14 to 1 O to set 650 Ithe Waveform Select register as the source which selects the output 660 lwaveform sequence 670 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG PEEK Base_addr 8
528. t into a matched load Setting OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity compensates for this effect so that the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage and SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude and OFFSet commands will output the specified voltages into an open circuit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units load numeric 50 75 9 9E 37 INFinity Ohms MINimum MAXimum MINimum selects 50 Q load impedance MAXimum selects 75 Q Use 9 9E 37 or INFinity to indicate an open circuit output The lt oad gt value specified by this command either must be the same as that specified by OUTPut 1 IMPedance or must be 9 9E 37 or INFinity or Error 221 Settings conflict will be generated With OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO ON set the OUTPut 1 LOAD value is coupled to tracks the OUTPut 1 IMPedance value Changing the IMPedance changes the LOAD value Specifying a value for LOAD sets AUTO OFF Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Voltage Related Commands OUTPut 1 IMPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO SOURce LIST subsystem SOURce VOLTage subsystem RST Condition OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO ON is set and the OUTPut 1 LOAD value is coupled to the OUTPut 1 IMPedance value Indicating Open Circuit Output Load OUTP LOAD INF Indicates open circuit 310 Command Reference Chapter 8 LOAD AUTO Parameters OUTPut 1 OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO mode indicates whether the OUTPut 1 LOAD value
529. t length Chapter 8 Command Reference 349 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt reserves enough segment sequence memory for a segment sequence of length segment names for the sequence currently selected by SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt length gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The segment sequence memory can store a maximum of 32 768 points 32 767 points if a square ramp or triangle wave exists All defined segment sequences share this memory Any one sequence can use any part of or all of this memory MINimum reserves 1 point MAXimum reserves the largest available contiguous piece of segment sequence memory Comments Once a segment sequence has been DEFined it must be deleted SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected command before its reserved length may be redefined The contents and length of the list may be changed repeatedly without re executing the DEFine command e By using the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt command up to 4096 repetitions of a waveform segment can take only one point in the segment sequence memory This factor should be considered when reserving segment sequence memory space e SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine initializes the segment sequence s waveform segment list to a zero current length and the repetition count a
530. tandard Event Status Group summary bit is received SRE lt unmask gt 440 AFG Status Chapter 9 HP BASIC Program Example ERRORCHK 1 IRE STORE ERRORCHK 2 This program represents the method used to check for programming 3 lerrors in HP BASIC programs 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 IDefine branch to be taken when an E1445A error occurs 50 Enable HP IB interface to generate an interrupt when an error 60 loccurs 70 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 80 ENABLE INTR 7 2 90 Clear all bits in the Standard Event Status Register unmask the 100 Standard Event Status Group summary bit in the E1445A Status Byte 110 Iregister decimal weight 32 unmask the query error device 120 Idependent error execution error and command error bits 130 decimal sum 60 in the E1445A Standard Event Status Register 140 OUTPUT Afg CLS 150 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 160 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 170 180 ISubprogram calls would be here 190 200 WAIT 1 allow error branch to occur before turning intr off 210 OFF INTR 7 220 END 230 240 SUB Errmsg 250 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 260 COM OAfg 270 DIM Message 256 280 IRead AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 290 B SPOLL Afg 300 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 310 OUTPUT Afg 320 OUTPUT QAfg ABORT labort output waveform 330 REPEAT 340 OUTPUT QAfg
531. tart Arm In BNC when used as the start arm source Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None Related Commands ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce IMMediate Example Setting the Start Arm Source ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT Start arm source is front panel s Start Arm In BNC 294 Command Reference Chapter 8 SWEep COUNt Parameters Comments Example ARM ARM SWEep COUNt lt number gt specifies the number of sweep arms the HP E1445A will accept after an INITiate IMMediate command before the sweep trigger sequence returns to the idle state This command is equivalent to the SOURce S WEep COUNt command either command may be used and executing either one changes the value of the other Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units number numeric 1 through 2147483647 9 9E 37 none INFinity MINimum selects 1 arm MAXimum selects 2147483647 arms 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition ARM SWEep COUNt 1 Setting the Sweep Arm Count ARM SWE COUN 10 Sets 10 sweep arms per INITiate SWEep IMMediate Comments ARM SWEep IMMediate starts a frequency sweep or list regardless of the selected sweep arm source The trigger system must be initiated and the sweep trigger seq
532. ted by functional group however commands are listed alphabetically in the reference Examples are shown in the reference when the command has parameters or returns a non trivial response otherwise the command string is as shown in the table For additional information refer to IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Table 8 4 HP E1445A Common Commands Category Command Title System Data IDN Identification Query PUD lt data gt Protected User Data Command PUD Protected User Data Query Internal Operations LRN Learn Device Setup Query RST Reset Command TST Self Test Query Synchronization OPC Operation Complete Command OPC Operation Complete Command WAI Wait to Continue Command Macro DMC lt name gt lt data gt Define Macro Command EMC lt enable gt Enable Macro Command EMC Enable Macro Query GMC lt name gt Get Macro Contents Query LMC Learn Macro Query PMC Purge Macros Command RMC lt name gt Remove Individual Macro Command Status and Event CLS Clear Status Command ESE lt mask gt Standard Event Status Enable Command ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query ESR Standard Event Status Register Query SRE Service Request Enable Command SRE Service Request Enable Query STB Read Status Byte Query Trigger TRG Trigger Command Stored Settings RCL Recall Command SAV Save Command 428 Command Reference Chapter 8 Chapter
533. ter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 157 Sweep Time Sweep Advance Source Specifying a Sweep Time The number of frequencies points in a sweep and the number of frequencies in a frequency list change the duration of the sweep or pass through the list The relationship between the sweep or list time SOURce SWEep TIMB the time between frequencies TRIGger SWEep TIMer and the number of frequencies points is shown below TIME TlMer points 1 Changing the number of points keeps the value set by the last command sent either SOURce SWeEep TIME or TRIGger SWEep TIMer and changes the other Changing TIME or TlMer affects the other The source which advances the sweep or list to the next frequency is set with the TRIGger S WEep SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The HP IB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e HOLD Suspend sweep or frequency list advance triggering Advance to the next frequency sweeping or in a list using TRIGger SWEep IMMediate LINK The next valid start arm advances the sweep or list e TIMer The SOURce SWEep TIME and or TRIGger SWEep TIMer commands control the sweep and frequency list advance timing default source e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines More information on the sweep advance source can be found in Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering The sweep time set by SOURce SWEep TIME
534. the AFG is faster than transferring a voltage list This section shows how to transfer the lists as DAC codes using the Signed number format The DAC codes are transferred to the AFG as a comma separated list The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus if the AFG currently contains Unsigned data and you wish to send Signed data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Signed data This section shows how to setup the AFG to receive DAC codes in the Signed number format and how to calculate the codes from voltage values With the AFG set to receive DAC codes in the Signed number format it receives the codes in 16 bit two s complement numbers Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command to select the format For outputs into matched loads and with the amplitude set to maximum 5 11875V the following DAC codes generate the following outputs Code 0 outputs 0 V Code 4096 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 4095 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage To calculate DAC codes from voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 For example to output 2V DAC Code 2 00125 1600 The SIGN_DAT program shows how to store a waveform segment i e points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The points are stored in the Signed DAC number format The data is transferred to the AFG as a
535. the timing relationship to select a segment sequence Port In Connector A to Select a Sequence x FPPACE EE ERE A A as o S FPCLK Jmm A mm th FPDDxx y X Figure 7 7 Digital Port In Data Timing The following explains the relationship 1 The AFG generates an FPPA CE signal after the next segment sequence has been selected but before completing its output 2 The AFG is now ready for a new segment sequence Set the FPCLK line low to select a new segment sequence If the line remains high the AFG re uses the last selected sequence 3 The AFG now latches the least significant byte on the FPDxx 1 e FPDOO through FPD15 data lines to select a new sequence These data lines contain the address of the sequence to be selected 4 Once the AFG uses the data to select a new sequence it generates a new FPPACE signal and the process completes For correct operation the FPCLK should occur 150 nS before the next FPPACE occurs The minimum response delay ts is 0 as is also the minimum data hold time ts The minimum FPPACE pulse width tp is 20 nS its width depends on the selected sample rate To change the sequence the sequence base memory must be loaded See the WAVSELFP example program beginning on page 272 to determine how to load the memory with the sequences Using the Dig Ital To download data ignore the FPPACE line but provide a FPCLK for Port In
536. thesis NCO technique to generate the specified frequencies It has an upper frequency limit of the reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 the second generator operates up to the reference oscillator frequency This generator has excellent resolution 01 Hz with the 42 94 MHz reference oscillator and allows frequency sweeping Sine wave output is possible only with this generator The second generator has better phase noise characteristics and permits higher frequency operation The values programmed by this subsystem are only used when TRIGger STARt SOURce is set to INTernal1 The swept commands STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN are coupled commands When sending these commands the following rules apply e If either STARt or STOP is sent singly the value of the other is preserved but the CENTer and SPAN values will change according to the following equations CENTer STARt STOP 2 SPAN STOP STARt e If either CENTer or SPAN is sent singly the value of the other is preserved but the STARt and STOP values will change according to the following equations STARt CENTer SPAN 2 STOP CENTer SPAN 2 e If any two commands are sent as part of a frequency coupled group within a single program message then these two will be set as specified and the other two will change If more than two are sent in the group the sweep will be determined by the last two received When MINimum and MAXimum are used with these commands the va
537. tion CALibration SECure STATe ON Example Disabling Calibration Security CAL SEC STATe OFF E1445A Disables security assuming factory set security code Chapter 8 Command Reference 303 CALibration STATe Parameters Comments CALibration STATe lt state gt specifies whether corrections using the calibration constants are made or not If STATe is OFF then no corrections are made If STATe is ON DC and or AC corrections will be made or not according to the states of the CALibration STATE DC and AC commands Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units state boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Example STATe AC e Related Commands CALibration STATe AC CALibration STATe DC e RST Condition CALibration STATe ON Disabling Calibration Corrections CAL STAT OFF Disables corrections CALibration STATe AC lt state gt specifies whether AC corrections using the calibration constants are made or not If state is OFF then no AC corrections are made If state is ON AC corrections will be made if CALibration STATe ON is also Parameters Comments Example set Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units state boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration STATe e RST Condition CALibration STATe AC ON
538. tion Register operation status group 435 query bits 383 386 questionable signal status group 431 reading 431 435 Configuration ARM TRIG 164 VXTIbus local bus testing 405 Conformity declaration 15 Connector digital port in 272 279 digital port in downloading 279 digital port in pinout 278 digital port in selecting a sequence 279 digital port in specifications 460 marker out BNC 204 342 363 364 ref sample in BNC 395 398 start arm in BNC 293 stop trig FSK gate in BNC 393 Count arming 199 292 frequency list repetitions 156 sweeps 156 295 372 waveform repetition 199 291 waveform segment sequence outputs 352 353 Coupled Commands coupling 27 288 coupling groups 288 467 469 executing 28 288 frequency generator 319 Cycles 512 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index arming setting 169 171 arming stopping 397 398 waveform setting 169 171 D DAC data source selecting 315 downloading data directly into 269 271 506 508 loading from VXIbus 506 508 output description 447 sources 280 DAC Codes amplitude effects on 280 incorrect 280 output voltage points 346 sending segment data with 114 specifying format 313 314 transferring in signed number format 225 240 transferring in unsigned number format 229 245 DACBLOK1 Example Program 232 234 DACBLOK2 Example Program 236 238 Damped Sine Waves generating 107 108 Data arbitrary block 156 157
539. tition count values the same as the specified value e Changing repetition count values preserves the waveform segment and marker enable lists and vice versa Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Defining a Segment Sequence Repetition Count List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C D E F G H Defines segment sequence LIST SSEQ DWEL COUN 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Outputs segment A six times others once 352 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts Comments SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected segment sequence s repetition count list e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Query Repetition Count List Length LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DWEL COUN POIN Queries repetition count list length SSEQuence FREE Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE returns information on segment sequence memory availability and usage The return data format is numeric value numeric value The first numeric value shows the amount of segment sequence me
540. to a segment that doesn t exist or selecting a segment name that s the same as an existing sequence name 1101 Too many segment names There are gt 256 segment names defined Use SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL SEL to delete the current selected segment or SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL ALL to delete all segments 1102 Segment in use Trying to delete a segment that is within a sequence 1103 Segments exist Trying to change the data format of a segment that already exists 1104 Segment lists of different lengths The length of a segment s voltage list does not equal the length of its marker list and its marker list does not equal 1 1105 Segment list has zero length Querying a voltage marker or dac code list that has no data 1106 Segment name not DEFined Trying to load segment memory and memory has not been reserved by the SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF command 1107 Segment name already defined Defining a segment and a segment by that name already exists 1108 No segment name SELected Trying to load a segment that has not been selected 478 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 6 HP E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 1109 Segment list length less than Waveform segment has less than four points minimum 1110 Illegal sequence name Attempting to download to a sequence that doesn t exist or selecting a Sequence name that s the same as an existing se
541. tor sources for custom frequency values Frequency The frequency generator generates the clock pulses to enable both the Generators output DAC and memory to output a segment The frequency generator thus determines the rate i e the sample rate at which the points of a waveform segment are output The AFG uses two different generators One generator Frequency1 generator uses a Direct Digital Synthesis NCO technique to generate the sample frequencies The other generator Frequency2 generator is a Divide by n generator 448 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 Refer to Figure 10 3 This generator has excellent resolution and allows for frequency sweeping frequency shift keying and output frequency lists However its maximum frequency is the Reference Oscillator frequency divided by 4 DDS Frequency Generator Frequency1 Generator Reference Oscillator Clock Trigger Figure 10 3 Generating Waveforms Using a Frequency1 Generator To generate precision frequencies for the memory and output DAC clock the output of the DDS frequency generator is applied to a DAC The DAC output is filtered and the resultant clock signals clocks the memory and output DAC to create the waveforms Refer to Figure 10 4 This generator has better phase noise characteristics and permits higher frequency operation up to the Reference Oscillator Frequency The output of this filter directly clocks the memo
542. tore the codes either in the Signed or Unsigned number format This memory uses 16 bit integer values for the codes To change the number format to a different format the memory must be completely empty before selecting the different format Because of hardware restrictions the segment space in memory allocates for a multiple of 8 words for each waveform segment 452 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 Appendix A HP E1445A Specifications Appendix Contents This appendix contains the HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator operating specifications Except as noted the specifications apply under the following conditions e Period 1 year e Temperature 0 55 C e Relative Humidity lt 65 0 40 C e Warm up Time 1 hour Typical typ or nominal values are non warranted supplementary information provided for applications assistance Memory Segment Memory contains DAC code and Marker Bit for each sample point Characteristics DAC Word 13 bits Digital Marker 1 bit user programmable Size 262144 256K 1K 1024 Segment Length from gt 4 points to 262 144 points Number of Segments 1 to 256 System Use while one of the following waveforms is selected Square 4 points Triangle Ramp 100 points default number unless changed by user Appendix A HP E1445A Specifications 453 Sequence Memory This memory concatenates segments into larger waveforms Size Sequence Le
543. trigger source remains unchanged e Executing this command with the start trigger sequence not in the wait for trigger state generates Error 211 Trigger ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None Related Commands INITiate IMMediate TRIGger e RST Condition None Single Stepping a Waveform ARM LAY2 SOUR IMM Sets immediate arming TRIG SOUR HOLD Sets manual sample generation INIT Initiates trigger system TRIG Advances waveform TRIGger STARt SLOPe edge selects the edge rising or falling at the HP E1445A 5 front panel Ref Sample In BNC to advance the waveform This edge is significant only with TRIGger STARt SOURce set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used when other sources are selected Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units edge discrete NEGative POSitive none Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STARt SLOPe POSitive Setting the Start Trigger Slope TRIG SLOP NEG Sets negative trigger slope Chapter 8 Command Reference 395 TRIGger STARt SOURce TRIGger STARt SOURce source selects the source that advances the waveform to the next sample point Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete BUS ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 none EXTernal HOLD
544. ts SOURce MARKer STATe ON This commands enables the AFG to output marker pulses Although RST automatically enables the AFG for marker outputs it is given here for good programming practice 7 Setup the Waveform Segment Store it as Voltage Data Points SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage voltage list 8 Setup the Sequence and Generate the Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence segment list SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example MARKTRG 160 170 180 IRE STORE MARKTRG This program computes a ramp wave as an arbitrary waveform and loutputs a marker pulse with each waveform amplitude point Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and delete all existing Iwaveform segments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf del ISet up the AFG OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E6 frequency Continued on Next Page Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 215 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V 210 O
545. ts a square wave 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator 240 OUTPUT QAfg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Itrigger source 250 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ RANG 0 frequency range 260 OUTPUT QAfg SOUR FREQ FIX 1E6 frequency 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU lfunction 280 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR RAMP POL INV Ipolarity more negative 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 4V lamplitude 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM OFFS 1V Idc offset 310 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM OAfg 370 OUTPUT EAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Errmsg 420 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 430 COM Afg 440 DIM Message 256 450 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 63 460 B SPOLL Afg 470 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 480 OUTPUT Afg 490 OUTPUT CAfg ABORT labort output waveform 500 REPEAT 510 OUTPUT QAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 520 ENTER Afg Code Message 530 PRINT Code Message 540 UNTIL Code 0 550 STOP 560 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SQUWAVE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SQUWA
546. ts this function it is selected here for good programming practice 6 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel I MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Setting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 7 Set the Phase Modulation Deviation SOURce PM DEViation phase This command sets the deviation angle The angle can either be in radians or degrees The values can be from 3 14159265 to 3 14159265 radians II to II or 180 to 180 See Selecting the Deviation Units for Phase Modulation on page 80 to select the different units 8 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information HP BASIC Program Example PHS MOD 1 IRE STORE PHS MOD 2 The following program shifts the phase of the output sine wave 3 lfrom O degrees to 180 degrees 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ONINTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Phase_mod 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END Continued on Next Page 76 Generating Standard W
547. ubled using the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command Frequency doubling is enabled by specifying a range that is greater than the maximum undoubled frequency allowed for a given waveform The maximum undoubled frequencies for the various waveforms are given below e Arbitrary Waveforms The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 e Square Waves The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 155 e Triangle and Ramp Waves The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value Sweep Countand The sweep count specifies the number of sweeps to occur or the number of Frequency List passes through the frequency list before the AFG returns to the idle state R ep etition Count from the wait for arm state see Chapter 5 The sweep count set with the SOURce S WEep COUNt command has a range from 1 to 2 147 483 647 or INFinity The default count is 1 Continuous sweeps or loops through a frequency list can be stopped with the ABORt command Arbitra ry Block Data Data sent to the AFG in an arbitrary block is in a binary format The encoding syntax for downloading frequency list data in this format is shown Figure 4 2 In a definite length arbitrary block Definite Length Arbitrary Block non zero digi
548. uence lists Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts to determine the length of the currently selected segment sequence s repetition count list 116 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter Contents This chapter covers the sweeping frequency list and frequency shift keying FSK features of the HP E1445A 13 Bit Arbitrary Function Generator called the AFG The chapter is organized as follows e FSK Programming Flowchart 0005 Page 118 FSK Command Reference 0005 Page 120 e Sweeping and Frequency Lists 0 Page 120 Sweeping Using Start and Stop Frequencies Page 121 Specifying a Frequency List 0405 Page 124 Sweeping Using Start and Span Frequencies Page 127 Frequency Lists Using Definite and Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks Page 130 Logarithmic Sweeping 0 2 e eee eee Page 133 Sweep Points Versus Time 0005 Page 135 Frequency Lists Versus Time 44 Page 138 Sweeping Arbitrary Waveforms Page 141 AC Output Leveling eee Page 144 e Frequency Shift Keying 00 00 0000 Page 147 FSK Using the FSK Control Source Page 147 FSK Using the TIL Trg lt n gt Control Source Page 150
549. uence must be in the wait for arm state The selected sweep arm source remains unchanged Executing this command when frequency sweeps or lists are not enabled or with the sweep trigger sequence not in the wait for arm state generates Error 212 Arm ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands INITiate IMMediate SOURce S WEep e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 295 ARM Example Starting a Frequency Sweep SWE START 1E3 STOP 10E3 Sets sweep frequency limits SWE POIN 10 Sets 1 kHz steps ARM SOUR IMM Sets output to start immediately ARM SWE SOUR HOLD Sets manual sweep arm INIT Initiates trigger system ARM SWE Starts sweep SWEep LINK ARM SWEep LINK lt link gt selects the internal event that starts a frequency sweep or list when ARM SWEep SOURce is set to LINK The only defined internal event to start a sweep or list is ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 There is no need to send this command since there is only one defined internal event The command is included for SCPI compatibility purposes only Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt link gt string ARM STARt SEQuence1 LAYer2 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands ARM SWEep SOURce e RST Condition ARM SWEep LINK ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Example Linking th
550. uency list repetition rates are based on the number of points and frequencies and are calculated as follows MINimum 1 25 mS points 1 MAXimum 4 19430375 S points 1 Again for continuous sweeping list repetitions the desired minimum or maximum time must be multiplied by the quantity points 1 points The default sweep time is 1 second for any number of points or frequencies specified The function in this program is a 1 000 point triangle wave The maximum frequency allowed in the frequency list is the reference oscillator frequency divided by the quantity four multiplied by the number of waveform points Rosc 4 npts 42 94967296E6 4 1000 10 7374 kHz Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 159 Output Frequency The output frequency of an arbitrary waveform is defined as and Sample Rate Fo sample rate waveform_points For frequency sweeps the sample rate s are the start and stop frequencies For example with an arbitrary waveform with 4096 amplitude points a start frequency of 4 096E6 and a stop frequency of 8 192E6 produces a sweep from 1 kHz to 2 kHz For frequency shift keying the sample rates are frequencyl and frequency2 specified by the SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey command The output frequencies are the sample rates divided by the number of amplitude points in the arbitrary waveform AC Leveling The AFG has a 250 kHz output filter and a 10 MHz output filter When the filter
551. ueue Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program ARBWA VE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program ARBWAVE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your HP E1445A 92 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Executing Several Waveform Segments Sinewaves and Ramp generated as Arbitrary Waveforms 2 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 5 msec DIV The MULSEG program shows how to generate an arbitrary waveform using two different waveform segments One waveform segment generates a 1 kHz 5 V sine wave repeated twice The other one generates a 1 kHz 5 Vpeak triangle repeated once The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST The RST command aborts waveform output and sets the AFG to a defined state 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL This command clears all segment sequence data stored in the sequence memory 3 Clear the AFG Memory of All Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 DELete ALL This command clears all segment data stored in the segment memory 4 Setthe Sample Rate SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency This command sets the rate at which the points are output by the AFG The frequency is sample frequency number of points Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits Chapter 3 Generating Arb
552. ug a C4 CAR ROC AAA ACA KORR E T URN 483 DIE CORA cues dock REE Oe OR Rog dte ee cce Rug 484 Accessing the RESISTEN xu o aceit RR Rok d does dod wed e dod dede 484 Determining the A24 Base Address ee Ra 484 Reading the Offset Register ses do ok PEER WR we ERE GR S V a 486 Changing the Output Prequenty s ee ca aout ak ot ek ee hoe ke ea e 487 The Frequency Control Registers scc co zu 544d dR Re RR RRR ERD 487 Frequency Control Programs ss ooo RR XX V XR ws 489 HP BASIC Program Example FREQ 1 REG one cae ene ro ewa 489 HP BASIC Program Example FREQ2 REG 492 Chonging the Signal Phase sss eek ee KR RAE AA 495 The Phase Control Registers 4244254 go ORO OR AO OR RR OR 495 Phase C ontol POS a de deo Ep piena de aco de cipe Ded 496 HP BASIC Program Example PHAS CHNG llle 496 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents 11 Selecting the Waveform Sequence uuo a ae o A E ER 4 oe 498 The Waveform Sequence Registers 44086466 Ge 9e s 498 Sequence Selection Programi ccs duo RR RARO SESE OES 500 HP BASIC Program Example WAVE SEL 4 22 so o ras 500 Loading the DAC from the VXIDUS amp sese sooo RARA 506 HP BASIC Program Example VXIBRCE 25 44 ce eR ERS ee SD 506 THON duo RR SESE uo AORUGCRORCEON Eo oe Se Oe eR PHS Ce ee ed 509 12 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time
553. uired for the first pass and n triggers are required for all subsequent passes n number of points 2 number of triggers When the sweep and frequency list arming and triggering sources are set to HOLD the starting frequency is output when the AFG is set to the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Once the sweep or frequency list arm is received ARM SWEep IMMediate the sweep or list can be advanced when a sweep or list advance trigger TRIGger SWEep IMMediate is received Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 201 Notes 202 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter Contents This chapter shows how to generate the different signals at the front panel s Marker Out BNC and how to select the ECL trigger lines Use these signals and trigger lines to synchronize multiple AFGs generate trigger pulses etc The sections are as follows e Marker Pulse Enable Flowchart o o o oo Page 204 e Available Marker Sources 00 00 00 eee eee Page 205 e Arbitrary Generated Marker Pulses Page 206 Generating Marker Pulses for Arbitrary Waveforms cintia beni Seeds was Page 206 Generating Multiple Marker Pulses in Multiple segment Lists rd Ver Page 207 Generating Single Marker Pulses in Single Waveform Segments 2 debe lei ed ended ee eee Page 212 e Generating Marker Pulses for Each Waveform POMC iss Re Oe ned xir aoe ees
554. ulses are output each time a segment is output the pulse rate is the same as the sample rate you can use this function as another way to lockstep multiple AFGs The example generates a 10 point 5 V ramp Although this example generates an arbitrary waveform the pulses can be generated in any function and sample source Chan A applied to AFG s Output Connector Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Connector Chan A 2V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 1 usec DIV The commands are Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed frequency SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 4 Select the Marker Source SOURce MARKer FEED TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 This command selects the marker source for the front panel s Marker Out connector to output marker pulses at the sample rate See Available Marker Sources on page 205 for the different sources 214 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 5 Select the Marker Polarity SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt NORMal lt polarity gt selects active high marker pulses INVerted selects active low marker pulses 6 Enable Marker Outpu
555. uration 0 48 HP BASIC Program Example LEN km RE S RES 48 Checkine tor ERES C 4 qoo dopo e Re Eoo A eode og 49 HP BASIC Program Example ERRORCHR sek ee eR RAS 49 Generating Sine WAVES sued d A oboe de RES ES e deeds 51 HP BASIC Program Example RSTSINE leen 51 Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 53 C ha pier CONDE acid equo OP go SRE E deed db AA 33 Standard Waveforms Flowchart 22 222 224 hs 54 G nerdtair DC Younes qu qu RO SWRA Fb E Roue P SSH RC RP de bk d 56 HP BASIC Program Example DOVOLTS 2 4 4 24 4 6 0 A ER 56 G nerating Sine WAVES uu qeu Eo Dee ED dox dor OR RO Rok doe ed d 58 HP BASIC Program Example SINEWAVE o o 59 G nerataur Square WEYES lt a quw wes ebria AA 61 HP BASIC Program Example SQUWAVE 63 Generating Triangle Ramp Waves o o o 65 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Contents 1 HP BASIC Program Example TRIWAVE cok 6 ee RR we RO 67 Selecting the Output Loads oa kG ee ee Ped eee KEG EER ER De DES 69 HP BASIC Program Example OUTPLOAD 70 Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units o 72 HP BASIC Program Example OUTPUNIT 244006 44 RR eke ba iis 3 Using Phase Modulation lt i aoo boh o ok dep doe dee ooo KES GOH 73 HP BASIC Program Example PHS_MOD 0 76 Standard Waveform Program Comments
556. urnishing performance or use of this material This docu ment contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photo copied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard Company HP assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by HP U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 October 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 June 1995 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard software agreement for the product involved HEWLETT LA proxano HP E1445A User s Manual Edition 3 Copyright O 1997 Hewlett Packard Company All Rights Reserved HP E1445A User s Manual 13 Documentation History All Editions and Updates of this manual and their creation date are listed below The first Edition of the manual is Edition 1 The Edi tion number increments by 1 whenever the manual is re
557. urrently defined frequency list Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No frequency list is defined Example Query the Frequency List Length LIST FREQ2 POIN Queries frequency list length 360 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer The SOURce MARKer subsystem controls Which signal is routed to the Marker Out BNC The polarity of the Marker Out BNC signal Which signals if any are routed to the VXIbus ECL trigger lines Subsystem Syntax SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt STATe lt mode gt FEED lt source gt POLarity polarity STATe lt mode gt ECLTrg lt n gt FEED SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED source selects the marker source for the specified VXIbus ECL trigger line ECLTRGO or ECLTRG1 The available sources are ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 For arbitrary waveforms the marker level changes with the first waveform point of the first repetition A marker pulse is then output with the last waveform point of each repetition For sine waves the marker is a 50 duty cycle square wave at the sine wave frequency ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Once a start arm is received the marker is asserted when the first amplitude point is triggered The marker is unasserted with the last amplitude point of the last waveform repetition o
558. ve The frequency of the triangle depends on the speed at which downloading occurs The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Set the AFG s Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 3 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed or UNSigned number format 4 Select the DAC Data Source SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce VXI This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use VXI to transfer data using the VXIbus 5 Place the AFG Into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This commands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until it executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the previous commands 6 Download the Waveform Segment as a Combined Signed List This step directly downloads the Combined Waveform Segment List to the DAC using the Signed number format set by the Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 269 SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded controller or a command module The AFG output depends on the data received by the DAC and the currently selected amplitude HP BASIC Program Example VXISRCE The program uses the V36
559. ve Polarity SOURce RAMP POLarity INVerted This command selects the square wave polarity For NORMal the initial voltage goes positive For INVerted the initial voltage goes negative 8 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 9 Set the Offset SOURce VOL Tage L EVel IMMediate OFFSet offset This command specifies the offset Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 10 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 62 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 HP BASIC Program Example SQUWAVE 1 IRE STORE SQUWAVE 2 This program outputs a 1 MHz 4V square wave with a 1V DC offset 3 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Squ_wave 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 180 END 190 200 SUB Squ wave 210 Squ wave Subprogram which outpu
560. vised Updates which are issued between Editions contain replacement pages to correct or add additional information to the current Edition of the manual Whenever a new Edition is created it will contain all of the Update information for the previous Edition Each new Edition or Update also includes a revised copy of this documentation his tory page Edition Li in S ed E November 1991 Editon Za aere tete ea See tees er S ONERE November 1992 Edilom3 esi Ve vae AN March 1997 Trademarks Windows is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Safety Symbols Instruction manual symbol affixed to prod uct Indicates that the user must refer to the N Alternating current AC manual for specific WARNING or CAU TION information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product eme Direct current DC Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates the field wiring terminal that must be connected to earth ground before operat f ing the equipment protects against electri Calls attention to a procedure practice or cal shock in case of fault WARNING condition that could cause bodily injury or death Calls attention to a procedure practice or con Frame or chassis ground terminal typi CAUTION dition that could possibly cause damage to r3 or cally connects to the equipment s metal equipment or permanent loss of data frame WARNINGS
561. wchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Set the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freg gt 3 Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP stop freq 4 Set the number of points frequencies in the frequency sweep SOURce S WEep POINts number 5 Set linear or logarithmic spacing SOURce SWEep SPACing mode 6 Set the number of sweeps SOURce S WEep COUNt number 7 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 8 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate HP BASIC Program Example LOG SWP 1 IRE STORE LOG_SWP 2 This program logarithmically sweeps from 1 Hz to 1 MHz in seven 3 Ipoints 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM QAfg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ONINTR7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 133 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Swp_pvss 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Swp_pvss 210 Swp_pvss Subprogram which sets a logarithmic sweep 220 COM Afg
562. when other sources are selected Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt edge gt discrete NEGative POSitive none e Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group None e Related Commands ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe POSitive Setting the Start Arm Slope ARM LAY2 SLOP NEG Sets negative start arm slope Chapter 8 Command Reference 293 ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt selects the source that will start waveform output The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET HP IB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 and ECLTrg1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The HP E1445A s front panel Start Arm In BNC connector HOLD Suspend arming Use the ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate command to start the waveform IMMediate Immediate arming An arm is internally generated two to three reference oscillator cycles after the start trigger sequence enters the wait for arm state TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete BUS ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 none EXTernal HOLD IMMediate TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments Use the ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe command to select the active edge for the front panel S
563. word serial command and has exactly the same effect Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands ARM and TRIGger subsystem SOURce commands e RST Condition None TST causes the HP E1445A to execute its internal self test and return a value indicating the results of the test A zero 0 response indicates that the self test passed A one 1 response indicates that the test failed The failure also generates an error message with additional information on why the test failed When the test completes all waveform segment and segment sequence definitions are deleted and all other commands are set to their RST values Comments Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None e RST Condition None 426 Command Reference Chapter 8 WAI WAI causes the HP E1445A to wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any further commands If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set command execution resumes when all commands received prior to the WAI have been executed If ON is set WAI waits for waveform generation to complete before resuming command execution Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC OPC e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 427 Common Commands Quick Reference This section describes the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands implemented in the HP E1445A The table below shows the commands lis
564. xample Program 255 258 COMBSIGN Example Program 242 244 COMBUNS Example Program 247 249 Command Module HP IB port address 22 Command Reference 281 312 ABORt subsystem 290 ARM subsystem 291 297 CALibration subsystem 298 305 CLS 47 416 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 GMC 418 IDN 419 INITiate subsystem 306 307 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 OPC 420 OPC 421 OUTPut 1 subsystem 308 311 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47 424 SAV 424 SOURce subsystem 312 380 SOURce ARBitrary subsystem 313 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem 319 329 SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem 330 331 SOURce FUNCtion subsystem 332 333 SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 334 357 SOURce LIST2 subsystem 358 360 SOURce MARKer subsystem 361 364 SOURce PM subsystem 365 367 SOURce RAMP subsystem 368 369 SOURce ROSCillator subsystem 370 371 SOURce SWEep subsystem 372 376 SOURce VOLTage subsystem 377 380 SRE 425 SRE 425 STATus subsystem 381 388 STB 426 SYSTem subsystem 389 390 TRG 426 TRIGger subsystem 391 402 TST 46 426 VINStrument subsystem 403 408 W AT 427 Commander assigning AFG to 21 Commands ABORt 290 arbitrary waveform generation 84 85 ARM 291 297 arming 165 291 297 CALibration 298 305 CLS 47 416 common 416 428 common quick reference 428 coupling 27 28 288 coupling groups 27 28 467
565. y Add the Last Point Add the value of the last point bit to the first element of the second 16 bit word array Setup the Sequence List SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt Select the Download Source for the Segment Sequence List SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt This command selects the source used to download DAC data into segment sequence memory see DAC Sources on page 280 The lt source gt parameter selects the download source lt dest gt contains the Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 263 name of the segment sequence list to be downloaded and lt length gt contains the size of the segment sequence list in number of segment lists 1 e the same size set in SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt 24 Place the AFG into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This commands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until it executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the previous commands 25 Download and Store the Segment Sequence List as a Combined List This step stores the segment sequence list into memory The command or downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded controller You can also use the command module li
566. y 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 Isuch that there are valid sequence base addresses in memory before the AFG is INITiated and waveforms are selected COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO IPreserve Traffic register contents Set bits 15 14 to 1 O to set Ithe Waveform Select register as the source which selects the output Iwaveform sequence Traffic BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8 16 IVAL 3FFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8 16 BINIOR Traffic IVAL 8000 16 Write the location of the sequence base address waveform index Ito the Waveform Select register Write the base address of lof the sequence in sequence memory to the Sequence Base register Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav_sel IVAL 0100 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 20 16 Seq1_ addr sequence mem base addr Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav sel IVAL 0200 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 20 16 Seq2_addr sequence mem base addr Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav_sel VAL 0300 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 20 16 Seq3_addr sequence
567. y When downloading segment sequence data from the VXIbus data transfer bus the most significant 16 bits should be written to offset 34 decimal 22 hex in the HP E1445A s A24 address space The least significant 16 bits should be written to offset 36 decimal 24 hex Comments Example Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units source discrete DPORt LBUS VXI none dest char defined waveform segment none or segment sequence name length numeric see below none MINimum MAXimum For waveform segments the length in terms of points must be greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to the defined waveform segment length The current waveform segment length is set to this length MINimum selects 4 points MAXimum selects the defined waveform segment length For segment sequences the length in terms of points must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the defined segment sequence length The current segment sequence length is set to this length MINimum selects 1 point MAXimum selects the defined waveform segment or segment sequence length The waveform segment or segment sequence must have been previously defined see the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine and SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine commands e When downloading is complete use the SOURce ARBitrary DOWNIoad COMPlete command to restore normal operation e No error checking is per
568. y List hopping through a frequency list The program also shows how to query the number of frequencies in the list Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce source 2 Select the frequency generator which allows frequency lists hopping TRIGger STARt SOURce source 3 Select the frequency list mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 4 Specify the frequency list SOURce LIST2 FREQuency freq list 5 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe shape 6 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude amplitude 7 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate 124 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 HP BASIC Program Example LIST1 1 IRE STORE LIST1 2 The following program outputs the frequencies 1 kHz 10 kHz 3 1100 kHz and 1 MHz in a default period of 1 second 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL List1 150 CALL List_length 160 170 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 180 OFF INTR 7 190 END 200 210 SUB List1 220 List1 Subprogram which outputs a
569. y repetition count list 116 segment reserving memory for 350 segment selecting 356 segment sending 114 segment storing in memory 87 selecting 498 505 selection program 500 505 Servant Area setting 23 switch 23 Setting AFG bus request level 24 arming sources 166 168 294 arming sweeps 295 296 372 arming sweeps sources 297 frequency lists 124 126 logical address switch 22 number of arms 169 171 output amplitude 72 74 377 380 output impedance 69 71 309 phase modulation deviation 76 365 security code 302 See also Selecting servant area 23 servant area switch 23 start arm slope 293 start arm source 294 HP E1445A AFG Module User s Manual Index 523 start trigger slope 395 stop trigger slope 398 waveform cycles per arm 169 171 SIGN_DAT Example Program 227 228 Signal marker disabling 362 364 marker enabling 362 364 marker polarity 364 phase and gating 200 phase changing with registers 495 questionable status register 381 431 434 Signed data combined 239 244 data generating waveforms with 225 228 number format 225 226 240 Sin X X Waveforms 105 106 sweeping 141 143 SIN_D Example Program 107 108 SIN_R Example Program 111 SIN_X Example Program 105 106 Sine Waves generating 51 58 60 450 generating damped 107 108 generating half rectified 111 generating noise 112 generating spiked 109 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157
570. y response with less resolution For best operating practice use the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source INTernal 1 for the DDS generator use the 40 MHz reference oscillator source INTernal2 for the Divide by N generator See Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments on page 113 for more information The AFGGENI program shows how to use the AFG s DDS generator selected at power on to generate waveforms Use this generator for better frequency resolution and to perform frequency sweeping frequency shifting and so forth see Chapter 4 See program AFGGEN2 for a frequency2 generator example This program generates a 100 point ramp at 100 kHz The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST The RST command aborts waveform output and sets the AFG to a defined state 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL This command clears all segment sequence data stored in the sequence memory 3 Clear the AFG Memory of All Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 DELete ALL This command clears all segment data stored in the segment memory Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 99 4 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the 42 9 MHz Internal1 reference oscillator source to be used with the DDS frequency generator see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 115 Although RST selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator it is selected here for good

HP E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator Module User`s Manual and

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents